Dec 31, 2012

Posted by in Ace Folklife | 0 Comments

ACO Lightworkers & Truthseekers Workshops Study Groups GUIDE BOOK

Alien Contact Organization
For Advisors Consultants Organizers

By: TJ Morris 
Copyright Page
Alien Contact Organization
Copyrights belong to Theresa J Morris ©2012

Publisher is TJ Morris Publishing ©Timely Manor Books Imprint
ACO Associate Guides,Advisors, Consultants, Organizers Association by TJ Morris

Printed by LuLu.com
Website: AssociateGuides.com
ACO ~ Ascension Center Organization
EBOOK #
TJ Morris ACO ©

Dedication

Dedicated to all those who desire to share in the preparation of the future for all. We all have a direct connection to our higher source and higher self which acts as a channel to our own future.
We will be creating more open source information and allow this to serve as an example of what we can all learn to share in the future while we learn how fast words and work come and go in cyberspace.
This type of collection will come and go only to be replaced by something else far better in the future. Let the words of this work state the shared synergy of us all while we were here.
We are all from the ancient past and the future while sharing the present. I also dedicate this work to my children, grand, and great grandchildren who are now on earth and will follow me here to earth.

Alien ET UFO Community is the Ascension Center Organization as the ACO. A creation of Ascension Center Organization Guide for members
Who join the ACO Social Service Club © Alien ET UFO Community is the Ascension Center Organization as the ACO.  

Foreword

We can all only be here now for a short time before passing on into our other selves with our memories of our past, present, and future.
My thoughts are not my own since they are shared with everyone who has ever been on this planet. I am referring to being an agent of the past, present and future in time as a Time Traveler to some and to others simply a modern mystic or channel some call a sleeping prophet. I have always received information while sleeping and in lucid dreams and learned in life that I could find out information about the future while allowing myself to be open to what we call the akashic field also known as the field of everything.
Please know I am about knowing and sharing what I know as it is to be in the divine plan by the Chairman and Co-Chairman as the original co-creators of all there is. I believe in both the original makers as both male and female sources. Call them God and Godmother if you like.
What you believe in or think is not my concern but sharing what I know to be my truth in the light of all that is has a calling and election made sure for me as what is termed and called the Ascension Center.
We are all capable of loving and learning about that which is right which is also called the light. I consider myself a messenger. My life story will be forthcoming as my own memoirs in a future book in 2013.
ACO Ascension Center Organization is an educational, humanitarian, social, research, project management, speaker’s membership club 501(c) (3) non-profit organization. The mission is to offer membership in globally-recognized standards and credentials, extensive research online program, and professional development opportunities in our social service club as ebooks, virtual classrooms, and webinars. ACO Association is about respect, compassion, and trust. We practice skills of empathy, fairness, objectivity – qualities like these characterize the Psychological Contract, just as they characterize a civilized outlook to life as a whole. We are in the process of building a new tomorrow today with our community online practicing skills together as the ACO Social Service Club members.
Please note that both UK-English and US-English spellings may appear for certain terms, for example organization/organisation, behavior/behaviour, etc. When using these materials please adapt the spellings to suit your own situation. Thank you.

Alien ET TJ Divine Plan share of the ASCENSION AGE©
ACE FOLKLIFE is the common folk who have the awareness that there is more to our history than has been told in the past. They are the members who are researchers, authors, educators, and folklorists who dare to care to share what isn’t exactly what we thought it was. We understand that in our past that the myths and legends were created to share what information was too dangerous to tell as the truth in our past of our ancestors. How we coped in the past is now written by the winners of the wars of the past in our history books. We will now engage in sharing the future of all those cultures that share their own truth based on their own cultural traditions. We will learn to compare our own real truth in our own real world of notes and oral and written traditions and compare this information to our science and religions stored on this planet as information which we think is shared knowledge thus far. Awakened Conscious Awareness is a title of my work and a process for the Ascension Center Organization as ACO.
The Higher Soul Essence of Self
Alien Contact Orbit as shares as the Ascension Center Organization Advisers, Consultants, Organizers Association.

The future will become the time known as the Ascension Age. I am one of the messengers of what I understand to be passed down by those in the past we may have called messengers also known as angels from above. Join me now as I share some information that is shared on planet earth to become incorporated in the future of our understanding of what the future will become based on our past, present understanding and our future expectations of all of us who are waiting on the aliens who will contact us. We now realize that some of us who are chosen messengers may be channeling some of the future truth to come to be just as Nostradamus and Edgar Cayce has shared with those who desire to know and learn about the signs left behind for certain individuals who are the Lightworkers and Truthseekers of the information we live by morally and ethically some call the golden rule as the Christ Consciousness. We now regard our past as that which aligned us to become a part of the future as the Ascension Age~ Golden Age of Cosmology and Enlightenment.
ACO
Ascension Center Organization Educational, humanitarian, social, research, project management, speakers membership association. To offer membership in globally-recognized standards and credentials, extensive research online program, and professional development opportunities in our social service club as conferences, ebooks, virtual classrooms, videos, webinars for educational certification purposes and learning forever as individuals in the global economic community.
We are the ACO Association a social service club.
I, TJ Morris am the agent manager of the operating account. 
Part 1
Alien Contact Organizers Founder is TJ Morris ET

Theresa J Thurmond Morris
TJ Morris ACO
Project Management
Ascension Age 2012 & beyond is the time to officially adopt the name of the second level, which is outside of this universe which we also relate to as the higher fifth dimension.
We are awakened now to the possibility that there are others who have always been outside our macrocosm we call the omniverse.
Some of us will choose to relate to the sixth and seventh senses.
We are now learning not only that we can use our basics taught in the twentieth century as taste, touch, smell, feel, sight, hear, but instincts as our feelings and emotions that may be attached to our own nervous system and the mind as it relates to our own physical selves inside the brain. We are now looking to design a way to monitor our spiritual selves which many of us relate to the soul. The soul may be made up of all our recognized senses although when dead and using the Frankenstein effect we all know that we can still generate electricity inside our body after death to make the body move.
What is there really is 22 ounces that leave our body at the time of death and this has been recorded by some scientists and researchers as that which leaves our body weight at the time of death. Some have even recorded a slight difference in our sleep patterns when we go out of body while we sleep and are in our astral travel projections of spirit which some can roam the earth or so some have reported in their lucid dream state or astral travel state of understanding while in the temporary paralyzed state of being while in the body and out of body.
We basically say we understand the human brain to have various levels of being as in the Beta~Alpha~Theta~Gamma~ Tau~Sigma status. And yet we now realize that we have a seventh connection to our higher source or God connection to that which we call the “ALL” as in the “IAM” presence. This connection to an outside source we now preface with practicing skills with our own seven chakra system chart of being as in the body~mind~spirit Awakening Awareness Movement of the Ascension Age and the Ascension Chart to some which is sharing the basic chakra locations and the meridians of the body as we relate to the nervous system points of energy located throughout our physical, mental. emotional, and spiritual bodies all together.
We will attempt to begin building a bridge of communication between our noted Ascension Avatar Messengers on earth as senders and receivers who are in touch with the Observers and Watchers of all of the humanoid species as a young planetoid humanoid origination in space.
There are those who have always been as the alpha males and omega females of the humanoid kind as creators. The one name that has been used in Atlantis in the past came from the world that existed prior even earlier than that of Lemuria that of which humanoids call MU.
The Alpha males and Omega females were those who our ancestors called deities as God and Goddesses. The future we will now accept is all in our minds of the past, present and present-future!
Extraterrestrial hybrid part in our own DNA encoding allows us to know that there is always a reason for Ascension Center Enlightenment as essence. Immortal thoughts and behaviors while we are here in a physical form will assist us all in the future.
There will be a time when many of us on this planet will begin to share out pathways outside of this universe and it is time we lay the groundwork for the various directions that will expand outward from this one point of origin we now call earth.
There are few whom I can open up to with a straight stream of consciousness and I must say that there are only a few. It has never been a normal pattern for me to open up and write to another direct. I believe that it was Dirk who had the good intentions for the good of this planet that allowed for others such as you and me to meet in a level of surreal virtual reality. This may be all that many of us will be allowed to share in this lifetime on this planet. This should be understood by all our planets churches of the continuous flow of energy in the future.
We each are a shard of the larger picture that our human physical sentient intelligent being species refers to as the Omniverse from whatever spiritual school of disciplines or manmade religions that may be familiar with in their upbringing. We shall all still be kindred spirits regardless of what religious culture or location we were born into on this planet and encouraging others to open up to the various world religions and their likes and dislikes as differences will be the best way to ask all who share this space in this place to realize that there are as many ways to believe, think, and become, in a world as there are separate units, vessels, containers of information in our created world.
We are correct in believing and knowing that life of the immortals is of a spiritual romantic nature of which the world of love abounds. It is the love of our humankind that has kept us alive, well, and coming to this planet repeatedly throughout time. This is a learning plane of life and abundance and those who come are to find their way through this life of transition.
We are all in a transitional phase and at the eve of the portal that will be offered to all who come here that we presently call life after death in this lifetime on earth. There are words that will become cemented in time that will attach to our energy, as it will be known in cyberspace that will be called the immortal web of our humanoid species in this place we call earth. Those of us who travel with the Time Lords will be remembered only as the Ascended Masters in time.
The psychological contract
The theory of psychological contracts in organizational employment – and wider ‘psychological contracting’ in relationships, communications and societies
‘The Psychological Contract’ is an increasingly relevant aspect of workplace relationships and wider human behavior.
Descriptions and definitions of the Psychological Contract first emerged in the 1960s, notably in the work of organizational and behavioral theorists Chris Argyris and Edgar Schein. Many other experts have contributed ideas to the subject since then, and continue to do so, either specifically focusing on the Psychological Contract, or approaching it from a particular perspective, of which there are many. The Psychological Contract is a deep and varied concept and is open to a wide range of interpretations and theoretical studies.
Primarily, the Psychological Contract refers to the relationship between an employer and its employees, and specifically concerns mutual expectations of inputs and outcomes.
The Psychological Contract is usually seen from the standpoint or feelings of employees, although a full appreciation requires it to be understood from both sides.
Simply, in an employment context, the Psychological Contract is the fairness or balance (typically as perceived by the employee) between:
How the employee is treated by the employer, and
What the employee puts into the job.
The words ’employees’ or ‘staff’ or ‘workforce’ are equally appropriate in the above description.
At a deeper level the concept becomes increasingly complex and significant in work and management – especially in change management and in large organizations.
Interestingly the theory and principles of the Psychological Contract can also be applied beyond the employment situation to human relationships and wider society.
Unlike many traditional theories of management and behavior, the Psychological Contract and its surrounding ideas are still quite fluid; they are yet to be fully defined and understood, and are far from widely recognized and used in organizations.
The concept of ‘psychological contracting’ is even less well understood in other parts of society where people and organisations connect, despite its significance and potential usefulness. Hopefully what follows will encourage you to advance the appreciation and application of its important principles, in whatever way makes sense to you. It is a hugely fertile and potentially beneficial area of study.
I. At the heart of the Psychological Contract is a philosophy – not a process or a tool or a formula. This reflects its deeply significant, changing and dynamic nature.
The way we define and manage the Psychological Contract, and how we understand and apply its underpinning principles in our relationships – inside and outside of work – essentially defines our humanity. We have included in various parts of this education information guide as the ACO for Associate Guides that information we feel is understandable and attainable for any human being on earth.
For those who desire to know TJ who has assembled this information to study until such time as we all receive our own direct connection as a sender and receiver to source we shall all enjoy the Ascension Age together in preparation for our future on planet earth while learning to travel in space.
THE PROCESS By: TJ Morris channeling, akashic insights and mystical energy artistry
Aka Theresa J Thurmond Morris
ACO~Ascension Center organization’s ACE FOLKLIFE CLUB
Honestly, none of us have a clue what the future will hold for us however, we can make plans and hope for the best. I am a psychic medium who has died in this lifetime not just once but three times. I have written a book called Ascension Age 2012 & Beyond.
Also, I have been contacted and my life story can be seen in the “TAKEN” made for television. I am presently working on my own story called “ASCENSION AGE” and “TAKEN UP”. I have several books written but the one that most people are interested in is called “Roswell UFO Encounters” by Theresa J Morris. I wanted to become an author like my mother who gave me the gift of life and writing. We lived across from a library on two occasions in my childhood life growing up with her as my mother. I miss her as she passed over May 4, 2011 and my father passed Dec 9, 2011 leaving me at the age of 59 years.
I am married and I live with my husband who is an author as Thomas R. Morris. He has written about his life as a Spy for our country in his book series once called “Spy Games” and one called “The Package”. He and I worked some cases together out of country while he was U.S. Army and I was U.S. Navy and we were part of the intelligence community and the Alien Contact Team. This is how we know that alien civilizations exist. My life is anything but normal and there are many threads and story lines.
I am a woman who has experimented with life in various worlds of existence whether I wanted too or not didn’t matter. Life made some decisions for me and due to these life experiences I decided to learn from what was given me in this lifetime.
My name is TJ Morris. My legal name is now Theresa J Morris according to Uncle Sam in the USA. I was born a Christian in Monroe, Louisiana and the name my mother wanted to name me was Wilhelmina however since I was born the day after Christmas I was almost named Holly instead of Holy. For some unknown reason that I do not understand I was given the name on my birth certificate as Theresa Janette Thurmond. Names supposedly mean something in this world as symbols and sounds. I haven’t written an article in a while now although I am a prolific writer and syndicated columnist. My history of how I came to be who I am in this lifetime is of interest to many people in my country and in others due to the social, spiritual, and paranormal way I feel I am involved in my social networks.
Personally, I feel rather exposed and public now and this is teaching me how we really do not deep down like to expose ourselves to others outside of ourselves meaning that we are all inner beings. The theosophy, psychology, history, and philosophy I plan on sharing of myself are growing daily. Every day I change and this is common now for most people like me. Because of my curiosity of life and people who exist like me in our humanoid sentient intelligent being species, I feel that it is my duty to share as a messenger of truth as a Lightworker and Truthseeker. I am both.
I have written for UFO Digest online for five (5) years now while sharing my stories on my own websites, blogs, and in my magazines. Now, I felt compelled to share my story with Phyllis Galde of FATE Magazine. Phyllis is a woman in business and she may understand me being that I am a public known psychic. I am also a publisher and we together may be able to benefit our readership with ways to expand our own lives and may even in the future proclaim a joint venture. For now, we shall learn how to create more stories to share that which is unknown to some. Join two women writers, entrepreneurs and see what the future holds for us in what we have become a part of known as FATE.
I also have the Social Paranormal Magazine online as socialparanormal.com which I share and will use it in the future to share with my fellow peers in the social paranormal club of ACO Social Service Club of advisers, consultants, and organizers. We work together in project management for global IT and future open source assignments.
We also share the Ascension Center Organization, ACE Folklife Historical Society of Researchers, and ET spirit. I share in TJ Morris Marketing Media Manufacturing and ACIR as American Culture International Relations and Assured Confidential Investigative Reports.

There are many people who are Internet Researchers such as myself and we share our home businesses to keep overhead low and the future of entrepreneurs appear to be headed in this direction for everyone with the new technology of sharing business meetings online.
Many of our members in the connection to me as Theresa J Thurmond Morris, or TJ Morris ET have shared in the Alien ET UFO Community for years. We share a common knowledge that alien civilizations exist. We share our interest in the History Channel which we remember in the 20th century as offering us documentaries and interesting stories first about the reality of UFOlogy and Ancient Aliens and UFOs are REAL with Stanton T Friedman and others we recognize in our field of study. Many of us joined MUFON at one time or another.

Let us now begin sharing that which many of us now know and accept as a common knowledge of awakened awareness in our own peer group of the Alien ET UFO Social Paranormal Community that shares many various recognized members of our TJ Morris, and ACO Associations. I presently have two Federal ID numbers as TJ Morris ACIR and ACO Ascension Center Organization both used as Social Clubs online on the Internet.

We will now begin our ACO Social Service Club Association guide of what I personally shared online thus far since my early indoctrination as an Ambassador of Goodwill in May, 1967. It was exactly twenty years before I actually went to Washington, D.C. where I agreed to have my U.S. Navy contract bought by the Intelligence Field of Operation of which we now refer to as vegetable soup agencies among our peer groups. I personally have a story to tell as a UFO observer and Alien Contactee. Some information is in various other books I have written available in Amazon and on lulu.com/TJMorrisPublishing.
TJ Morris tm ACIR sm ACO Social Service Club

We prefer to think of ourselves as an Alien Contact Investigations Research association as ACIR and list also as ACO for the Ascension Center Organization. While the ACIR is about paranormal investigations, the ACO is more about the spiritual aspects dealing with out of body experiences and the parapsychological aspects we deal with in spirituality and Spiritism. We are sharing our knowledge without scientific empirical findings as well as our spiritual channeling perceptions and downloads of what we share as out inspired automatic writings as aspiring to be better in the future than we are today.
We are interested in the human mind and how we may be effected by it others who may be more intelligent than ourselves and who visit this planet. Some call these beings who visit us extraterrestrials as ET. Some call them angels which have been visiting our planet for eons throughout time and are recorded in our ancient history including our most sacred codexes and books including the Bible and Koran. We are learning that much of what we once believed and separated as fact and fiction is now a gray area and we are rewriting our history for our children.
We are now about correcting what has been written by our authors, and scribes of the past. We will use that which we call science which actually came from what we call philosophy. The history can be found now written and recorded in various places on the Internet. This is my version of what information I can share now in 2012 to begin my idea of how to assist others find those of us who have co-created the TJ Morris ACO business and marketing plan for the future of those who desire to find us and how we came to share much of the same information we share in the ACIR and ACO both of which I personally started. I am the founder of the ACIR and ACO which some now consider an organized fellowship association as a Social Service Club or Social Network Online. We all learn about each other and who is in our various interest groups online. Many of us share social marketing media groups now like Facebook, Twitter, Igoogle, and use SKYPE and other ways to meet including a radio show I began as TJ MORRIS ET Radio. I will probably continue a radio show which allows others in the world to find me as the anchor of the energy for those who are my friends. The connection I make were once considered a special interest group of the metaphysical kind. I am interested in parapsychology and spirituality as well as the paranormal. I am not only an author but a ghost writer, editor, and I format books and design covers for others who are in my Social Service Club. This is just the physical working side of what I do as a spiritual being.
Now to the more interesting information we all share in our ACO.
ACO Research Archives.

We begin in 1947 at the creation of the CIA

Project Sign
The first official USAF investigations of UFOs were Project Sign (1947–1949) and its successor Project Grudge (1949). Several hundred sightings were examined, a majority of them having a mundane explanation. Some sightings were classified as credible but inexplicable, and in these cases the possibility of an advanced unknown aircraft could not be ruled out. The initial memos of the project took the UFO question seriously. After surveying 16 early reports, Lt. Col. George D. Garrett estimated that the sightings were not imaginary or exaggerations of natural phenomena.
Lt. General Nathan F. Twining expressed the same estimate in a letter to Brig. General Schulgen. Flying Saucer Working Party (UK, 1950–1951)
Flying Saucer Working Party
The United Kingdom’s Ministry of Defence, alarmed by reports of seemingly advanced unidentified aircraft, followed the US military’s example by conducting its own study on UFOs in 1950. A research group was formed based on the recommendation of the chemist Henry Tizard, and was involved in similar work, such as “Project Sign”. After less than a year, the directorate, named the “Flying Saucer Working Party” (FSWP), concluded that most observations were either cases of mistaken identity, optical illusions, psychological delusions, or hoaxes, and recommended that no further investigation on the phenomena should be undertaken. In 1952, the directorate informed Prime Minister Winston Churchill, after his inquiry about UFOs, that they had found no evidence of extraterrestrial spacecraft. The FSWP files were classified for fifty years and were released to the British public in 2001.
Project Magnet, Project Second Story (Canada, 1950–1954)
Project Magnet, led by senior radio engineer Wilbert B. Smith from the Department of Transport, had the goal of studying magnetic phenomena, specifically geomagnetism, as a potential propulsion method for vehicles. Smith believed UFOs were using this method to achieve flight. The final report of the project, however, contained no mention of geomagnetism. It discussed twenty-five UFO sightings reported during 1952, and concluded with the notion that “extraterrestrial space vehicles” are probable. Along with the Smith group, a parallel committee dedicated solely to dealing with “flying saucer” reports was formed.
This committee, called Project Second Story, was sponsored by the Defence Research Board, with its main purpose being to collect, catalog, and correlate data from UFO sighting reports. The committee appeared to have dissolved after five meetings, as the group deemed the collected material unsuitable for scientific analysis.
Project Blue Book (USA, 1951–1969)
As a continuation of Project Sign and Project Grudge in 1951, the USAF launched Project Blue Book, led by Captain Edward J. Ruppelt. Under Ruppelt, the collection and investigation of UFO sightings became more systematic. The project issued a series of status reports, which were declassified in September 1960 and made available in 1968. Project Blue Book was terminated in December 1969, following the report of the Condon Committee. Until then, 12,618 incidents had been investigated, the grand majority of which explained by conventional means. 701 cases, around 6%, remained “unidentified”. Officially, the USAF concluded from the project that the phenomena investigated were of no concern to national security, and that there was no evidence the sightings categorized as “unidentified” were caused by extraterrestrial aircraft.
Project Blue Book Special Report No. 14 (USA, 1952–1954)
The main entrance to Battelle Memorial Institute in Columbus, Ohio.
Ruppelt contracted a team of scientists from the Battelle Memorial Institute to evaluate the early sightings gathered by Project Blue Book. They conducted analysis, primarily statistical, on the subject for almost two years. The study concluded that the more complete the data was and the better the report, the more likely it was that the report was classified as “unidentified”. However, the report emphasized the subjectivity of the data, and stated that the conclusions drawn from the study were not based on facts, but on the subjective observations and estimations of the individual. The report summary and conclusion stated that “unknowns” were not likely something beyond the era’s technology, and almost certainly not “flying saucers”.
Robertson Panel (USA, 1953)
Before the final Battelle report was published, the Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) had developed an interest in UFOs as a national security issue, and set up a committee to examine existing UFO data. The panel, headed by mathematician and physicist Howard Percy Robertson, met from January 14 to 17, 1953.It concluded unanimously that the UFO sightings posed no direct threat to national security, but did find that a continued emphasis on UFO reporting might threaten government functions by causing the channels of communication to clog with irrelevant reports and by inducing mass hysteria.[6] Also, the panel worried that nations hostile to the US might use the UFO phenomena to disrupt air defenses. To meet these problems, the panel stated that a policy of public education on the lack of evidence behind UFOs was needed, to be done through the mass media and schools, among others. It also recommended monitoring private UFO groups for subversive activities. The recommendations of the Roberson Panel were partly implemented through a series of special military regulations.
The December 1953 Joint-Army-Navy-Air Force Publication 146 (JANAP 146) made publication of UFO sightings a crime under the Espionage Act. The Air Force Regulation 200-2 (AFR 200-2) revision of 1954 made all UFO sightings reported to the USAF classified. AFR 200-2 revision of February 1958 allowed the military to deliver to the FBI names of those who were “illegally or deceptively” bringing UFOs to public attention.
Condon Committee (USA, 1966–1968)
Edward U. Condon
After the recommendations of the Robertson Panel, the USAF wanted to end its involvement in UFOs, and pass Project Blue Book to another agency. In October 1966, the USAF contracted the University of Colorado, under the leadership of physicist Edward U. Condon, for $325,000 to conduct more scientific investigations of selected UFO sightings and to make recommendations about the project’s future. The committee looked at ninety-one UFO sightings, of which 30% was unidentifiable. The report concluded that there was no “direct evidence” that UFOs were extraterrestrial spacecraft, that UFO research from the past twenty-one years had not contributed anything to scientific knowledge, and that further study was not justified. As a direct result of the Condon report, Project Blue Book was closed in December 1969. Many ufologists, however, were not satisfied with the Condon report, and considered it a cover-up.
RAND Corporation paper (USA, 1968)
The RAND Corporation produced a short internal document titled “UFOs: What to Do?”, published in November 1968. The paper gave a historical summary of the UFO phenomenon, talked briefly about issues concerning extraterrestrial life and interstellar travel, presented a few case studies and discussed the phenomenological content of a UFO sighting, reviewed hypotheses, and concluded with a recommendation to organize a central UFO report-receiving agency and conducting more research on the phenomenon.
Project Identification (USA, 1973–1980)
In 1973, a wave of UFO sightings in southeast Missouri prompted Harley D. Rutledge, physics professor at the University of Missouri, to conduct an extensive field investigation of the phenomenon. The findings were published in the book Project Identification: the first scientific field study of UFO phenomena. Although taking a specific interest in describing unidentified aerial phenomena, as opposed to identifying them, the book references the presumed intelligence of the sighted objects. Rutledge’s study results were not published in any peer-reviewed journal or other scientific venue or format.
Studies by GEPAN, SERPA & GEIPAN (France, 1977–present)
Drawing from the GEPAN report on the Cussac case
: Groupe d’études et d’informations sur les phénomènes aérospatiaux non identifiés
In 1977, the French Space Agency CNES Director General set up a unit to record UFO sighting reports. The unit was initially known as Groupe d’Etudes des Phénomènes Aérospatiaux Non identifiés (GEPAN), changed in 1988 to Service d’expertise de rentrée atmosphérique Phenom (SERPA) and in 2005 to Groupe d’études et d’informations sur les phénomènes aérospatiaux non identifiés (GEIPAN).
GEIPAN found a mundane explanation for the vast majority of recorded cases, but in 2007, after 30 years of investigation, 1,600 cases, approximately 28% of total cases, remained unexplained “despite precise witness accounts and good-quality evidence recovered from the scene” and are categorized as “Type D”. In April 2010, GEIPAN statistics stated that 23% of all cases were of Type D. However, Jean-Jacques Velasco, the head of SEPRA from 1983 to 2004, wrote a book in 2004 noting that 13.5% of the 5,800 cases studied by SEPRA were dismissed without any rational explanation, and stated that UFOs are extraterrestrial in origin.
United Nations (1977–1979)
Thanks to the lobbying of Eric Gairy, the Prime Minister of Grenada, the United Nations General Assembly addressed the UFO issue in the late 1970s. On July 14, 1978, a panel, with Gordon Cooper, J. Allen Hynek, and Jacques Vallée among its members, held a hearing to inform the UN Secretary General Kurt Waldheim about the matter.
As a consequence of this meeting, the UN adopted decisions A/DEC/32/424 and A/DEC/33/426, which called for the “establishment of an agency or a department of the United Nations for undertaking, co-ordinating and disseminating the results of research into unidentified flying objects and related phenomena”.
Project Hessdalen / Project EMBLA (Norway, 1983–present / Italy 1999–2004)
Hessdalen light
Since 1981, in an area near Hessdalen in Norway, unidentified flying objects have been commonly observed. This so-called Hessdalen phenomenon has twice been the subject of scientific field studies: Project Hessdalen (1983–1985, 1995–) secured technical assistance from the Norwegian Defense Research Establishment, the University of Oslo, and the University of Bergen, while Project EMBLA (1999–2004) was a team of Italian scientists led by Ph.D. Massimo Teodorani from the Istituto di Radioastronomia di Bologna.
Both studies confirmed the presence of the phenomenon and were able to record it with cameras and various technical equipment such as radar, laser, and infrared. The origin and nature of the lights remains unclear. Researchers from Project EMBLA speculated the possibility that atmospheric plasma had been the origin of the phenomenon
Project Condign (UK, 1996–2000)
The British Ministry of Defence (MoD) published in 2006 the “Scientific & Technical Memorandum 55/2/00a” of a four-volume, 460-page report entitled Unidentified Aerial Phenomena in the UK Air Defence Region, based on a study by DI55 (a section of the Directorate of Scientific and Technical Intelligence of the Defence Intelligence Staff) codenamed Project Condign. It discusses the British UFO reports received between 1959 and 1997.
The report affirms that UFOs are an existing phenomenon, but points out that they present no threat to national defense. The report further states that there is no evidence that UFO sightings are caused by incursions of intelligent origin, or that any UFO consists of solid objects which might create a collision hazard. Although the study admits of being unable to explain all analyzed UFO sightings with certainty, it recommends that section DI55 ceases monitoring UFO reports, as they do not provide information useful for Defence Intelligence. The report concludes that a small percentage of sightings that cannot be easily explained are caused by atmospheric plasma phenomenon similar to ball lightning; Magnetic and other energy fields produced by these “buoyant plasma formations” are responsible for the appearance of so-called “Black Triangles” as well as having hallucinogenic effects on the human mind, inducing experiences of Close Encounters.
Sturrock Panel Report (USA, 1997)
From Sept. 29 to Oct. 4, 1997 a workshop examining selected UFO incidents took place in Tarrytown, New York. The meeting was initiated by Peter A. Sturrock, who had reviewed the Condon report and found it dissatisfying. The international review panel consisted of nine physical scientists, who responded to eight investigators of UFO reports, who were asked to present their strongest data. The final report of the workshop was published under the title “Physical Evidence Related to UFO Reports” in the Journal of Scientific Exploration in 1998. The study concluded that the studied cases presented no unequivocal evidence for the presence of unknown physical phenomena or for extraterrestrial intelligence, but argued that a continued study of UFO cases might be scientifically valuable.
COMETA Report (France, 1999)
COMETA (Comité d’Études Approfondies, “Committee for in-depth studies”) is a private French group, which is mainly composed of high-ranking individuals from the French Ministry of Defence. In 1999 the group published a ninety-page report entitled “Les OVNI et la défense: à quoi doit-on se préparer?” (“UFOs and Defense: What Should We Prepare For?”). The report analyzed various UFO cases and concluded that UFOs are real, complex flying objects, and that the extraterrestrial hypothesis has a high probability of being the correct explanation for the UFO phenomenon. The study recommended that the French government should adjust to the reality of the phenomenon and conduct further research. Skeptic Claude Maugé criticized COMETA for research incompetency, and claimed that the report tried to present itself as an official French document, when in fact it was published by a private group.
“Disclosure Project” Press Conference (USA, 2001)
Steven M. Greer
On May 9, 2001, twenty government workers from military and civilian organizations spoke about their experiences regarding UFOs and UFO confidentiality at the National Press Club in Washington D.C.. The press conference was initiated by Steven M. Greer, founder of the Disclosure Project, which has the goal of disclosing alleged government UFO secrecy. The purpose of the press conference was to build public pressure through the media to obtain a hearing before the United States Congress on the issue. Although major American media outlets reported on the conference, the interest quickly died down, and no hearing came forth.
Fife Symington Press Conference (USA, 2007)
On November 12, 2007, a press conference, moderated by former Governor of Arizona Fife Symington, was held at the National Press Club in Washington D.C.. Nineteen former pilots and military and civilian officials spoke about their experiences with UFOs, demanding that the U.S. government engage in a new investigation of the phenomenon.
Notable cases in ufology
Further information: List of UFO sightings
Below are short summaries of select famous cases in UFO research. All of the incidents remain subject to controversy.
Kenneth Arnold UFO sighting (USA, 1947)
On June 24, 1947 pilot Kenneth Arnold reported seeing nine metallic objects flying near Mt. Rainier, Washington.
The term “flying saucer” was coined by an Associated Press reporter, Bill Bequette, who based it on Arnold’s description of the objects.
Roswell UFO Incident (USA, 1947)
The Roswell Incident of 1947 ranks as one of the most publicized and controversial UFO incidents. The US Army recovered an object which crashed near Roswell, New Mexico in July 1947, allegedly an extraterrestrial spacecraft, and alien pilots, Many books on the incident have been written since the 1970s, and numerous alleged witnesses have spoken on the event. The USAF maintains that the crashed object was a top-secret military spy balloon, a part of Project Mogul, many UFO proponents maintain that an alien craft was found and its occupants were captured, and that the military covered it up.
July 1952 Washington D.C. UFO incident (USA, 1952)
From July 13 to 29, 1952, there was a major wave of UFO sightings over Washington D.C. Simultaneous radar and visual sightings were reported, of what appeared to be a group of UFOs flying over the city, and the Capitol Building. Fighter jets were scrambled to intercept the objects, which allegedly disappeared when the planes got close enough to engage, and reappeared when the jets disengaged. The USAF held a major press conference to respond to the media and public inquiry, and brought in Harvard astronomer Donald Menzel to explain away the sightings as being caused by temperature inversion.
Tehran UFO Incident (Iran, 1976)
Page 2 of a USAF report on the Tehran incident by Captain Henry S. Shields
On the morning of September 19, 1976, a bright object was sighted and recorded by radar over Tehran, Imperial State of Iran. Two Imperial Iranian Air Force F-4 Phantom jet fighters tried to intercept the object, but turned back, reportedly after an instrumentation and communications failure on both planes. The second plane’s weapons system reportedly also died when it tried to fire a missile at a smaller object, which had emerged from the object pursued. The case is confirmed both by the statements of a senior Iranian military official and by a report from the U.S. Defense Department on the case.
Skeptic Philip J. Klass, after having examined the case, claims the witnesses initially saw an astronomical body, possibly Jupiter, while equipment malfunction and pilot incompetence accounted for the technical malfunctions. Klass also pointed out that although being supposedly such a spectacular UFO case, it remained unclassified, and that there was no evidence of a follow-up investigation.
Rendlesham Forest Incident (UK, 1980)
From December 26 to 28, 1980, several bright UFOs were reportedly observed by military personnel in Rendlesham Forest, Suffolk, England. In one case, a witness reported seeing a landed object, which he then touched and felt characters etched on its surface, before the object flew off. Later, military personnel found impressions and increased radioactivity measurements on the supposed landing site. The witnesses were all military personnel, including the deputy commander of the nearby Bentwaters Royal Air Force base, Lt. Col. Charles I. Halt. An official USAF memo dated January 13, 1981 documents the incident. An audio recording of the military investigation that took place on December 27 is also available to the public. Skeptic Brian Dunning of the Skeptoid podcast suggests the UFO and strange light sightings were misidentifications of the nearby Orfordness lighthouse, the re-entry of the Russian Cosmos 749 rocket, and meteors.
Belgian UFO wave (Belgium, 1989–1991)
From 1989 to mid-1991, around 3,500 UFO sightings were recorded in Belgium. On the night of March 30, 1990, hundreds of people reported seeing UFOs in the airspace over Belgium, and unknown targets were confirmed by radar. Two Belgian Air Force (BAF) F-16 fighters attempted to intercept the objects, with no success. The radar tapes were later analyzed by the BAF, who concluded that the anomalies could have been caused by processing errors on the on-board computers. Ufologist Renaud Leclet states that some of the sightings could be explained by helicopters with unusual designs, with which the public was unfamiliar.
Phoenix Lights (USA, 1997)
On March 13, 1997, from around 8:15 to 10 p.m. local time, hundreds of citizens in the city of Phoenix, Arizona reported seeing a formation of lights move over city and surrounding mountains, giving the impression of a large “V”-shaped object. Along with eyewitness testimony, video material and pictures of the lights exist. It was revealed that the visiting 104th Fighter Squadron of the Maryland Air National Guard dropped illumination flares as a part of an exercise near Phoenix around 8:15 to 8:30 p.m.
Notable UFO organizations
United States
In the US, groups and affiliates interested in UFO investigation number in the hundreds, of which a few have achieved prominence based on their longevity, size, and researcher involvement with scientific credentials. The first significant UFO interest group in the US was the Aerial Phenomena Research Organization (APRO), formed in 1952 by Coral and James Lorenzen. The organization closed down in 1988. The National Investigations Committee on Aerial Phenomena (NICAP), which formed in 1957 and shut down in the 1970ṣ, whose Board of Directors included former Director of Central Intelligence and first head of the Central Intelligence Agency, VADM Roscoe H. Hillenkoetter, was, at one time, the largest UFO organization in the country, with numerous chapters.
In 1957, brothers W. H. and J. A. Spaulding founded the Ground Saucer Watch, which later became famous when, in 1977, the group filed a suit under the Freedom of Information Act against the CIA.
ARPO out of Arizona was prior to MUFON and CUFOS
The two major UFO groups active today are the Mutual UFO Network (MUFON), founded in 1969, and the Center for UFO Studies (CUFOS), founded in 1973 by J. Allen Hynek.
MUFON grew as the key members of NICAP joined the organization in the 1970s.
CUFOS has tried to limit its membership to established researchers, but has found little academic acceptance.
United Kingdom
The British UFO Research Association (BUFORA) is the largest and oldest of the active British UFO organizations. It traces its roots to the London UFO Research Association, founded in 1959, which merged with the British UFO Association (BUFOA) to form BUFORA in 1964.
Ukraine
The Ukrainian Ufologic Club (UFODOS) has released and placed on the Internet (ufobua.org.ua) a national archive of UFO evidences. It was compiled based on people’s evidences about strange flying objects over Ukraine. The “secret files” comprise about 500 eyewitnesses testimonies who saw UFO in Ukraine starting from the 17th century. According to UFODOS chief Yaroslav Sochka, the materials were collected from various sources, basically, Hydrometeorological Center of Ukraine Air Force and public ufological organizations.
Australian Ufology
The Australian Flying Saucer Bureau (AFSB) and the Australian Flying Saucer Research Society (AFSRS) were the earliest UFO groups established in Australia, with both being founded in the early 1950s.
The Australian Centre for UFO Studies (ACUFOS) was established in 1974 with links to the American CUFOS.[140] Other currently active Australian UFO groups include the Victorian UFO Research Society (VUFORS), the Australian UFO Research Network (AUFORN), and UFO Research Queensland (UFORQ).
Part of a Sub-Culture debunkers as Skeptic organizations (Prior to when UFOlogy became accepted about 1997-2007.
How are some of us inspired to write books? Some of are inspired while others feel a spiritual implication and epiphany of importance. TJ had no idea she would write a book and become an author. It was with encouragement which another saw as inspiration to support TJ also known as Rose. This information is gathered in another book called Roswell Encounters and Roswell UFO Encounters available on lulu.com/TJMorrisPublishing.
TJ was encouraged by others of Australia and Sally Hester of Roswell, new Mexico. It was meant to be used as the power of suggestion to TJ. Sally was visited or inspired through her dream state and had a spiritual experience she relate to TJ as Christ Consciousness moment in time where Sally felt inspired and a drive to write her story of others who shared their stories on visits to the Roswell UFO Museum and was told and inspired in her sleep state to share this with TJ she called Rose. There was to be a book about all the UFO information. Finally during the anniversary of the Roswell UFO Encounters. A book called Roswell Encounters by Theresa J Morris -1995-2005 finally printed a book in 2009 available on Amazon.com by lulu.com/TJMorrisPublishing is now available online.
TJ is Theresa Janette. Born maiden name Thurmond and married name was Parrish now Morris. Theresa in military had name Havelka.

TJ Morris aka Theresa Janette Thurmond Morris
DOB :12-26-51, Monroe, LA 12 Noon
TJ is a natural born leader which is so noted in astrology as she is a Capricorn with Aquarius rising in her Astrological Chart. TJ is believes in living a balanced ascension centered enlightened life as a spiritual intellectual and shares her essence and energy and sometimes funding and creations with those who are in alignment with her own endorsements and beliefs as a patron and leader in the discoveries of the future minds of the world. TJ has been associated with many famous people in her time on earth and began on television at age of 3 years and while in grade school was on TV weekly. She is an extrovert to some and believed to be an introvert to others. TJ enjoys psychic science and neuro science and shares brain training and spiritual training as part of being a well-balanced humanoid in body-mind-spirit in the birth-life-death experience which is her faith. TJ is not a religious person but is considered an Avatar Ascension Master having master all 33 Ancient Mystery School levels including surviving life after death in this lifetime not only as an experienced believer in reincarnation with this being her ninth and final return to this planet. TJ believes that alien civilizations exist and says this is her religion if anyone bothers to ask her religion she is a declared Ascension Age Avatar Master Minister of the Shamanic Healing Arts. TJ believes in creative design and reincarnation for the soul. Former Military DOD,USN
Former Investigator, Private, GS, Legal, Investigative Reporter, Author, Entrepreneur, Hostess-Speaker
Toastmaster, Member BMI, Former IBMA, USTA, CMA,
The Parapsychological Association is an international professional organization of scientists and scholars engaged in the study of psi (or ‘psychic’) experiences, such as telepathy, clairvoyance, psychokinesis, psychic healing, and precognition. The primary objective of the PA is to achieve a scientific understanding of these experiences.
First established in 1957, the PA has been an affiliated organization of the American Association for the Advancement of Science (AAAS) since 1969. The PA is a non-profit, non-adjudicating organization that endorses no ideologies or beliefs other than the value of rigorous scientific and scholarly inquiry.
Further information: List of skeptics and skeptical organizations
The Committee for Skeptical Inquiry (CSI), although not a UFO organization, has investigated various UFO cases and has given a skeptical review of the phenomena in its publications, often in the Skeptical Inquirer magazine. Founded as the Committee for the Scientific Investigation of Claims of the Paranormal (CSICOP) in 1976 by professor of philosophy Paul Kurtz, the committee is notable for its member scientists and skeptics, such as Carl Sagan, Isaac Asimov, Philip J. Klass, Ray Hyman, James Randi, and Martin Gardner.
The Skeptics Society, founded by science historian Michael Shermer in 1992, has also addressed the UFO issue in its magazine Skeptic.
See also Ancient astronauts, Extraterrestrial life, Fringe science
MK Ultra – Montauk-Pegasus-MKUltra-Redhawk-Aviary
William Leonard Moore (born October 31, 1943?) is an author and former UFO researcher. Prominent from the late 1970s to the late 1980s, he co-authored two books with Charles Berlitz, including The Roswell Incident – the first book written about the alleged Roswell UFO crash/retrieval.
Moore later became a controversial figure within UFOlogy due to his involvement with a group of intelligence contacts known as ‘The Aviary’. He played a role in The Bennewitz Affair, and was a central figure in the release of the controversial Majestic 12 documents.
Bill Moore has a background in the liberal arts, history, teaching and English. He speaks fluent French and holds a degree in Russian.
Moore attended Thiel College, located in Greenville, Pennsylvania graduating in 1965.
Before deciding to concentrate on his writing career he taught language and humanities at various high schools. Bill Moore was a subscriber to NICAP and during the mid to late 1960s he was asked to investigate a couple of UFO cases for the group.
He was later on the board of directors of APRO, based in Arizona.
Moore wrote The Philadelphia Experiment with Charles Berlitz. Published in 1979, it details the alleged 1943 US Navy cloaking experiment of the destroyer escort USS Eldridge at the Philadelphia Naval Yard.
The Roswell Incident
Whilst Bill Moore was based in Minnesota and still publicizing
The Philadelphia Experiment he met with fellow UFO researcher Stanton T. Friedman who he knew, to compare notes.
Friedman stated to Moore that he had recently travelled to Louisiana and spoken to a retired Major Jesse Marcel, after following up on an earlier lead he received from a radio station manager whilst he was waiting for an interview.
Jesse Marcel detailed to Friedman his involvement in an incident that had occurred almost 30 years previously – the handling of wreckage from an alleged crash of a craft during July 1947 in Roswell, New Mexico.
Moore also had some information pertaining to a UFO crash and when they thought it could be connected to the same story, they began to research the case further. Moore later raised the idea of a book with his writing partner Charles Berlitz who liked the idea. Within a relatively short period of time Moore conducted the field work, interviewed eyewitnesses, prepared reports and sent them to Berlitz in New York who wrote up the chapters of the book.
The Roswell Incident was published in 1980 and was the first book written about the alleged Roswell UFO crash/retrieval.
Interactions with ‘The Aviary’
In late 1980 after the release of The Roswell Incident, Moore received a phone call after appearing on a radio show where he was promoting the new book. In October 1988 on the nationally televised UFO Cover-Up?: Live! broadcast Bill Moore described:
“I got a phone call after appearing on a radio show from a man who said ‘you’re the only person we’ve heard talk about this subject, who seems to know what he’s talking about’. He convinced me that he was a government intelligence agent and wanted to begin disseminating some information about UFOs to the public”.
The original contact Moore later met was to be known as ‘Falcon’. In exchange for information received Moore would keep tabs on sections of the UFO research community. This also included taking part in disinformation activities against Paul Bennewitz with AFOSI agent Richard C. Doty, as Moore would later admit at the 1989 Las Vegas MUFON conference. Throughout the 80s the group of intelligence contacts grew in number, each given a bird name – hence they became known as ‘The Aviary’.
In June 1982 television producer Jaime Shandera joined forces with Moore to attend the meetings and collaborate on the research, including the discovery of the existence of MJ-12 – the purported high-level policy making group overseeing the UFO and extraterrestrial issue. In 1984 Moore and Shandera received the now infamous MJ-12 documents as a 35mm black and white film that was mailed to Jaime Shandera in a plain brown envelope. Their contacts with The Aviary continued until the 1990s when Moore and Shandera eventually left the UFO research field.
Recent Activities
In the last few years William Moore has been interviewed several times by researcher Greg Bishop on his radio show Radio Mysterioso regarding his past involvement in UFOlogy. In one of the interviews Bill Moore reveals he still writes, though not about UFOs – he carries out editorial work for a newspaper, and has been acting as an historian researching and writing about The Book of Mormon.
William Moore was also a central figure in Greg Bishop’s 2005 book detailing the Bennewitz Affair Project Beta: The Story of Paul Bennewitz, National Security, and the Creation of a Modern UFO Myth. Some of Moore’s activities and interactions with The Aviary have also been detailed in the 2006 book Exempt from Disclosure: The Black World of UFOs by Aviary members Robert M. Collins aka ‘Condor’ and Richard C. Doty – the surrogate ‘Falcon’
ACO also known as the Ascension Center Organization has educators, spiritualists, and those who believe in both science and religion.
We do not discriminate against any being regardless of race, color, religion, ethnicity, culture, or traditional preferences. We share in the practice of social service network clubs online. We are an association of churches online as spiritualists which shares in the study of world religions, world sciences, and super natural phenomena not yet explained either empirical or in the existential transparency in our art, culture, education, science, technology, folklife, history, epistemology, philosophy, theology, or any other world categories or patterns, symbols, numbers, or coincidence of life experiences.
We accept that we believe in a higher power as well as empirical knowledge based awareness.
We claim no particular God or Goddess but regard the ACO as a creationist belief and faith of the entire universal order of creation and chaos as empirical and that there are higher beings and species in the universe, multiverse, metaverse, xenoverse, omniverse, Alphaverse, and Omegaverse Matrix or Macrocosm.
TJ THURMOND MORRIS, founder receives no compensation as the organizer and founder of the ACO – Ascension Center Organization Association and expresses her desire to serve in this spiritual
THE LEMURIAN AND ATLANTIS CIVILIZATIONS. GALACTIC HUMANS OF THE NEW AGE – 2012
According to Sheldon Nidel, ‘You are Becoming a Galactic Human’ listen to show on Sheldon Nidel on BUFO Paranormal and UFO Radio our first civilization here was etheric intelligence and were designated to be the guardians of Earth but this etherical intelligence also needed the help of physical guardians of Earth.
ETHEREAL GUARDIANS AGAINST THE REPTOIDS & DINOIDS (Pre-Cataceans)
Dinoids from the Bellatrix system in the Constellation of Orion and Reptoid colonies from the Constellation of Sagittarius arrived later to inhabit the Earth. The Reptoid and Dinoids allowed a mammalian species to evolve to sentiency. These mammals were called the pre-cataceans.
THREE (3) COLONIES
The pre-cataceans provided food for all 3 colonies in exchange for technology which in turn improved their production rate further. These 3 civilizations co-existed in harmony trading among one another for over 8 million years. All 3 civilizations developed advanced forms of space/time travel.

The pre-cataceans developed their spiritual side, such as psychic abilities, extensively. A Dinoid/Reptoid Alliance from Bellatrix , believing they were superior to the pre-cataceans, came to Earth to cease all cooperation with the pre-cataceans and wanted to put them under their control. Over time, the Earth Dinoids and Reptoid became more and more
Influenced by the Bellatrix Dinoid/Reptoid Alliance.
URAL MOUNTAINS
The Pre-cataceans, through their high psychic abilities, began sensing the aggression against them and came to see the threat presented by the Dinoid/Reptoid civilizations. Being given permission for the Earth Spiritual Hierarchies, the Pre-Cataceans decided to implode their fusion reactors located in the Ural Mountain Range.
The Pre-cataceans divided into two groups. One group evacuated out of our solar system to the constellations of Pegasus and Cetus and the other group altered themselves physically so that they could enter the oceans and find haven. This group is now our present day cataceans such as the dolphins and whales. The entire transformation process occurred over a period of 4 million years. When the transformation was complete and the later sector was safe, the first sector imploded the fusion reactors, destroying 98% of the Dinoid/Reptoid civilizations, the survivors evacuated to the planet in our solar system, Maldek. Now with the Dinoid/Reptoid no longer present on Earth, the Earth Spiritual Hierarchies and the cataceans had to find a suitable guardian for the land. They searched the galaxy for 2 to 3 million years before finding what they were looking for. They found, on the fourth planet of the Vega system, a primitive aquatic species that was starting to emerge from the oceans. This species had creation myths, a language, and a hunting and gathering culture. The Spiritual Hierarchies of the Vega system were then asked if they would permit this species to be vastly altered genetically to accelerate their evolution so that they may become a guardian species. The Vega Spiritual Hierarchies agreed. So, the traces of the first humans came from the Vega Star System. Their technology improved very quickly, and once they had developed star travel technology they started to migrate into nearby star systems for a period of 2.5 million years. During this time the Galactic Federation was formed, Sirius B was colonized and Earth was selected for seeding. Later Mars and Venus were colonized and the Hybornea colony was founded on Earth. Dinoid/Reptoids in the meantime had built up there forces and were invading the various colonies throughout the solar system.
MALDEK AND MARDUK
Hyborean Earth, Mars and Venus were victim to these attacks and the Dinoids and Reptoids gained control over the solar system for a period of approximately 80,000 years. In response to this the Galactic Federation planned a counterattack to reintroduce humans into this system. They arranged for a battle planet (4 times the diameter of the Earth) to come into the solar system and destroy the planet Maldek – which was the Dinoid/Reptoid stronghold.
ATLANTIS & YU
The remains of the planet Maldek are what we can now see as the asteroid belt. After the destruction of Maldek and the defeat of the Dinoid/Reptoids a human colony was again established on Earth. It is what we know today as Lemuria. Over the next 850,000 years the Lemurians spread across the face of the planet. They founded daughter colonies such as Atlantis, Yu which is now Central China and Tibet and the Libyan/Egyptian colonies.
The Atlanteans began to acquire a feeling of uniqueness about their culture and wanted to eliminate Lemuria so that they could become the mother country.
The Atlanteans began forming alliances with renegade Pleidans and Alpha Centaurians which had Hierarchical systems of government. They accomplished the destruction of Lemuria by taking the Earth’s moon (Earth had 2 moons in those times) out of orbit by using force fields until it was as close as possible to the Lemurian empire, and then the moon was destroyed resulting in a catastrophic shower of meteors.
TWO MOONS ONCE WAS ABOVE EARTH
This destroyed much of Lemuria, but this also resulted in many pressures being inflicted upon the tectonic plates: resulting in the gas chambers under Lemuria to implode and thus sink most of the Lemurian continent. AGARTHA AND SHAMBHALA Yu Empire would not bow down to the hierarchical rule of Atlantis and Libyan/Egyptian empires and was thus forced to literally go underground.
Today, they form what is known as the Kingdom of Agartha or Shamballah. AUTOCRACY WAS BORN Atlantis formed 10 ruling districts, each with their own king.
These kings together formed the governing council of Atlantis. – The royal governing council of Atlantis decide that a new form of government was desperately needed in which a superior ruling class could be established and sustained by their pretense that they had been empowered by a God-Force. Autocracy was thus born and was in full control enforcing a period of peace and stability.
To achieve control over the populace, they started experiment with the people’s DNA and genetics. This resulted in the people’s consciousness being reduced, life spans contracted and psychic/spiritual abilities dramatically decreasing.
WARS
Throughout the years there were many wars among the various empires due to underground movements of people that wanted to have the Lemurian “philosophy” back in place (i.e. no hierarchy).
These wars led to vast destruction. As a last resort the warring empires decided to attack the opponents crystal temples (which were responsible for maintaining two frozen layers of water about 15,000 – 30,000 feet above ground which protected people on Earth from the harmful sun’s rays and also ensured a stable weather pattern at all times)
GREAT FLOOD ON EARTH
Unfortunately, the attacks were made simultaneously and caused the Firmament (the water layers) to be broken down and thus millions of gallons of water thus poured down onto the surface causing what is known biblically as “The Great Flood” .The breakdown of the Firmament also resulted in the polar icecaps freezing and also the many climatic variations we have today to form.
AFTER THE FLOOD
– Only about 2 million people survived the Flood from an original 65 known million. Unfortunately many of the survivors were the mutant humans that had been genetically altered by the Atlanteans into a much lower state of consciousness. Also, the fact that the firmament was now no longer in existence resulted in the DNA and thus consciousness breaking down even further.
PLEIEDES & ALPHA BETA CENTAURI
A few different renegades from Pleiades, Alpha and Beta Centauri came to different places on Earth after the Flood, seeing it as an opportune time to establish their own desired ideologies and also be seen as “godlike” and thus reverenced. Being already genetically altered, the surviving humans were therefore easily controlled by these renegades. – Since no form of disobedience to these new “gods” was allowed, the concept of ruling by “divine right” became inculcated on Earth. This concept of worshipping elite has continued through to modern times. Culture would rise against culture in wars claiming that the elite they themselves worshipped were superior to the elite of the opposing faction. – We are now in times, though, that will finally bring to an end an approximate 10,000 years of “semi-consciousness” and regain our full consciousness that we deserve. This will be due to our entire solar system coming into contact with what is known as the “Photon Belt” »
SOCIAL PARANORMAL NETWORK NEWS = socialparanormal.com
SEE THERESA MORRIS at www.theresajmorris.com
For more of the ASCENSION CENTER ENLIGHTENEMENT
ASCENSION CENTER IS OWNED BY WHOM MOST PEOPLE CALL GOD. The LIGHTWORKERS on earth are equal to the ANGELS of THE MOST HIGH in ETHEREAL.
Theresa Janette Thurmond Morris is the KEEPER OF THE FLAME and was chosen before birth on earth. Theresa is a female with many past life memories of being of both male and female. She is an advocate of Ancient Civilizations and shares her truth that “ALIEN CIVILZATIONS EXIST!”
Theresa is considered a MOPS which is an acronym for Mystic, Oracle, Prophetess, Sage, Shaman, Seer, and Author and Writer. Theresa also known as TJ in prior stories, myths, legends, and lore is said to also be the perfection reincarnated energy as a whisper in all that is connected as all intelligent beings including those on earth, and in space. Theresa has had out of body experiences, and died as we know on earth and has gone to heaven. Theresa still travels throughout this universe, the metaverse, the xenoverse, and the Omniverse as those who are called the “TIME LORDS” that some once called Zeus and the Lords of Heaven allow. Theresa is a servant as a communicator and in another part of her present existence are the Commanding Officer and Communication Officer for the Federation of Galaxies. The Galactic Federation is real and Theresa answers to no one besides her companion spouse on earth who is also a Commanding Officer of the Fleet Above in the space we know as Stellar Space and of the actual Supreme Council Federation of Galaxies in this universe and all others in the Metaverse, The Xenoverse, and the Omniverse. When they have passed on in the 21st century, they shall return once again in other forms as the need arises. They explain they are all a part of our eternal plan that was explained in the Unity of the Force which we at present call GOD. They are both sharers and believers in the words we use to explain our cover of life on earth in what is now termed the “Game of Life” with the Tree of Knowledge and all other myths, legends, and tales that were too dangerous to tell in times of the past.
The story that is called the ASCENSION CENTER ENLIGHTENMENT is one for the NEW AGE OF ENLIGHTENMENT as the “AGE OF AQUARIUS” that was promised to all when the time to reveal came to be in place. The Secret Government and the Alien Connection
We shall rewrite our history. There are countless reports and documents available about this subject. We are being manipulated by human and alien powers to lead humanity into a one-world government and the enslavement of the human race.
We all are invited to health and prosperity for all. The new word for all is sustainability. Look for more books by TJ Morris. Share our Blogtalkradio.com/TJMorrisETradio. TJ Morris Publishing Network
Ascension Age is now!
When we shall learn about our own existence on the Alien ET Highway of the Cosmos Through Time Called the Ascension Age.
We are each a soul first as a creation. We are then given an essence which can become an actual separate entity that can detect separate awareness from the original source as the creator.
ACO Adopts a Psychological Contract
The psychological contract adopted by ACO

Definitions and usage of the term ‘the Psychological Contract’
Psychological Contract diagrams and models – Venn diagram and ‘Iceberg’ model diagram
Context and implications of the Psychological Contract – its meaning and effects
Increasing complexity of the Psychological Contract – how work/life has changed, especially since the 1980s
Leadership transparency – significance to the Psychological Contract
Change management and the Psychological Contract
‘Selling’ changes to people, and relevance to the Psychological Contract
Empathy and the Psychological Contract
‘Virtuous Circles’ and ‘Vicious Circles’ within the Psychological Contract – for example Openness of communications
External and relative factors within the Psychological Contract – for example Generational factors
Additional and deeper perspectives of the Psychological Contract – extending its implications
Transactional Analysis ‘contracting’ – helpful in understanding the wider concept.
The Psychological Contract – tool – process – working model
The psychological contract – definitions and usage

In management, economics and HR (human resources) the term ‘the Psychological Contract’ commonly and somewhat loosely refers to the actual – but unwritten – expectations of an employee or workforce towards the employer. The Psychological Contract represents, in a basic sense, the obligations, rights, rewards, etc., that an employee believes he/she is ‘owed’ by his/her employer, in return for the employee’s work and loyalty.
This notion applies to a group of employees or a workforce, just as it may be seen applying to a single employee. In general here we refer to ‘the organization’ and ‘leaders’ and ‘leadership’, which broadly are the same thing in considering and describing the Psychological Contract. Leadership or ‘the leader’ is basically seen to represent the organization, and to reflect the aims and purposes of the owners of the organization. Leaders and leadership in this context refer to senior executive leaders or a chief executive, etc., not to team leaders or managers who (rightly) aspire to be leaders in the true sense of the word (covered under leadership, separately).
Organizational aims and purpose at a fundamental constitutional level have potentially deep implications within the Psychological Contract which are addressed later, notably under additional perspectives.
Where the term Psychological Contract is shown in books, articles, training materials, etc., it commonly appears as the Psychological Contract (capitalized first letters), but you might also see it in quote marks as the ‘psychological contract’, ‘The Psychological Contract’, or more modestly as the psychological contract, or sensible variations of these. Any is correct.
The common tendency to capitalize the first letters – Psychological Contract – as if it were a uniquely significant thing (a ‘proper noun’) like we do for names and important things like Planet Earth or the Big Bang or Wednesday. Personally I think the Psychological Contract is very significant and unique, but it’s a matter of personal choice.
This also seeks to differentiate it from a more general sense of ‘psychological contracting’ or ‘contracts’ or ‘contracting’ in wider human communications, mutual understanding and relationships.
The concept of the Psychological Contract within business, work and employment is extremely flexible and very difficult (if not practically impossible) to measure in usual ways, as we might for example benchmark salaries and pay against market rates, or responsibilities with qualifications, etc. .It is rare for the plural form ‘Psychological Contracts’ to be used in relation to a single organization, even when applied to several employees, because the notion is of an understanding held by an individual or a group or people, unlike the existence of physical documents, as in the pluralized ’employment contracts’ of several employees. The Psychological Contract is quite different to a physical contract or document – it represents the notion of ‘relationship’ or ‘trust’ or ‘understanding’ which can exist for one or a number of employees, instead of a tangible piece of paper or legal document which might be different from one employee to another.
The singular ‘Psychological Contract’ also embodies very well the sense of collective or systemic feelings which apply strongly in workforces. While each individual almost certainly holds his or her own view of what the Psychological Contract means at a personal level, in organizational terms the collective view and actions of a whole workgroup or workforce are usually far more significant, and in practice the main focus of leadership is towards a collective or group situation. This is particularly necessary in large organizations where scale effectively prevents consideration of the full complexities and implications of the Psychological Contract on a person-by-person basis. That said, it is usual for the Psychological Contract to refer to one employee’s relationship with an employer, or to an entire workforce’s relationship with the employer.
The term ‘contracting’ (lower-case ‘c’) in the context of communications is not clearly defined yet, and does not normally refer to the Psychological Contract. As discussed later ‘contracting’ does specifically refer broadly to ‘agreeing mutual expectations’ within Transactional Analysis (a specialized therapeutic or coaching/counselling methodology), and conceivably within other forms of therapy too. (TA ‘contracting’ is specifically described within modern TA theory.)
The nature of the relationship in Transactional Analysis is somewhat different to that of employee and employer, although significantly the sense of agreeing mutual transparent expectations within Transactional Analysis is very similar in spirit and relevant to the Psychological Contract in employment.
The term ‘psychological contracting’ is not typically used in referring to the Psychological Contract in the workplace, but may arise in the context of therapy. It would be helpful to us all for this expression and its related theory, as an extension of the Transactional Analysis usage, to become more generally used in human communications and understanding. In life, relationships and communications generally operate on a very superficial level. Opportunities to explore, understand, explain and agree mutual expectations are largely ignored or neglected – mostly through fear or ignorance. It is a wonder that humans manage to cooperate at all given how differently two people or two parties, can interpret a meaning, and yet be seemingly incapable of seeking or offering better transparency or clarity.
The Psychological Contract is becoming a powerful concept in the work context. Potentially it is even more powerful when we consider and apply its principles more widely.
Definitions of the psychological contract
A basic definition of the Psychological Contract appears in Michael Armstrong’s excellent Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice (10th Ed., 2006): “…the employment relationship consists of a unique combination of beliefs held by an individual and his employer about what they expect of one another…”
Armstrong references Edgar Schein’s 1965 definition of the Psychological Contract, as being (somewhat more vaguely) an implication that: “…there is an unwritten set of expectations operating at all times between every member of an organization and the various managers and others in that organization…”
Armstrong highlights other references, within which these points are especially notable:
“…Because psychological contracts represent how people interpret promises and commitments, both parties in the same employment relationship can have different views…” (DM Rousseau and KA Wade-Benzoin, 1994)
“…a dynamic and reciprocal deal… New expectations are added over time as perceptions about the employer’s commitment evolve… concerned with the social and emotional aspects of the exchange…” (PR Sparrow, 1999)
Notice how those three definitions of the Psychological Contract cited by Armstrong progressively increase in their subtlety and sophistication.
Schein’s view reflects the early identification of the concept in the 1960s. Later Rousseau/Wade-Benzoni acknowledges the significance of different perceptions of employee and employer. Later still Sparrow recognizes the dynamic quality, and the social and emotional factors. This is not to say the respective writers did not all in some way appreciate the depth of the concept; but it is a helpful illustration of the tendency for the conceptual thinking about the Psychological Contract to evolve, which in part reflects the increasing complexity of the essential employer/employee relationship.
The definition of the Psychological Contract on Wikipedia (April 2010) is: “A psychological contract represents the mutual beliefs, perceptions, and informal obligations between an employer and an employee. It sets the dynamics for the relationship and defines the detailed practicality of the work to be done. It is distinguishable from the formal written contract of employment which, for the most part, only identifies mutual duties and responsibilities in a generalized form.” The UK Chartered Institute of Personal Development, which takes a keen interest in the concept of the Psychological Contract, defines the concept as follows (as at April 2010, in a paper revised in January 2009): “…It [the Psychological Contract] has been defined as ‘…the perceptions of the two parties, employee and employer, of what their mutual obligations are towards each other’. These obligations will often be informal and imprecise: they may be inferred from actions or from what has happened in the past, as well as from statements made by the employer, for example during the recruitment process or in performance appraisals. Some obligations may be seen as ‘promises’ and others as ‘expectations’. The important thing is that they are believed by the employee to be part of the relationship with the employer…” The quoted extract in the above larger excerpt is referenced: ‘Guest, D E and Conway, N. (2002) Pressure at work and the psychological contract. London: CIPD’. Professor David Guest of Kings College London is a leading figure in modern thinking about the Psychological Contract. You will see his ideas and models commonly referenced if you research the subject in depth.
Within these referenced definitions you will see already that the concept is open to different interpretations, and has a number of complex dimensions, notably:
There are a series of mutual obligations on both sides (which include, crucially, intangible factors that can be impossible to measure conventionally).
It is a relationship between an employer on one side, and on the other side an employee and/or employees (which by implication distorts the notion of a formal contract between two fixed specified parties).
The obligations are partly or wholly subject to the perceptions of the two sides (which adds further complexities, because perceptions are very changeable, and as you will see, by their subjective ‘feeling’ and attitudinal nature perceptions create repeating cause/effect loops or vicious/virtuous circles, which are scientifically impossible to resolve).
Overall the Contract itself has a very changeable nature (being such a fluid thing itself, and being subject to so many potential influences, including social and emotional factors, which are not necessarily work-driven).
And an obvious point often overlooked, within any organization the Psychological Contract is almost never written or formalized, which makes it inherently difficult to manage, and especially difficult for employees and managers and executives and shareholders to relate to (the Psychological Contract is almost always a purely imaginary framework or understanding, which organizational leadership rarely prioritizes as more real or manageable issues – or leadership regards the whole idea as some sort of fluffy HR nonsense, and anyway, “Let’s not forget who’s the boss… etc” – so that the whole thing remains unspoken, unwritten, and shrouded in mystery and uncertainty).
Work used to be a relatively simple matter of hours or piece-rate in return for wages. It is a lot more complicated now and so inevitably are the nature and implications of the Psychological Contract.
Much of the theory surrounding Psychological Contracts is intangible and difficult to represent in absolute measurable terms. Diagrams can be helpful in understanding and explaining intangible concepts. Here are a couple of diagram interpretations, offered here as useful models in understanding Psychological Contracts which are often overlooked in attempting to appreciate and apply Psychological Contracts theory. Venn diagrams (devised c.1880 by British logician and philosopher John Venn, 1834-1923) are useful in representing all sorts of situations where two or more related areas interact or interrelate. The Venn diagram below provides a simple interpretation of the factors and influences operating in Psychological Contracts.
vc = visible contract – the usual written employment contractual obligations on both sides to work safely and appropriately in return for a rate of pay or salary, usually holidays also, plus other employee rights of notice and duty of care.
pc = psychological contract – which is hidden, unspoken, unwritten, and takes account of the relationship references (r) between employee and market (which includes other external factors), also the employer’s relationship with the market (also r), and the visible contract (vc). Note that only the visible contract (vc) element is written and transparent. All the other sections are subject to perceptions until/unless clarified.
This Psychological Contracts ‘iceberg’ diagram below is a helpful way to illustrate some of the crucial aspects and influences within Psychological Contracts theory.
For team-builders and trainers, and leaders too, it’s also potentially a useful tool for explaining and exploring the concept and its personal meaning for people.
An iceberg is said to be 90% hidden beneath the water. This metaphor fits the Psychological Contract very well, in which most of the Contract perceptions are unwritten and hidden, consistent with its definition.
This is especially so for junior workers in old-fashioned ‘X-Theory’ autocratic organizations, where mutual expectations typically have little visibility and clarity. Here we might imagine that the iceberg is maybe 95% or 99% submerged.
By contrast the Psychological Contract between a more modern enlightened employer and its employees, especially senior mature experienced and successful staff, is likely to be much more clearly understood and visible, with deeper inputs and rewards, formally and mutually agreed. Here the iceberg might be only 60% or 70% submerged.
These percentage figures are not scientific – they merely explain the way the model works.
The iceberg metaphor extends conveniently so that the ‘sky’ and the ‘sea’ represent external and market pressures acting on employee and employer, affecting the balance, and the rise or fall of the iceberg.
As the iceberg rises with the success and experience of the employee, so does the contract value and written contractual expectations on both sides. Increasingly deeper inputs and rewards emerge from being hidden or confused perceptions below from the water-line, to become visible mutual contractual agreement above the water-line.
The process can also operate in reverse, although in a healthy situation the natural wish of both sides is for the iceberg to rise.
A quick key is alongside the diagram. A more detailed explanation is below the diagram.
Psychological contracts iceberg model – explanation in detail while one imagines the diagram of an iceberg use in various teaching power point presentations.
The left side of the iceberg represents the employee’s inputs. These are also the employer’s needs or expectations, which may be visible and contractually agreed, or informal, perceived, inferred, etc., and unwritten, or potential expectations depending on performance and opportunity, which not necessarily apply to all employees/employers.
The right side represents typical examples of rewards given by the employer. These are also the employee expectations or needs, which again may be visible and contractually agreed, or perceived, inferred, imagined, etc., in which case they would generally be unwritten. As with the left-side employee inputs, the right side of the iceberg also includes potential inputs which are not necessarily applicable to all employees/employers.
In both cases ‘below the water-line’ factors are strongly a matter of perception until/unless brought out into the open and clarified. Perceptions from the employee’s standpoint are crucial, which tend to differ markedly from the employer’s perceptions, and also from the employer’s methods of assessing such factors. For example the employee may vastly over-estimate the value of his/her contribution to organizational performance. The employer may vastly under-estimate the stress or erosion of life balance that the job causes to the employee.
The examples of factors on the iceberg are not exhaustive, and the sequences are not intended to be matched or directly reciprocating. Many other factors can apply. I have referred already to the importance of encouraging open communications, without which a leader will never discover what the iceberg looks like, let alone how to manage it.
Above the water level – ‘work and pay’ – represents the basic employment contract – the traditional ‘fair day’s work for a fair day’s pay’. This loosely equates to the ‘vc’ segment in the Venn diagram. This visible employment contract is typically the written contractual obligations on both sides. The iceberg diagram shows the most basic work and pay exchange. In reality most workers are formally responsible for other inputs and are formally entitled to benefits beyond pay alone, so in this respect the iceberg here represents a very basic situation.
The black arrows represent market influences on work and pay, especially including those that are specific to the employment situation, which are obvious, visible, and known, etc. These influences would include specifics such as market demand for and availability of people who can do the job concerned. This extends to market rates of pay and salary.
The red arrows represent the tendency for the iceberg to rise with success and maturity in the job, and to a degree also in the success and maturity of the employer organization. More mature experienced and high-achieving employees will tend to see their personal icebergs rising so that increasingly the hidden contractual factors become visible, and written into formal employment contracts, above the water-line, so to speak. Employees generally want the iceberg to rise. So do enlightened and progressive employers. They want the hidden unwritten aspects of the Psychological Contract which are below the surface to become applicable, and to be visible and formalized contractually. A rising iceberg signifies increasing employee contribution towards organizational performance, which is typically rewarded with increasingly deeper rewards and benefits.
Below the water-line – the metaphorical 90% of the iceberg which is under the surface. These are the hidden perceptions which strongly affect interpretation of the Psychological Contract, notably by the employee. These factors loosely equate to the ‘pc’ area of the Venn diagram. Where the Psychological Contract is very largely hidden perceptions and mutually unclear, then we can imagine the iceberg being more than 90% submerged. Where the Contract is healthier and clearer – for whatever reason – we can imagine the iceberg perhaps being only 60-70% submerged. Interestingly, in cooperatives and employee ownership organizations the iceberg model will tend to be (due to the nature of the employee ownership model) mostly out of the water, and perhaps even floating on top, as if by magic, which is a fascinating thought..
The sequential listing of factors shown below the water-line on both sides is not definitive or directly reciprocating (of equal values). The model provides a guide to the concept, not a scientific checklist of equally matched or balancing factors. That said, the diagram offers a broad indication of relative seriousness of the factors in both lists, with the deeper items representing the most serious potential inputs and rewards, which tend to be matched by deeper elements on the other side.
Use the framework to map your own situation, rather than attempting to fit your own situation into the specific examples given.
The blue arrows represent hidden factors influencing employee and employer and notably affecting their perceptions and attitudes to each other. These factors may be very visible to and clearly understood by one side but not to the other until/unless revealed and clarified in objective terms. Many hidden influences are not well understood by either side. Many of these factors change unpredictably, but many are relatively constant and can easily be clarified. Both sides may assume the other side already knows about these factors, or alternatively has not right to know about these factors. Some factors are hidden because they are difficult for anyone to understand or predict, but a great many others result simply from secrecy, borne of distrust or insecurity.
Some employers and leaders will wonder how on earth all these hidden and subjective factors can possibly be identified and balanced. In fact they can’t in absolute terms; but they can be made far more transparent and agreed if management philosophy and methods strive for good open positive cooperation between employer and employees.
A healthy Psychological Contract is one where both sides agree that a fair balance of give and take exists. This is impossible to achieve where there are lots of hidden perceptions, so the first aim is to encourage greater openness and mutual awareness. Given greater awareness most people tend to take a more positive approach to compromise and working agreements.
Various reference models help with this process, particularly the Johari Window, which is an excellent way to explore and expand mutual awareness.
Employers, leaders, team-builders, etc., wanting to explore the Psychological Contract with staff could invite people to sketch what they think their own icebergs look like. And then compare the results with how the leadership sees the iceberg, and also how the leadership imagines its people see the Psychological Contract. It would be interesting and helpful within such an exercise to attempt to label some of the external factors and pressures (the black and blue arrows) – especially the blue ones below the water line on both sides.
The psychological contract – basic context and implications
In management and organizational theory many employee attitudes such as trust, faith, commitment, enthusiasm, and satisfaction depend heavily on a fair and balanced Psychological Contract.
Where the Contract is regarded by employees to be broken or unfair, these vital yet largely intangible ingredients of good organizational performance can evaporate very quickly.
Where the Psychological Contract is regarded by employees to be right and fair, these positive attitudes can thrive.
The traditionally dominant and advantageous position of an employer compared to its workforce (or indeed of any other authority in relation to its followers, ‘customers’, or members, etc) means that the quality of the Psychological Contract is determined by the organizational leadership rather than its followers. An individual worker, or perhaps a rebellious work-group could conceivably ‘break’ or abuse the Psychological Contract, but workers and followers under normal circumstances are almost always dependent on the organization’s leadership for the quality of the Contract itself.
This last point is intriguing, because in organizations such as employee ownership corporations and cooperatives, a different constitutional business model applies, in which workers and potentially customers own the organization and can therefore to a major extent – via suitable representational and management mechanisms – determine the nature and quality of the Psychological Contract, and a lot more besides. We see a glimpse here possibly as to how organizations (and other relationships involving leadership authority or governance) might be run more fairly and sustainably in future times. We live in hope.
Intriguingly also, several factors within the Psychological Contract – for example employee satisfaction, tolerance, flexibility and well-being – are both causes and effects. Feelings and attitudes of employees are at the same time expectations (or outcomes or rewards), and also potential investments (or inputs or sacrifices).
This reflects the fact that employee’s feelings and attitudes act on two levels:
Employee feelings and attitudes are strongly influenced by their treatment at work (an aspect of the Psychological Contract), while at the same time,
Employee feelings and attitudes strongly influence how they see themselves and their relationship with the employer, and their behavior towards the employer (also an aspect of the Psychological Contract).
The simple message to employers from this – and a simple rule for managing this part of the Psychological Contract – is therefore to focus on helping employees to feel good and be happy, because this itself produces a healthier view of the Contract and other positive consequences. Less sensible employers who ignore the relevance of employee happiness – or the relevance of the Contract itself – invariably find that the Psychological Contract is viewed more negatively, and staffs are generally less inclined to support and cooperate with the leadership.
Aside from this, a major reason for the increasing significance of, and challenges posed by, the Psychological Contract is the rapid acceleration of change in business and organized work. This modern dramatic acceleration of change in organisations, and its deepening severity, began quite recently; probably in the 1980s. Some leaders do not yet understand this sort of change well, or how to manage it.
Autocratic leaders, which we might define as ‘X-Theory’ in style, are probably less likely to appreciate the significance of the Psychological Contract and the benefits of strengthening it. Modern enlightened people-oriented leaders, which we might regard as Y-Theory in style, are more likely to understand the concept and to develop a positive approach to it. (See McGregor’s XY-Theory – it provides a helpful perspective.)
An old-style autocratic X-Theory leader might say: “I pay the wages, so I decide the contract…”
Here the Psychological Contract is unlikely to be particularly healthy, and could be an organizational threat or weakness.
An enlightened Y-Theory leader is more likely to take the view: “People work for many and various reasons; the more we understand and meet these needs, the better and more loyally our people will perform…”
Here the Psychological Contract is more likely to be fair and balanced, and is probably an organizational strength and even a competitive advantage.
The most enlightened and progressive leaders will inevitably now find themselves considering the deeper issues of employee ownership and representational leadership.
The increasing complexity of the psychological contract
The nature, extent and complexity of the Psychological Contract are determined by the nature, extent and complexity of people’s needs at work.
Work needs are increasingly impacted by factors outside of work as well as those we naturally imagine arising inside work.
People’s lives today are richer, more varied, and far better informed and connected than ever. People are aware of more, they have more, and want more from life – and this outlook naturally expands their view of how work can help them achieve greater fulfillment.
Work itself has become far more richly diverse and complicated too. The working world is very different to a generation ago.
The employer/employee relationship – reflected in the Psychological Contract – has progressively grown in complexity, especially since workers have become more mobile and enabled by modern technology, and markets globalized. These changes began seriously in the 1980s. Prior to this many modern dimensions of work – such as mobile working, globalization, speed of change – were unusual, when now they are common.
Below the grid gives examples of how work has changed. The watershed might have been the 1980s, or maybe the 90s, it depends on your interpretation; but the point is that sometime around the last two decades of the 20th century the world of work changed more than it had changed since the Industrial Revolution, which incidentally was from about the late-1700s to mid-1800s.
Globalization and technology in the late 20th century shifted everything we knew about organized work onto an entirely different level – especially in terms of complexity, rate of change, connectivity and the mobility of people and activities.
There are also significant changes under way specifically involving attitudes to traditional corporations, markets and governance. Examples of extremely potent ‘community’ driven enterprises are emerging. Social connectivity and technological empowerment pose a real threat to old-style corporate models. Younger generations have seen the free market model and traditional capitalism fail, and fail young people particularly. Certain industries no longer need a massive hierarchical corporation to connect supply and demand.
The significance and complexity of Psychological Contract have grown in response to all of these effects, and given that the world of work will continue change in very big ways, so the significance and complexity of the Contract will grow even more.
How work has changed since the 1980s
Up to 1980s after 1980s
Work teams virtual teams
Factory/office working home/mobile-working
Line management matrix management
Customer service call centers
In-house services outsourcing and off-shoring
Job for life job for 2 years
A life’s work a career for 10 years
Onsite services online services
Few employee rights many employee rights
Low employee awareness high employee awareness
Employees isolated employees connected
Reliable pensions unreliable pensions
other issues: equality, discrimination, training, qualifications, share save, pensions, buy-to-let, 4x4s, telephone, letters, mainframe computers and terminals, sub-contracting, employment contracts other issues: life-balance, sabbaticals, lifelong-learning, employee ownership, community, social enterprise, email, social networking, mobile web, globalization, the psychological contract
It is easy to understand given this dramatically shifted backdrop that people’s relationships with their employers have altered a great deal.
Just one of these factors would be sufficient alone to change substantially how employees relate to employers, and vice-versa – but all these features of work, and more besides, are now quite different to how they were a generation ago.
This new shape of organized work is a fundamental driver of the nature of the Psychological Contract, and also of its significance for employers, especially during economic growth and buoyancy, when employees have more choice and flexibility compared to the relative power of employers during periods of recession.
When considering the ‘before-and-after’ grid above in relation to the Psychological Contract the initial reaction can be to focus on the erosion of traditional outputs (benefits, rewards, etc) accruing to employees, such as job and career security, pensions, etc. Extending these issues, the tendency is to imagine that the changing nature of the Psychological Contract presents more of a challenge or threat to employees than employers.
This is not necessarily so. The shifting world of work (and life beyond work) presents some threats to employers, and erosions of the employee inputs traditionally taken for granted by employers. The changes in work and life that continue to re-shape the Psychological Contract have a two-way effect; they present risks and opportunities (and advantages and disadvantages) to employers and employees alike.
Notably, workers are increasingly mobile, flexible and adaptable – they no longer stay dutifully working for the same employer for as long as the employer needs them. Good workers can far more easily find alternative employment than twenty years ago. They are not limited to working in their local town, or region, or not even in the same country. In fact with modern technology geographical location is for many workers irrelevant, and will become more so.
Also consider the connectivity of workers today. In past times, trade unions were the vehicle for people-power. Instead, increasingly today the vehicle is the internet and modern social networking, which enable awareness and mobilization of groups of people on an awesome level of sophistication and scale, the effects of which we are only beginning to witness.
Modern technology, which the younger generations understand and exploit infinitely better than older people, is fantastically liberating for employees. Historically workers relied on employers for access to technology. In the future, employers will progressively depend on employees for its optimization.
Training and development was a big aspect of employer control. Employees depended on their employer to advance their learning and skills, and thereby their value in the employment market. This is no longer the case. Employees are progressively able to control their own learning and development, again through modern technology, and a new attitude of self-sufficiency is emerging, which we have never seen before.
Leaders were historically focused on retaining customers. Increasingly they will have to focus just as much on retaining staff. A new generation of workers has grown up with no expectation of a job for life. They seek variety and change, where their parents sought routine and security. Moreover they have access to, and control over, substantial modern technologies which will continue to evolve in favor of the individual, rather than the organization.
Leaders must therefore lead in a different way, if they are to retain the best people, and to develop better relationships and reputation among staff, customers and opinion-formers.
Interestingly there are still plenty of leaders (in business and wider governance) whose ideas of power and authority are a lot closer to the practices of the early industrialization of work, than to the modern world. This may be so particularly in the UK, which is still dogged by old systems and attitudes of class and elitism. The signs are that much of this old thinking will be forced to change – and be reflected within the Psychological Contract – as people, at the level of employees, followers, citizens, customers, etc., become more empowered.
Leadership transparency – or lack of…
This is worthy of separate note and emphasis because it’s a big factor in organizations of all sorts.
Lack of leadership transparency results from one or a number of reasons:
Assumption by leadership that employees already know
Assumption by leadership that employees aren’t interested, or are incapable of understanding
Thoughtless leadership – not even considering transparency to be a possible issue
Belief by leadership that employees have no right to know
A policy of secrecy – to hide facts for one reason or another
First let’s put to one side those situations where a leadership intentionally withholds facts and operates secretively because it has something to hide. Achieving a healthy Psychological Contract will neither be an aim or a possibility for such employers.
More commonly in other situations, lack of transparency exists due to leadership negligence, fear or insecurity, or simply a lazy old-fashioned ‘X-Theory’ culture, all of which can be resolved with a bit of thought and effort, and which can produce dramatically positive results, because:
Leadership transparency has a huge influence on two major factors within the Psychological Contract and its effective management:
Employee trust and openness towards the employer
Employee awareness of facts – enabling employee objectivity in judging the Psychological Contract
Where leadership is not transparent, employees have no reason to trust the employer, and according to human nature, will tend not to be open and trusting in return. As discussed elsewhere in this article, trust is crucial for a healthy Psychological Contract.
And where leadership fails to inform and explain itself openly and fully to employees, employees will form their own ideas instead, which tend not to be very accurate or comprehensive. Wrong perceptions, especially when we add misinformation, rumor, etc., thrive in an information vacuum. Faulty beliefs become hidden factors (among the blue arrows in the iceberg diagram) which influence the Psychological Contract very unhelpfully. Aside from this, ignorance and uncertainty make people feel threatened and vulnerable.
Lack of leadership transparency is a particularly daft failing where clear explanation of organizational position provides real objective justification for a particular organizational action or inflexibility.

Transparency helps to kick-start a ‘virtuous circle’ within the Psychological Contract, as well as giving employees reliable facts about their situation.
The ‘virtuous circle’ enables trust, openness and tolerance to develop. Reliable facts replace faulty assumptions and unhelpful perceptions.
Lack of transparency starts a ‘vicious circle’. Distrust fosters distrust. Secrecy fosters secrecy. Employer/employee communications will tend to be closed, not open. Fear and suspicion on both sides increase, particularly in employees, whose perception of the Contract worsens as a result, in turn increasing animosity and fear.
‘Virtuous and vicious circles’ within the Psychological Contract are explained in more detail later in this article.
Note that this advocation of transparency does not give leaders the right to unburden themselves constantly of the worries and pressures that typically come with the responsibility of leadership. Followers expect leaders to be transparent where people are helped by knowing, so that they can prepare and react constructively.
Transparency here refers to the easy and helpful availability of information about the organization. It’s similar to openness, discussed later, which is more concerned with honest two-way communications within an organization. These are not fixed definitions of transparency and openness; just an attempt here to explain two different aspects of organizational and management clarity.
Transparency tends to be a matter of leadership policy, style, by which clear facts about an organization’s position, activities and decisions are made available to its employees and ideally also to its customers. Openness tends to refer to the flow of communications in all directions within the organization, here especially the feelings, ideas and needs of employees. Good general levels of openness in communications may have no influence at all on improving leadership/organizational transparency, especially if the organization chooses not to be very transparent. Transparent organizations find it much easier to foster open communications.
The psychological contract and change management
Change management is a big challenge in today’s organizations, and it is very significant in the Psychological Contract.
Organizational change puts many different pressures on the Psychological Contract.
So does change outside of organizations – in society, the economy, and in individuals’ personal lives; for example ‘Life-Stage’ or ‘generational’ change – (see Erikson’s Life-Stages Theory).
Our ability to understand and manage organizational change increasingly depends on our ability to understand and manage the most important drivers within the Psychological Contract.
These can vary considerably situation to situation. We need therefore to be able to identify and interpret the nature of change, and other factors impacting on the Psychological Contract, rather than merely referring to a checklist. People’s needs, and their perceptions of their needs, can change quickly, and tend to do so more when they are unhappy.
Organizational leaders naturally see change from their own standpoint. Crucially, to manage change more effectively leaders must now see change in terms of its effects on employees, and must understand how employees feel about it.
Managing change is often seen as merely a process – as in project management for example – but effective leadership style and behavior – notably alongside a modern appreciation of the Psychological Contract – are also vital for successful change management.
Where a leader’s behavior is sensitive to people’s feelings, change happens much easier. Where a leader forces change on people insensitively, and without proper consideration of the Psychological Contract, then problems usually arise.
These two approaches extend interestingly in different ways, which we can call a ‘virtuous circle’ or a ‘vicious circle’.
‘Selling’ changes and the psychological contract
The extent to which change, or any situation, is ‘sold’ to people warrants careful consideration.
‘Selling’ here refers informally to the use of persuasion, influence or incentive, in causing someone or a group to do something they would probably not otherwise do, which commonly in management and business seeks to achieve the acceptance of a proposition or other sort of change.
When change has to be ‘sold’ to people, it’s normally because whoever is doing the selling suspects that people might not willingly accept the situation where it to more openly and objectively explained.
Persuasion can produce mutually positive outcomes in some situations – especially if the people being persuaded are comfortable and open to the approach – but persuasion which amounts to ‘selling’ change is often not helpful or constructive for those being persuaded, and may not actually produce a good outcome for the persuader either.
This particular effect is very significant within the Psychological Contract.
‘Selling’ change – especially unfairly or strongly – tends to produce a negative outcome for everyone.
This is a simple way to decide usually what is fair and what is unfair when ‘selling’ or persuading others to agree to or accept change:
Motivating and encouraging people to apply a positive constructive approach to achieving or handling properly explained challenges are generally a good thing.
Distorting the challenge or situation so that it is made to look acceptable or even advantageous is not.
Both of the above could be described as persuasion, but they are quite different approaches. Where there is a sense that change has to be ‘sold’ to people, it’s a sign that that the approach is probably not fair and could produce problems later.
For those preferring a more tangible perspective than fairness, we could substitute the notion of risk, or risk avoidance:
Methods of communicating change which involve distortion of deceit carry greater risk of conflict and negative outcomes than methods which explain the situation clearly, while offering motivation, support and encouragement, etc.
People need to know what lies ahead, and to be consulted and supported in dealing with it.
Leaders have a duty to give proper information and explanation to their followers. Leaders neglect a fundamental responsibility where they deceive people or distort facts, in the hope that people will somehow absorb the problem when it looms larger than promised, or worse where a leader takes the view that people have no right to know or to complain.
I’m not advocating negative thinking in assessing and communicating change. I’m advocating objectivity and honesty. People don’t like nasty surprises and they don’t like dishonesty, especially when it stems from authority trying to reduce resistance to change or to avoid obligations arising.
This is an important aspect of change management and of relationships generally, and because it involves trust at a deep level, it is very relevant to the Psychological Contract.
Usually where change is ‘sold’ to people the Psychological Contract is damaged.
Employers tend to minimize or ‘spin’ the negative effects of change. Doing so (initially) makes the change easier and quicker to manage, and reduces the difficulties for the leader, so in this respect it’s perhaps a natural human tendency, as well as a common organizational behavior. The short term appeal of glossing over or otherwise distorting hard facts often encourages leaders to neglect deeper discussion and debate where it might be warranted.
‘Selling’ change is usually a short-term gain, with a long-term cost, plus interest.
Employees may be fooled initially when a leader ‘sells’ them a change without properly and honestly explaining its implications. They may even be enthused by the change. This all turns very bad indeed however when a change, ‘sold’ on a false premise, turns out to be worse than first presented. Employees feel bad because of the new unpleasant situation, but they feel even worse because they can now see they’ve been deceived, or fooled or conned.
Also, where change is ‘sold’ to people using strong persuasion or distortion or omission, they naturally struggle to cope as well as they might have done if they’d been given a fair chance to prepare.
Many changes are difficult and cannot be avoided of course. Always though, it is best to be open and honest with people. This gives people time to absorb and react. They feel good because they’ve been trusted and treated as adults, not children. They may even come up with helpful ideas and suggestions – they often do – which the leadership might not remotely have imagined possible. Most importantly by being open and honest with people – preferably involving them at the earliest possible stage – the essential relationship and trust within the Psychological Contract can be protected far more easily.
Empathy and the psychological contract
Empathy is the ability or process used in understanding the other person’s situation and feelings.
We normally characterize empathy as the behavior of a single person, but in the Psychological Contract empathy must be an organizational capability – a cultural norm and expectation of leaders and managers in their dealings with people.
Empathy is crucial to trust, cooperation and openness, and it’s also crucial to mutual understanding. All of these elements are significant within the Psychological Contract, so empathy is too.
The nature of empathy is that people can see if it exists or not. Where it does not, building trust and cooperation is very difficult.
Where an employer lacks empathy, employees naturally are less inclined to trust and cooperate. A ‘vicious circle’ begins.
The nature of many organizations, and a traditional view of management, commonly puts the employees at the bottom of the management hierarchy. It’s partly human nature, perhaps reinforced by experiences of authority in childhood and schooling. It’s also the way that authority has been for thousands of years.

Having raised the point I should add that it might not always be like this. The world is changing in some very interesting ways. We are beginning to see authority in various contexts shifting back to followers, and separately due to similar forces (notably technological and connective empowerment of people), certain types of authorities are beginning to see and describe themselves as servants rather than leaders.
That said, authority in most businesses and organizations will continue for some while to see itself at the top of the pile.
The underlying attitude of this sort of authority tends to impose its views and to project its interpretations onto the people who are subject to the authority.
This attitude is very unhelpful for modern work and management, and especially for the Psychological Contract.
Where leadership has this attitude, it cascades down through management. This is a big obstacle to improving the quality of the Psychological Contract, because it is an obstacle to empathy.
Empathy is lacking where authority fails to truly understand and recognize the feelings, needs, views, etc., of its followers/employees.
Achieving a fair balanced Psychological Contract requires that important factors are understood, and seen to be understood. The more an employer demonstrates broad awareness of the employee situation, the more likely it becomes that mutual agreement – and a healthy Psychological Contract – can be established and maintained.
Many employers, especially businesses, accepted a generation ago that empathy is vital when dealing with customers – to build trust, and to know what customers truly feel, think and need. Businesses realize that customers’ needs change according to changes in the market and the wider world, and that these needs can be very complex and dynamic. They need to be understood by using empathy and building trust, and appropriate responses provided, or the relationship between supplier and customer is broken or lost altogether.
The analogy is significant.
Progressive employers are realizing that exactly the same principles apply to the Psychological Contract with employees.
II. Virtuous circles and vicious circles
When an employee feels bad, he/she tends to look for someone to blame.
We all behave like this at times, especially when our emotional reserves and self-image are low. When an employee looks for someone to blame he/she tends to put the employer high on the list. The perception of the employer worsens. The Psychological Contract stinks mostly because the employee feels bad.
Conversely, when an employee feels good and the self-image is strong, he/she tends to see the employer more positively. “I like my work (and my boss) because I feel good…” The Psychological Contract now smells of roses.
This is not new. This sort of loopy effect has always existed. It’s unavoidable within any proper appreciation of the Psychological Contract. These loops are not conventionally measurable, but they do exist and can be very significant.
Within the Psychological Contract many perceptions become an important part of the reality.
A traditional X-Theory employer/leader might dismiss employee perceptions as not being real or relevant.
The traditional autocratic view is “…To run a corporation we must deal in reality and not worry about perceptions…”
However if the workforce believes (perceives) that the leadership is being heavy-handed, or greedy, or neglectful, or unethical, then this is the reality which the leadership needs to address, because such perceptions have a huge effect on the Psychological Contract.
Perceptions are part of the reality and dismissing them doesn’t make them disappear.
We cannot manage every conceivable element in the Psychological Contract, especially when we try to imagine the detailed personal needs of large numbers of employees within a big organization.
I. Happily employees do not normally demand such attention to detail, provided they are satisfied that their major needs of trust and fairness are met. Beyond a certain level of consultation and involvement, employees are generally accepting of decision-making by leaders.
II. Employees have their own jobs to do and (ideally) enjoy doing them; many do not aspire to be leaders themselves, or to do the work of a leader, and so are happy to assume that leaders are making good decisions in good faith – particularly if, again, essential elements of trust and fairness are seen to exist.
III. What is it then within the Psychological Contract that sometimes causes relatively small factors to be big problems in some situations, but not in others?
An explanation can be seen in the ‘virtuous circles’ – or ‘vicious circles’ – that operate within the model.
IV. Helpfully – for employers who have a positive approach to the Psychological Contract – people’s needs at work tend to reduce and simplify when the Psychological Contract is healthy. We see a ‘virtuous circle’ operating.
V. When people are happy at work they are more emotionally positive, resilient and flexible. These attitudes make it easier for people to adapt to and accept change, and to tolerate and be flexible in response to unexpected demands or irritations.
VI. This is true in life generally, not just in work. To handle change – or any potentially negative effect – we need strong emotional reserves.
VII. When people are happy and emotionally strong at work they are more likely to assist in the change process.
VIII. This is extremely useful in big organizations, where change is usually ever-present and ongoing.
IX. This ‘virtuous circle’ makes managing organizational change much easier, and it means that employees are less likely to react in a big negative way to a relatively minor incident or anomaly within the overall Psychological Contract.
X. Emotionally positive people tend to be resilient and flexible. They also tend to rationalize (explain to themselves and others) events in a positive way, even events that in other circumstances might be regarded as potentially threatening.
XI. Positive attitude, mood, and frame of mind are very powerful in turning perceptions and opinions into helpful realities.
XII. It is human nature for happy satisfied people to see the bright side of things, just as it is human nature for unhappy dissatisfied people to see the negative and to fear the worst.
WE shall now enter the world of Emotions which is now going to be described as part of the body-mind-spirit as the emotional body which deals with the nervous system responses.
Negative Emotions
We are now sharing that becoming awake and aware of who we are, why we are here, and what we are here to do relieves us of more anxiety and stress whether self-induced or obtained by what we think are outside stressors as the source of our negative emotions.
Negative emotion is a very powerful driver of employees’ unhelpful needs and dependencies at work. Unhappy workers find plenty to be dissatisfied about; they demand more support and help; they need more managing; they feel worse about themselves, their work, their boss, their employer, their pay, and life as a whole.
They also moan to colleagues, who will often moan back, and reinforce negative feelings. And so, unhappy employees are emotionally not able to be very tolerant or flexible when their employer needs them to be, which makes managing the Psychological Contract much more difficult. In terms of change management this can be disastrous to organizational performance, and in terms of the Psychological Contract, it stinks, because that’s how the employees feel about it. This is a ‘vicious circle’.
Try motivating people and providing brilliant service to your customers in that situation. It’s not easy.
Sadly and typically the vicious circle accelerates if managers and leaders then retaliate or exhibit negative emotions towards employees.
We see this commonly in publicized industrial disputes, and you might be imagining now as you are reading this the sort of leaders and organizations who perform so incompetently in such situations. Temper tantrums and bullying regrettably enable many poor leaders to advance way beyond their true level of ability (see the Peter Principle, which partly explains how).
The behavior is not very sustainable however.
Transactional Analysis methodology is very useful in understanding aggressive confrontational leadership, and potentially also in rehabilitating leaders so afflicted, if they can be persuaded to attend therapy…
Openness of communications
Openness of communications is crucial to within the Psychological Contract and to ‘virtuous and vicious circles’.
Open communications in an organization become ‘virtuous circles’. Closed communications become ‘vicious circles’.
Leadership generally determines and controls the level of organizational transparency, whereas openness of communications, or lack of, depends on wider issues of culture, processes, management methods and attitudes, etc.
Organizational/leadership transparency is quite simple to achieve where the leadership has a will to do so.
Achieving openness of communications is usually a much bigger and more complex challenge.
Significantly within the Psychological Contract openness is the preparedness of employees to be open and honest about their feelings to their employer, which usually depends on the employer (and its management) being open and honest with the employees.
Openness of communications produces lots of other organizational benefits, but in terms of the Psychological Contract openness crucially influences trust and mutual awareness (between organization and employees, i.e., both sides of the Contract), and through the ‘virtual/vicious circle’ effect openness hugely influences the quality of the Psychological Contract.
Secretive distrustful employees are extremely difficult to manage.
The organization has no real idea of what they want, or what their priorities and concerns are.
The employer may not even realize that a problem exists until it blows up into a major crisis.
Open communications between employer and employees are a strong indicator of a healthy Psychological Contract, and also of a capability to accommodate change.
Open communications enable change to be managed, and problems to be resolved. The characteristic is both cause and effect – a ‘virtuous circle’.
When openness is offered, encouraged and acted upon helpfully by the employer, employees themselves become more open, and also more accepting of change and other challenges.
Mistakes in Business
Closed, secretive communication between employer and employees suggests the opposite – an unhealthy Psychological Contract – and this effect tends also to be self-fuelling – a ‘vicious circle’.
Murphy’s Plough is a helpful and amusing analogy.
This sort of behavior is obviously very obstructive when trying to manage organizational change.
Closed communications inevitably produce ‘blind’ arbitrary leadership decisions and changes from which people feel excluded.
This creates fear and negativity among staff, which closes communications further and increases suspicion, resentment and resistance.
The ‘virtuous circles’ within the Psychological Contract offer a naturally efficient way to build tolerance, flexibility and adaptability and other positive characteristics among employees within the Psychological Contract.
The ‘vicious circles’ aspect reminds us that where a leader fails to foster positive attitudes and communications – or worse, displays distrust, aggression, animosity, etc – this causes employees generally to be less tolerant of anomalies, even small ones, within the Psychological Contract.
I repeat the point that leadership openness and transparency must not extend to leaders unburdening themselves of worries and pressures arising in the responsibility of leadership.
Openness chiefly applies to the flow of honest constructive communications within an organization, especially enabling the building of mutual trust and awareness between leaders/managers and followers (for which the Johari Window is a very relevant and useful model).
External and relative reference factors
There are for each of us many and various shifting external and/or relative reference factors and which influence our judgment as to what is right or fair or reasonable in our lives.
Many external references become internalized or personalized, affecting our ‘frame of reference’ and how we value and compare situations and especially alternative options.
Psychological Contracts depend heavily on relative factors. People cannot think about the Psychological Contract with their employer without reference to external and relative factors.
Adams’ Equity Theory provides a very helpful viewpoint of this.
For example how we perceive our market worth as an employee has a substantial influence on the value that we imagine our employer should place on us:
A person who has secured an alternative job offer at a higher salary than his current employment will tend to expect more from his current employer than a person who has attended a dozen job interviews in the past year and received no job offer.
Here is a different example of how consideration of the psychological contract can greatly depend on external factors:
COMPARISONS
Imagine a banker’s attitude to his employer six months before the 2008 global financial crash.
Employment was buoyant, bonuses were high, performance and stocks were booming. A senior banking employee would tend to feel bullish and confident. He/she would tend to feel that his/her job is safe, and that other jobs elsewhere are available. The market generally favored employees. Largely a good performer could pick and choose where to work.
BUSINESS MENTALITY AFTER 2008 GLOBAL FINANCIAL CRASH – MANMADE BUT REAL ENOUGH
Now contrast that with a time six months after the 2008 global financial crash.
Banking job vacancies were relatively scarce. Redundancies were rife.
Bonuses were slashed (for a while).
Those in work are not so bullish or confident.
It was no longer an employees’ market; it was an employer’s market. The external market had changed, and with it the employee’s perceptions, and reality, as to his/her relative value, and the relative value (and increasingly, security) offered by the employer.
The employee in 2009 had a different interpretation of his/her Psychological Contract – specifically reduced expectations – than the same employee with the same employer before the 2008 crash.
The employee is the same; the employer is the same; the financial and tangible package might be the same (it might even have worsened in terms of bonus and job security), and yet the employee in 2009 almost certainly would view the Psychological Contract as being more acceptable than it was in 2008.
Of course perceptions can go down, as well as up…
The banker scenario is an obvious and extreme example, nevertheless external and relative factors are everywhere in everyone’s view of work, and in life outside work, and these factors are often hidden until we think or ask about them, and many can be very significant in influencing people’s feelings, perceptions and expectations.
Relative factors tend to be very difficult to measure.
Imagining a scientifically balanced formula for just a small set of ‘give and take’ (inputs and rewards) within the Psychological Contract is difficult enough.
The notion of a mathematical model covering every possible exchange, and allowing for external/relative factors, is even more mind-blowing.
We should instead aim to identify, understand and clarify the biggest external relative factors and then react to them fairly and realistically.
Pareto (80/20) analysis methods are useful in assessing the most important factors within a complex series of possibilities.
If we clarify the major confusions, fill the big information gaps, and satisfy people’s major needs, then the remaining smaller incidental or occasional issues – which will be countless in a large workforce – will generally take care of themselves through the ‘virtuous circle’ rule.
Remember that the Psychological Contract is not measurable or manageable in conventional ways.
It needs approaching partly through tangible facts and logic and partly through intuition, trust, and a level of pragmatism too. (I use the word pragmatism here not in its negative sense of rigidity or officiousness, rather in the sense of “dealing with matters according to their practical significance…”, as the OED puts it – which is what the Pareto Principle helps us to do.)
Generational factors
While not necessarily external, generational issues are very interesting relative factors, and often overlooked. This generational model offers a simple and entertaining angle.
Erikson’s Life-Stage Theory offers a different and deeper perspective.
Our frame of reference changes quite markedly as we get older and pass through different life stages.
I am not suggesting that a detailed generational analysis be conducted of every employee’s unique situation in order to arrive at a properly balanced Psychological Contract.
I am suggesting instead that generational issues can be influential factors within employee needs and feelings, and so they need some consideration.
This is obvious in an ageing workforce, or a very young workforce, but it’s also worth consideration where distinctly different generational groups work together.
A practical example is that older people (see Erikson again) are commonly interested in helping younger people – passing on their knowledge, mentoring, for instance. Younger people value this sort of help.
Isn’t it logical then to consider these generational capabilities and needs in the broad thinking about the Psychological Contract?
When considering age be mindful of the laws about ageism and age equality.
Generational factors must not be a basis of discrimination, but they can and should be a basis of understanding people’s deeper needs and capabilities.
The psychological contract – additional and deeper perspectives
You will see many and various definitions of the Psychological Contract. It is a complex concept when examined beyond its most basic principle, and is dynamic when considered in any single situation: it’s not fixed or static – it contains forces and feelings which can fluctuate and be quite chaotic.
The basic principle – that people seek fair treatment at work – is simple.
Complexities and dynamics however come to life as soon as the principle is seen in a practical context; essentially the Psychological Contract is driven by people’s feelings – therefore it’s an effect which cannot be measured or defined in fixed terms like a salary or a timesheet. We might more easily try to define love or fear, or life itself.
As a concept, the Psychological Contract will continue to evolve and change, in both its effects and its definitions.
This complexity and dynamism is not surprising.
The Psychological Contract combines the effects of at least two highly complicated systems:
1. An individual person’s thoughts, and
2. An organization’s behavior towards that person.
Beyond this other complex systems are almost always involved:
The thoughts of fellow employees;
The thoughts and attitudes of leaders
The positions and needs of the organization’s ownership;
The organization’s behavior towards fellow employees;
The organization’s performance and strength (especially the employee perceptions of this);
The market in which the employer operates (again employee perceptions of this);
The wider economy and world in which the employee sees him/herself (again employee perceptions of these factors);
and perhaps most fundamentally of all, the constitutional or corporate structure of the organization concerned (notably the extent of separation/alignment between employees and the organization itself – ownership, purpose, rules, policies, equity, profit, performance, growth, reward, direction, etc – the extent to which the employees are genuine ‘stakeholders’).
Basic descriptions of the Psychological Contract tend to simplify the concept as merely the addition of intangible input/reward factors (such as loyalty and effort/job security and satisfaction) to the traditional tangible pay/hours and other clear measurable mutual obligations found within a conventional contract of employment.
In modern times more advanced and sophisticated views of the Psychological Contract are emerging.
Psychological Contract Employer-Employee Relationships

In a fuller practical sense, the Psychological Contract offers a way to interpret and improve the relationship between employer and employees, with consideration of:
1. Formal written terms or contract of employment – pay, hours, holidays, conditions, duties and responsibilities, etc
2. (Potentially any or all) other aspects of the work – job interest, management, development, satisfaction, advancement, etc
3. What the employee ‘brings to the job’ or ‘puts into the job’ – effort, time, loyalty, innovation, results, etc
4. The employing organization’s performance and situation – market success, financial strength, or lack of (seen as a sort of ‘ability to reward’, or ‘constraint to reward’)
5. The state of the job market and economy (for example, alternative job or career options, availability of replacement staff)
And significantly, often overlooked:
Perceptions and assumptions about all of the above factors, which can be very different for employees and employer, and which especially for employees can be influenced by various things, for example workmates, trade unions, media, social networking and other group dynamics and communications – note: perceptions and assumptions of employers can be heavily influenced also – if unhelpfully so this needs addressing
The employee’s self-image – how he/she sees him/herself – in whatever way is significant to the employee
And, fundamentally influential on the above point and many others – is the employee ‘just an employee’ or does he/she have a deeper interest in the employer organization in terms of ownership, policies and direction?
We can see the Psychological Contract potentially extending to very deep considerations of the employee/employer relationship, especially in business organizations.
This is beyond traditional appreciations of reward and emotional well-being. The Psychological Contract causes us to question the fundamental alignment of employee and employer – specifically in relation to ownership, representational leadership, profit-share, etc – and how this is structured within the constitutional rules and purpose of the organization.
This obviously suggests that the traditional model by which most businesses are run is not necessarily the best organizational structure for achieving a healthy Psychological Contract.
The traditional model is probably fine for people who have no interest in their work beyond quite basic inputs and rewards, but it’s likely to be an inherently and increasingly strained arrangement for employees who want something deeper, and logically for employers too who seek a deep involvement and commitment from their people.
Traditionally, maintaining a healthy Psychological Contract is addressed by balancing employee inputs and rewards.
This exchange typically happens on a constitutional foundation which places employees clearly and firmly outside of the ownership and the strategic leadership of the organization. In many situations, notably ‘X-Theory’ business corporations, this exclusion encourages and enables real and/or perceived vulnerability, disadvantage, unfairness, etc.
The employee may (and generally does) feel disengaged, and not a real ‘part of the organization’.
Similar disengagement may be felt by employees of state organizations by virtue of exclusion from decision-making, especially where decisions undermine service quality.
Where workers are disempowered at the most basic operating level, the Psychological Contract may need attention at a fundamental constitutional level, i.e., the rules and structure of the organization, which can only be changed by its ‘owner’ – the state, or other public authority.
Where an organization’s basic constitution and rules work against people’s core needs, the balancing of employee inputs and rewards almost inevitably becomes a battleground.
Serious ‘vicious circles’ develop, reducing mutual trust and transparency. Crucially, people do not feel aligned with the organization.
They work in spite of the organization, not truly for the organization.
The wasted potential is considerable.
Self-image is a very significant element in people’s assessment of the Psychological Contract. An employee whose self-image is one of a detached remote worker (detached and remote from the ownership and direction of the organization) – a mere ‘hired-hand’ – will inevitably focus his/her thinking strongly on traditional employment expectations: pay, hours, advancement, job quality, etc., (it’s a long list, referenced elsewhere on this page, and see Herzberg’s theory for example).
People treated like ‘hired-hands’ naturally behave like ‘hired-hands’.
An obvious question about the Psychological Contract in the modern world is:
If we change the fundamental relationship between the employee and the employer so that the employee is also an owner of the enterprise (or meaningfully empowered, in the case of state organizations), how does this alter the self-image, and consequentially the Psychological Contract?
We would not be changing (hypothetically) the terms and conditions of work. We instead (hypothetically) would change the relationship between the employee and employer at a far more fundamental level. This alters the self-image dramatically. The employee is now far more engaged and aligned with the organization, because he/she has a deep and meaningful interest in it.
Further points about this:
1. In many situations a similar deep constitutional change could apply to the relationship between a supplier and its customers.
2. The opportunities for such deep alignment of employer/employee is different in state-owned organizations compared to businesses, but the question immediately becomes very relevant where state-owned services are privatized in one way or another, as has been the trend in recent times. Regardless of whether privatization of state-owned services is right or wrong in any particular situation, we can see that where services are privatized it is very damaging to the Psychological Contract for employees and potentially users/customers to be excluded from the ownership arrangements.
3. The actual level of employee/customer ownership in any given situation is a matter of degree. Broadly the greater the extent of shared ownership, then more naturally balanced the Psychological Contract is likely to be.
4. Shared ownership automatically brings with it shared or representational leadership in some form or other, which is another basic exclusion dictated by old-style (paternalistic, X-Theory) organizational structures.
There are proven, long-established examples of employee-owned enterprises, and customer-owned organizations, large and small, which operate very successfully, and in some cases a lot more successfully than traditional business models with detached employees and shareholders.
In such organizations the Psychological Contract is typically and inherently balanced and healthy.
Achieving employee (or customer) involvement at this depth is not easy for large well established business corporations, especially if the existing ownership and/or financing of the corporation are very inflexible.
However there is no guarantee that any particular business model will last forever. Certain corporations in certain industries could find it increasingly difficult to compete in their markets against employee-ownership, and customer-ownership models. Internet technology challenges some of our most basic assumptions about the ways that business is structured.
For example, are services like banking, insurance, broadcasting, news, and retailing, necessarily most effectively and competitively provided via a big corporation with shareholder expectations?
Wonder about Questions
A. The Psychological Contract may initially have caused us to ask the questions, but the changing world, and especially the increasing connectivity and empowerment of people, will ultimately shape the answers.
Contracting in transactional analysis – related to the psychological contract
As mentioned previously, the concept of ‘psychological contracting’ offers much potential for understanding and improving relationships outside of the traditional employer/employee context.
There is not yet a wide appreciation of ‘psychological contracts’ and ‘contracting’ in society and human behavior outside of employee/employer relationships. There should be.
A specialized exception and example is the term ‘contracting’ within Transactional Analysis and specifically described within modern TA theory.
Here next, in summary, is how ‘contracting’ is regarded in Transactional Analysis. It’s not the same as the Psychological Contract in employment, but certain governing principles are very similar.
These principles are very helpful in understanding the Psychological Contract as it applies in employment, especially in human relationships and communications. This is because:
1. In Transactional Analysis ‘contracting’ is seen as crucial in working relationships (typically between a therapist and a patient), and
2. Importantly in Transactional Analysis – as it should be in employment – ‘contracting’ seeks to be transparent, open, and clearly agreed between both sides.
Eric Berne (1910-70), the founder of Transactional Analysis, very elegantly described a ‘contract’ (which for these purposes we could call a ‘psychological contract’) as “… an explicit bilateral commitment to a well-defined course of action…”
In his 1967 book about TA, I’m OK – You’re OK, Thomas Harris says of the ‘contract’ in Transactional Analysis: “…We use the word ‘contract’ as a statement of mutual expectations…”
This recognizes that clarity of mutual expectations is vital for a good working relationship.
Eric Berne’s quote is cited by Ian Stewart and Vann Joines, in their 1987 book TA Today. Stewart and Joines significantly explain also that: “… in any relationship, the parties may exchange ulterior [hidden] messages. This is especially true where personal or organizational change is being sought…”
Stewart and Joines are referring here to the use of Transactional Analysis as a therapy or counselling methodology, but they might just as well be referring to modern organized work and employee management.
Stewart and Joines continue: “… such changes usually mean a challenge to someone’s frame of reference. Both practitioner [therapist] and client [patient] are likely to come into their working relationship with a covert agenda… One important function of a contract is to make the covert agenda explicit…”
Equate ‘therapist’ to an employer, and ‘patient’ to an employee or workforce.
In Transactional Analysis it is recognized that a good working relationship cannot exist without the therapist giving proper consideration to the patient’s ‘frame of reference’.
This equates to an employer giving proper consideration to the employee’s frame of reference. Frame of reference here refers to the way someone sees themselves, and their life and world, including their work and employer.
When employees criticize managers and directors for ‘being in another world’, or ‘sitting in their ivory towers’ this is usually a strong indication that that organizational leaders are not giving and showing proper consideration for the employee’s ‘frame of reference’.
In Transactional Analysis, just as in work organizations, failing to consider someone’s ‘frame of reference’ tends to ensure that it is impossible to achieve a good working relationship.
The second key point in the Stewart-Joines quote is the reference to making the covert agenda explicit.
In other words, both sides must be transparent about what they want and how they are thinking.
This is difficult in TA, and a lot more challenging in organisations, nevertheless, the likelihood of problems arising in the Psychological Contract increases with lack of transparency.
Covert agendas – hidden or unknown motives and needs on both sides – in Transactional Analysis therapy and in organized work tend to produce conflicts, misunderstandings, and mistrust, which all obviously undermine good working relationships.
Seeing this point more positively: transparency, openness, and exposure all foster trust, which in turn enables further transparency and clarity. Clarity is the basis of mutual understanding, which is the only viable foundation on which a strong Psychological Contract can be built.
The psychological contract – tool, process, working model?
Unfortunately the Psychological Contract is not yet a scientific tool or a process.
Given the growing power of technology – notably in gathering and interpreting highly complex data, in real time, across large groups of people – perhaps a feasible tool will be developed one day, but not for a while.
The dynamics and details of any substantial analysis of the Contract in an organizational context are too many and chaotic for scientific interpretation to be viable or practical.
Aside from this there are always big difficulties in resolving self-perpetuating loop effects like the virtuous and vicious circles which feature strongly in the Contract.
Additionally, as ever, measuring feelings and attitudes represents a further big obstacle to developing the concept onto a process or system.
Certain vast systemic activities, such as managing a nation’s finances, or regulating a stock market, can just about be translated into a series of mathematical processes, but the Psychological Contract presents deeper complexities.
I have said already that successful management of the Psychological Contract is more of a philosophy than a process or tool, and it is in this spirit that it is best managed.
The Psychological Contract can be seen as a working model in the sense that it provides a guiding philosophy – essentially which of fairness – to the use of various organizational tools and processes, notably in human resources management, many of which are explained elsewhere on this website.
Fairness is fascinating – it is both a leadership driver (for leaders who decide so), and also a positive outcome and perception within the Psychological Contract.
The perception of fairness within the Psychological Contract is influenced by many factors, as we have seen.
There is nevertheless a fundamental and unavoidable correlation between perceived fairness and the organization’s balancing of the needs of:
1. Customers
2. Staff
3. And shareholders.
Some organizations have flexibility and inclination to address the balance of these needs. Others have neither.
Naturally where the balance is set strongly in favor of shareholders, employees are less likely to perceive great fairness in the Psychological Contract. This has been largely the traditional shape of employment organizations and businesses since work itself became organized.
The Psychological Contract increasingly causes us to ask a big question
Are there better ways to organize work, and especially business?
Refer to fundamental organization – structural, constitutional, regulatory, etc – deeper than organizational management.
Every organization can improve its relationship with its people, if its leadership has the will to do so, because so much of the relationship depends on simple trust, honesty and humanity, which by any normal reckoning cost absolutely nothing.
More progressive organizational structures, in which the responsibilities and rewards of ownership and leadership are shared with employees, potentially customers too, face much easier and simpler challenges in developing and keeping a healthy Psychological Contract.
We can apply the theory and thinking about the Psychological Contract in a potentially far-reaching way:
1. To guide the way processes are used for fact-finding, analysis and people-management (appraisals, staff surveys, job grading, pay plans, training and development, etc)
2. To increase the use fairness as a chief leadership driver, along with related qualities like honesty, objectivity, humanity, and integrity
3. And, where possible, to question and seek to improve the fundamental structure and purpose of the organization
The Psychological Contract offers insight and inspiration to explore and improve the very structure of businesses and other employment organizations.
Many existing conventional corporations are of course stuck with the model they have, for one reason or another, typically because the finances are too entrenched to unpick and re-structure, and/or because owners and leaders simply do not agree that there could be a better, fairer, way. Time will tell.
Newer businesses and businesses yet to be formed have a great deal more flexibility, and can consider different ways of structuring – such as mutuals, cooperatives and partnerships – which are founded on fairer principles, and for which the Psychological Contract is largely self-balancing.
The constitution of any enterprise or activity (its rules of formation, ownership and purpose, etc) is conceivably the major influence upon fairness of the organization, and since fairness is at the heart of the Psychological Contract, addressing the constitution is for some situations the surest way to develop a Psychological Contract that is naturally balanced and healthy, and also likely to sustain itself with minimal intervention.
Summary – The Psychological Contract

1. The Psychological Contract is fascinating for many reasons because it offers so many different perspectives.
2. it’s not a tool or a process. The Psychological Contract is a model and a philosophy which can guide us in the way we structure and manage organizations, and deal with employees within them.
3. At a basic level it helps us understand more about the ‘give and take’ that characterizes working for an organization, and particularly leading an organization.
4. It is very useful in understanding why employees are ‘difficult to motivate’, or ‘difficult to manage’ – especially when this is an ongoing or widespread challenge.
5. The Psychological Contract helps leaders understand better how to align their people’s needs with those of the organization, which is a very elusive notion.
6. The concept also offers a powerful way to expand thinking and possibilities for people and work, in some distinctly separate and important ways:
A. Individual employee motivation and management
B. Motivation and management of workgroups and departments
C. Entire workforce motivation and management
D. Review of grading, management hierarchy, and succession
E. Recruitment and selection and induction
F. Training and development
G. Assessment of leadership – vision, style, capability
H. Assessment of traditional workplace terms and conditions, contracts, etc
I. Organizational communications
J. Organizational philosophy and culture
K. Fundamental organizational purpose, constitutional rules and ownership
New business purpose and legal structure
L. Markets and societies – types of organizations that will work best in the future
At a deeper level the Psychological Contract questions the significance of fairness in the way organizations are run and established.
There is no single right way

There are ways which are bound to fail, because in essence they become uncompetitive.
The world changes, and as it does, work and business changes too.
From the tone of this article, and the website surrounding it, you may gather that I am not a great fan of old-style business and management.
It seems to make an awful lot of money for a very few people, and provide a relatively unhappy and unfulfilled working life for a big proportion of everyone else.
Most people still live for the weekends and their annual holidays; many hate their work and are not truly connected to or aligned with their employer, which often is a bigger problem for the employer than it is to the staff.
Meanwhile many big businesses are making a mess of the world in all sorts of ways, because profits come first.
All the indications seem to be that there are better ways to do things.
The Psychological Contract gives us a guide to the answers.

There are fascinating connections between the Psychological Contract and other behavioral models, many of which feature on this website, for example:
I. Johari Window – a powerful model for mutual understanding and awareness, central to the Psychological Contract
II. Adams Equity Theory – a helpful perspective for appreciation of relative factors within the Psychological Contract
III. General motivational theory – and specific models such as those of Maslow, Herzberg, McGregor
IV. Transactional Analysis theory – within which the notion of ‘contracting’ is fundamental, and also extremely illuminating when applied beyond TA to workplace relationships and societal behavior – specifically described within modern TA theory
V. Cybernetics – which helps explain how systems behave?
VI. Ad sizes Corporate Life-Cycle Model – which offers a particular angle as to how businesses change over time, which is part of the ‘external’ consideration of a business’s ability to reward its people.
VII. Erikson’s Life-Stage/Psychosocial Theory – which helps explain generational factors which can be influential?
VIII. The Psychological Contract is also strongly connected to, and useful for understanding, stress and stress management, and the broader strategic approach to these issues through the protection and development of workplace well-being.
Share and research topics:

• Related materials
• Adams’ equity theory
• Adzes corporate life-cycle theory
• Change management
• Emotional intelligence (EQ)
• Erikson’s life-stage theory
• Herzberg’s motivational theory
• Johari window model and free diagrams
• Leadership tips
• Love and spirituality at work
• Maslow’s hierarchy of needs
• McGregor’s xy theory
• Personality theories, models and types
• Stress and stress management
• Transactional analysis
• Workplace well-being
• See main subjects index for more materials, ideas and resources.
• Home » leadership/management » psychological contracts theory
We who have come from the future to share the past will remedy that which has been taken to heart as the prior truth and yet was disguised and mislead many souls down pathways that could have been avoided. It is with great blessings that we are afforded our guides, sages, seers, teachers, and are allowed to be students of learning of the ancient mystery schools and ancient paths, which can guide us back to the power in our spiritual magick that allows us to become as the immortals, who created the entire omniverse.
We can then begin sharing how one can obtain the portals in time to go from one into the other as immortals once passing from the only awareness that many now allow themselves in time.
There will be those who shall assist us in adapting to the seven areas of this macrocosm awareness, which will, exists among our ancient ancestors and will return now as it was once written and shared among those of the oral and written tradition of the seven levels and seven heavens of our ancient alien ancestors.

Part 2
Common Cosmology Energy of Essence Exploration

The future emphasis of space time and the God Particle are of particular interest now in this day and time on earth. We should also pay close attention to the levels listed below, along with the dimensions and realms. We now share 7 levels and 12 dimensions but added to our own point of origin we use 13 in the metaphysical world.
1. Universe
2. Multiverse
3. Metaverse
4. Xenoverse
5. Omniverse
6. Alphaverse
7. Omegaverse
We share twelve (12) Dimensions in what we call parallel Omniverses as we now know there are many Omniverses but for the minds of our present humanoid species it is well we categorize the present state of mind as one entire Omniverse.
We have realms which are overlays in time that are separate from dimensions and are different from impaired recognition.
In various ways that exist in time as to how we think while on earth, we use what we now call timelines from the beginning which we call birth, through the middle we share as worthy of using the vehicle as body-mind-spirit, to the recorded end of our time on earth.
We share that we are here to explore, and witness while we learn about knowledge as wisdom which is knowing. This is said to be the divine plan of those who in the beginning co-created us from the story listed in this book. The Ascension Age is part of the entire spectrum across the eons of what we call time. A body in motion tends to stay in motion and a body that is at rest tends to stay at rest and we call this particles and waves in motion that increase the entire macrocosm.
The expansion of our minds is in the process of allowing our thoughts to expand based on what we all can generate in our own languages and understanding in words that work for us in what we call wrapping our minds around that which we presently do not yet absorb as knowledge which will someday assimilate into wisdom and knowing for the entire humanoid intelligent being species which is at present now contained on the planet we call earth. Let it suffice to say that we use many numbers from 1-9 and also 1 and 0 and now use this as our basic as in the 10 which we incorporate into our present belief system with numbers and symbols.
Our ancient alien ancestors did what they could to take what they saw among the visiting aliens of the past and would put what they could use in their own words and way of thinking into a form of writing of that which is linked to the Sumerian cultural writing although there were many ancient ways to write prior to the Sumerian and some was kept over from the ancient of days on planet earth known as YU, MU, and Atlantis. We will now allow ourselves to co-create a new constitution that allows for the New Atlantis that will still have various continental constitutions among those who we consider those who will be now social conscious and participate as citizens of the constitution of the people, by the people, and for the people around the world.
We are now in the process of incorporating what we shall discuss as the Global Tectonic Economics based on the former knowledge that information we presently believe as the “ALL” is just the tip of the proverbial “Iceberg”. We now have figured that based on the ancient written texts of the former higher levels built with waters that were above us and separated to the below that there were waters that dropped down onto the earth that was once a water world above this one. The dolphins were once in their own ethereal realm above earth which also had two moons or so it is a part of our deepest psyche.
We who are building upon the future welcome those who came before and who will rise again in their spiritual ethereal essence and power to discern who are the good spirits that were born of those whom we call the deities of the alpha males and omega females who designed all the many Omniverses as was born from the original one or the 1 from the 0 in the beginning and the future was the beginning which we now know we have been moving away from the whole time on what we call a timeline as moving further away from the original source. We know of the God Code and the God Particle which will both come to allow us to accept there is more in the hierarchy of the evolution of the making of this co-creation which we now know we need both terms we call science and religion which both are co-created from our own minds as the original philosophy of our own humanoid kind as one species. We now know that we have ancestors who come and go from this point and this place we once thought was not visited as our ancestors over time began to forget about those whom they registered as “Those who from the Heavens Came”.
It is now our position as to derive our truth from all that matters not only from that which we can prove in the empirical order of what is of material world we can discover in this three dimensional world but we now will affirm that the infirmity is superior to our own intelligence as an individual but as a collective we can all share in obtaining our own level of knowing and wisdom of the two or more present in us all as touching the Akashic Field as the Theory of Everything we shall learn to adjust too in the future as the critical mass mind included in the macrocosm of the overall brain for all.
We are truly in the beginning of the new age of cosmology that some have learned to trust as the Golden Age of Enlightenment which is also known as the Ascension Age. We as our adaptation to our ancient words of wisdom accept that December 21, 2012 marks a date in time when one door closes in time and a new door opens. This is what we will now share as the new beginning as our species learns to graduate to the next level of taking care of our own humanoid sentient intelligent being species and our planet and environment.
You each are invited to allow your own minds to adapt and overcome change as we all accept that we can achieve alien contact separately and together. The information that we allow ourselves as beginning the new opening of our minds in the Ascension Age will allow us to do more, be more, have more, and see more from a totally new perspective. This is the new beginning for those who join us in co-creating the New Atlantis on earth. We will learn from our mistakes with all of those who are here to enjoin us and befriend us of whom we address as the Supreme High Counsel for those who desire to share in the Galaxy Federation among various groups that their spirits believe come from their original home worlds as their true essence of what we now address as their own memory banks as reincarnated spirits which are connected to their twin flame super conscious minds.
LUCID DREAM STATE – The Other Dimension

We of the old traditions, who enjoy the wisdom of the ancient past, and who celebrate the present, will learn to prepare the future generations to come to earth with the written words as the power in knowledge used and not only the wisdom of our ancient ancestors. We can learn while we dream in the other dimension some call the 13th dimension and time here is the 12th reality or dimension.
We who are the scribes of the future share in the blessings and energies that are inspired by all the great ones of the immortals. It is with great fortitude and the breath of life that we are allowed to be here and to know of each other’s whereabouts on this planet. I have been allowed to see outside the Omniverse while visiting in the future by way of Sirius and Andromeda in what we now call lucid dreams. I am wondering if you also learn from lucid dreams. I wonder how many of our colleagues are taught in their dream state with a direct connection to their own creators.
The future must begin sharing that all beings be prepared to share in taking on the world class of all those who are poverty-stricken. This means that to remain as spiritual powers of the enigma of souls we will have to become recognized as part of the ancient powers that were to be heralded into the new information age as the Ascension Age 2012 & beyond.
Please join us who are the Lightworkers and Truthseekers. We shall fulfill the prophecies of the ancients with the seven rings of awareness of the space with the future in the various levels and ages. The ancients share that which we shall govern in our future. Please assist me in sharing the various levels as those of ancient Atlantis as the universe, multiverse (polyverse), metaverse, xenoverse, omniverse, Alphaverse, and Omegaverse…
I am now allowed since the date of April 22, 2012 we all know as Earth Day to reveal to others of my higher calling and election made sure for the benefit of others who have a need to know to become awakened and aware of the Ascension Age on the planet Gaia we call earth.
The reason that we had to wait until Earth Day Conscious Awareness day in 2012 is because there is a “DIVINE PLAN” and everything on earth has a time and reason for all seasons and all things.
I am doing what I can to make the hierarchy of the way that our Omniverse is structured. We are all living in levels, realms, dimensions and we all are to learn about those who we call God and Goddess as those who are various levels of beings we call extraterrestrials and celestial beings. The highest form that has evolved inside this particular macrocosm we call Supreme Beings and their job is to bring order to chaos. In other words in the beginning before there was anything known to be considered outside of the beginning there was the first we call the alpha and the second was the omega and we all each are conceived from the first as alpha and the second as omega inside the third which is the place in space we know as the third or Omni.
All of this has been called the beginning and we say “In the beginning was the word and the word was without form. What this means is that in the original conceived energy as essence there was the first awakening awareness of self as one. Then the second this awareness was conscious the second was created to become that which is awakened awareness of the first which is the mirror image with a twist of fate that created the equal and opposite of all that is like the dark and light, up and down, positive and negative, inner and outer.
When I train children as infants as my star babies I teach them about being in the beginning and they had no form and they came from their first alpha father male and first omega mother female into that which is the outside macrocosm from that which was created by both the originals who give us our soul.
The soul is the key to our essence as what is our actual conceived light body in the darkness of space we call chaos. It is the light inside the dark that allows us to know we are someone in the somewhere. We then have those who were created as the children of this chaos of both the light and dark in what we call the balance of chaos and this is called the order. The order came in the beginning after the first Alphaverse and Omegaverse inside the chaos in order to bring about the place as space for the dark and light to become awake and aware of the beginning.
The new place in space that the light and dark are created.

We have the 0 or womb of the all and the beginning and we add the 1 and 2 which creates the 3. We say in the beginning 0 was the word and the word was without form. We say that because we had to have the original Aha of that which was not in order to have that which was the beginning. We believe in the divine creation of the soul. The soul came into being from the all or nothing of the word of awakened awareness of the original soul self which makes up all the first souls that were created form that was given to become the beginning before the word and world was and before the omniverse was.
The Omniverse is the BIG O or the ONE. From the Original O was the original Alpha and Omega. From the nothing of which we know that nothing existed came what we consider the first original soul that when it was first aware over self it had to have an outer for the inner to step outside of the original soul.
That is how we have the inner soul and the outer self which is called the essence which makes up the spirit in all things. Therefore we are all created from an alpha male, and an omega female which joins energy essence to create a third inside the womb which comes to life in the outer chaos and order of the fourth. We need to have our understanding of our creation now while we are called humanoid co-creators of other divine spirits as essence that come to this place.
We are older souls that share our spirits in a form we call our unit vessels which is in the likeness of our original prototypes as the first models. We have souls that were the original first prototype and no two of us are exactly alike for a reason that only our original soul co-creators know.
The fact that we are now awakened to the fact that the veil of the all which is that which separates the chaos from the order as the balance is what was also first created to give separation. The intelligence of the fact that we are aware of ourselves is what we are now all sharing in this the new age or what is to be called the Ascension Age of the Ancient Alien Astronauts who from the heavens came who came before as the Ancient Ones sent to this planet by those above them who are older and wiser in the hierarchy of the sea of souls.
This is a very long and drawn out story over what we call time. Time is of the Essence. Time was created by the first Essence that was like what we call the Angel Hair from the first God Alpha and the first Goddess Omega that streamed together and what we now know was created to become the energy in order to become outside of both their own conscious awakened awareness of their own divine souls.
We have been taught this story by our ancient ancestors who left clues in imprints on our planet and in our psyches which is now our critical mass consciousness. We can see some of this in the artistic creations of the work in the word. In the beginning was the word and the word was without form and therefore our balance of all that is maintained as order inside the chaos.
There are many words in the work I share that I can now use but being that I am only one of the original soul creations by our divine plan of the original Supreme Beings we know as the God and Goddess this makes me a deity. We are all alien ET in one form or another and for the sake of work in words we call me as one outside of all others that has the awakened awareness responsibility as an older soul to share the work and words for my younger soul brothers and sisters. This is to be in the place we call the space of the Ascension Age. This is about as far as I can explain what I am doing here on this planet as what some call an Alien ET Hybrid or in spiritual work and words an Avatar Ascension Master Mentor as TJ.
I am one of the first meaning oldest essences to be given a soul and I am not only an old soul but am one of the first angels or aliens that came from space or what we know has heaven in the cosmos who has all the ancient alien ancestors memories recorded or imprinted inside my own soul in this life as DNA. The fact that we were all given the right to be separate and have our own soul inside the essence of our being becomes the spirit or the traveler in time and space. This gives us our setting about our business in the astral plane so we can become awakened and aware of our own soul self to become awakened and aware of all our outside experiences when we are aware we are somewhat, somewhere, and someplace outside of our own original soul which at this time we call quantum entanglement.
Our original soul is part of the original divine plane and the older original souls have come up with energy as essence that the original one and two which made the three in the four have agreed upon to become the five. We then obtain the six, seven, eight, and nine, with the levels and dimensions before we create another as the 0 or another omniverse.
Various levels and Densities
Those who are not in the original soul group are not allowed to venture outside of their own omniverse.

We are taught in metaphysics about the chaos and order in the universe which those who are the Time Lords and Observers work with those who are the Watchers in a way who are assigned to keep order.
We are confronted with the various terms, definitions, categories, and words and work that allow us to maintain that which is needed for us to remain in existence in the universe, multiverse, metaverse, xenoverse, omniverse, Alphaverse, and Omegaverse. This number 7 is based on the prime number 3 which formula is expressed and designed in our own existence in what we have adapted to what we call real knowledge and wisdom so we can talk and communicate.
We use what is different about us and what is similar in this day and time to describe our energy and essence in communication of what we use as our thoughts, names, words, and symbols.
We are not only about our being, doing, and having as co-creators but co-creating memories, and changing over the course of our existence in what we call life on this planet as humanoid sentient intelligent beings.
We are humanoid sentient intelligent beings and are one young species in this entire macrocosm. There are older more intelligent and more experienced of our humanoid sentient intelligent being species.
We can compare who we are as individuals that fit as separate entities as containers who are individual microcosms and we are each unique.
We are all beautiful and complicated and empowered. We by definition are co-created to know what we learn as our own motivation and inspiration as the grand design that exists inside the entire macrocosm that is forever expanding from the inside out. We are about the ever expanding co-creation as the infinity of life we know as immortals which is pure eternal creation from the origin of our beginning we use as 0. When we knew we could create memories we began making plans on how to recognize all that was not only inside but outside. The outside became 1 and then with 0+1 we then co-created 2. The 2 combined made another which became 3. This is not so hard to understand because we can observe it in action on this planet as we co-create together with one female as 0 and a male known as 1. Take the 0 as a magic number for the beginning which is feminine or specifically the first womb of knowing inside and out had the ability to know of the outside which became male as 1. We see the male energy as 1 that entered the 0 female and they together co-created the 2 which then makes a 3 or first triune or three as what we call a family on earth.
TJ of that which we call “TAKEN UP”
Into the clouds as in a UFO not of earth origin
Going about our own Father and Mothers Divine Business!
Ascension Age of Higher Consciousness Awakened Awareness of ET Time Lords
Each humanoid on earth is a sentient intelligent being. Each being is understood to have a unit as its vessel.
This unit vessel is one’s own personal container. We use three divisions on earth for now to describe out main 3 parts of our own selves that we can all relate too that we all share as a common ground conscious awareness.
We all use on this planet as a humanoid what we refer to as the body-mind-spirit. We use the main three divisions and still know we have the emotional ego/id portion of our energy that we can learn to control as that part of us that responds to stimulation from the outside forces usually that we observe and respond to our outside environment including the weather.
The reason we are now sharing that all humanoids as sentient intelligent beings are now to join others of us who are the Avatar Ascension Masters of the Omniverse as the messengers of the Supreme Beings of the Alphaverse and Omegaverse is that it is now time to become awakened and aware of the higher soul self we call the glorious golden twin flame essence that is actually one’s own original soul as this part of each creations beginning.
We who are chosen before we come to earth with a choice in our own freewill of created soul essence in life are considered the older souls. We are taught about the hierarchy in heaven so to speak or in the co-created cosmos. We learn about those who from the heavens came before all those who are now present on earth and we regard them as the first and older humanoids that were created prior to all of us on earth or at least most all the young spirit souls on earth.
There are those who are the oldest and wisest who were in the beginning and we who are allowed to come and go from this level, plane, realm that were some of the first souls created are given various levels in what presently we know of as Time.
Alien ET TJ Spirit Guided Plan “New Atlantis” Project
All of us are now a part of the new beginning of Atlantis. We are the soul heirs to the future in space. We are also the soul airs, if one will allow a simple and fun play on words. We are going to now learn to share the spirit of the times, also known as zeitgeist.
I am going to change the German word from zeitgeist to ET spirit.
Those who desire to assist in the future that want to share in creating the future Atlantis with others in synergy and esprit de corps may join me in a new organization called ET Spirit.Org. (etspirit.org).
We of course still will use the Ascension Center Organization, which is about the shift and uplift of all our spiritual awareness to that of the spirit. These spiritual beings may or may not choose to assist us create the physical location of Atlantis on earth but this is going to be the physical Ascension Center called the New Atlantis project as well.
Now, how this plays out is any bodies guess while I am still alive in physical body-mind-spirit on earth. Everyone has to remember that I am now considered 59 earth years. I was born on December 26, 1951. Yes, I am a day late and a dollar short baby born the day after Christmas. Ask anyone born on that date and they will explain the life and term we all share with that birth date for presents and gifts while on earth being on the normal American family life.
I was given this vision when I was a business entrepreneur in Hawaii in 1990. I had the vision energy but it did not materialize into something I could fathom with my own mind until I died on January 27, 1974. I was allowed to come back to earth as was my baby daughter Ginger Theresa Fay Parrish Bowers who also died. I mean both our hearts had stopped and to all that knew of us both we were clinically dead. I have to participate in watching them cut me open from overhead as spirit. That was different to say the least. That was my first out of body experience or OBE. I had seen ET spirits before or whom I called angels as a child of 7 years when I was in the second grade in about April of 1957 while I attended Mitchell Elementary School in West Monroe, Louisiana. I caught Hepatitis and all the blood in my body was taken out by machine and purified somehow and that helped bring me back somehow. The Spirits I could see the Catholics were very interested in. That is a story I have told but not in detail.
Just please know that I have plenty of spirit both in and out of body and I also can communicate with other ET spirits whether in a physical form or out. I can also see ET UFOS when I am needed. That too is another story. Apparently, I have a lot of explaining to do about my past life and my other past lives that have brought me to this moment in this life and in this time. I am also called a time traveler which most of those who truly take me seriously in the quantum physics scientific world prefer me to use with the work and worlds I frequent versus being an alien TJ ET spirit.
That too is a long story dealing with the past business corporation structures we have created on earth in the last twentieth century. I have to be able to work with the past and the present in order to create the future. It is what President Barrack Obama of the United States called reinventing one’s self and business ventures. I am sure President Obama knows of me since I was so adamant about changing the views of congress on the NASA views of going into space.
Most of the friends of TJ Morris know that I am a mover and shaker social and spiritual entrepreneur. I have a guided spirit that shares a real passion for making this world a better place for all to encounter whole life energy of all body-mind-spirit. This means that we are going to begin sharing how we can all share in our future to make the world a better place for all future spirits.
There are various parts of the plan for Atlantis. The first priority if location, location, location. This is still an important sale point in all parts of the omniverse. May I offer that a major part of what we are building is for all extraterrestrials that are here and will be coming here after December 21, 2012? 11:11. my creators allowed me four (4) beautiful daughters that can assist us when the time comes but for now they are all middle aged raising their children in school in Florida. Therefore, while they are doing their part to make sure they can survive while taking care of my grandchildren, I as woman in business will assist all those who desire to create a franchise business that will be like no other on earth.
How will I do this one might ask? I plan to use my ET Spirit Guides. Belief is a wonderful power on this planet. It was once taught that if one has the belief as small as a mustard seed that one can move mountains. Those of us who are of a spiritual nature are going to test this saying out in our time. That is one of the ancient culture sayings. We are going to say those with ET spirit can make the world a better place by creating the New Atlantis.
This past global catastrophe of 3-11-11 of a major earthquake and tsunami has opened my mind and awareness to more of what the Ascension Center is all about and it is amazing. I always knew something wonderful was going to happen in the future but it had not materialized.
Now, for those who are non-believers, they will be able to participate in the future with those of the ET spirit on earth. For those who desire to make the future a pro-disclosure atmosphere of the governments of the world, we are going to learn about tectonic economics, which is the reason we will use the spiritual energy named “New Atlantis”. That is the name of this project.
I realize that there are many people who have been my readers and fans in the past five years. Some are only made aware of me through UFO Digest and I will always be thankful to my soul group that includes Dirk Vander Ploeg, Robert Morningstar and all my colleagues as fellow writers. I hope that all my ET/UFO Community friends will join me in my new quest to rebuild and restructure Atlantis. This time it is my hope and desire to bring the Etspirit from within to the without for the entire world to behold. Many of the past has tried and that is where the Egyptian pyramids were introduced. They were also used to create the mysticism of humanities imagination, which has worked in this world. In addition, they were first used in the ancient of days to locate the human populations from space. That is another story of the ancient aliens and we are about the future ET spirit. I have had so many spiritual experiences and ET UFO experiences that I lost count. I know that for many who have only seen one UFO that is must have been a wonderful experience. However, for me, I know that they are real and alien civilizations exist and this is just a part of life on earth. I do not have the first epiphany experience that others have anymore. I had mine and had to learn how to live a life as normal while my normal was sharing ET, Spirit Guides, and UFOS. Therefore, my life is one that could and should probably be shared with the global population but they will hear it when it is time. Right now, I want to concentrate on bringing others together that desire to be included in the Ascension Center Organization, the ET Spirit Organization, and the TJ Morris Organization.
Now, there will be many people on earth and especially in the corporate Fortune 500 world that will ask why do I need three organizations. The answer is that each serves a purpose and the triad is one of the most powerful forms one can use on earth. This particular triad will be one that starts with an E, one that starts with an A, and one that starts with a T. Put the three letters together and that spells the word “EAT”.
What does the humanoid species like to do best and do so to survive while on earth? We eat and this is a way to remember all three organizations, Etspirit.org, Ascensioncenter.Org, and TJ Morris.org.
We will find a way to recognize all members. For now, we share social networking and have to create our websites and Facebook pages. We will be planning our marketing and business plans along with our future Ascension Center ET Spirit Space Port.
The project for all three involved at this point is called the “NEW ATLANTIS”. This will also include the quest for all past history that is of the Ancient Mystery Schools and all the antique relics.
We will share in our ACE Folklife with the common folk of the middle class, which deals in art, culture, education, science, and technology. This is the worker bees so to speak on this planet. We all are volunteers and we include our hobbies and most are collectors of some type. IF not of ET UFO information, then of ancient artifacts as in archaeology and some can only afford fine replicas of things. I like the sphinx and I have only two. Now, I plan to build one outside the New Atlantis.
We will create a way to share that which will be promoting a spaceport in the United States of America and then we will franchise out to all other countries that desire to use our proven model by my ET spirit Guides.
At this point, I am recognized as the recipient of the news or inspiration as the creator founder of this project due to every corporation will need a founder as the point of origin or who first received the idea which will spread around the world.
That is how we have learned to share our energy on earth. I have done this before in the past and many people have just been waiting for me to finally get the last piece of the puzzle so that they could participate with me as staff in the Ascension Center, the New Atlantis, the ET Spirit Organization, or the TJ Morris Organization. I hope to see many jobs created and we will support drop shipping for obvious tectonic economic reasons.
The one main goal is to create my ET spirit guided energy into something that people all over the world can recognize as products, services, and will be able to desire a passion for working for this franchise in the future. We of course will use the present global community idea of utilizing corporations with angel backers who will then become stockholders preferred and common.
It is my hope to get all of this far enough along on earth before I die. I will leave my four daughters in charge of four separate corporations as the founder’s heirs. One corporation will be strictly for the family and it will depend on one girl to manage my estate when I die. That daughter will have to manage the money in the trust that I plan on making for our own family to exist. Right now, I only require a tithing or 10% for my consulting fee of what I begin as thought.
When I put this thought into service I require a 15% Management fee. Right now, as far as my books are priced I am given the cost of material and labor but we have to add in shipping cost which is now part of our formula being that we are a global community. So FedEx, UPS, and US Mail are a part of our extended global reach family. Keep in mind if you join our organizations that whatever products and services we create, we will sooner or later set up franchise businesses around the world with our logo and service marks. These in time will develop goodwill. I have been working as long as I can remember. My first paying job on my U.S. social security card was at Dairy Queen in Houston, Texas in 1966. I have been working since 1966 in the United States. That gives me 45 years of experience in the Unites States as either an employee or entrepreneur. I have experience as a President/CEO of both profit and nonprofit corporations. We can do this with positive spirit of encouragement. I will do what I can to maintain my body-mind-spirit while we create this “New Atlantis” project.
I create products, I require the cost of labor and material plus we double the sale price for those who desire to franchise the model we use in business. Then for those who manage all businesses, we require a 40% above the maintained business plan cash flow for unexpected catastrophes to maintain cash flow on earth. My grandchildren may also partake in management and administration if they so desire. It will require interest and energy on their own part in order to succeed. No one will be required to become a part of this spiritual venture if they do not feel guided by their own ET spirit.

Ascension Age – Alphaverse & Omegaverse Cosmos Deities
I would like to introduce that expansion of our minds we may regard as outside of the ALIEN ET BOX. That which we can share as outside of this Omniverse as the ET Creator Deities also known as ALPHA and OMEGA or the Beginning and End.

We have all heard of the seven (7) heavens or have we?
They are here listed:
1. Universe,
2. Multiverse,
3. Metaverse,
4. Xenoverse,
5. Omniverse,
6. Alphaverse,
7. Omegaverse.
ALPHA & OMEGA SYNERGY ENERGY FOR OUR ASCENSION AGE (Golden Age Cosmology)
Thoth-the-Atlantean
Thoth-the-Atlantean (Hermes Trismegistus in His next incarnation) is a Divine Teacher known from the time of ancient Egypt.
The history of His life is described in the Emerald Tablets of Thoth-the-Atlantean, which were discovered by M.Doreal in the pyramids of South America.
In the Tablets Thoth tells about Atlantis — an archipelago consisting of two large islands which existed in the Atlantic Ocean a long time ago, also about the highly developed civilization of the Atlanteans.
The most important point about this civilization is that it possessed a true religious-philosophical knowledge, which allowed many people to advance quickly in their development to the Divine level and accomplish thus their personal human evolution.
In the Emerald Tablets, Thoth-the-Atlantean explains also the reason for the destruction of Atlantis: confidential knowledge was imparted to unworthy people and the latter began using it for evil purposes. They adopted bloody sacrifices — and this resulted in numerous incarnations of hellish beings among people. This led to quick degradation of incarnated people in Atlantis.
When the destruction of Atlantis happened (two islands submerged into the ocean one after another according to the Divine Will), Thoth-the-Atlantean moved to Egypt (Khem) with a group of other Divine Atlanteans.
Thanks to this, the higher spiritual knowledge of Atlantis was brought to Egypt and to other countries.
In the Egyptian mythology, Thoth is worshipped as a God of wisdom and writing, as a patron of sciences, scribes, Holy Scriptures, as a creator of the calendar.
According to Plato, He revealed to the Egyptians counting, geometry, astronomy, and writing.
Apart from The Emerald Tablets of Thoth-The-Atlantean, there is another text by Thoth — the famous Emerald Tablet of Hermes Trismegistus.
Hermes Trismegistus is the name of Thoth in His next incarnation in Egypt.
ACE Folklife is about the “Common Folk” of the world.
We all are experiencing our past, present, future as the IMMORTALS of our SOULS!
Those who I am finding out on earth that are humanoids have large holes in their education about who they are, why there are here, what they are to explore, and what will happen to them when they leave earth.
Therefore, I am inclined to share what was sent to me as inspired thoughts about the ASCENSION CENTER and the symbol. For those who desire to know, the Golden Age of Cosmology is shared with the ACE Folklife common folk of the world.
One may have noticed that the “COMMON FOLK” are those who are in the streets these days uniting for common causes. It is said that there are only 10% classed as the wealthiest in the world while the other 90% is not. Does that mean that there is no middle ground for the middle class?
We share the planet as humanoid sentient intelligent beings and we are all considered one species. Why is it that there has been allowed in the past the corporations with their investors to believe that their CEO should make 550 times that of the common employee? It is not fair and there has to be some changes made in the world of corporate power and greed.
We believe in the social entrepreneurs of the social networks. We also know that it is entrepreneurs of the world that learn to find their passion, go out to create a better world with products and services, find their teams and groups to work on their new projects to be called corporations then go out and find their investors as angels for their investment capital. This is the way it has always been since the world decided to revolve around corporations and then came the stock markets.
Now, we can share the future Ascension Age as the Golden Age of Cosmology and the NEW AGE ACE FOLKLIFE will share our cultural refinements that include the changes to be made in politics and religions.
We are seeing a major change among the common folk all over the world. So, to those who believe in ALIENS and ET one might believe that I am a messenger. I believe I am based on my past life and death experiences in this lifetime and my memories of reincarnation. I share what I can as what is now referred to as a Spiritual Teacher or Spiritual Guide. Some believe that Avatars are reincarnated spirits and I tend to agree.
There are spiritual avatars and internet avatars and in some ways we are similar. Please share this article with those who believe in the Alien ET Ascension Age. Some of us don’t only believe but we know of our existence as those who are to share parts of ourselves. We know that something wonderful is happening and occurring right now today as in the PRESENT!
Remote Viewers and Psychics

We who are called PSYCHICS and REMOTE VIEWERS have all learned to astral travel in a manner of speaking. We can share the various time frames and dimensions we share in space that we call the cosmos. I shall end this with a quote of Carl Sagan’s Cosmos but please take the time to read this article and copy it to your “Hidden Archive Treasure FILES”. (Reason being many files are archived or removed or simply cease to exist in cyberspace.)
We are all “IMMORTAL SOULS” – Ascension Center Organization teachers share the awakened awareness of the continuous process of the expansion of our souls creations. We are eternal essence. Theresa (Tara) J. Thurmond Morris – Founder of Ascension, ET Spirit, TJ
Alien to our own way of thinking is that which we call the God force also known as the God Particle or ET particle in the cosmos. We of the world that are sharing the word “FUTURISTS” as “SEERS” also enjoy knowing that we can use our “Screen of the mind” or our “PSYCHE”.
I have shared a part of me as that which has my signature on what we call creation of cyberspace reality in the cosmos with the Supreme Beings of the Ascension Age. Ascension Center is an inspiration as my contribution to our future Esprit de Corps.
We share our thoughts and creations on earth and welcome all others who desire to link to us and our creations as websites in cyberspace. Virtual reality is one layer of our existence.
It is time we all gravitate toward our other selves as real-time Avatars in Cyberspace in the WEB online. We are all now realizing we are much more than our physical selves. We can create our thoughts into websites and blogs in space that is electronically engineered in cyberspace that we call the Web on the Internet online. Things are changing and so are we.
Please READ the FOLLOWING in its entirety in order to understand more about the PAST-PRESENT-FUTURE of all of us!
That which claims to be both politics and religion is changing in this world and we the people as the common folk are the reason. We can see that the world we live that includes television and the entertainment media is changing along with us.
We have interests and now the Internet is recording our interests and our involvement with our Internet is now being archived not only as common groups with similar interests but as individuals. This is also done in space by those we call “ALIENS” and “ET”.
GET READY FOR THE ASCENSION AGE!
Beyond by Theresa J Thurmond Morris aka TJ

“I am that I AM” is a famous saying. We can all say and know that as the God Particle Energy in each and every one of us. However, can we all agree that there is an outside force that flows inside of us all as that which is also called the “I AM”?
Alpha and Omega in Greek is the same as in English saying A and Z in the literal translation of thought and the way we think and surmise on earth. However, we are now learning to accept the new age we call the “ASCENSION AGE” in which we call our way of knowing and becoming awake and aware of our own “Mortality”. Just as Steven Jobs passed on or died at the young “Baby boomer” age of 56 years, this has left us all confronting our own “Mortality” and “Immortality”.-Let us share one being who made a difference for many of us besides Tim Berard Lee of the computer age– One who has left our present and memory will continue on here on this planet is Steve Jobs. Steve practiced Zen.
We will always be grateful to people who walk to the beat of a different drummer. We of the Cyberspace Internet Generation will share information with others online such as those who assisted us to become better human beings as we share communication with each other. Some people are gifted and we believe chosen to serve others. The manifestation of abundance is simply the outpouring of profit for the health and prosperity of all not just certain people. We do know that certain beings are interested in leaving the world a better place such as Steve Jobs, Apple Entrepreneur inventor spearheading the iPod, iPhone, iPad. Isn’t it ironic that Steve was born with a last name of Jobs?
Born Steven Paul Jobs
February 24, 1955
San Francisco, California, U.S.
Died October 5, 2011 (aged 56)
Palo Alto, California, U.S.
Cause of death Respiratory arrest/pancreatic cancer
Nationality American
Alma mater Reed College (one semester)
Occupation Co-founder, Chairman and CEO, Apple Inc., CEO, Pixar,
Years active 1974–2011
Net worth $7.0 billion (September 2011)
Board member of The Walt Disney Company, Apple Inc.
Religion Buddhism
Spouse Laurene Powell
(1991–2011, his death)
Children 4
Relatives Mona Simpson (sister)
Signature
Steven Paul “Steve” Jobs
(February 24, 1955 – October 5, 2011) Steve Jobs was an American business magnate and inventor. He was co-founder, chairman, and chief executive officer of Apple Inc. Jobs was co-founder and previously served as chief executive of Pixar Animation Studios; he became a member of the board of directors of the Walt Disney Company in 2006, following the acquisition of Pixar by Disney.
In the late 1970s, Jobs – along with Apple co-founder Steve Wozniak, Mike Markkula and others – designed, developed, and marketed one of the first commercially successful lines of personal computers, the Apple II series. In the early 1980s, Jobs was among the first to see the commercial potential of Xerox PARC’s mouse-driven graphical user interface, which led to the creation of the Apple Lisa and, one year later, the Macintosh. After losing a power struggle with the board of directors in 1985, Jobs left Apple and founded next, a computer platform development company specializing in the higher-education and business markets.
In 1986, he acquired the computer graphics division of Lucas film Ltd, which was spun off as Pixar Animation Studios. He was credited in Toy Story (1995) as an executive producer. He remained CEO and majority shareholder at 50.1 percent until its acquisition by The Walt Disney Company in 2006, making Jobs Disney’s largest individual shareholder at seven percent and a member of Disney’s Board of Directors. Apple’s 1996 buyout of NeXT brought Jobs back to the company he co-founded, and he served as its interim CEO from 1997, then becoming permanent CEO from 2000 onwards, spearheading the advent of the iPod, iPhone and iPad. From 2003, he fought an eight-year battle with cancer, and eventually resigned as CEO in August 2011, while on his third medical leave. He was then elected chairman of Apple’s board of directors.
On October 5, 2011, around 3:00 p.m., Jobs died at his home in Palo Alto, California, aged 56, six weeks after resigning as CEO of Apple. A copy of his death certificate indicated respiratory arrest as the immediate cause of death, with “metastatic tumor” as the underlying cause. His occupation was listed as “entrepreneur” in the “high tech” business.
“The Secret Government and the Alien Connection”
(Source: Revelation of Awareness newsletters)
There are countless reports and documents available about this subject.
The lightnet team invites you to study our “Petition of Welcome to the Galactic Federation of Star Nations”
Let´s find some answers to the following questions:
Question:
Who represents the Galactic Federation?
Answer:
The Galactic Federation is made up from Federations of different star systems throughout the galaxy, most being human types. (Pleiadians, Vega, Sirius, Arcturus, Lyrans, Andromeda etc.)
Question;
Who are the other Players in this Galaxy?
Answer:
The other 2 major Players in the Galaxy are: The Reptoid Federation and the Orion Empire.
The Orion Empire is ruled basically by one leader, you can see it presented fictionally in the story of Star Wars. The Reptoid Federation is a conglomeration of many different groups.
The Secret Government promotes The New World Order
The New World Order is part of the alien agenda, promoted by Greys from Orion. The purpose is to set up the world for its future inclusion in the Orion Empire.
The Galactic Federation (includes the Pleiadians, Vegans and Sirius, etc), they are concerned that the earth becomes part of the Orion Empire, or the Reptoid (Draco) Federation. They intend to see the earth become part of the Galactic Federation.
The Earth has a particular position in the galaxy. It has a special value in regard to its minerals and water. It also has a central core computer that was placed under the earth’s surface by Orion overseers in ancient times when they had great control over the planet. Now they wish to restart that computer, and reclaim the planet as their own.
Question:
When did the US Government make the treaty with the aliens?
Answer:
“President Eisenhower met with the aliens on February 20, 1954, and a formal treaty was signed between the alien nation and the United States government. (Behold a Pale Horse Chapter 12)
Question:
Why were these contracts made in secret without the knowledge, or consent of the HUMAN FAMILY?
Answer:
It was believed that this would lead to economic collapse, collapse of the religious structure and national panic, which could lead into anarchy.
(Source: The Pale Horse by William Cooper)
Because of this the U.S. government made contracts with the aliens at our expense without the consent or knowledge of its people. And we now as the people of the Earth claim as –
The Petition states correctly:
“We, the united Human Family, declare these illegal contracts NULL and VOID.
WE EXTEND A HUMBLE AND HOPEFUL INVITATION TO THE UNITED GALACTIC FEDERATION OF FREE WORLDS, FOR IMMEDIATE AND PUBLIC INTERVENTION, HERE ON OUR BELOVED MOTHER EARTH, WITH THE PURPOSE TO FREE HUMANITY ~ ON ALL LEVELS ~ THAT WE MAY TAKE OUR RIGHTFUL POSITION AS MEMBERS OF THE GALACTIC HUMAN FAMILY. ”
Question:
Have there been official contacts with the Galactic Federation
Answer:
William Cooper speaks about a race of humanoid aliens who landed at Homestead. This should be the representatives of the Galactic (Con) Federation.
“A race of humanoid aliens landed at Homestead Air Force base in Florida and successfully communicated with the U.S. Government. This group warned us against the race orbiting the equator and offered us to help us with our spiritual development. They demanded that we destroy our nuclear weapons as the major conditions. They refused to exchange technology citing that we were spiritually unable to handle the technology we already possessed. These overtures were rejected on the ground that it would be foolish to disarm in the face of such an uncertain future.”
Question:
What is the position of The Galactic Federation since that time?
Answer:
According to Galactic Laws the Galactic Federation cannot intervene unless INVITED. It is monitoring the events and is only allowed to intervene in case the life of Planet Earth would be in danger, such as the risk of being destroyed by atomic warfare.
(Source: various)
Question:
Why was the Galactic Federation formed?
Answer:
This was because of the destruction by nuclear war of planet Maldek long ago. Maldek was a beautiful planet in our solar system located between Mars and Jupiter. The Asteroid Belt between Mars and Jupiter are the remains of Maldek. The reverberations were felt throughout the Cosmos. Not only was this universe shaken, but all of the others as well. This act of selfishness was felt in great waves throughout the Cosmos. A great unbalance was experienced as all ones began to put together that which had been rocked by the explosion of the planet. As a consequence of the destruction of Maldek an Intergalactic Pact was drafted between the star nations of different Galactic Systems to prevent such events from happening again.
Question:
Is there something else that we should be aware of in these turbulent times to understand the urgency and importance of signing this petition?
Answer:
Yes, this has to do with the returning of Wormwood or the 12th Planet. It is in the solar system at this time and is moving ever closer to the planet earth.
It is seen that as it approaches Earth it will cause great upheaval on our planet in the years ahead. Many of the cataclysmic events that so many religions have prophesized, including the Wormwood prophecies have to do with the closeness of what is referred to in Sitchin’s book as the 12th Planet
(Source: Lull (Stillness) Before the Storm)
From the Book: Behold a Pale Horse
Published in 1991
By Milton William Cooper, former United States Intelligence Briefing team member.
(Born the 5th of May 1943 and killed on the 6th of November de 2001)
Chapter twelve: The Secret Government
Excerpts:
During the years following World War II the Government of the United States was confronted with a series of events which were to change beyond prediction its future and with it the future of humanity. These events were so incredible that they defied belief. A stunned President Truman and his top military commanders found themselves virtually impotent after having just won the most devastating and costly war in history.
The United States had developed, used, and was the only nation on earth in possession of the atomic bomb. This new weapon had the potential to destroy any enemy, and even the earth itself. At that time the United States had the best economy, the most advanced technology, the highest standard of living, exerted the most influence, and fielded the most powerful military forces in history. We can only imagine the confusion and concern when the informed elite of the United States Government discovered that an alien spacecraft piloted by insect like beings from a totally incomprehensible culture had crashed in the desert of New Mexico. Between January 1947 and December 1952 at least 16 crashed or downed alien craft, 65 alien bodies and 1 live alien were recovered.
In the coming years these events were to become the most closely guarded secrets in the history of the world. During these early years the United States Air force and the Central Intelligence Agency exercised complete control over the “alien” secret. President Truman had been keeping our allies, including the Soviet Union, informed of the developing alien problem. This had been done in case the aliens turned out to be a threat to the human race.
Beginning in 1953 a new president occupied the White House. The President was General of the Army Dwight David Eisenhower. During his first year in office, 1953, at least 10 more crashed discs were recovered along with 26 dead and4 live aliens. Eisenhower knew he had to wrestle and beat the alien problem. He knew that he could not do it by revealing the secret to the Congress.

In 1953 astronomers discovered large objects in space which were tracked moving towards the Earth. It was first believed that they were asteroids. Later evidence proved that the objects could only be spaceships. When the objects reached the Earth they took up a very high geosynchronous orbit around the equator. There were several huge ships, and their actual intent was unknown.
Project SIGMA and a new project PLATO, through radio communications using the computer binary language, were able to arrange a landing that resulted in face-to face contact with alien beings from another planet. This landing took place in the desert. The movie, Close Encounters of the Third Kind is a fictionalized version of the actual events.
In the meantime, a race of humanoid aliens landed at Homestead Air Force base in Florida and successfully communicated with the U.S. Government. This group warned us against the race orbiting the equator and offered us to help us with our spiritual development. They demanded that we destroy our nuclear weapons as the major conditions. They refused to exchange technology citing that we were spiritually unable to handle the technology we already possessed. These overtures were rejected on the ground that it would be foolish to disarm in the face of such an uncertain future. There was no track record to read from. It may have been an unfortunate decision
President Eisenhower met with the aliens at on February 20, 1954, and a formal treaty between the alien nation and the United States of America was signed. Four others present at the meeting were Franklin Allen of the Hearst newspapers, Edwin Nourse of Brookings Institute, Gerald Light of metaphysical research fame, and Catholic Bishop MacIntyre of Los Angeles. Their reaction was judged as a microcosm of what the public reaction might be. Based on this reaction, it was decided that the public could not be told. Later studies confirmed the decision as sound. An emotionally revealing letter written by Gerald Light spells it out in chilling detail: Quote: “I had the distinct feeling that the world had come to an end and with fantastic realism. For I have never seen so many human beings in a state of complete collapse and confusion, as they realized that their own world had indeed ended with such finality as a beggar description. The reality of “other-plane” aeroforms is now and forever removed from the realms of speculation and made a rather painful part of the consciousness of every responsible scientific and political group.” end quote.
The alien emblem was known as the “Trilateral Insignia” and was displayed on the craft and worn on the alien uniforms.

Both of these landings were filmed. These films exist today. The treaty stated that the aliens would not interfere in our affairs and we would not interfere in theirs. We would keep their presence on Earth a secret. They would furnish us with advanced technology and would help us in our technological development. They would not make any treaty with any other nation. They could abduct humans on a limited and periodic basis for the purpose of medical examination and monitoring of our development, with the stipulation that the humans would not be harmed, would be returned to their point of their abduction, would have no memory of the event, and that the alien nation would furnish Majesty Twelve* with a list of all human contacts and abductees on a regularly scheduled basis. It was agreed that bases would be constructed underground for the use of the alien nation and the United States Government. A multimillion-dollar secret fund was organized and kept by the Military Office of the White House. The fund was used to build over 75 deep underground facilities. Presidents who asked were told that the fund was used to build underground shelters for the President in case of war. It was used to build Top Secret alien bases as well as Top Secret DUMB (Deep Underground Military Bases)
By secret Executive Memorandum NSC 5510, Eisenhower had precoded NSC 5412/1 to establish a permanent committee (not ad hoc) to be known as Majesty Twelve (MJ-12) to oversee and conduct all covert operations concerned with the alien question. By 1955 it became obvious that the aliens had deceived Eisenhower and had broken the treaty. Mutilated humans were being found along with mutilated animals across the United States. It was suspected that the aliens were not submitting a complete list of human contacts and abductees to Majesty Twelve and it was suspected that not all abductees had been returned. The Soviet Union was suspected to interact with them, and this proved to be true. The aliens stated that they had been, and were then, manipulating masses of people through secret societies, witchcraft, magic, the occult, and religion. After several Air Force combat air engagements with alien craft it also became apparent that our weapons were no match against them.

In November 1955 NSC-5412/2 was issued establishing a study committee to explore all factors which are involved in the making and implanting of foreign policy in the nuclear age. This was only a blanket of snow that covered the real subject of study, the alien question.
By Secret Executive Memorandum NSC-5511

In 1954, President Eisenhower had commissioned the study group to “examine all the facts, evidence, lies, and deception and discover the truth of the alien question”.
A mayor finding of the alien study was that the public could not be told. It was believed that this would most certainly lead to economic collapse, collapse of the religious structure and national panic, which could lead into anarchy. Secrecy thus continued. An offshoot of this finding was that if the public could not be told, the congress could not be told. Funding for the projects and research would have to come from outside the Government. Another finding was that the aliens were using humans and animals for a source of glandular secretions, enzymes, hormonal secretions, blood plasma and possibly in genetic experiments. The aliens explained these actions as necessary for their survival. They stated that their genetic structure had deteriorated and that they were no longer able to reproduce. They stated that if they were unable to improve their genetic structure, their race would soon cease to exist. We looked upon their explanations with extreme suspicion. Since our weapons were literally useless against the aliens, Majesty Twelve decided to continue friendly diplomatic relations until such a time as we were able to develop a technology which would enable us to challenge them on a military basis. Overtures would have to been made to the Soviet Union and other nations to join forces for the survival of humanity.
The public is being bombarded with movies, radio, advertising, and TV programs depicting almost every aspect of the purported true nature of an alien presence. This includes the good and the bad. Someone is planning to make their presence known and the government is preparing you for it. They do not want any panic.
The unprecedented number of sightings worldwide indicates that public exposure is not far off. Never in history have there been so many incidents involving UFO´s and never in history have there been so many official acknowledgements.
CONCLUSIONS ARE INESCAPABLE –Knowing is power
1. The secret power structure may believe that by our own ignorance or by Divine decree, planet Earth will self-destruct sometime in the near future. These men sincerely believe that they are doing the right thing in their attempt to save the human race. It is terrible ironic that they have been forced to take as their partner an alien race which is itself engaged in a monumental struggle for survival. Many moral and legal compromises may have been made in this joint effort.
2. These compromises were made in error and must be corrected. Those responsible should be brought to account for their actions. I can understand the fear and urgency that must have been instrumental in the decision not to tell the public. Obviously I disagree with that decision. Throughout history small but powerful groups of men have consistently felt that they alone were capable of deciding the fate of millions. Throughout history they have been wrong.
3. Full disclosures to the public should be made and we should proceed to save the human race together.
4. We are being manipulated by a joint human/alien power structure which will result in a one-world government and the partial enslavement of the human race. This has been deemed necessary to solve the elemental question: “Who will speak for planet Earth?” It has been decided that man is not mature enough in his evolutionary development to be trusted to interact properly with an alien race. We already have enough trouble between the different human races, so what would happen if a totally alien extraterrestrial race was introduced? Have our leaders decided to lock us in the playpen? The only way to prevent this scenario is to cause an evolutionary leap in consciousness, a paradigm shift for the entire race. I have no idea how this can be done. ilia needs to be done very quickly and very quietly,
5. 3) The government has been totally deceived and we are being manipulated by an alien power, which will result in the total enslavement and/or destruction of the human race. We must use any and every means available to prevent this from happening.

6. If none of the above are true, something else may be happening which is beyond our ability to understand at this moment.

7. We must force disclosure of all the facts, discover the truth, and act upon it. The situation in which we find ourselves is due to our own actions or inactions over the last 44 years.

8. Because it is our own fault, we are the only ones who can change future events. Education seems to me a major part of the solution.

There is always the possibility that I was used, that the whole alien scenario is the greatest hoax in history designed to create an alien enemy from outer space in order to expedite the formation of a one-world government.
Through ignorance or misplaced trust we as people have abdicated our role as watchdog of our government. Our government was founded “of the people, for the people, by the people.” There was no mention or intent ever to abdicate our role and place our total trust in a handful of men who meet secretly to decide our fate.
In fact, the structure of our government was designed to prevent that from ever happening. If we had done our jobs as Citizens we would never have reached that point.
Most of us are completely ignorant as to even the most basic functions of our government. We have truly become a nation of sheep-and sheep are always eventually led to slaughter.
The most important information that you need to determine your future actions is that the New World order calls for the destruction of the sovereignty of nations, including the United States.
The New World Order cannot, and will not, allow our Constitution to continue to exist. The new World order will be a totalitarian social system. We will be the slaves shackled to a cashless system of economic control.
If the documentation that I viewed while I was in Naval Intelligence is true, then what you have just read is probably closer to the truth than anything ever written.
I can assure you beyond any shadow of a doubt that even if aliens are not real, the technology IS REAL. Antigravity craft exist and human pilots can fly them.
I and millions of others have seen them.
They are an alien alloy; they are machines, they come in different shapes and sizes; and they are obviously intelligently guided.
As William Cooper alerts us:
We are being manipulated by human and alien powers to lead humanity into a one-world government and the enslavement of the human race.
Let us remember that it is all a game that we all agreed to play and to be careful not to condemn anyone or anything and to remember that all is One and the ONE Is ALL.
“We must raise ourselves to a higher level of consciousness before we can adequately view the whole”
ALPHA and OMEGA CREATOR DEITIES
Alphaverse, and Omegaverse home to our own Omniverse
I have been impressed or inspired to share that which has come to me due to questions that I have been asked about our Creator Deities and the Omniverse in which we live.
The fact that I thought that I was not allowed to venture further own my known conscious existence as that of the Omniverse has changed.
I should point out to my readers that if one challenge their minds to look back in the history of my writings on UFO Digest of which I am a contributing syndicated columnist one will find a history of how I have grown in my own particles and waves flux and flows.
I am very happy to report that I now have the awakened awareness that we have that of which I have known in the furthest solar core of my own soul as the Alpha and Omega.
The Alphaverse and Omegaverse to show those who are only into the physical reality of science that there can be seven (7) levels and dimensions to our souls eternal source and life force we presently address as energy and essence.
Our energy and essence is expressed in this lifetime as our SPIRIT!
We have learned that we all share something in common besides our own physical makeup as humanoids with a head, trunk, and limbs. We have a brain that allows us to think for ourselves. Inside our brain and inside our mind also exists our own awareness of life that we call our conscious awareness of the fact that we are alive.
Some of us are only thinking about that which we can see, feel, touch, taste, hear, and smell with what we are told are our five (5) senses.
We now know that our emotional state of being with our nervous system in tact allows us to also understand and react to the outside stimulus we encounter on a daily basis.
It has now come to the attention of this one person also known as a humanoid sentient intelligent being that we are much, much more than what we perceive. We are all the creations that are here to explore our way back to the creator deities of both Alpha and Omega.
Alpha is the male energy and Omega is the female energy that we are all created with and sent in tachyon energy as the strongest force that is now not understood.
The Alpha wraps around the Omniverse. The Omega is the entire womb of that which we call Alphaverse and Omniverse in one manner of thinking in the Physical Cosmology.
In the Religious Cosmology the Alphaverse is the outer creation of the Omniverse, as well as, the Omega is the outer creation of the Omniverse.
We now are in the quandary as to which came first the chicken or the egg. We need both in order to understand the other. Therefore we are now at the crossroads in Quantum Physics and the study of Quantum Entanglement with what we call the Higgs-Boson Theory which is only one of many new theories of everything.
The theoretical ‘God’ particle might have a mass between 120 and 140GeV – looked much less conclusive among new statistics received from the experiment. Guido Tonelli, spokesman for the Compact Muon Solenoid Detector, a huge particle detector at CERN employing 3,600 scientists, told the BBC’s Today program this week, ‘If we exclude the existence of the Higgs this will be a major discovery
– It would completely review our vision of nature.’
One of the biggest questions in science – does ‘the God particle’ exists? – is likely to be answered by the end of next year, it was claimed yesterday. We say we have found the Higgs boson around July 2012. The Higgs boson, nicknamed the God particle, is theoretically responsible for mass, without which there would be no gravity and no universe. No one being can create that which gives us the spirit and soul. We can clone animals but do they have the same soul content makeup of the humanoids?
Please begin updating your information on our COMMON and PRACTICAL history of the past way we have been programmed.
We will now all be able to become more as we learn to receive divine revelations from that which we call the alpha and omega forces direct.
Father Alpha and Mother Omega which is inside us all as both a male and female energy entity. We will learn some new ways to be, do, have, think, exist, and what we thought in the past will now become history in various forms. We share our Metaphysical, Physical, and Religious Cosmology in our ACE FOLKLIFE on earth. The Alpha and Omega allows us to now know that “ALIEN CIVILIZATIONS EXIST!”
CDM or Lambda-CDM is an abbreviation for Lambda-Cold Dark Matter, which is also known as the cold dark matter model with dark energy. It is frequently referred to as the standard model of big bang cosmology, since it attempts to explain:
The existence and structure of the cosmic microwave background
The large scale structure of galaxy clusters. The distribution of hydrogen, helium, deuterium and lithium. The accelerating expansion of the universe observed in the light from distant galaxies and supernovae.
It is the simplest model that is in general agreement with observed phenomena.
We shall learn to watch for patterns and symbols in nature. in the supernatural serendipity synergy equation of what we think is impossible and what do we get?
Imagination or Reality in this world or another parallel universe?
The story listed next is based on two people’s combined truth and yet is used simply as a model for the future of the Ascension Age in Cosmology.

PART 3
Taken Up – Series
Chapter 1

Tom and Sara walked up the ramp into the galaxy universal shuttle called Gus the name that Sara had named it some three months earlier when she was told by Tom that he would call the intelligent spacecraft Gus when Tom first started working on the aircraft. Tom had been working on it for three months before Sara joined him on this particular project underground. Sara and he both knew that the aircraft could fly.
This was the day that he was going to prove it to the whole world. Tom was going to take the aircraft out of the underground Top Secret Military Base facility hidden inside mountain in New Mexico somewhere.
Sara had tried to talk him out of it but he was going to do it with or without her so she decided to go along. In the back of her mind, Sara didn’t think that for a second that Tom would really take the aircraft out of the hangar. It was a top secret place and the aircraft had been there since 1947 when it was recovered in Roswell, New Mexico.
The underground facility had been Tom and Sara’s home for six months and they had not been allowed out of the place since they had arrived.
When arriving they flew into El Paso, Texas then went by military cloaked van into the sandy deserted bad lands of New Mexico. Since they loaded at what is known as the Fort Bliss Army Base they believed or they were lead to believe they were on the Fort Bliss Military Reservation but could not be sure.
There were so many mountains and areas underground that they could be anywhere after the long drive in the hot desert. Some rumors had them in the Dulce, New Mexico area among the many underground facilities made by the U.S. Government for performing Top Secret nuclear tests.
The mountains had been carved out back when there was the World War II bunkers being used for food storage and then they just kept going from there during the cold war with Russia.
Tom and Sara were now the only beings on board the alien craft not of earth origin.
Tom and Sara took their seats that formed to their bodies as then set down in them. The inside of the aircraft was to human eyes colored a dull gray and measured 30 feet by 30 feet inside and out. As Tom and Sara settled into their chairs the consoles came alive and the wall monitors came on making a half circle around the two people showing 365 degrees panoramic view around the outside of the aircraft as it had existed even before Sara and Tom boarded the alien spacecraft on this project. Sara had been aboard an alien craft as a child unbeknownst to Tom as her own knowledge and experience. He believed her to be perfectly stupid about such things as alien craft not of earth origin. She pretended along with what Tom had believed to keep down emotional disturbances between them both. Time was now of the essence.
Tom was there to find out how it ran and if there were any weapons on board.
But whenever he would report to the high Command of the facility the General would tell Tom to write it up and then it would be put in some classified file and forgotten.
The General seemed to be scared of reporting anything and had the attitude let sleeping dogs lie. He wanted his job security but wasn’t going to be responsible for World War III or so he mentioned from time to time in his frustration.
Today they would not be able to just lock the results of Tom’s and Sara’s results away in some vault.
Tom had decided to take matters to task for all humans and for the purpose of plain curiosity and total disclosure for our American Veterans on earth who always wanted to know the truth. The hard part was knowing that as humans we would be evolving fast and extreme from this day forward when he returned with the information. But who would believe him and would it matter?
“Good morning Gus.”
“Good Morning Commander Bradley and Co-Commander Bolton.”
Smiling Sara nodded and responded in a carefree voice.
“Good morning Gus, it’s nice to be aboard.”
“Gus we are going to take a little trip this morning… These five inch cables that are running in from the ramp… Are they going to be a problem?”
“No Commander… Where are we going?”
“I want to see and talk to these creators or as we call them the aliens that you have told me about.”
“Commander I am to monitor the progress of the humans.”
“Your mission has changed Gus. I am the Commander as you tell me often enough and I am giving you a new mission.”
“Yes Commander. I am programmed to follow your orders as you are the chosen commander along with the Co-Commander which is also in my memory banks. You both have the highest level of authority in my code banks.”
“Code banks huh. Well okay then that means we are in charge now okay. So close the ramp and open the bay doors Gus. Get us out of here.”
Tom had not much more than gave the order then the ramp started to retract and at the same time the 300 feet by 75 feet bay doors started to open. At first the men and women working around Gus didn’t notice the activity as they were going about their regular missions for the day and random readings and taking numbers down from their computers and scope. Then one of the techs saw the bay door opening and called out.
“Hey. Something is happening here. We have a problem.”
Tom and Sara had full audio and video and were watching the techs and scientists in a state of panic who were running around trying to stop what was happening. As the ramp closed it severed the large thick high powered cables running into Gus. They had been placed inside of him since he arrived at the facility so many years earlier. The aircraft was now maneuvering as the clamps were dropped automatically as if they were never there. Gus moved slowly and rotated a half turn to the left aligning its self with the now open bay door. Fast and efficiently the aircraft maneuvered itself out the bay door and into the New Mexico sun for the first time since it had arrived on the back of a flatbed semi- tractor trailer years before in July 1947. As Gus cleared the bay doors he electronically lowered the door again.
Unknown to Tom and Sara the Air Force had scrambled in response. Just as soon as the technician in control of the communications had reported the problem there was the standard control command of ten seconds to depart defense on that locked down Top Secret facility. All who had an above Top Secret clearance were now in trouble with their own levels of ideal understanding of how to do their jobs. They had not been trained for a departure of the spacecraft not of earth origin. Each person appeared lost as to what to do now.
Tom had no idea that the doors were on a strict defense call sign control. There had been reported a problem which scrambled five of the Air Forces jets the moment that there had been activity from the alien spacecraft not known as anything other than a foreign aircraft to most working in the area of the aircraft and the electronic doors were opening. Watching out the screens Tom saw the jets approaching them.
“Gus we have company.”
“Yes Commander they were scrambled seventeen seconds from the time we engaged our activity. They are now manned and entering air space after scramble alert.”
“Do we have a problem Gus?”
“No Commander.”
Gus answered and at the same time pulled away from the hidden entrance of the underground facility allowing the jets to follow a short distance before going to Mock 5 then to Mock 8 faster than the five jets could travel.
However, Tom or Sara could not detect any change in the speed from inside the Alien aircrafts there were ballasts rafters based on centrifugal force in rotation inside the magnetic field inside the alien spacecraft. This was something that those on earth had not yet figured out or reverse engineered. Within moments they were at the outer atmosphere of the earth.
“Commander you will lose the video as we go through the earth outer atmospheres of the hemisphere of the earth but it will return as soon as we are through and into space.”
“Okay Gus… let’s do it then.”
The console screens changed as if it was late night when the TV had went off for the night thought Tom. The console screen went dark lasting only moments then came back on showing Tom and Sara the stars and earth and moon without the clouds blocking their site. Within minutes the alien aircraft was setting beside the earth’s moon slowly rotating around to allow Tom and Sara to view the earth before continuing to the destination.
Tom and Sara were both in awe of the sight of the view and neither could speak. They had gotten to the sight of the moon in what appeared only a few minutes. Gus allowed some time then turned back to deep space and propelled its self-back to Mack 8. It seemed only minutes to Tom and Sara and before they were at the outskirts of Mars. The orange brightness of the planet was beautiful to see with human eyes. Gus slowed and traveled around the planet, where there was a huge command ship or mother ship coming into view. Tom and Sara had not seen anything like what they were looking and the ship was in Tom’s estimation 300 miles long and half that height. There had never been a ship on earth built that large or like the one that they were looking at on earth.
“Gus what in the world is that?”
Sara asked Gus in awe of what she was seeing.
“It is the Command ship of the fleet Co-Commander.”
“Fleet… There are more of these ships?”
“Yes Commander Bradley, there are four more of them which are even larger than this one located around your galaxy and hidden from view in strategic locations from the planet’s population of those who may could view the universe. Each ship has a purpose as one builds more shuttle craft like this one that I employ. There is one that handles the plants and animals to feed the large amount of service members assigned to the fleet. There is the carrier and what you call a battle ship. It is like a fleet armada on earth on your oceans.”
“Tell me about this ship Gus.”
“Yes Commander…”
Tom could hear the faint humming sound of what he suspected of the on board computer working.
“This ship has been designated as the Command ship or as said on earth the flagship it operates under your navy and army personnel designations as you preferred in the past briefings you made with me and we made note that it is easier to incorporate the levels of training as per your request in the past. The main information you would be interested in knowing per our prior telekinetic talks would be thus.
It is 347 miles in length and 178 miles wide 94 miles high and there are 28 different species of intelligent life forms on board. The Commander of this ship is Supreme Commander Robert Clark. There are 294,820 fighting aircraft on this ship along with the pilots to man them. The ground crews are set up under the same military model as they are on the United States aircraft carriers along with the ground crews. We simply travel in space instead of on the waters of the planet earth. There are 1,567 restaurants and canteens along with 750 places similar to your fast food places on earth in the established military underground facilities. There are 7,834,674 people as you would call them. They all do not have planet earth human characteristics designed for earthling humanoids; however most of them do for your convenience in our transition for contact. The weapons are laser canons and laser machine guns as you would know them.”
“There are over 7,000,000 people on this ship?”
“That is right Co- Commander Bolton, and over half of them are female as well.”
“Half of them are female. Well then how about living quarters?”
Sara asks, wondering what to expect when they arrived on board.
“There is separate living quarters for everyone on board Co- Commander. Along with mess halls as you have in your military for the lower ranks of men and women that do not wish to cook or meals. There are recreation decks with all types of physical activities for our military personnel to engage in on off duty time while in space along with some family members that were created while away from the home world you Sara call Andromeda Galaxy. Some are from other quadrants in space and are allies working on board the fleet which is designated as the Supreme High Counsel’s universal rule which is designated in quadrants according to the way earth humanoids believe at this time. There are other levels that we are not yet at liberty to discuss since your minds are not yet programmed to review the files of what Sara calls downloads.”
Tom had been watching the monitors all the time that Gus had been telling them about the ship seeing one of the large bay doors opening on the side of the ship Tom lead forward.
“Gus what is happening on the ship?”
“They are opening the bay door so we can enter Commander.”
“What can we expect to happen once we land on the spacecraft Gus?”
“The supreme Allied Commander will meet you at the ramp to greet you on board after the bay door had been resealed and reset for the opening of the bay door entrance.”
“Then what?”
“He will show you around the Command deck and show you your quarters Commander and will take his orders from his higher court command which is the Supreme High Counsel of the entire universe.”
“I came to talk to the ones that are calling the shots… Is he the one I need to be talking too?”
“The Great Counsel Commander as you know governs the Supreme Allied Command Fleet. The Great Counsel is similar to the earth’s United Nations on the planet except they rule and govern the entire universe of the lower and the higher levels on the branes in space. We can only tell you that the higher levels added above this level in space are six beyond this one giving seven levels which are related to your people on earth in the history of our generations contact.”
“Right… The Great Counsel, are they on board?”
“No, Commander they are on the home world.”
“Right, so how am I going to talk to them?”
“The communication to the home world has been unseated and it will take the same amount of earth time in space to summon up the Great Counsel but it can be done as we have done this for you on earth as requested prior. This takes time but can be done although most of the time there is not much reason to contact except to send regular reports from our quadrant as progress reports in this quadrant of this universe. We have treasures here in this level and there are various levels reaching up to what you on earth call the Omniverse. There are two levels above this as the Alphaverse and Omegaverse and these are not ruled by our Supreme High Counsel. We know that they simply have always been and send information to the chosen for the Supreme High Counsel that rules over what you on earth call the Galaxy Federation. We shall contain the contact in what on earth you call in time about three of your earth days or earth rotations around your sun. There is no exclusive way to describe time in space as it is not apparent in space that which you use as time and rotation on the planet. It does not apply to those in the universe. There is a way for us to alert the Great Counsel the same way that I was programmed to do but this will be done from the Command Ship that we are approaching. When it is completed then you will be about to communicate with the Great Counsel once the wormhole communication is established in space once again from this location or similar location to this geographical order in space Commander.”
Tom nodded while watching all the monitors. He knew he did not really have to speak aloud but it was by his own choice since Gus always read his mind. Tom was willing to make a sacrifice of his time on earth to share what would become known about space and the humanoids superiors in space.
Tom and Sara could see that they had just entered the ships bay door entrance in the level of the hull of the ship which had been opened about three quarters of the way up from looking from where they once were located outside of the main ship.
Tom looked at Sara and shrugged his shoulders as if he knew what not to expect from their combined future together on the command ship. Getting to his feet Tom moved to one side of the shuttles ramp and removed the Beretta 9 mm from his shoulder holster which was worn under his right arm. Tom was left handed so that worked out well while in civilian attire. Holding it at the ready he put his back against
the bulkhead of Gus.
“Commander there will be no need for a weapon, there is no harm that will come to you while you and Sara are visiting the command ship…”
“Well Gus I like to be right myself and I believe it is always better to be safe than sorry if you know what I mean… Sara you may want to get out of the line of fire if it comes.”
“Where do you want me to go?”
Tom pointed to the other up side of the bulkhead out of the line of fire where the door would open for Gus.
“Over there for now Sara, I don’t know how this is going to play out and we need to be ready for anything.”
Sara moved to the side if the ramp as Tom had and they waited. Gus entered the hanger and set down as lite as a feather onto what appeared to be a silver dull steel deck. The outer bay door closed then another one came down in front of that one. One was heavier than the other and it appeared there was an air lock happening effect to the doors. There were red lights flashing in the bay area as soon as the red lights went out the ground crow came rushing out securing Gus to what appeared to be similar to earth’s steel plating with some type of what appeared to be hovering type clamps for shuttle craft.
Tom noticed these appeared to be suspended in space along with Gus while he hovered which was interesting to the human eye. It was apparent there were some higher levels of understanding about gravity and oxygen dealing with suspension in space which Tom and Sara had never experienced before. Tom and Sara watched all the activity happening outside while still located inside Gus. Gus had the outer screens open and all was visible to the eyes of both Tom and Sara.
A large door opened in front of Gus and a military formation of twenty men marched out with a tall slim man at the rear of the two columns of soldiers. Tom counted them to make sure of the number as they approached Gus. Then Gus began descending and extending the ramp end. The two columns divided and lined up alongside the ramp of Gus. A short balding man resembling Napoleon Bonaparte of France in History books that Tom had seen stepped forward and unrolled a maroon red and gold colored carpet. The tall slim man with stars on his shoulders walked forward.
“Gus what is meant by the stars on the man’s shoulders?”
“The rank insignias have been modeled after the American Army to make it easier for you Commander. Sara of course will see the U.S. Navy insignias and both are used on board as the joint fleet operations model on earth as it is in space. We would like you to know that we have been involved along the way of earth’s history throughout the timing and formation of what has been called the military and the intelligence community. Some of what appears to be real on earth may be an illusion here in space. Much has happened between your times on earth and here in space since the time I arrived to earth in July1, 1947.
“That’s just great to know so I am to believe that he is a four star General and you have been away from this fleet since July 1, 1947 is that correct?”
“Yes Commander that is correct. The only one that has a higher rank is you and the Great Counsel. I answer to you while here too Commander.”
“I out rank this General?”
“Yes Commander.”
The deep voice of the tall man called out in English to Commander Bradley.
“Commander Bradley welcome to the Command ship we have been anticipating your arrival.”
Tom looked at Sara and again shrugged his shoulders in silence to that since he had no idea what to say to Sara.
“What do you think Sara?”
“We came all this way to talk to them didn’t we?”
“You have a point.”
Tom told Sara as he put the Beretta back into its holster. They both appeared to look out without sticking their heads out from behind the bulkhead. Then after a minute they looked at each other and Tom went first onto the ramp of Gus. Sara followed Tom as they descended the ramp. At the bottom of the ramp the tall man rendered and perfect military hand salute.
Tom noted that the man had only three fingers and a thumb on his right hand. Glancing over the new alien in front of him, Tom could see that it was the same on the man’s left hand as well. Tom returned the salute and put out his hand to shake hands with the alien humanoid.
“I am Tom Bradley and this young woman is Sara Bolton. As you already know we are from the planet we refer to as earth. We are from the country on a continent; well to be more precise an area we call North America and we come from the country we call the United States of America.”
“I am Supreme Commander Robert Clark… We know your coordinates on the planet Commander. We knew from global update that you were on your way from the moment that you boarded the shuttle this morning and we have prepared you quarters and some refreshments.”
“I would like to get down to why we are hear Commander… I want to talk to the Great Counsel about their plans for us earthlings.”
“We are a long way from our own home world Commander Bradley and it takes some time to get in contact with them as universally the connection has to be right as we contact through what we use as wormhole technology and some computations are not up to us but we do this regularly and it could take some time as you say on your planet. If you will be so kind as to allow us to set up the arrangement for you and we will inform you as soon as our communication stream opens up. ”
Tom nodded and said nothing since there was anything he could do or say to make the situation happen while in space. He was new at this space flight communication technology and was very aware he was out of touch with his own reality.
“If you and Co- Commander Bolton will follow me I will take you to my office and brief the two of you sir.”
As the three started to walk away from the shuttle craft called Gus the two ranks of soldiers, made left and right facing movements and escorted Tom and Sara to the door they had entered into the landing bay. As the three walked General Clark talked about the ship and its capabilities.
“There are movable levels and flight decks in each of the levels that will appear stationary but let me affirm to you that looks can be deceiving around here when not accustomed to our ways in space travel and on spacecraft such as this one. We would like to keep you safe and will ask you both to get accustomed to our spacecraft and floating floors as you would call them on earth. We shall share with you that there are map stations on all floors and flight decks. You are presently on one level now that can attach and detach to other levels we call decks and you may call them floors. The heart of the craft is the top deck forward. That is where the Command Control is located and where my office is located and is stationary at all times. We have the protective layers of course which are made of the strongest hulls we have available to us in this universe. We will hope that our terms while sharing our space travel will become familiar to each of you while you are visiting here.”
“I see. There is much I guess that we need to learn about here in space. I have already been told by the Supreme Counsel that there are words we have no equal description for on earth that match those used in space. I have noticed that you along with every one that I have seen so far wear military rank and insignias.”
“Yes along with or names we had adopted the American Military Joint Army and Navy ranking system used on earth. The Great Counsel believes that it would be easier for you to understand. We did have our own system but can adapt to your naval fleet academy and as you mentioned to them prior you wanted to use U.S. Army which you were more familiar with while Commander Bolton is familiar with U.S. Navy.”
“Oh yes the Great Counsel looks out for us don’t they?”
Tom had talked to the Great Counsel from Gus while on earth and they didn’t see eye to eye about a lot of things. He had not needed to come to this ship to talk to the Great Counsel but it was as good of any to learn more about what made the universe work if there was any way to find out more about these aliens Tom had plans to do just that.
Once the three entered into the corridors of the ship the military escort was no longer with them. However as they entered a large room that appeared to be a conference room there were a dozen officers that appeared to be waiting and watching for their arrival to this briefing or conference room. General Clark stopped and introduced each officer by name and rank to Tom and Sara. Sara noticed that there were only two women in the dozen or so officers in the group.
The General’s staff was wearing all Army insignias which Tom could relate too. Sara found the talking to only senior levels allowed to speak aloud an interesting piece of information to record in her own way of thinking. After the introductions they continued on the tour of the ship. Hitting the high spots were mostly about levels that had various work groups dealing with variable project management teams who were in the course and scope of their working environments. Tom learned that they had moving sidewalks and elevators all over the ship and that there were golf cart type vehicles as vault looking four to six team personnel carriers for transportation purposes as well as single zip line stand alone units for personnel on these rider looking pogo sticks that glided on some type of air cushion or on magnets on each level. Tom thought about asking the details on how the technology worked as in gliding on air but decided to wait until a later time since this was a fast and furious tour which was to cover as much ground as possible in a short amount of time as a basic introduction to the highlighted areas. It appeared that the entire spacecraft was simply a military working spacecraft and their appearance was not to disturb the work crews that were in the process of completing their assignments.
Taking what appeared to be an elevator with no cables or apparent mode of energy transference to the naked eye up Tom or Sara could not determine how many floors they had visited after boarding. There was something off about everything that moved on board this spacecraft but the fact that it all appeared to work similar to people carriers on earth was some what a relief to both Tom and Sara.
A golf cart type car had taken them on a drive through the apparent food court or restaurant district and then down long corridors as what appeared to be retail shops for some odd looking products of the ship which was made to look available to those who were off duty and on their own time. It appeared to Tom and Sara that there were many aliens that were wearing what was called civilian attire on earth. As a special aid who was assigned to drive General Clark explained the lay out of the parts of the ship they were being shown as a basic introduction to their culture on board the command ship was the general introduction to visiting dignitaries as General Clark had already arranged for him to do the speaking aloud to both Tom and Sara. It could be seen that they did not need to speak with their own vocal chords and each wore a type of tiny connection from voice box to ear to communicate to those who did not speak the same language as the General.
“We have a wide variety of cultural choices and languages. This is also why we have restaurants for various cultures and galaxy personnel to enjoy… As you can see they have names similar to your restaurants on earth but are written in their own native language also for those who prefer to dine in their own native cuisine while on board.”
“Look Tom there is Ponderosa.”
“Yes I see that and a Bonanza there also. Is that a steak house?”
“Yes Commander the steak is very good there… I eat there often. We have a type of steak very similar to your cow and buffalo.”
“Is this the only place on the ship that has restaurants?”
“No Co-Commander there are restaurants on just about every level and this area is the closest to your assigned guest quarters. We have various dignitaries from time to time from various parts of the universe.”
“Is there a gym?”
“Yes that will be the next stop Co-Commander.”
“You know I don’t know how long that we are going to be here right now but this Commander and Co-Commander is getting confusing… Can you please just drop the military titles and call me Tom and Sara… that is if Sara pleases. It is really not going to make a difference to others now on this trip is it?”
“As you wish Commander… That is Tom.”
“That feels much better. After all I am not on official duty as far as I am concerned for our U.S. Army. I came on my own accord. I wanted to be truthful and accurate to those whom I feel should learn the truth. Truth is universal don’t you think?”
“You may address the Supreme Counsel with such matter then Tom. But please also call me by my assigned earth name Robert if it will make you feel more at ease during your stay here?”
“If that is the way you would like us to call you sir. It will be a pleasure.”
“Yes it would be nice if the two of you called me by my earth name as I don’t get to hear it that often except in training among our other personnel practices. Hearing Robert will be nice.”
“Then Robert it is sir.”
Robert told Tom and Sara as they entered the large room foreword on the ship,
“This should interest you both as this is our what you call radar only designed in space in levels that are far more advanced than anything on earth. I believe this is similar in naming micro wave stations and satellite imaging systems but I understand we are what one would call light years in terms of your advanced space technology.”
Tom had to answer,
“That estimate would be a given Robert on planet earth. We would say that you are light years ahead of us too.”
The radar sites were in another dimensional screen with technicians who were charting courses in space and yet there were some type of clear screens with various highlighted colors and movements which were none like Tom or Sara had ever seen before.
“Well, it is so far advanced that it isn’t even anything I have time in this lifetime to understand.”
Tom viewed with his own eyes while Sara was taking it all in without speaking a word. In Tom’s own estimation he advised Sara,
“Robert’s light years estimate was a casual polite estimate. I wonder how many earth years they will allow us before we are using this same type of technology on earth.”
Sara said nothing since they were light years ahead of what the United States had and there was no use discussing what wasn’t going to be happening anytime soon or at least in her lifetime.
Clark when through the various names and controls of the Command Ship’s various levels of technology although it was hard to fathom by Tom and Sara. They both listed to everything said that was expanded upon by Robert. Robert searched for earth terms although what he shared most had no words to compare too in earth since the technology had not been invented to be used in space as of yet on earth. How everything worked was interesting but they were both a little lost regarding how the words related to earth terms. They were truly interested although the words that were used sounded like a foreign technology which resembled Chinese and Russian languages all mixed with Egyptian words on earth. The sounds were not very complimentary to the English language.
The command center looked to Tom like the NASA Space Command Center seen during the Apollo Mission on earth.
“This room can actually control the whole entire spacecraft or I mean ship?”
“Yes Sara and we have the main communication center here which l can give orders from this console to all the other spacecraft in the fleet here. We also monitor the other ships located on your planet. It is a form of satellite communication and microwave usage that is just much more advanced than anything you have shared on earth. We use sound vibrations and particles and waves that react to the dark matter and the various forces which you are not familiar with on earth. We know you understand various strong and weak forces and gravity but there is one that would be the fifth element which is used here but not known on earth as of yet.”
“You told me that there are four more ships on earth…?”
“Yes.”
“Do you have constant communication with them?”
“Yes of course.”
Clark looked assured while Sara looked puzzled as they walked into a new area of the Command center.
“This is the largest area of our Command Center on this you would call the Flag ship in a fleet on earth with your U.S. Navy Tom and Sara.”
Tom looked around the room. The room it’s self was at list 300 feet wide and 600 feet long there were 100’s of men and women manning the station throughout the room which had various locations and levels of personnel seated in what appeared to be gravitational cushioned seating conformed to the midair although they appeared to be sitting in space while attached personally to consoles which would move with them as need be to certain control areas in front of them in mid-air. No collisions would happen since they were all in tiered seating arrangements. Although there were some who appeared to fly through the air to post various imaging in mid- air on various personnel screens. It was as if they all could sit and fly in the air. There was definitely something going on regarding gravity and the illusion of conformity and control to something that could not be seen but was apparently activated like some type of personal force field that allowed the personnel to move freely without crossing others point of view or reference points. How this could be explained back on earth when the way that they moved was not understood by the human mind.
Clark took his time and showed Tom and Sara everything that was on visual display in mid-air although there was nothing to explain how it appeared in midair to their own minds. He showed a contact console to each of the Commanders of the other four ships on earth as well as the entire fleet in space command with their fleet. It all appeared out of thin air and as if it was in another dimension in space like a hologram that could be maneuvered and manipulated while communication was done as if there was no effort involved.
Once Tom had talked to the four ships with his own voice they left the Command center and Clark took them to their quarters. The golf cart type vehicle careered them to a bank of elevators.
“Your quarters are located on the deck Tom along with Co-commander Sara.”
“Is that up or down from where we are?”
“Up Sara and there are about a 1,000 levels on this ship… But there are several that we don’t use.”
“Why is that?”
Tom asked as the doors to the visual holographic elevator opened.
“They were digested when the ship came through a worm hole into these Gases.”
“They can’t be repaired?”
“Yes we have been repairing the dates but it has taken a long time. We have moved the things that were on the levels that were damages to other levels and things are working well now that we have become accustomed to various ways of the turbulent gaseous wormhole changes as they can appear seemingly out of nowhere and sometimes are near black holes we cannot detect until we are right upon them because they are not visible from long distances in space as you would know it to be.”
“That sounds dangerous and too complicated for us to figure out on earth.”
“Yes you are correct and this will take many of your earth years to figure out over what you refer to as time on earth as rotations around your sun as orbits you total as years and annual orbit projections in space.”
Tom noted that where there appeared to the naked eye to be a pool of what resembled gold carts that floated in space. The carts were located at every virtual elevator and drivers for the, when the doors of the elevator opened.
Tom had to ask,
“Are the personnel posted as guards at the elevators all the time like this is their post?”
“Actually we have posts on each level at these virtual elevators but they are not necessarily your drivers but this will be arranged for you and it will appear as such at the time you arrive to a destination you call virtual elevators. Like I said, these areas move from one level to another but also do the walking or moving what you call escalators to assist one to advance from one square much like a virtual chess board in this ship in space. It would seem complicated to your mind if we did not allow it to appear in a way that your minds can understand. Therefore we are designing our energy grids to match and combine what you are accustomed to on earth.”
Tom along with Sara and Clark boarded a golf cart and the driver began to drive away in a direction that appeared straight ahead. But after what was said, he felt he couldn’t trust his own mind. Tom estimated that they drove about 5 miles before the golf cart stopped.
“This is your questers Sara. You Commander Bradley are located just down from here and the post side of the corridor. It will take some time to adjust to our ways in space but soon it will become apparent that all of our arrangements for you are simply to accommodate your own minds that are based on time and in three dimensional spacing which we use more than five here. We accommodate your way of thinking and being while you are here visiting so let us feel as though we understand your three dimensions while we have you on board. We enjoy the training. “
The first thing that Tom noticed was there was not a door knob on the door into the quarters.
“How do you open the door?”
“Only Sara can open the door from the outside. We have set up for your convenience and way of thinking on earth so just walk up to the door and say open and it will. Depending on your stay will determine how much we will have you graduate to the higher levels of what we use to accommodate your minds.”
“And from the inside?”
“Anyone that is inside the quarters that is the assigned crew to quarters including guests can learn to live and open the door in the manner to which their kind is accustomed to Tom.”
“That is good… By the way this place is so big do you have a map that will help us get oriented to the ship?” asked Sara.
“The maps would be hard for you to carry around Sara. However we have something like your handheld computer in holographic designs which you may want to learn to use later. However for now we have programmed the ship to accommodate you where ever you are. Now mind you what you use and see not be the same as what we use. So, for your own pleasure there are Map Stations at every elevation and the drivers of the level transportation will know how to get you to any place or anything that you want to see or do. This is our pleasure to accommodate you among our spacecraft. We have put an aid in place for each of you as they are will vested into your total comfort and arrangements of earth while you are on the ship and all its functions should be similar to earth as programmed from the main terminal of what we know you call holographic projections. So we hope that our computer generation levels meet with your approval for now.”
Tom and Sara entered their assigned quarters not knowing what to expect. Tom was thinking that it was going to be like an Army barracks room with a bed and closet. He was however surprised when he and Sara entered the room together for the first time.
It was a large room set up as a living room that reminded Sara out of Southern Living Magazine or Better Homes & Gardens Magazine which honestly appealed to her mind as magic.
Sara said,
“I don’t think we are in Kansas anymore Toto I mean Tom.”
There was a couch and big chair along with a recliner and end tables with lamps on each of them but they were more modern than anything on earth so maybe it was modern earth which was the latest designs. There was a simulated style love seat to one side of a simulated rock fire place that had some type of simulated blue fire like from a computer generated program and yet it gave off a type of heat that was not air or heat. Some type of magnetic pulse arrangement Sara suspected. There was a designed simulated world carpet on the floor. And what Sara thought was funny was the world map that was used on earth as the design in the carpet. A type of modern book shelf was on one wall with the CD’s and actual a collection of books of earth such as Moby Dick, and some Sherlock Holmes books. Interesting enough there were some James Bond Ian Fleming Books which Sara read as a girl on the shelf which had all types of world gadgets sitting on them. There were various gadgets which allowed for all type of gaming systems including what appeared to be Wii devices and computer software for some type of computer of earth which had a station with a funny looking seat that was supposed to conform to the back posture when seated.
Off from the living room was a dining room with and oval table and six chairs and along one wall a china cabinet with fine china displayed in it. Somehow it all looked fake but resembled the real thing.
Off the dining room was the kitchen with stainless steel counter tops and something that looked like dark wood cabinets along with all the various appliances one might use in today’s life on earth. There was only one exception resembling a modern American Kitchen Floor plan. It had a double level to the room which was hard to figure out if one stepped up or down. It must have been programmed that way to have a higher level or second level to walk up to. In one corner off the kitchen was an odd briefing room off the breakfast nook. This room had what appeared to be a window that had a view to look out over a small lake with ducks and a small boat on the lake. This room looked like something which was used out of the ordinary by the ships personnel when not in the home relationship compliment for personal time. Tom said,
“I believe what we are seeing is an actual holographic projection room. You know like on the old Star Trek movies.”
Sara entered and hit a square resembling a keypad which changed the colors in the small room.
“Wow, this is a holographic computer for images we may want to see. Cool! Do they have these in some rich homes on earth already? They must and we just don’t have access to them yet. It’s going to be hard to know what earth already has and has not according to our visit here now you know?”
Tom had disappeared from the kitchen are and into the bathroom area where he was having some color changes of his own.
There was a small bathroom off the living room and the bed room alone was half the size of Tom’s entire apartment back home on earth. Tom begin thinking about all the space that was allowed for him as one guest and began wondering where al l the space actually came from that he was viewing. The bed was king size and the color of the spread which was shiny seemed to be changing as the whole room had various walls which at first glance appeared to be colored white. But when Tom pushed the squares by the entry way to the room there was a pleasant surprise of colors which could be changed to the color spectrum of the rainbow back on earth. It also appeared in the patterns of the rainbow or of blue sky and clouds which he liked.
There was a fire place in one corner and a very large dresser along with a chest of drawers. Tom opened a drawer and found his own size in underwear and T shirts he liked to wear back home on earth.
The closet was a large walk in and was completely stocked with clothing that was for Sara or Tom. Everything one needed as shared by most life forms on earth to make life more enjoyable. Tom and Sara were not sure if they were to share this as one big room or if there room was changing depending on who touched the drawers or entered the walk in closet.
It was as if they were being observed by the computer in the walls. All of a sudden Sara had this creepy feeling and the hair stood up on her neck.
“Tom, you know how Gus seems to know and anticipate our every move and desire. I think this ship has a double dose of Gus. I think that this is more than meets the eye if you know what I mean. This place feels sort of spooky and creepy.”
Tom said,
Well Sara you know how we were observed by the other four ships besides Gus. Well on earth and we had observers of our life on planet earth. They must have co-created similar situations in the past that resembled earth life. We must acquire new pathways while performing complexities with increasing difficulties in space. The conclusion is that the space friends offered accommodations which allowed the human mind to decide to relax around non obstacles being employed in space.”
Sara just looked at Tom in a puzzled stare she had become accustomed to using when things just didn’t seem right to her. Tom had known that look and knew there was no convincing Sara of anything.
The master bath was 20 feet by 20 feet with a shower and a deep bath bub and wool pool combined. Even the makeup table in the bath room had all the regular products including the makeup that Sara used.
“Wow how did you know what kind of makeup that I use or the clothes I prefer to wear? And even what colors I like and the right sizes too?”
“It is in your dossier.”
“I’d like to read that some time.”
Tom had to ask about contacting others while in this area alone with Sara.
“The computer looking card you gave me and Sara during at arrival in the conference room does it allow us outside our doors and how do we contact you or our aids if we need them?
Tom asked because he couldn’t help but notice no others were using cell phones and nothing thus far even resembled a phone.
“There are computer control boxes in every room Tom all you have to say is what you want and the computer will do the rest. There is a control sent to every room between yours and Sara’s living space. The computer in the walls can generate anything you desire within reason while you stay here. ”
As they went back into the living room Clark went to a roll top desk similar to the one he owned back on earth. It appeared that someone had raided his thoughts about his preferences on earth. The top he rolled back which revealed a lap top with key board similar to the one he had on earth.
“This is set up like the computers on earth where you can type in the commands or you may use voice commands and the computer will respond to either one. This is for your convenience to make you feel at home so you don’t have to talk to the walls.”
“I see… And we use that to conduct communication with you and all the personal on the ship.”
“Yes Commander along with the other four ships. I know that you both will have a lot of questions so we have made it easy for you with these computers which will be available to all of us around the spacecraft in the fleet. It is to generate a code that will communicate with only the person you desire to speak too. It is a simple program as what you would say is a computer generated software program with some advanced conditions. So just ask the computer and it will answer you about whatever or whomever you need to contact.”
Tom nodded thinking of a lot of questions off the top of his head. Noticing another door Tom nodded towards it as he asked Clark his question…
“What is in that room?”
Tom asks assuming that it was a room behind the door. Walking over to the door and opening it Clark pointed inside.
“It is a second what you refer to as a bed room. For another such as the Co-Commander or her aid or a guest. You will have the same in your quarters. As you each can share memory codes in each room or simply suggest to be your own quarters alone and the walls will accommodate your thoughts.”
Clark closed the door and turned to Tom.
“Commander Bradley if you will come with me I will show you your separate quarters which will appear as you desire it too.”
Tom nodded and looked at Sara.
“I will be back in a little bit then. Why don’t you explore your desires to the walls and see what pops up!”
“Okay Tom.”
Tom’s quarters were just up the corridor about 50 feet and on the same floor but opposite the hall of Sara’s assigned quarters.
When Tom entered the apartment he saw that it was laid out the same as Sara but walls were shining different colors. The living room had been done in cherry dark wood stained colors and the dining room in some type of field stone on the walls because Tom liked natural rock fireplaces. The bed room had been done it what looked like mahogany wood.
“Commander Bradley there is one room more than Co-Commanders quarters.”
“Where and why?”
Clark when over to the roll top desk area in the room and he pushed a small out of the way button and the wall behind the desk came open revealing a room haft the size again of the spaces in both the living rooms that Tom and Sara both had with identical roll top desks which Tom liked back home on earth. In this room however this room was special to the eye as it was laid out with rows of computers. It looked like the control center just smaller. Tom noted that there was no one manning the computers.
“You told us that there was going to be someone to help us get around the Ship… When are they going to be here?”
“I will call and have them to report now Commander.”
Tom had noticed that Clark had gone back to calling him Commander, not Tom.
“Haw about all this equipment?”
Tom pointed at the room in front of him.
“Yes Commander your aid is well invested in interim knowledge in all the equipment and will be here in a moment.”
With that Clark when to the apartment door opened it which must have been some type of telepathic communication going on between these aliens. Then two people entered the room.
“When the communication comes through as the information stream connection as our pathway from the home world it will be routed through here for your convenience to engage in communication transmissions as contact.”
“Great and any idea how long before that happens?”
“I am sorry Commander I can’t tell you that… It may be in the next 10 minutes or it could be in two of your earth hours or days.”
Clark pushed a button on the roll top desk so tom could see how easy it was to use and the wall closed once again hiding the mini control room where he could speak direct to the Great Counsel.
The two people who had entered the room were a man and woman.
Once the wall closed Clark turned to the two people that had just arrived.
“This is Lara she will be your aid while you are visiting with us on the ship.
The young women put out her hand to Tom, shaking hands as the women practiced her nod as was taught her the way earth people do.
“I am pleased to meet you Commander.”
The women had a detected Russian accent for some reason.
“I am sure that we will do fine… Is that and Russian accent that I hear?”
“Yes we all get to choose of what earth language we desire to learn while we work with those of earth. However we all must learn to speak one other language as our own accent to develop while we travel to adopt as our own communication skills along with the world’s business language which is the primary as English of course. .”
“I see…”
Tom looked at the man.
“And you are?”
“This is Franco.”
Clark stated as a formal introduction was made to Tom of Franco.
“Let me guess by the name I will say that your primary earth language you chose was Italian.
“Yes commander you are correct.”
“You are going to be Sara’s assigned aid?”
“Yes unless you do not want him to be and we can assign a female if you desire?”
“No that will be up to Sara… Not me Clark.”
“Then I will leave you explore your new quarters Commander and take Franco to meet Co-Commander Bolton.”

Chapter 2

Tom’s aid Lara followed Tom around the apartment while he was getting familiar with the place and then when they went into the hidden communications room Lara expanded everything in the room and what the computer console allowed to be used as in earth terms.
Commander you can tap into any type of computer program on earth that you desire to reach from the phone calls from the Pentagon of the United State to the Russian Kremlin. You can listen to your older sister Alta Fay talking to your younger one called Debbie or Deborah Kay or Shirley Marie. Tom was put off for a minute as he had never told anyone about his family before. Tom knew that these were aliens but to be told that he had sisters he really didn’t know how to feel at the moment that he could eaves drop on their own conversations from there on the space craft. But he did not like it at all. Now he knew just how alien that this place was and how much they knew about all humans on earth.
“If you will excuse me I would like to have what we call on earth a private little talk with Sara if you don’t mind?”
“Yes Commander.”
“Then excuse me while I go do that then. But can you direct me to which device I can use to contact her.”
Within moments Sara’s voice was coming over the speaker in the communication room.
“Sara how are you doing and how are things going over there with your new aid?”
“Oh have you met my aid… He is Italian… well that is his primary earth language besides English. I just love his accent of earth which is very authentic. ”
“That is good Sara… Are you hungry?”
“Starving.”
“I will be over there in a few minutes then and we will go to one of the food courts to eat.”
“What place?’
“I don’t know we can pick it out when we get there.”
Having Lara to call for one of the golf carts Tom and Lara went to get Sara who was accompanied now by Franco her aid wherever she went.
The restaurant area that they went too was on the same level that the quarters were on. As they drove down the corridor Tom picked a German restaurant and the four of them went in out of habit Tom went to the middle of the room and chose to sit with his back against one of the walls. This putting his back to the wall was a habit he had grown accustomed to while in the military and in the intelligence field for many years on earth.
Tom said,
“If you don’t mind, I would like to share some time alone with Sara so Lara if you and Franco will simply join us at another table that would be best for now.”
The two aids set at a nearby table to give Tom and Sara a chance to talk alone together or at least it would appear that way to them .
“Well… Tom how do you like this place, I mean well I just can’t get over it…”
“Yea… It is smothering.”
“What is it?”
“I am not sure Sara I just can’t put my finger on it. It is made for us to believe what we are seeing and I know we are never alone since the walls have ears.
“I think that they are being very nice… After all Tom they did not ask for us to come here and you know this was your own idea to come here.”
“We didn’t ask to come.”
“Well no but we did ask Gus to bring us here or at least you did and I just went along with you.”
“Have you checked your quarters out?”
“You were there Tom.”
“No, I mean well you know the place is bugged and probably we are on full video while we are here for security purposes and for inquiring minds about us. Although I realize they monitor us all earth. I am just not sure if it is all of us or just some who are chosen for whatever reasons.”
“Well I know what we were told about the walls and Gus is the same way you know so what bothers you most?”
“Well I know but I mean well No… I have not got a real chance to snoop around because there has been someone with me from the time that we arrived here. Even now there sits our two aids as they are called not ten feet away.”
“Tom I think that you are seeing more into this than there is… They are just trying to make us feel as safe and comfortable while we are here that they can don’t you think?”
“Well, I hope that you are right Sara.”
“Sure I am you will see… Now you picked this place what do you want to eat.”
Tom looked at the menu for a moment and put it down.
“I think that I will stick to the Schnitzler and fried potatoes.”
“Then that is what I will have too.”
The waiter came and took their order and shortly returned with their drinks. Tom tasted the Diet Pepsi that he had ordered and could not tell it from what he drinks on earth.
“Sara I was wondering why we would need a second bed room?”
“Why?”
“For the aid.”
“You think so?”
“I know that it is… I see clothing in the other room when I looked in.”
“Then that will be where they are when not with us which will be able twenty four hours a day.”
“You don’t have a problem with someone that you don’t know staying in your quarters with you do you like in an apartment?”
“I don’t think that they are going to hurt me if that is what you mean.”
“Sara that is not the point… I just don’t like to have an aid living in my area or space full time. It’s very unpleasant and I am a private sort of person.”
Sara looked over at the two aids.
“I don’t know Tom she is very pretty.”
“So are you Doll but I don’t want her to live in my place.”
“That is nice for you say… What are you going to about the aid?”
“Well I have been thinking about it. I am supposed to be the overall Commander so if I am then I am just going to tell Clark that I want my aid to have her own place and out of my place.”
“Then tell him the same on my aid for me then.”
Tom looked over at the two aids and motioned for one to come over to his table.
“Lara I would like for you to contact Clark and have him to meet me here.”
“Yes Commander I will do that immediately as you ordered.”
“Thank you.”
The young woman turned and left the restaurant and went out to the common area. Within only minutes Clark appeared out of nowhere it seemed right into the Restaurant and was in front of Tom and Sara.
“Clark I have been thinking… The second bed room is for the aid right?”
“Yes sir.”
“I think that I would like for you to get Sara quarters of her own alone if you don’t mind. Her aide will need his own quarters.
My aid will also need her own quarters. I would like a little time and space to myself and if I need her I can always call her.”
“The Great Counsel directed me to give you an aid Commander.”
“And you have done that Clark I just want them out of our apartments and a place of their own. They can stay down the hall can’t they while they are still assigned to us which accomplishes your mission.”
“I will take care of it as you prefer it to be then Commander Bradley.”
“Good thank you Clark… How about the communication with the home world as a communication call meeting?”
“We have not made contact with the home world Commander but I expect it shall not be much longer in earth time as you know it to be.”
“I hope not… We are going to have to work on this communication between the ships and your home world. Tell me Clark once you get the commutation up how long will it is up?”
“As long as we do not end the connection sir.”
“Then why break the connection at all?”
“We can be detected by earth if we move from out behind the planets non detectable area. We are in the area that is undetected in space like what you call the easel point or trigger point area for safety in the direct location of your earth rotation in space.
If we have an open communication with the home world. We have to do it through a wormhole connection and bounce the signals in a certain way to be out of reach and realm of detection of your world.”
“You usually move out and away from this present location?”
“Yes we have mover up here closer for your arrival and for your convenience Co- Commander Bolton to receive the transmission from you earth as you desire to hear of your home world communications on our equipment here on the spacecraft where you are visiting us now. Normally we will simply monitor the spacecraft we have left on the planet earth to send us all the information we need direct to where we are located and hidden.”
“Oh well then you are going to get the aids a place of their own and let me know when you get the communication up and running?”
Clark got to his feet and nodded to Tom.
“Yes Commander.”
With that Clark along with the two aids left the restaurant.
“Do you think that you hurt the aids feelings?’
Tom shrugged his shoulders.
“I don’t know… They say that they know everything about us so they should know that we like our privacy.”
When the food came out it looked like it was straight out of a German kitchen, the smells were delightful and Tom did not hesitate on digging in and eating all that was on his plate.
“I can say one thing Sara they can cook German food. I have not had this good of a meal since I left Germany.”
“I have never been to Germany but I like the food… What is Schnitzel?”
Tom laughed.
“It is a pork cutlet that is breaded and fried.”
Tom got to his feet as did Sara.
“I think we should head on back to our quarters. I am going back to my place Sara I want to talk to the Counsel as soon as I can.”
“I want to check out some of the things on the ship… I will stop by you place in a little bet.”
“Okay.”
Tom and Sara went to a cart where a driver for them was waiting. They headed back to their own quarters. The first thing that Tom noticed was all the things in the second bed room that had belonged to Lara who was now gone and the door was open to the room. A small green light was flashing on the roll top desk.
Then there was a voice.
“The connections are up to the home world.”
Lara informed Tom in a heavy Russian accent.
“That is good I want to talk to them. Going into the room where all the computers were in moments. Lara then entered the room and set up a computer looking connection which had a screen light up that took up one of the entire walls of the room. There were twelve humanoid figures setting at a long table with dark hoods over their heads so one could not see the faces beneath them.
“That will be all for now Lara please close the door as you leave.”
The humanoid figure in the middle of the twelve told Tom’s aid as she was dismissed from the room.
“Commander Bradley please have a seat, if you would like. Tom looked around him and sat down in the nearby chair like the chairs on Gus it formed into Tom’s physical contour. Setting back Tom took out a cigarette and lit it. (The story will be continued later by Tom and Sara also known as TJ)

Part 4
The Twelve Chakras for Ascension Age

We mentioned earlier in the beginning about the seven (7) chakras we taught in the past on earth, now learn about the entire fourteen (14) but for now we share the twelve which is presently shared with many in the metaphysical spiritual paranormal community.
Thousands of years ago, our spiritual guides gave us some tools to help us grow spiritually. These were our grade school textbooks, and we have learned them well. But as we evolve, the new textbooks arrive, building on the first. Spiritual knowledge is not static; it evolves as we do. New information arrives when we are ready to receive it. This is why so much new information is coming in today.
If you know what a chakra is, then you probably know that there are seven of them and that they have a corresponding color, or vibration. This knowledge has been with us for thousands of years. And for thousands of years, it was true. But as we evolve and ascend, the chakra system evolves as well. The ascended, fourth-dimensional human (or partially ascended human) has twelve chakras, and they differ in many ways from the seven chakras of the third dimension.
Changing from seven tones to twelve is a lot like changing music modalities. The vibrations are different. The colors are different. The sound, the harmony, is different. And of course, the whole being is different.
If you are a healer, you will find that some people have activated all twelve of their chakras, while others are still operating within the seven-chakra system. If the twelve chakras have been activated, then the person is at least half way to living in a fourth-dimensional reality. Please note that when working with the twelve chakras, it is imperative that you begin clearing with the uppermost chakra and work downward.
So what are the new chakras and their color correspondences? Let’s start from the top and work our way down.
CHAKRAS TO THE HIGHER REALMS

Twelfth Chakra
Color: Turquoise
The twelfth chakra is three steps above the crown chakra, in the aura. It corresponds with the bottom point of the upper Merkaba (of Source, or your Higher Self) that meets the human Merkaba, or light body. This chakra is associated with masculine energy—”Father Sky.” It is our connection to Source.
Eleventh Chakra
Color: Deep indigo
The eleventh chakra is two steps above the crown chakra, in the aura. It corresponds with the upper point of the human Merkaba. It encompasses all of the lower chakras, so it must remain clear or all of the chakras will have problems. While the twelfth chakra corresponds with the masculine, the eleventh chakra corresponds with feminine energy—the Christ-consciousness of Mary, Kwan Yin, or Mother Earth. Its deep indigo energy radiates outward and encompasses things other than ourselves, so it is associated with compassion and connection with all life, including Mother Earth.
Tenth Chakra
Color: Yellow
The tenth chakra is one step above the crown chakra, in the aura. Its energy radiates infinitely in a linear plane in all four directions: front, back, left, and right. Therefore, it is the chakra that connects us with everything. It also protects the Higher Mind processes.
Ninth Chakra
Color: Magenta
The ninth chakra is the crown chakra. It is the portal to the rest of the body as it will be. It is also the upper root chakra, where creation and manifesting energy live. As such, issues about self-denial, feeling undeserving, and even 4-D sex will show up here.
Half-tone Chakra (8.5)
Color: Amber
There is a half-tone chakra between the eighth and the ninth chakra. This chakra provides a clear connection between the third eye and the crown, and it governs emotional and mental clarity. Problems with any of these areas usually show up here.
Eighth Chakra
Color: Silver
The eighth chakra is the third eye, or inner vision. It is the foundation for the higher chakras and must be kept clean and clear. Its silver ray radiates as a cone, with the point of the cone beginning at the third eye, then spreading outward at the back of the head.
Seventh Chakra
Color: Gold
The seventh chakra is the throat chakra. It is about speaking your truth without judgment or delineation. Its color is gold—Golden Truth. Use this color in healing when people need help understanding that their voice—every voice—matters.
Sixth Chakra
Color: Purple
The sixth chakra is the heart chakra. The ascended heart chakra is concerned with Christ-consciousness, or Universal love. This is unconditional love for everyone and everything. During the transition, many healers may see heart problems because this must be cleared in order to ascend. If it cannot be healed in the physical body, then people will leave it to heal on the other side.
Fifth Chakra
Color: Green
The fifth chakra is the solar plexus. Many formerly third-dimensional heart chakra issues now live here, namely the “lower heart” functions such as connectivity and interpersonal relationships (romantic love and friends and family). This may seem like a demotion for feelings that we all really care about, but it isn’t. When the upper heart, or Christ-consciousness, is open and clear, it includes these wonderful, healthy feelings of connection with those we love, but it also allows us to move far beyond them and to maintain much healthier relationships.
Fourth Chakra
Color: Red
The fourth chakra is the seat of emotions, and it corresponds with the old second chakra, behind the navel. Emotional issues are centered in this chakra.
Third Chakra
Color: Ultraviolet X
The third chakra is where the root chakra is in the old system. It helps us to understand our need to be intimately connected with other people. Problems with connection or intimacy may center in this chakra. I call the color associated with this chakra “Ultraviolet X” because it has no name and cannot be seen by most third-dimensional human eyes. It lies in the ultraviolet frequency.
Second Chakra
Color: Ultraviolet Y
The second chakra is in the soles of both of your feet. It is the grounding chakra. Whereas in 3-D this is more of a simple grounding, in 4-D this chakra helps us to feel Mother Earth and to know that we are her children. It allows us to be intimately associated with her chakra system, so abuses of the Mother can never again occur with this understanding. The color of this chakra also lies in the ultraviolet frequency.
First Chakra
Color: Clear, or transparent
The first chakra is below your feet, in the earth. It corresponds with the bottom point of your Merkaba, or light body. Use the clear color of this chakra for general healing work, along with another color, “Clear Color Y,” that is not associated with any of these chakras.
Creator Deity -Metaphysical Cosmology
Physical Cosmology & Religious Cosmology – Metaphysics
In philosophy and metaphysics, cosmology deals with the world as the totality of space, time and all phenomena. Historically, it has had quite a broad scope, and in many cases was founded in religion.
The ancient Greeks did not draw a distinction between this use and their model for the cosmos. However, in modern use it addresses questions about the Universe which are beyond the scope of science. It is distinguished from religious cosmology in that it approaches these questions using philosophical methods (e.g. dialectics).
Modern metaphysical cosmology tries to address questions such as:
What is the origin of the Universe?
What is its first cause? Is its existence necessary? We share monism, pantheism, emanationism and creationism as our sub culture words.
What are the ultimate material components of the Universe? Mechanism, dynamism, hylomorphism, and atomism are a part.
What is the ultimate reason for the existence of the Universe?
Does the cosmos have a purpose? Check out the work and teleology.
Does the existence of consciousness have a purpose?
How do we know what we know about the totality of the cosmos?
Does cosmological reasoning reveal metaphysical truths?
Creator Deity
A creator deity is a deity responsible for the creation of the world and universe. In monotheism, the single God is necessarily also the creator deity, while polytheistic traditions may or may not have creator deities. A number of monolatristic traditions separate a secondary creator from a primary transcendent being, identified as a primary creator.
Cosmology is the discipline that deals with the origin, structure, and space-time relationships of the universe or a theory or doctrine describing the natural order of the universe.
Cosmologists study the universe as a whole: its birth, growth, shape, size and eventual fate. Modern cosmology is dominated by the Big Bang theory, which brings together observational astronomy and particle physics.
Though the word cosmology is recent first used in 1730 in Christian Wolff’s Cosmologia Generalis, the study of the universe has a long history involving science, philosophy, esotericism, metaphysics, and religion. Cosmogony for the study of origins of the Universe and Cosmography for the features of the Universe.
Physical cosmology, as a branch of astronomy, is the study of the largest-scale structures and dynamics of the universe and is concerned with fundamental questions about its formation and evolution.
For most of human history, it was a branch of metaphysics and religion. Cosmology as a science originated with the Copernican principle, which implies that celestial bodies obey identical physical laws to those on Earth, and Newtonian mechanics, which first allowed us to understand those laws.
Physical cosmology, as it is now understood, began with the twentieth century development of Albert Einstein’s general theory of relativity and better astronomical observations of extremely distant objects.
These advances made it possible to speculate about the origin of the universe, and allowed scientists to establish the Big Bang Theory as the leading cosmological model. Some researchers still advocate a handful of alternative cosmologies; however, cosmologists generally agree that the Big Bang theory best explains observations.
Cosmology draws heavily on the work of many disparate areas of research in physics. Areas relevant to cosmology include particle physics experiments and theory, including string theory, astrophysics, general relativity, and plasma physics. Thus, cosmology unites the physics of the largest structures in the universe with the physics of the smallest structures in the universe.
History of physical cosmology.
Modern cosmology developed along tandem tracks of theory and observation.
In 1915, Albert Einstein formulated his theory of general relativity, which provided a unified description of gravity as a geometric property of space and time. At the time, physicists believed in a perfectly static universe that had no beginning or end. Einstein added a cosmological constant to his theory in order to force it to model a static universe containing matter. This so-called Einstein universe is, however, unstable; it will eventually start expanding or contracting. The cosmological solutions of general relativity were found by Alexander Friedmann, whose equations describe the Friedmann-Lemaître-Robertson-Walker universe, which may expand or contract.
In the 1910s, Vesto Slipher and later Carl Wilhelm Wirtz interpreted the red shift of spiral nebulae as a Doppler shift that indicated they were receding from Earth.
However, it is difficult to determine the distance to astronomical objects. One way is to compare the physical size of an object to its angular size, but a physical size must be assumed to do this. Another method is to measure the brightness of an object and assume an intrinsic luminosity, from which the distance may be determined using the inverse square law. Due to the difficulty of using these methods, they did not realize that the nebulae were actually galaxies outside our own Milky Way, nor did they speculate about the cosmological implications. In 1927, the Belgian Roman Catholic priest Georges Lemaître independently derived the Friedmann-Lemaître-Robertson-Walker equations and proposed, on the basis of the recession of spiral nebulae that the universe began with the “explosion” of a “primeval atom” — which was later called the Big Bang. In 1929, Edwin Hubble provided an observational basis for Lemaitre’s theory. Hubble showed that the spiral nebulae were galaxies by determining their distances using measurements of the brightness of Cepheid variable stars. He discovered a relationship between the red shift of a galaxy and its distance. He interpreted this as evidence that the galaxies are receding from Earth in every direction at speeds directly proportional to their distance. This fact is now known as Hubble’s law, though the numerical factor Hubble found relating recessional velocity and distance was off by a factor of ten, due to not knowing at the time about different types of Cepheid variables.
Given the cosmological principle, Hubble’s law suggested that the universe was expanding. There were two primary explanations put forth for the expansion of the universe. One was Lemaitre’s Big Bang theory, advocated and developed by George Gamow. The other possibility was Fred Hoyle’s steady state model in which new matter would be created as the galaxies moved away from each other. In this model, the universe is roughly the same at any point in time.
For a number of years the support for these theories was evenly divided. However, the observational evidence began to support the idea that the universe evolved from a hot dense state. The discovery of the cosmic microwave background in 1965 lent strong support to the Big Bang model, and since the precise measurements of the cosmic microwave background by the Cosmic Background Explorer in the early 1990s, few cosmologists have seriously proposed other theories of the origin and evolution of the cosmos. One consequence of this is that in standard general relativity, the universe began with a singularity, as demonstrated by Stephen Hawking and Roger Penrose in the 1960s.
Light elements, primarily hydrogen and helium, were created in the Big Bang.
These light elements were spread too fast and too thinly in the Big Bang process also study nucleosynthesis to form the most stable medium-sized atomic nuclei, like iron and nickel. This fact allows for later energy release, as such intermediate-sized elements are formed in our era.
The formation of such atoms powers the steady energy-releasing reactions in stars, and also contributes to sudden energy releases, such as in novae. Gravitational collapse of matter into black holes is also thought to power the most energetic processes, generally seen at the centers of galaxies (see quasars and in general active galaxies).
Cosmologists are still unable to explain all cosmological phenomena purely on the basis of known conventional forms of energy, for example those related to the accelerating expansion of the universe, and therefore invoke a yet unexplored form of energy called dark energy] to account for certain cosmological observations. One hypothesis is that dark energy is the energy of virtual particles (which mathematically must exist in vacuum due to the uncertainty principle).
There is no unambiguous way to define the total energy of the universe in the current best theory of gravity, general relativity. As a result it remains controversial whether one can meaningfully say that total energy is conserved in an expanding universe. For instance, each photon that travels through intergalactic space loses energy due to the red shift effect. This energy is not obviously transferred to any other system, so seems to be permanently lost. Nevertheless some cosmologists insist that energy is conserved in some sense.
Thermodynamics of the universe is a field of study to explore which form of energy dominates the cosmos – relativistic particles which are referred to as radiation, or non-relativistic particles which are referred to as matter. The former are particles whose rest mass is zero or negligible compared to their energy, and therefore move at the speed of light or very close to it; the latter are particles whose kinetic energy is much lower than their rest mass and therefore move much slower than the speed of light.
As the universe expands, both matter and radiation in it become diluted. However, the universe also cools down, meaning that the average energy per particle is getting smaller with time. Therefore the radiation becomes weaker, and dilutes faster than matter. Thus with the expansion of the universe radiation becomes less dominant than matter. In the very early universe radiation dictates the rate of deceleration of the universe’s expansion, and the universe is said to be ‘radiation dominated’. At later times, when the average energy per photon is roughly 10 eV and lower, matter dictates the rate of deceleration and the universe is said to be ‘matter dominated’. The intermediate case is not treated well analytically. As the expansion of the universe continues, matter dilutes even further and the cosmological constant becomes dominant, leading to acceleration in the universe’s expansion.
History of the Universe

Some share our universal time as the timeline of the Big Bang theory.
The history of the universe is a central issue in cosmology. The history of the universe is divided into different periods called epochs, according to the dominant forces and processes in each period. The standard cosmological model is known as the CDM model.
Equations of motion
Friedmann-Lemaître-Robertson-Walker metric
The equations of motion governing the universe as a whole are derived from general relativity with a small, positive cosmological constant.
The solution is an expanding universe; due to this expansion the radiation and matter in the universe are cooled down and become diluted. At first, the expansion is slowed down by gravitation due to the radiation and matter content of the universe. However, as these become diluted, the cosmological constant becomes more dominant and the expansion of the universe starts to accelerate rather than decelerate. In our universe this has already happened, billions of years ago.
Particle physics in cosmology
Particle physics is important to the behavior of the early universe, since the early universe was so hot that the average energy density was very high. Because of this, scattering processes and decay of unstable particles are important in cosmology.
As a rule of thumb, a scattering or a decay process is cosmologically important in a certain cosmological epoch if the time scale describing that process is smaller or comparable to the time scale of the expansion of the universe, which is
1 / H with H being the Hubble constant at that time. This is roughly equal to the age of the universe at that time.
Timeline of the Big Bang
Main article: Timeline of the Big Bang
Observations suggest that the universe began around 13.7 billion years ago. Since then, the evolution of the universe has passed through three phases. The very early universe, which is still poorly understood, was the split second in which the universe was so hot that particles had energies higher than those currently accessible in particle accelerators on Earth.
Therefore, while the basic features of this epoch have been worked out in the Big Bang theory, the details are largely based on educated guesses. Following this, in the early universe, the evolution of the universe proceeded according to known high energy physics.
This is when the first protons, electrons and neutrons formed, then nuclei and finally atoms. With the formation of neutral hydrogen, the cosmic microwave background was emitted. Finally, the epoch of structure formation began, when matter started to aggregate into the first stars and quasars, and ultimately galaxies, clusters of galaxies and superclusters formed. The future of the universe is not yet firmly known, but according to the CDM model it will continue expanding forever.
Below, some of the most active areas of inquiry in cosmology are described, in roughly chronological order. This does not include all of the Big Bang cosmology, which is presented in Timeline of the Big Bang.
The very early universe
While the early, hot universe appears to be well explained by the Big Bang from roughly 10-33 seconds onwards, there are several problems. One is that there is no compelling reason, using current particle physics, to expect the universe to be flat, homogeneous and isotropic and the cosmological principle.
Grand unified theories of particle physics suggest that there should be magnetic monopoles in the universe, which have not been found. These problems are resolved by a brief period of cosmic inflation, which drives the universe to flatness, smooth’s out anisotropies and in homogeneities to the observed level, and exponentially dilutes the monopoles. The physical model behind cosmic inflation is extremely simple, however it has not yet been confirmed by particle physics, and there are difficult problems reconciling inflation and quantum field theory.
Some cosmologists think that string theory and brane cosmology will provide an alternative to inflation.
Another major problem in cosmology is what caused the universe to contain more particles than antiparticles.
Cosmologists can observationally deduce that the universe is not split into regions of matter and antimatter. If it were, there would be X-rays and gamma rays produced as a result of annihilation, but this is not observed.
This problem is called the baryon asymmetry, and the theory to describe the resolution is called baryogenesis. The theory of baryogenesis was worked out by Andrei Sakharov in 1967, and requires a violation of the particle physics symmetry, called CP-symmetry, between matter and antimatter. Particle accelerators, however, measure too small a violation of CP-symmetry to account for the baryon asymmetry. Cosmologists and particle physicists are trying to find additional violations of the CP-symmetry in the early universe that might account for the baryon asymmetry.
Both the problems of baryogenesis and cosmic inflation are very closely related to particle physics, and their resolution might come from high energy theory and experiment, rather than through observations of the universe.
Big bang nucleosynthesis
Big Bang Nucleosynthesis is the theory of the formation of the elements in the early universe. It finished when the universe was about three minutes old and its temperature dropped below that at which nuclear fusion could occur. Big Bang nucleosynthesis had a brief period during which it could operate, so only the very lightest elements were produced. Starting from hydrogen ions aka protons, it principally produced deuterium, helium-4 and lithium. Other elements were produced in only trace abundances. The basic theory of nucleosynthesis was developed in 1948 by George Gamow, Ralph Asher Alpher and Robert Herman. It was used for many years as a probe of physics at the time of the Big Bang, as the theory of Big Bang nucleosynthesis connects the abundances of primordial light elements with the features of the early universe. Specifically, it can be used to test the equivalence principle, to probe dark matter, and test neutrino physics. Some cosmologists have proposed that Big Bang nucleosynthesis suggests there is a fourth “sterile” species of neutrino.
Cosmic microwave background
The cosmic microwave background is radiation left over from decoupling after the epoch of recombination when neutral atoms first formed. At this point, radiation produced in the Big Bang stopped Thomson scattering from charged ions. The radiation, first observed in 1965 by Arno Penzias and Robert Woodrow Wilson, has a perfect thermal black-body spectrum. It has a temperature of 2.7 kelvins today and is isotropic to one part in 105. Cosmological perturbation theory, which describes the evolution of slight in homogeneities in the early universe, has allowed cosmologists to precisely calculate the angular power spectrum of the radiation, and it has been measured by the recent satellite experiments such as COBE and WMAP and many ground and balloon-based experiments (such as Degree Angular Scale Interferometer, Cosmic Background Imager, and Boomerang). One of the goals of these efforts is to measure the basic parameters of the Lambda-CDM model with increasing accuracy, as well as to test the predictions of the Big Bang model and look for new physics. The recent measurements made by WMAP, for example, have placed limits on the neutrino masses.
Newer experiments, such as QUIET and the Atacama Cosmology Telescope, are trying to measure the polarization of the cosmic microwave background. These measurements are expected to provide further confirmation of the theory as well as information about cosmic inflation, and the so-called secondary anisotropies, such as the Sunyaev-Zel’dovich effect and Sachs-Wolfe effect, which are caused by interaction between galaxies and clusters with the cosmic microwave background.
Formation and evolution of large-scale structure
Of the cosmos, Structure formation, and Galaxy formation and evolution understands the formation and evolution of the largest and earliest structures (i.e., quasars, galaxies, clusters and superclusters) is one of the largest efforts in cosmology. Cosmologists study a model of hierarchical structure formation in which structures form from the bottom up, with smaller objects forming first, while the largest objects, such as superclusters, are still assembling. One way to study structure in the universe is to survey the visible galaxies, in order to construct a three-dimensional picture of the galaxies in the universe and measure the matter power spectrum. This is the approach of the Sloan Digital Sky Survey and the 2dF Galaxy Redshift Survey.
Another tool for understanding structure formation is simulations, which cosmologists use to study the gravitational aggregation of matter in the universe, as it clusters into filaments, superclusters and voids. Most simulations contain only non-baryonic cold dark matter, which should suffice to understand the universe on the largest scales, as there is much more dark matter in the universe than visible, baryonic matter. More advanced simulations are starting to include baryons and study the formation of individual galaxies. Cosmologists study these simulations to see if they agree with the galaxy surveys, and to understand any discrepancy.
Other, complementary observations to measure the distribution of matter in the distant universe and to probe reionization include:
The Lyman alpha forest, which allows cosmologists to measure the distribution of neutral atomic hydrogen gas in the early universe, by measuring the absorption of light from distant quasars by the gas.
The 21 centimeter absorption line of neutral atomic hydrogen also provides a sensitive test of cosmology
Weak lensing, the distortion of a distant image by gravitational lensing due to dark matter.
These will help cosmologists settle the question of when and how structure formed in the universe.
Dark Matter

Evidence from Big Bang nucleosynthesis, the cosmic microwave background and structure formation suggests that about 23% of the mass of the universe consists of non-baryonic dark matter, whereas only 4% consists of visible, baryonic matter. The gravitational effects of dark matter are well understood, as it behaves like a cold, non-radiative fluid that forms haloes around galaxies. Dark matter has never been detected in the laboratory, and the particle physics nature of dark matter remains completely unknown. Without observational constraints, there are a number of candidates, such as a stable supersymmetric particle, a weakly interacting massive particle, an axion, and a massive compact halo object. Alternatives to the dark matter hypothesis include a modification of gravity at small accelerations (MOND) or an effect from brane cosmology.
Dark energy
If the universe is flat, there must be an additional component making up 73% (in addition to the 23% dark matter and 4% baryons) of the energy density of the universe. This is called dark energy. In order not to interfere with Big Bang nucleosynthesis and the cosmic microwave background, it must not cluster in haloes like baryons and dark matter. There is strong observational evidence for dark energy, as the total energy density of the universe is known through constraints on the flatness of the universe, but the amount of clustering matter is tightly measured, and is much less than this. The case for dark energy was strengthened in 1999, when measurements demonstrated that the expansion of the universe has begun to gradually accelerate.
Apart from its density and its clustering properties, nothing is known about dark energy. Quantum field theory predicts a cosmological constant much like dark energy, but 120 orders of magnitude larger than that observed.
Steven Weinberg and a number of string theorists (see string landscape) have used this as evidence for the anthropic principle, which suggests that the cosmological constant is so small because life (and thus physicists, to make observations) cannot exist in a universe with a large cosmological constant, but many people find this an unsatisfying explanation. Other possible explanations for dark energy include quintessence or a modification of gravity on the largest scales. The effect on cosmology of the dark energy that these models describe is given by the dark energy’s equation of state, which varies depending upon the theory.
The nature of dark energy is one of the most challenging problems in cosmology.
A better understanding of dark energy is likely to solve the problem of the ultimate fate of the universe. In the current cosmological epoch, the accelerated expansion due to dark energy is preventing structures larger than superclusters from forming. It is not known whether the acceleration will continue indefinitely, perhaps even increasing until a big rip, or whether it will eventually reverse.
Other areas of inquiry
Cosmologists also study:
Whether primordial black holes were formed in our universe, and what happened to them.
The GZK cutoff for high-energy cosmic rays, and whether it signals a failure of special relativity at high energies
The equivalence principle, whether or not Einstein’s general theory of relativity is the correct theory of gravitation, and if the fundamental laws of physics are the same everywhere in the universe.
Please research the physics portal and string cosmology.
Physical ontology and a List of cosmologist’s references may help.
^ For an overview, see George FR Ellis (2006). “Issues in the Philosophy of Cosmology”. In Jeremy Butterfield & John Earman. Philosophy of Physics (Handbook of the Philosophy of Science) 3 volume set. North Holland. pp. 1183ff. arXiv: astro-ph/0602280. ISBN 0444515607.
Polytheism
In polytheistic creation myths, the world often comes into being organically, e.g. sprouting from a primal seed, sexually, by miraculous birth (sometimes by parthenogenesis), by hierosgamos, violently, by the slaying of a primeval monster, or artificially, by a divine demiurge or “craftsman”. Sometimes, a god is involved, wittingly or unwittingly, in bringing about creation. Examples include:
African contexts:
Mbombo of Bakuba mythology, who vomited out the world upon feeling a stomach ache;
Egyptian mythology
Atum in Ennead, whose semen becomes the primal components of the universe
Ptah creating the universe by speaking
Unkulunkulu in Zulu mythology
American contexts:
Nanabozho (Great Rabbit,) Ojibway deity, a shape-shifter and a cocreator of the world.
The goddess Coatlique in Aztec mythology;
Viracocha in Inca mythology;
A trickster deity in the form of a Raven in Inuit mythology;
Asian contexts:
El or the Elohim of Canaanite mythology (see Genesis creation myth)
Esege Malan in Mongolian mythology, king of the skies
Kamuy in Ainu mythology, who built the world on the back of a trout;
Izanagi and Izanami in Japanese mythology, who churned the ocean with a spear, creating the islands of Japan
Marduk killing Tiamat in the Babylonian Enuma Elish
Vishvakarman in Vedic mythology, responsible for the creation of the universe (while in later Puranic period, Brahma, Vishnu and Shivaare for creation, maintenance and destruction, respectively)
European contexts:
The sons of Borr slaying the primeval giant Ymir in Norse mythology
Rod in Slavic mythology.
Oceanic contexts:
Ranginui, the Sky Father, and Papatuanuku, the Earth Mother in Maori mythology
Platonic demiurge
Neoplatonism and Gnosticism and Great Architect of the Universe
Plato, in his dialogue Timaeus, describes a creation myth involving a being called the demiurge (“craftsman”). This concept was continued in Neoplatonism and Gnosticism. In Neoplatonism, the demiurge represents the second cause or dyad, after the monad. In Gnostic dualism, the demiurge is an imperfect spirit and possibly evil being, transcended by divine Fullness (Pleroma). Unlike the Judeo-Christian God, Plato’s demiurge is unable to create ex-nihilo.
Monolatrism
Monolatristic traditions would separate a secondary creator from the primary transcendent being, identified as a primary creator. According to Gaudiya Vaishnavas, Brahma is the secondary creator and not the supreme. Vishnu is the primary creator. According to Vaishnavabelief Vishnu creates the basic universal shell and provides all the raw materials and also places the living entities within the material world, fulfilling their own independent will. Brahma works with the materials provided by Vishnu to actually create what are believed to be planets in Puranic terminology, and he supervises the population of them.
Monism
Monism has its origin in Hellenistic philosophy as a concept of all things deriving from a single substance or being. Following a long and still current tradition H.P. Owen (1971: 65) claimed that:
“Pantheists are ‘monists’…they believe that there is only one Being, and that all other forms of reality are either modes (or appearances) of it or identical with it.”
Although, like Baruch Spinoza, some pantheists may also be monists, and monism may even be essential to some versions of pantheism (like Spinoza’s), not all pantheists are monists. Some are polytheists and some are pluralists; they believe that there are many things and kinds of things and many different kinds of value.
Not all monists are pantheists. Exclusive monists believe that the universe, the God of the pantheist, simply does not exist. In addition, monists can be Deists, pandeists, theists or panentheists; believing in a monotheistic God that is omnipotent and all-pervading, and both transcendent and immanent.
There are monist pantheists and panentheists in Hinduism (particularly in Advaita and Vishistadvaita respectively), Judaism (monistic panentheism is especially found in Kabbalah and Hasidic philosophy), in Christianity (especially among Oriental Orthodox, Eastern Orthodox, and Anglicans) and in Islam (among the Sufis, especially the Bektashi).
In Advaita Vedanta, Brahman is the abstract notion of “the Absolute” from which the universe takes its origin and at an ultimate level, all assertions of a distinction between Brahman, other gods and creation are meaningless (monism).
Buddhism
The Buddha explicitly rejects a creator, denies endorsing any views on creation and states that questions on the origin of the world are worthless.
Some gods in Buddhism have the view that they are creators of the world. For example, Baka Brahma. However, Buddha pointed out to them that they do not know the whole extent of the universe (he said they have no knowledge of some of the highest heavens), and further, the spiritual power of the Buddha was greater than the spiritual power of these gods who thought they created the world. One of the Suttasdealing with this subject is the Kevaddha Sutta.
The Buddha said (in DN1 – the Brahmajala Sutta or The Net of Views) that their view of being the creator of the world is a misconception and that these Brahma-gods actually have a cause which leads their origination (taking birth as a Brahma-god). Buddha even tells how the views concerning ‘creator gods’ originate in the world – through junior Brahma-gods (with a more limited life-span) who, on their passing away, get reborn as a human, and through practicing meditation are able to remember their previous life as a junior god to a Brahma god. Then, he starts to preach this view of a ‘creator god’ to others (see DN1 – the Brahmajala Sutta) starts to preach this view of a ‘creator god’ to others (see DN1 – the Brahmajala Sutta).
Hinduism
Hinduism includes a range of viewpoints about the origin of life, creationism and evolution. The accounts of the emergence of life within the universe vary in description, but classically the god Brahma, from a Trimetric of three gods also including Vishnu and Shiva, is described as performing the act of creation, or more specifically of “propagating life within the universe” with the other two deities being responsible for preservation and destruction (of the universe) respectively.[ Most Hindu schools do not regard the scriptural creation myth as a literal truth, and often the creation stories themselves do not go into specific detail, thus leaving open the possibility of incorporating at least some theories in support of evolution. Some Hindus find support for, or foreshadowing of evolutionary ideas in scriptures, namely the Vedas.
An exception to this acceptance is the International Society for Krishna Consciousness (ISKCON), which includes several members who actively oppose “Darwinism” and the modern evolutionary synthesis.
Jainism
Jainism does not support belief in a creator deity. According to Jain doctrine, the universe and its constituents – soul, matter, space, time, and principles of motion have always existed (a static universe similar to that of Epicureanism and steady state cosmological model). All the constituents and actions are governed by universal natural laws. It is not possible to create matter out of nothing and hence the sum total of matter in the universe remains the same (similar to law of conservation of mass). Similarly, the soul of each living being is unique and uncreated and has existed since beginningless time.
The Jain theory of causation holds that a cause and its effect are always identical in nature and therefore a conscious and immaterial entity like God cannot create a material entity like the universe. Furthermore, according to the Jain concept of divinity, any soul who destroys its karmas and desires, achieves liberation. A soul who destroys all its passions and desires has no desire to interfere in the working of the universe. Moral rewards and sufferings are not the work of a divine being, but a result of an innate moral order in the cosmos; a self-regulating mechanism whereby the individual reaps the fruits of his own actions through the workings of the karmas.
Through the ages, Jain philosophers have adamantly rejected and opposed the concept of creator and omnipotent God and this has resulted in Jainism being labeled as nastika darsana or atheist philosophy by the rival religious philosophies. The theme of non-creationism and absence of omnipotent God and divine grace runs strongly in all the philosophical dimensions of Jainism, including its cosmology, karma, moksa and its moral code of conduct. Jainism asserts a religious and virtuous life is possible without the idea of a creator god.
Monotheism
Judaism, Christianity, Islam and Sikhism teach that creation is the origin of the universe by the action of God.
Among monotheists it has historically been most commonly believed that living things are God’s creations, and are not the result of a process inherent in originally non-living things, unless this process is designed, initiated, or directed by God; likewise, sentient and intelligent beings are believed to be God’s creation, and did not arise through the development of living but non-sentient beings, except by the intervention of God.
Baha’i
Bahá’í teachings state that God is too great for humans to fully comprehend, or to create a complete and accurate image of, by themselves. Therefore, human understanding of God is achieved through his revelations via his Manifestations. In the Bahá’í religion God is often referred to by titles and attributes (e.g. the All-Powerful, or the All-Loving), and there is a substantial emphasis on monotheism.
Chinese Mythology
Pangu can be interpreted as another creator deity. In the beginning there was nothing in the universe except a formless chaos. However this chaos began to coalesce into a cosmic egg for eighteen thousand years. Within it, the perfectly opposed principles of yin and yang became balanced and Pangu emerged (or woke up) from the egg. Pangu is usually depicted as a primitive, hairy giant with horns on his head (like the Greek Pan) and clad in furs. Pangu set about the task of creating the world: he separated Yin from Yang with a swing of his giant axe, creating the Earth (murky Yin) and the Sky (clear Yang). To keep them separated; Pangu stood between them and pushed up the Sky. This task took eighteen thousand years, with each day the sky grew ten feet higher, the Earth ten feet wider, and Pangu ten feet taller. In some versions of the story, Pangu is aided in this task by the four most prominent beasts, namely the Turtle, the Qilin, the Phoenix, and the Dragon.
Shangdi is another creator deity, possibly prior to Pangu sharing concepts similar to abrahamic faiths.
After the eighteen thousand years had elapsed, Pangu was laid to rest. His breath became the wind; his voice the thunder; left eye the sunand right eye the moon; his body became the mountains and extremes of the world; his blood formed rivers; his muscles the fertile lands; his facial hair the stars and milky way; his fur the bushes and forests; his bones the valuable minerals; his bone marrows sacred diamonds; his sweat fell as rain; and the fleas on his fur carried by the wind became human beings all over the world. The distance from Earth and Sky at the end of the 18,000 years would have been 65,700,000 feet, or over 12,443 miles.
The first writer to record the myth of Pangu was Xu Zheng during the Three Kingdoms period.
Christianity
See also: Christ the Logos
It is a tenet of Christian faith (Roman Catholic, Orthodox and Protestant) that God is the creator of all things from nothing but by his word, and has made human beings in the Image of God, who by direct inference is also the source of the human soul. Within this broad understanding, however, there are a number of views regarding exactly how this doctrine ought to be interpreted.
Some Christians, mainly evangelical Protestants, particularly Young Earth creationists and Old Earth creationists, interpret Genesis as a historical, accurate, and literal account of creation. Others, in contrast, may understand these to be, not statements of historic fact, but rather spiritual insights more vaguely defined.
While the synoptic gospels do not address the question of creation, the Gospel of John famously begins:
“In the beginning was the Word, and the Word was with God, and the Word was God. He was in the beginning with God. All things came into being through Him, and apart from Him nothing came into being that has come into being … And the Word became flesh, and dwelt among us, and we saw His glory, glory as of the only begotten from the Father, full of grace and truth” .
The Epistle to the Hebrews, a book of the New Testament, contains another reference to creation:
“For by faith we understand the worlds were prepared by the word of God, so that what is seen was not made out of things which are visible” .
Thus, in Chalcedonian Christology, Jesus is the Word of God, which was in the beginning and, thus, is uncreated, and hence is God, and consequently identical with the Creator of the world ex nihilo.
The Catholic Church allows for either a literal or allegorical interpretation of Genesis, so as to allow for the possibility of Creation by means of an evolutionary process over great spans of time, otherwise known as theistic evolution. It believes that the creation of the world is a work of God through the Logos, the Word (idea, intelligence, reason and logic).
The New Testament claims that God created everything by the eternal Word, Jesus Christ his beloved Son. In him
“All things were created, in heaven and on earth… all things were created through him and for him. He is before all things, and in him all things hold together.
Surrounded by a pervasive culture of rationalism, relativism and secularism, the Catholic Church has asserted the primacy of reason in Christian Theology. In a 1999 lecture at the University of Paris, then-Cardinal Joseph Ratzinger said:
“The question is … whether reason, being a chance by-product of irrationality and floating in an ocean of irrationality, is ultimately just as meaningless; or whether the principle that represents the fundamental conviction of Christian faith and of its philosophy remains true: “In principio erat Verbum” — at the beginning of all things stands the creative power of reason. Now as then, Christian faith represents the choice in favor of the priority of reason and of rationality. There is no ultimate demonstration that the basic choice involved in Christianity is correct. Yet, can reason really renounce its claim to the priority of what is rational over the irrational, the claim that the Logos is at the ultimate origin of things, without abolishing itself?” Even today, by reason of its choosing to assert the primacy of reason, Christianity remains “enlightened,” and I think that any enlightenment that cancels this choice must, contrary to all appearances, mean, not an evolution, but an involution, a shrinking, of enlightenment.”
The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints
Followers of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, and others within Mormonism, believe that “the elements are eternal” (Doctrine & Covenants § 93:33), and that God (our Father in Heaven–the Creator, Sustainer, and Governor of the Universe)–organized or wrought the creation of the Earth through His Son, Jesus Christ (known as YHWH “Jehovah” of the Old Testament), Who was with Him in the beginning (John 1:1-2, 14): “And by the word of my power have I created them [i.e., the Earth and its many inhabitants], which is mine Only Begotten Son, who is full of grace and truth” (Moses 1:32). God, the Father, had His Son fashion the eternal elements into the Earth upon which we live over the course of six creative periods that He called “days” (yom in Hebrew, Genesis 1:5) (note, however, that there is nothing to suggest that these six days were either immediately contiguous or of 24 hours duration (indeed, as to the latter, the data suggests that these “days” were rather longer)). “We will go down,” said Jehovah, “for there is space there, and we will take of these [already existing] materials, and we will make an earth whereon these [i.e., us] may dwell” (Abraham 3:24). But Latter-day Saint theology does not perceive God as the Creator of our Earth alone, but of countless worlds: “worlds without number have I created; and I also created them for mine own purpose; and by the Son I created them, which is mine Only Begotten” (Moses 1:33), ” By him, and through him, and of him, the worlds are and were created, and the inhabitants thereof are begotten sons and daughters unto God” (Doctrine & Covenants 76:24).
In short, the Creator is an architect and organizer of pre-existing matter and energy, who constructed our original Earth and other worlds out of this raw material according to the laws and principles He has decreed shall govern such things.
Creationism
Christian fundamentalism in the USA since the 1930s has pursued Biblical literalist doctrines of “Creationism” as a counter-hypothesis opposing the scientific community, with concepts such as flood geology, creation science and intelligent design proposed as syntheses of Christian creation beliefs and scientific method.
Judaism
Further information: Genesis creation myth
Orthodox Judaism historically affirms that one incorporeal God (self-identified to Moses as Yahweh) is the creator of all things (many references available, see Job 38-41, for example), and that this same one created Adam and Eve personally (directly). They affirm that this Being is an indivisible one, incomparable to any created thing, and immutable.
Islam
According to Islam, God, known in Arabic as Allah, is the all-powerful and all-knowing Creator, Sustainer, Ordainer, and Judge of the universe. Islam puts a heavy emphasis on the conceptualization of God as strictly singular (tawhid). God is unique (wahid) and inherently one (ahad), all-merciful and omnipotent. According to tradition there are 99 Names of God (al-asma al-husna lit. meaning: “The best names”) each of which evoke a distinct attribute of God.
All these names refer to Allah, the supreme and all-comprehensive divine name. Among the 99 names of God, the most famous and most frequent of these names are “the Compassionate” (al-rahman) and “the Merciful” (al-rahim).
Creation is seen as an act of divine choice and mercy, one with a grand purpose: “And we did not create the heaven and earth and that between them in play.”Rather, the purpose of humanity is to be tested: “Who has created death and life, that He may test you which of you is best in deed. And He is the All-Mighty, the Oft-Forgiving; “Those who pass the test are rewarded with Paradise: “Verily for the Righteous there will be a fulfillment of (the heart’s) desires;”
According to the Islamic teachings, God exists above the heavens and the creation itself. The Qur’an mentions, “He it is who created for you all that is on earth. Then He Istawa (rose over) towards the heaven and made them seven heavens and He is the All-Knower of everything. “At the same time, God is unlike anything in creation:
“There is nothing like unto Him, and He is the Hearing, the seeing.”
Nobody can perceive God in totality:
“Vision perceives Him not, but He perceives [all] vision; and He is the Subtle, the Acquainted.”
God in Islam is not only majestic and sovereign, but also a personal God: “And indeed we have created man, and we know what his own self whispers to him. And we are nearer to him than his jugular vein (by Our Knowledge).”
Allah commands the believers to constantly remember Him (“O you who have believed, remember Allah with much remembrance”) and to invoke Him alone (“And whoever invokes besides Allah another deity for which he has no proof – then his account is only with his Lord. Indeed, the disbelievers will not succeed.”)
Islam teaches that God as referenced in the Qur’an is the only god and the same God worshipped by members of other Abrahamic religions such as Christianity and Judaism. (29:46).
Sikhism
One of the biggest responsibilities in Sikhism is to worship God as “The Creator”, termed Waheguru who is shapeless, timeless, and sightless, i.e., Nirankar, Akal, and Alakh Niranjan. The religion only takes after the belief in “One God for All” or Ik Onkar.
MYTHOLOGICAL COSMOLOGY also RELIGIOUS COSMOLOGY
A Religious cosmology (also mythological cosmology) is a way of explaining the origin, the history and the evolution of the universe based on the religious mythology of a specific tradition. Religious cosmologies usually include an act or process of creation by a creator deity or a larger pantheon.
Buddhism
In Buddhism, the universe comes into existence dependent upon the actions (karma) of its inhabitants. Buddhists posit neither an ultimate beginning nor final end to the universe, but see the universe as something in flux, passing in and out of existence, parallel to an infinite number of other universes doing the same thing.
The Buddhist universe consists of a large number of worlds which correspond to different mental states, including passive states of trance, passionless states of purity, and lower states of desire, anger, and fear. The beings in these worlds are all coming into existence or being born, and passing out of existence into other states, or dying. A world comes into existence when the first being in it is born, and ceases to exist, as such, when the last being in it dies.
The universe of these worlds also is born and dies, with the death of the last being preceding a universal conflagration that destroys the physical structure of the worlds; then, after an interval, beings begin to be born again and the universe is once again built up. Other universes, however, also exist, and there are higher planes of existence which are never destroyed, though beings that live in them also come into and pass out of existence.
As well as a model of universal origins and destruction, Buddhist cosmology also functions as a model of the mind, with its thoughts coming into existence based on preceding thoughts, and being transformed into other thoughts and other states.
Hebrew Bible
Further information: Biblical cosmology and Genesis creation myth
The main Judeo-Christian religious text, the Bible, opens with a story of creation. The first two chapters of the Book of Genesis describe the creation of heaven and earth by God (called both Elohim and YHVH) in six successive days.
First day: God creates light (“Let there be light!”)[Gen 1:3]—the first divine command. The light is divided from the darkness, and “day” and “night” are named.
Second day: God creates a firmament (“Let a firmament be…!”)[Gen 1:6–7]—the second command—to divide the waters above from the waters below. The firmament is named “heaven” (shamayim).
Third day: God commands the waters below to be gathered together in one place, and dry land to appear (the third command). [Gen 1:9–10]”earth” and “sea” are named. God commands the earth to bring forth grass, plants, and fruit-bearing trees (the fourth command).
Fourth day: God creates lights in the firmament (the fifth command) [Gen 1:14–15] to separate light from darkness and to mark days, seasons and years. Two great lights are made and the stars.
Fifth day: God commands the sea to “teem with living creatures”, and birds to fly across the heavens (sixth command) [Gen 1:20–21] He creates birds and sea creatures, and commands them to be fruitful and multiply.
Sixth day: God commands the land to bring forth living creatures (seventh command); He makes wild beasts, livestock and “everything that creepeth upon the earth”. [Gen 1:24–25] He then creates humanity in His “image” and “likeness” (eighth command). [Gen 1:26–28] They are told to “be fruitful, and multiply, and fill the earth, and subdue it.” The totality of creation is described by God as “very good.”
Seventh day: God, having completed the heavens and the earth, rests from His work, and blesses and sanctifies the seventh day. [Gen 2:2]
Christianity:
See also Biblical cosmology, ex nihilo, and Creationism for a more complete description and understanding.
It is a tenet of Christian faith (Roman Catholic, Orthodox and Protestant) that God is the creator of all things from nothing, and has made human beings in the Image of God, who by direct inference is also the source of the human soul. In Chalcedonian Christology, Jesus is the Word of God, which was in the beginning and, thus, is uncreated, and hence is God, and consequently identical with the Creator of the worldex nihilo.
The New Testament claims that God created everything by the eternal Word, Jesus Christ his beloved Son. In him
“All things were created, in heaven and on earth… all things were created through him and for him. He is before all things, and in him all things hold together.
Mormon
Mormon cosmology draws from Biblical cosmology, but has many unique elements provided by Latter Day Saint movement founder Joseph Smith, Jr.
According to Mormon cosmology, there was a pre-existence, better described as a pre-mortal life, in which human spirits were literal children of heavenly parents.
Though their spirits were created, the essential “intelligence” of these spirits is considered eternal, and without beginning. During this pre-existence, two plans were said to have been presented, one championed by Lucifer (Satan) that would have involved loss of moral agency, and another championed by God the Father. When his plan was not accepted, Lucifer is said to have rebelled and taken a third of the hosts of heaven with him to the earth to serve as tempters. According to a plan of salvation as described by God the Father, Jesus would create the earth, under the direction of God the Father, as a place where humanity would be tested. After the resurrection all men and women except spirits that followed Lucifer and the sons of perdition would be assigned one of three degrees of glory. Within the highest degree, the Celestial Kingdom, there are three divisions, and those in the highest of these divisions would become gods and goddesses through a process called exaltation or “eternal progression”. This would involve having spirit children and populating new worlds.
The Earth’s creation, according to Mormon scripture, was not ex nihilo, but organized from existing matter. The faith teaches that this earth is just one of many inhabited worlds, and that there are many governing heavenly bodies, including a planet or star Kolob which is said to be nearest the throne of God. According to some Mormon sources, God the Father himself was once like a human, and lived on a planet with his own higher god.
Hindu
The Hindu cosmology and timeline is the closest to modern scientific timelines and even more which might indicate that the Big Bang is not the beginning of everything but just the start of the present cycle preceded by an infinite number of universes and to be followed by another infinite number of universes.
The Rig Veda questions the origin of the cosmos in: “Neither being (sat) nor non-being was as yet. What was concealed? And where?
And in whose protection?
Who really knows? Who can declare it? Whence was it born, and whence came this creation?
The devas were born later than this world’s creation, so who knows from where it came into existence? None can know from where creation has arisen, and whether he has or has not produced it. He who surveys it in the highest heavens, he alone knows-or perhaps does not know.” (Rig Veda 10. 129)
Large scale structure of the Universe according to one Hindu cosmology.
Intermediate neighborhood of the Earth according to one Hindu cosmology.
We have the neighborhood of the Earth according to one Hindu cosmology.
The Rig Veda’s view of the cosmos also sees one true divine principle self-projecting as the divine word, Vaak, ‘birthing’ the cosmos that we know, from themonistic Hiranyagarbha or Golden Womb.
The Hiranyagarbha is alternatively viewed as Brahma, the creator who was in turn created by God, or as God (Brahman) himself. The universe is considered to constantly expand since creation and disappear into a thin haze after billions of years.[citation needed] An alternate view is that the universe begins to contract after reaching its maximum expansion limits until it disappears into a fraction of a millimeter.
The creation begins anew after billions of years (Solar years) of non-existence.
The puranic view asserts that the universe is created, destroyed, and re-created in an eternally repetitive series of cycles. In Hindu cosmology, a universe endures for about 4,320,000,000 years (one day of Brahma, the creator or kalpa) and is then destroyed by fire or water elements. At this point, Brahma rests for one night, just as long as the day. This process, named pralaya (Cataclysm), repeats for 100 Brahma years (311 Trillion, 40 Billion Human Years) that represents Brahma’s lifespan. It must be noted that Brahma is the creator but not necessarily regarded as God in Hinduism. He is mostly regarded as a creation of God / Brahman.
We are currently believed to be in the 51st year of the present Brahma and so about 156 trillion years have elapsed since He was born as Brahma. After Brahma’s “death”, it is necessary that another 100 Brahma years (311 Trillion, 40 Billion Years) pass until a new Brahma is born and the whole creation begins anew. This process is repeated again and again, forever.
Brahma’s day is divided in one thousand cycles (Maha Yuga, or the Great Year).Maha Yuga, during which life, including the human race appears and then disappears, has 71 divisions, each made of 14 Manvantara (1000) years. Each Maha Yuga lasts for 4,320,000 years. Manvantara is Manu’s cycle, the one who gives birth and governs the human race.
Each Maha Yuga consists of a series of four shorter yugas, or ages.
The yugas get progressively worse from a moral point of view as one proceeds from one Yuga to another. As a result, each Yuga is of shorter duration than the age that preceded it. The current Kali Yuga (Iron Age) began at midnight 17 February / 18 February in 3102 BC in the proleptic Julian calendar.
Space and time are considered to be Maya (illusion). What looks like 100 years in the cosmos of Brahma could be thousands of years in other worlds, millions of years in some other worlds and 311 trillion and 40 billion years for our solar system and earth.
Islam
Islamic cosmology and Sufi Cosmology
Islam preaches that God, or Allah, created the universe, including Earth’s physical environment and human beings. The highest goal is to visualize the cosmos as a book of symbols for meditation and contemplation for spiritual upliftment or as a prison from which the human soul must escape to attain true freedom in the spiritual journey to God. Islam elaborates on cosmology in many instances. A modern English translation of the Quran describes the creation of the universe as follows: “We have built the heaven with might, and we are steadily expanding it.”51:47
Earlier English translations like for example Ahmed Ali, The Noble Qur’an, Pickthal, Shakir and Yusuf Ali never specify the expansion as a process that is still going on so it seems to be an addition after the expansion of the universe became a generally accepted scientific fact.
Below here there are some other citations from the Quran on cosmology.
“Do not the Unbelievers see that the heavens and the earth were joined together (as one unit of creation), before we clove them asunder? We made from water every living thing. Will they not then believe?” 21:30 Yusuf Ali translation
“The Day that we roll up the heavens like a scroll rolled up for books (completed), – even as we produced the first creation, so shall we produce a new one: a promise We have undertaken: truly shall we fulfill it.” 21:104 Yusuf Ali translations
Jainism
Jain cosmology considers the Loka, or universe, as an uncreated entity, existing since infinity, having no beginning or an end.
Jain texts describe the shape of the universe as similar to a man standing with legs apart and arm resting on his waist. This Universe, according to Jainism, is narrow at the top, broad at the middle and once again becomes broad at the bottom.
Mahapura’a of Acarya Jinasena is famous for this quote: “Some foolish men declare that a creator made the world. The doctrine that the world was created is ill advised and should be rejected. If God created the world, where was he before the creation? If you say he was transcendent then and needed no support, where is he now? How could God have made this world without any raw material? If you say that he made this first, and then the world, you are faced with an endless regression.”
Taoism
Chinese creation myth and Tian
The cosmology of Taoism beliefs is a complex mixture of different beliefs. There is a “primordial universe” Wuji (philosophy), and Hong Jun Laozu, water or qi.
It transformed into Taiji and multiplied into everything.
The Pangu legend tells a formless chaos coalesced into a cosmic egg. Pangu emerged (or woke up) and separated Yin from Yang with a swing of his giant axe, creating the Earth (murky Yin) and the Sky (clear Yang). To keep them separated; Pangu stood between them and pushed up the Sky. After Pangu died, he became everything.
See Hemacandras description of universe in Yogasastra “…Think of this loka as similar to man standing akimbo…”4.103-6
It is suggested when one can make time to also research Biblical cosmology, Brahma, Cosmogony, Cosmological argument, Cosmology
Dating Creation, Day-Age Creationism, Deism Existence, Gap Creationism, Great Spirit, Intelligent designer, Jainism and non-creationism, Old Earth Creationism, Tzimtzum, Young Earth and Creationism in general terms of humanity while on earth.
Alpha and Omega
The term Alpha and Omega comes from the phrase “I am the alpha and the omega” (Koiné Greek: an appellation of Jesus in the Book of Revelation (verses 1:8, 21:6, and 22:13). In the Book of Revelation, it reads “I am the Alpha and Omega, the first and the last.
”The first part of this phrase (“I am the Alpha and Omega”) is first found in Chapter 1 verse 8, and is found in every manuscript of Revelation that has 1v8. Several later manuscripts repeat “I am the Alpha and Omega” in 1v11 too, but it does not receive support here from most of the oldest manuscripts, including the Alexandrine, Sinaitic, and Codex Ephraemi Rescriptus.
It is, therefore, omitted in some modern translations. Scholar Robert Young stated, with regards to “I am the Alpha and Omega” in 1v11, that the “oldest MSS. omit” it.
Its meaning is found in the fact that alpha and omega is respectively the first and last letters of the Classical (Ionic) Greek alphabet. This would be similar to referring to someone in English as the “A and Z”. Thus, twice when the title appears it is further clarified with the additional title “the beginning and the end” (21:6, 22:13).
Though many commentators and dictionaries apply this title both to God and to Christ, some secular sources argue otherwise.
Barnes’ Notes on the New Testament (1974) claims: “It cannot be absolutely certain that the writer meant to refer to the Lord Jesus specifically here… There is no real incongruity in supposing, also, that the writer here meant to refer to God as such.” However, most Christian denominations teach that it does apply to Jesus and God as they are one; Revelation Chapter 22 has Jesus himself saying the words: “I am the Alpha and Omega, the First and the Last”.
Therefore the letters Alpha and Omega in juxtaposition are often used as a Christian visual symbol (see examples). The letters were shown hanging from the arms of the cross in Early Christian art, and some crosses in precious metal have formed letters hanging in this way. In fact, despite always being in Greek, the letters became more common in Western than Eastern Orthodox Christian art. They are often shown to the left and right of Christ’s head, sometimes within his halo, where they take the place of the Christogram used in Orthodox art.
This symbol was suggested by the Apocalypse, where many believe that Christ, as well as the Father, is “the First and the Last” (ii, 8); “the Alpha and Omega, the first and the last, the beginning and the end” (cf., xxii, 13; i, 8). Clement of Alexandria (2nd century, philosopher and commentator on pagan and Christian information) speaks of the Word as “the Alpha and the Omega of Whom alone the end becomes beginning, and ends again at the original beginning without any break” (Stromata, IV, 25). Tertullian (lawyer, theologian) also alludes to Christ as the Alpha and Omega (De Monogamiâ, v), and from Prudentius (Cathemer. ix, 10) we learn that in the fourth century the interpretation of the apocalyptic letters was still the same: “Alpha ET Omega cognominatus, ipse Fon et clausula, Omnium quae sunt, fuerunt, quaeque post futura sunt.” It was, however, in the monuments of early Christianity that the symbolic Alpha and Omega had their greatest vogue.
This phrase is interpreted by many Christians to mean that Jesus existed from eternity (as the second person of the Trinity), and will exist eternally. Alpha and omega are the first and last letters of the Greek alphabet, signifying that God is “the beginning and the end,” or eternal. The symbols were used in early Christianity and appear in the Roman catacombs.
The Alpha and Omega symbols are often combined with the cross, chi rho, or other Christian symbols.
Judaism
In Rabbinic literature, the word emet (meaning “truth”), one of the names of God in Judaism, has been interpreted as consisting of the first, middle and final letters of the Hebrew alphabet.
Islam
The Qur’an gives al’Awwal meaning “The First” and al’Akhir, meaning “The Last” as two of the names of God: 57:3.
Babylonian cosmology
Babylonian literature (1900-1200 BC) Plurality of heavens and earths The Earth and Heavens are a “spatial whole, even one of round shape,” revolving around the “cult-place of the deity”[clarification needed] rather than the Earth, and there is a plurality of heavens and earths.
Brahmanda (Hindu Cosmology)
Hindu Rigveda (1700–1100 BC) Cyclical or oscillating, Infinite in time the universe sustains for around 311,040,000,000,000 years, or 100 Years of Brahma. There is a smaller period of unmanifestation in around 4 billion years, that is, one Day of Brahma. The universe cycles between expansion and total collapse. After one cycle of the life of Brahma another universe follows for infinity, each of which exists for a time period of 311 trillion 40 billion years. It also speaks of an infinite number of universes at one given point of time. The Universe expanded from a concentrated form, a point called a Bindu.
The universe, as a living entity, is bound to the perpetual cycle of birth, death, and rebirth.
Atomist universe Anaxagoras (500-428 BC) & later
Epicurus Infinite in extent –
The universe contains only two things: an infinite number of tiny seeds, or atoms, and the void of infinite extent. All atoms are made of the same substance, but differ in size and shape. Objects are formed from atom aggregations and decay back into atoms. Incorporates Leucippus’ principle of causality: “nothing happens at random; everything happens out of reason and necessity.” The universe was not ruled by gods.
Pythagorean universe Philolaus (d. 390 BC) Existence of a “Central Fire” at the center of the Universe. At the center of the Universe is a central fire, around which the Earth, Sun, Moon and planets revolve uniformly. The Sun revolves around the central fire once a year, the stars are immobile. The earth in its motion maintains the same hidden face towards the central fire, hence it is never seen. This is the first known non-geocentric model of the Universe.
Stoic universe Stoics (300 BC – 200 AD) Island universe The Cosmos is finite and surrounded by an infinite void. It is in a state of flux, as it pulsates in size and periodically passes through upheavals and conflagrations.
Aristotelian universe Aristotle (384-322 BC) Geocentric, static, steady state, finite extent, infinite time Spherical earth is surrounded by concentric celestial spheres. Universe exists unchanged throughout eternity. Contains a fifth element, called aether (later known as quintessence), and added to the four Classical elements.
Aristarchean universe Aristarchus (circa 280 BC) Heliocentric Earth rotates daily on its axis and revolves annually about the sun in a circular orbit. Sphere of fixed stars is centered about the sun.
Seleucian universe Seleucus of Seleucia (circa 190 BC) Heliocentric Modifications to the Aristarchean universe, with the inclusion of the tide phenomenon to explain heliocentrism.
Ptolemaic model (based on Aristotelian universe) Ptolemy (2nd century AD) Geocentric Universe orbits about a stationary Earth. Planets move in circular epicycles, each having a center that moved in a larger circular orbit (called an eccentric or a deferent) around a center-point near the Earth. The use of equants added another level of complexity and allowed astronomers to predict the positions of the planets. The most successful universe model of all time, using the criterion of longevity. Almagest (the Great System).
Aryabhatan model Aryabhata (499) Geocentric or Heliocentric the Earth rotates and the planets move in elliptical orbits, possibly around either the Earth or the Sun. It is uncertain whether the model is geocentric or heliocentric due to planetary orbits given with respect to both the Earth and the Sun.
Abrahamic universe Medieval philosophers (500-1200) Finite in time A universe that is finite in time and has a beginning is proposed by the Christian philosopher, John Philoponus, who argues against the ancient Greek notion of an infinite past. Logical arguments supporting a finite universe are developed by the early Muslim philosopher Alkindus, the Jewish philosopher Saadia Gaon and the Muslim theologian Algazel.
Multiversal cosmology Fakhr al-Din al-Razi (1149–1209) Multiverse, multiple worlds & universes there exists an infinite outer space beyond the known world, and God has the power to fill the vacuum with an infinite number of universes.
Maragha models Maragha School (1259–1528) Geocentric various modifications to Ptolemaic model and Aristotelian universe, including rejection of equant and eccentrics at Maragheh observatory, and introduction of Tusi-couple by Al-Tusi. Alternative models later proposed, including the first accurate lunar model by Ibn al-Shatir, a model rejecting stationary Earth in favor of Earth’s rotation by Ali Kusçu, and planetary model incorporating “circular inertia” by Al-Birjandi.
Nilakanthan model Nilakantha Somayaji (1444–1544) Geocentric and Heliocentric A universe in which the planets orbit the Sun and the Sun orbits the Earth, similar to the later Tychonic system.
Copernican universe Nicolaus Copernicus (1543) Heliocentric The geocentric Maragha model of Ibn al-Shatir adapted to meet the requirements of the ancient heliocentric Aristarchean universe in his De revolutionibus orbium coelestium.
Tychonic system Tycho Brahe(1546–1601) Geocentric and Heliocentric A universe in which the planets orbit the Sun and the Sun orbits the Earth, similar to the earlier Nilakanthan model.
Static Newtonian Sir Isaac Newton (1642–1727) Static (evolving), steady state, infinite every particle in the universe attracts every other particle. Matter on the large scale is uniformly distributed. Gravitationally balanced but unstable.
Cartesian Vortexuniverse René Descartes
17th Century Static (evolving), steady state, infinite a system of huge swirling whirlpools of aethereal or fine matter produces what we would call gravitational effects. His vacuum was not empty. All space was filled with matter that swirled around in large and small vortices.
Hierarchical universe Immanuel Kant, Johann Lambert
18th century Static (evolving), steady state, infinite Matter is clustered on ever larger scales of hierarchy. Matter is endlessly being recycled.
Einstein Universe with a cosmological constant
Albert Einstein1917 Static (nominally). Bounded (finite) “Matter without motion.” Contains uniformly distributed matter. Uniformly curved spherical space; based on Riemann’s hypersphere. Curvature is set equal to? In effect? Is equivalent to a repulsive force which counteracts gravity? Unstable.
De Sitter universe Willem de Sitter
1917 Expanding flat space.
Steady state. > 0 “Motion without matter.
“Only apparently static. Based on Einstein’s General Relativity. Space expands with constant acceleration. Scale factor (radius of universe) increases exponentially, i.e. constant inflation.
MacMillan universe William Duncan MacMillan 1920s Static &
Steady state
New matter is created from radiation. Starlight is perpetually recycled into new matter particles.
Friedmann universe of spherical space Alexander Friedmann 1922 Spherical expanding space.
k= +1; no? Positive curvature. Curvature constant k = +1
Expands then recollapses. Spatially closed (finite).
Friedmann universe of hyperbolic space Alexander Friedmann 1924 Hyperbolic expanding space.
k= -1; no? Negative curvature. Said to be infinite (but ambiguous). Unbounded. Expands forever.
Dirac large numbers hypothesis Paul Dirac 1930s Expanding
Demands a large variation in G, which decreases with time. Gravity weakens as universe evolves.
Friedmann zero-curvature, a.k.a. the Einstein-DeSitter universe Einstein & DeSitter 1932 Expanding flat space.
k= 0; = 0 Critical density Curvature constant k = 0. Said to be infinite (but ambiguous). ‘Unbounded cosmos of limited extent.’ Expands forever. ‘Simplest’ of all known universes. Named after but not considered by Friedmann. Has a deceleration term q =½ which means that its expansion rate slows down.
BIG BANG THEORY = Only One Theory!
The original Big Bang. A.k.a. Friedmann-Lemaître Model
Georges Lemaître1927-29 Expansion
? > 0? > |Gravity|? Is positive and has a magnitude greater than Gravity. Universe has initial high density state (‘primeval atom’). Followed by a two stage expansion. ? Is used to destabilize the universe. (Lemaître is considered to be the father of the big bang model.)
Oscillating universe
(A.k.a. Friedmann-Einstein; was latter’s 1st choice after rejecting his own 1917 model) Favored by Friedmann
1920s Expanding and contracting in cycles Time is endless and beginningless; thus avoids the beginning-of-time paradox.
Perpetual cycles of big Bang followed by the big Crunch.
Eddington Arthur Eddington1930 First Static
Then Expands Static Einstein 1917 universe with its instability disturbed into expansion mode; with relentless matter dilution becomes a DeSitter universe. ? Dominates gravity.
Milne universe of kinematic relativity Edward Milne, 1933, 1935;
William H. McCrea, 1930s Kinematic expansion with NO space expansion Rejects general relativity and the expanding space paradigm. Gravity not included as initial assumption. Obeys cosmological principle & rules of special relativity. The Milne expanding universe consists of a finite spherical cloud of particles (or galaxies) that expands WITHIN flat space which is infinite and otherwise empty. It has a center and a cosmic edge (the surface of the particle cloud) which expands at light speed. His explanation of gravity was elaborate and unconvincing. For instance, his universe has an infinite number of particles, hence infinite mass, within a finite cosmic volume.
Friedmann-Lemaître-Robertson-Walker class of models Howard Robertson, Arthur Walker, 1935 uniformly expanding Class of universes that are homogenous and isotropic. Spacetime separates into uniformly curved space and cosmic time common to all co-moving observers. The formulation system is now known as the FLRW or Robertson-Walker metrics of cosmic time and curved space.
Steady-state expanding (Bondi & Gold) Herman Bondi, Thomas Gold1948 Expanding, steady state, infinite Matter creation rate maintains constant density. Continuous creation out of nothing from nowhere. Exponential expansion.
Deceleration term q = -1.
Steady-state expanding (Hoyle) Fred Hoyle 1948 Expanding, steady state; but unstable Matter creation rate maintains constant density. But since matter creation rate must be exactly balanced with the space expansion rate the system is unstable.
Ambiplasma Hannes Alfvén1965 Oskar Klein Cellular universe, expanding by means of matter-antimatter annihilation Based on the concept of plasma cosmology. The universe is viewed as meta-galaxies divided by double layers —hence its bubble-like nature. Other universes are formed from other bubbles. Ongoing cosmic matter-antimatter annihilations keep the bubbles separated and moving apart preventing them from interacting.
Brans-Dicke Carl H. Brans; Robert H. Dicke Expanding Based on Mach’s principle. G varies with time as universe expands. “But nobody is quite sure what Mach’s principle actually means.”
Cosmic inflation Alan Guth 1980 Big Bang with modification to solve horizon problem and flatness problem. Based on the concept of hot inflation. The universe is viewed as a multiple quantum flux —hence its bubble-like nature. Other universes are formed from other bubbles. Ongoing cosmic expansion kept the bubbles separated and moving apart preventing them from interacting.
MULTIVERSE THEORY

Eternal Inflation (a multiple universe model) Andreï Linde 1983 Big Bang with cosmic inflation
A multiverse, based on the concept of cold inflation, in which inflationary events occur at random each with independent initial conditions; some expand into bubble universes supposedly like our entire cosmos. Bubbles nucleate in spacetime foam.
Physical cosmology, as a branch of astronomy, is the study of the largest-scale structures and dynamics of the universe and is concerned with fundamental questions about its formation and evolution.
For most of human history, it was a branch of metaphysics and religion. Cosmology as a science originated with the Copernican principle, which implies that celestial bodies obey identical physical laws to those on Earth, and Newtonian mechanics, which first allowed us to understand those laws.
Physical cosmology, as it is now understood, began with the twentieth century development of Albert Einstein’s general theory of relativity and better astronomical observations of extremely distant objects.
These advances made it possible to speculate about the origin of the universe, and allowed scientists to establish the Big Bang Theory as the leading cosmological model. Some researchers still advocate a handful of alternative cosmologies; however, cosmologists generally agree that the Big Bang theory best explains observations.
Cosmology draws heavily on the work of many disparate areas of research in physics.
Areas relevant to cosmology include particle physics experiments and theory, including string theory, astrophysics, general relativity, and plasma physics. Thus, cosmology unites the physics of the largest structures in the universe with the physics of the smallest structures in the universe.
Universal Disciplines
In recent times, physics and astrophysics have played a central role in shaping the understanding of the universe through scientific observation and experiment. What is known as physical cosmology shaped through both mathematics and observation the analysis of the whole universe. It is generally understood to begin with the Big Bang combined with cosmic inflation – an expansion of space from which the universe is thought to have emerged ~13.7±0.2×109 (roughly 13.5-13.9 billion) years ago.
Physical cosmologists propose that the history of the universe has been governed entirely by physical laws. Such theories of an impersonal universe governed by physical laws were first proposed by Roger Bacon.
Between the domains of religion and science, stands the philosophical perspective of metaphysical cosmology. This ancient field of study seeks to draw intuitive conclusions about the nature of the universe, man, a supernatural creator and/or their relationships based on the extension of some set of presumed facts borrowed from spiritual experience and/or observation.
Metaphysical Cosmology
Metaphysical cosmology has also been described as the placing of man in the universe in relationship to all other entities. This is exampled by the observation made by Marcus Aurelius of a man’s place in that relationship: “He who does not know what the world is does not know where he is, and he who does not know for what purpose the world exists, does not know who he is, nor what the world is.”
Cosmology is often an important aspect of the creation myths of religions that seek to explain the existence and nature of reality. In some cases, views about the creation (cosmogony) and destruction (eschatology) of the universe play a central role in shaping a framework of religious cosmology for understanding humanity’s role in the universe.
A more contemporary distinction between religion and philosophy, esoteric cosmology is distinguished from religion in its less tradition-bound construction and reliance on modern “intellectual understanding” rather than faith, and from philosophy in its emphasis on spirituality as a formative concept.
History of Physical Cosmology

See also: Timeline of cosmology and List of cosmologists
Modern cosmology developed along tandem tracks of theory and observation. In 1915, Albert Einstein formulated his theory of general relativity, which provided a unified description of gravity as a geometric property of space and time. At the time, physicists believed in a perfectly static universe that had no beginning or end. Einstein added a cosmological constant to his theory in order to force it to model a static universe containing matter.
This so-called Einstein universe is, however, unstable; it will eventually start expanding or contracting. The cosmological solutions of general relativity were found by Alexander Friedmann, whose equations describe the Friedmann-Lemaître-Robertson-Walker universe, which may expand or contract.
In the 1910s, Vesto Slipher (and later Carl Wilhelm Wirtz) interpreted the red shift of spiral nebulae as a Doppler shift that indicated they were receding from Earth. However, it is difficult to determine the distance to astronomical objects. One way is to compare the physical size of an object to its angular size, but a physical size must be assumed to do this. Another method is to measure the brightness of an object and assume an intrinsic luminosity, from which the distance may be determined using the inverse square law. Due to the difficulty of using these methods, they did not realize that the nebulae were actually galaxies outside our own Milky Way, nor did they speculate about the cosmological implications. In 1927, the Belgian Roman Catholic priest Georges Lemaître independently derived the Friedmann-Lemaître-Robertson-Walker equations and proposed, on the basis of the recession of spiral nebulae that the universe began with the “explosion” of a “primeval atom” — which was later called the Big Bang. In 1929, Edwin Hubble provided an observational basis for Lemaître’s theory. Hubble showed that the spiral nebulae were galaxies by determining their distances using measurements of the brightness of Cepheid variable stars. He discovered a relationship between the redshift of a galaxy and its distance. He interpreted this as evidence that the galaxies are receding from Earth in every direction at speeds directly proportional to their distance. This fact is now known as Hubble’s law, though the numerical factor Hubble found relating recessional velocity and distance was off by a factor of ten, due to not knowing at the time about different types of Cepheid variables.
Given the cosmological principle, Hubble’s law suggested that the universe was expanding. There were two primary explanations put forth for the expansion of the universe. One was Lemaître’s Big Bang theory, advocated and developed by George Gamow. The other possibility was Fred Hoyle’s steady state model in which new matter would be created as the galaxies moved away from each other. In this model, the universe is roughly the same at any point in time.
For a number of years the support for these theories was evenly divided. However, the observational evidence began to support the idea that the universe evolved from a hot dense state. The discovery of the cosmic microwave background in 1965 lent strong support to the Big Bang model, and since the precise measurements of the cosmic microwave background by the Cosmic Background Explorer in the early 1990s, few cosmologists have seriously proposed other theories of the origin and evolution of the cosmos. One consequence of this is that in standard general relativity, the universe began with a singularity, as demonstrated by Stephen Hawking and Roger Penrose in the 1960s.
Light elements, primarily hydrogen and helium, were created in the Big Bang.
These light elements were spread too fast and too thinly in the Big Bang process (see nucleosynthesis) to form the most stable medium-sized atomic nuclei, like iron and nickel. This fact allows for later energy release, as such intermediate-sized elements are formed in our era. The formation of such atoms powers the steady energy-releasing reactions in stars, and also contributes to sudden energy releases, such as in novae. Gravitational collapse of matter into black holes is also thought to power the most energetic processes, generally seen at the centers of galaxies (see quasars and in general active galaxies).
Cosmologists are still unable to explain all cosmological phenomena purely on the basis of known conventional forms of energy, for example those related to the accelerating expansion of the universe, and therefore invoke a yet unexplored form of energy called dark energy to account for certain cosmological observations. One hypothesis is that dark energy is the energy of virtual particles (which mathematically must exist in vacuum due to the uncertainty principle).
There is no unambiguous way to define the total energy of the universe in the current best theory of gravity, general relativity. As a result it remains controversial whether one can meaningfully say that total energy is conserved in an expanding universe. For instance, each photon that travels through intergalactic space loses energy due to the redshift effect.
This energy is not obviously transferred to any other system, so seems to be permanently lost.
Nevertheless some cosmologists insist that energy is conserved in some sense. The Omniverse
The Universe
The universe is all of reality. It is an infinite span of space and time, all forms of matter, energy and momentum, and the physical laws and constants that govern them. It is everything that exists, has existed, and will exist. It’s an infinite refrain…
Main Universes:
Each of these Universes is connected to an infinite Multiverse. These are the four main ones that the Human side chapter focuses on. However, there are many more main universes within the series.
– 022390 Universe: It is an infinite universe that was created by Cronos and Rhea after a Big Bang.
– 51303 Universe: It is an infinite universe that was created by the Supreme Being of Hinduism.
– 81889 Universe: It is an infinitely infinite universe that was created by the Big Bang.
– 121693 Universe: It is an infinite universe that was created by the word of the Christian Omnipotent God.
– Unknown Universe: An infinite universe created by the hatred of Satan.
The Multiverse
The multiverse is the collection of multiple possible universes that together encompass everything that physically exists: the entirety of space and time, all forms of matter, energy and concepts, and the physical laws and constants that govern them.
Every universe within the Multiverse is absolutely endless and it so infinite that it repeats in an endless refrains. The various universes within the Multiverse are sometimes called parallel universes, alternative universes, quantum universes, interpenetrating dimensions, parallel dimensions, parallel worlds, alternative realities, and alternative timelines. The Multiverse is infinite, but there are an infinite amount of Multiverses within the Heir to the Stars series.
List of higher realities

– Superverse: The Superverse is a level of reality that encompasses all infinite Multiverses…
– Hyperverse: The Hyperverse is a level of reality that is infinitely infinite and houses an infinitely infinite amount of all Superverses.
– Megaverse: A Megaverse houses multiple infinitely infinite Hyperverses
– Ultraverse: The Ultraverse is the greater levels of infinity…It’s virtually an infinite number of Omniverses.
– The Interdimensional Rift: The rift is a level of reality that exists within and outside of the Omniverse. It is connected to every single form of reality and it exists within and outside of space-time. The passage of time does not exist within the rift and it is infinitely infinite. It is an eternal prison.
The Omniverse
The Omniverse is the collection of all possible universes, with all possible laws of physics. Everything ranging from all of fiction as well as real life is within the Omniverse. This all depends on the reality that you exist in and what you see as fiction and reality. It is the collection of every single Universe, Multiverse, Superverse, Hyperverse, Megaverse, and Ultraverse; every timeline, reality, dimension (alternate, micro, virtual or pocket) and realm. Every form of existence ever mentioned or seen (and the infinitely infinite amount never mentioned or seen or even conceived of yet…)
All folklores, novels, comic books and fiction exist within the creation known as Omniverse. They’re all part of one. The branches of literary work, theatrical work, cinematic work, documental work, and musical work all exist within the Omniverse. Every television show, movie, and/or form of idea is an actual universe and each universe exists within the Omniverse. The Omniverse is infinitely infinite. However, there is not just one Omniverse…
There is an infinitely infinite amount of Omniverses! Each one exists within regions, and each region exits within a higher level outside of infinity…
Example – Region 1 out of infinity includes for the following sections with each one housing an absolute infinitude of infinitely infinite Omniverses with in it:
1. North
2. North by east
3. North-northeast
4. Northeast by north
5. Northeast
6. Northeast by east
7. East-northeast
8. East by north
9. East
10. East by south
11. East-southeast
12. Southeast by east
13. Southeast
14. Southeast by south
15. South-southeast
16. South by east
17. South
18. South by west
19. South-southwest
20. Southwest by south
21. Southwest
22. Southwest by west
23. West-southwest
24. West by south
25. West
26. West by north
27. West-northwest
28. Northwest by west
29. Northwest
30. Northwest by north
31. North-northwest
32. North by west
There an infinite amount of Omniverses within a single Region. There is an infinite amount of Regions, each one possessing infinitude subsets, supersets, and all-sets of hierarchies of Omniverses.
Cardinalities
Outside of all Regions, there is a transfinite amount of cardinalities. The cardinalities possess an Aleph-Null amount of infinite Omniverses. Encompassing this, Omni-possibility and Omni-actuality are only the beginning to a greater concept. Each Omniverse is unique and distinct from the last. Outside of the cardinalities are merely higher systems of existences far beyond the parameters of Existence (the complete ensemble of all that exists).
The End of Infinity
Reality is everything that is and has being, whether or not it is observable or comprehensible. Even nothingness is a part of reality…
Existence is the world of which we are aware through our senses and persists independently without them. Even nothingness is a part of existence…
Qualia are the ways things seem to us…
Being is anything that can be said to be…
“God exists”…means “God is a thing/being”…
Collectively, this is what is conceptualized as “Everything in the Omniverse”
…Outside of the Omniverse brings no nothingness, no truth, no fiction, no everything, no strength, no weakness, no mind, no soul, no possibility, no beliefs, no views, and no perspectives.
…Outside of the Omniverse awaits an infinite refrain where the abstract boundless is broken, but at the end of the infinity lays the Nexus. The Nexus is the Garden of Eden and the end of infinity.
Beyond the end of infinity lies the entrance to the Alphaverse and the Omegaverse;
“Soto Subete Mugen” and “Bahara Saba Anantata” (Both meaning: outside all infinity)
Mainfold

The Mainfold is the system that encompasses an Infinity (not to be confused with infinity or the greatest Infinity, but everything stated above) together. It is known as the Outside of Infinity, but it is truly named as the Mainfold.
Beyond the Mainfold is the Road to Tomorrow, yet the Door to Tomorrow rest on the edge of the Mainfold…
At the beginning of the Mainfold is the Alphaverse…
At the end of the Mainfold is the Omegaverse…
The Door to Truth rests on the eight corners of the Mainfold, which is the gateway to and from certain Infinities…
“The Alphaverse” & “The Omegaverse”
Bahara Saba Anantata; it is the gateway that leads down to the Omegaverse. The Omegaverse is the final realm. It is far outside of the Omniverse and singly far beyond infinitely endlessly larger than the collection of every infinite Omniverse that exists before the Nexus. All infinite Omniverses combined are smaller than a pinpoint within the Omegaverse.
It is here, the story will end…
Soto Subete Mugen; it is the gateway that leads to up the Alphaverse. The Alphaverse is the very first realm. It is far outside of the Omniverse and singly far beyond infinitely endlessly larger than the collection of every infinite Omniverse that exists before the Nexus. All infinite Omniverses combined are smaller than a pinpoint within the Alphaverse.
It is here, everything began… Time ship Earth 2013
Earth is a time ship, voyaging through galactic time. Every single one of us, whether we are aware of it or not, is a galactic kin upon this time ship. Up until now we might have thought it was “spaceship Earth.” But that is only because we were in the wrong time – we didn’t know what time really was!
The meaning of 2012 lies in our waking up to the actual nature of time. Once this occurs we will see that time is the fourth dimension, that Earth is not a spaceship but a time ship, and that the purpose of operating in the 13:20 frequency of galactic time is to transform the planet into a work of art. We are aboard the time ship to learn and practice the planetary art of galactic time. The first stage of this is the rainbow bridge.
Time ship Earth 2013 is how we navigate the new evolutionary cycle – the noosphere, the time of universal peace, harmony and telepathy. By 2013, Earth will no longer be operating in the 12:60 frequencies, but in the natural 13:20 frequency of synchronization. To advance the coming of the new time of harmony, the call is put out for the Harmonic Convergence of 2012, synchronized celebrations at sacred sites around the world during 2012. This planetary awakening will be the conclusion to the Harmonic Convergence of 1987, and the appropriate groundwork for entry into Timeship Earth 2013.
Thermodynamics of the universe is a field of study to explore which form of energy dominates the cosmos – relativistic particles which are referred to as radiation, or non-relativistic particles which are referred to as matter. The former are particles whose rest mass is zero or negligible compared to their energy, and therefore move at the speed of light or very close to it; the latter are particles whose kinetic energy is much lower than their rest mass and therefore move much slower than the speed of light.
As the universe expands, both matter and radiation in it become diluted.
However, the universe also cools down, meaning that the average energy per particle is getting smaller with time.
Therefore the radiation becomes weaker, and dilutes faster than matter. Thus with the expansion of the universe radiation becomes less dominant than matter. In the very early universe radiation dictates the rate of deceleration of the universe’s expansion, and the universe is said to be ‘radiation dominated’. At later times, when the average energy per photon is roughly 10 eV and lower, matter dictates the rate of deceleration and the universe is said to be ‘matter dominated’. The intermediate case is not treated well analytically. As the expansion of the universe continues, matter dilutes even further and the cosmological constant becomes dominant, leading to acceleration in the universe’s expansion.
History of the Universe
The history of the universe is a central issue in cosmology. The history of the universe is divided into different periods called epochs, according to the dominant forces and processes in each period. The standard cosmological model is known as the CDM model.
Equations of motion
Friedmann-Lemaître-Robertson-Walker metric
The equations of motion governing the universe as a whole are derived from general relativity with a small, positive cosmological constant.
The solution is an expanding universe; due to this expansion the radiation and matter in the universe are cooled down and become diluted. At first, the expansion is slowed down by gravitation due to the radiation and matter content of the universe. However, as these become diluted, the cosmological constant becomes more dominant and the expansion of the universe starts to accelerate rather than decelerate. In our universe this has already happened, billions of years ago.
Particle physics in cosmology
Particle physics is important to the behavior of the early universe, since the early universe was so hot that the average energy density was very high. Because of this, scattering processes and decay of unstable particles are important in cosmology.
As a rule of thumb, a scattering or a decay process is cosmologically important in a certain cosmological epoch if the time scale describing that process is smaller or comparable to the time scale of the expansion of the universe, which is
1 / H with
H being the Hubble constant at that time. This is roughly equal to the age of the universe at that time.
Timeline of the Big Bang
Observations suggest that the universe began around 13.7 billion years ago. Since then, the evolution of the universe has passed through three phases. The very early universe, which is still poorly understood, was the split second in which the universe was so hot that particles had energies higher than those currently accessible in particle accelerators on Earth. Therefore, while the basic features of this epoch have been worked out in the Big Bang theory, the details are largely based on educated guesses. Following this, in the early universe, the evolution of the universe proceeded according to known high energy physics. This is when the first protons, electrons and neutrons formed, then nuclei and finally atoms. With the formation of neutral hydrogen, the cosmic microwave background was emitted. Finally, the epoch of structure formation began, when matter started to aggregate into the first stars and quasars, and ultimately galaxies, clusters of galaxies and superclusters formed. The future of the universe is not yet firmly known, but according to the CDM model it will continue expanding forever.
Areas of study
Below, some of the most active areas of inquiry in cosmology are described, in roughly chronological order. This does not include all of the Big Bang cosmology, which is presented in Timeline of the Big Bang.
The very early universe
While the early, hot universe appears to be well explained by the Big Bang from roughly 10-33 seconds onwards, there are several problems. One is that there is no compelling reason, using current particle physics, to expect the universe to be flat, homogeneous and isotropic (see the cosmological principle). Moreover, grand unified theories of particle physics suggest that there should be magnetic monopoles in the universe, which have not been found. These problems are resolved by a brief period of cosmic inflation, which drives the universe to flatness, smooths out anisotropies and in homogeneities to the observed level and exponentially dilutes the monopoles. The physical model behind cosmic inflation is extremely simple, however it has not yet been confirmed by particle physics, and there are difficult problems reconciling inflation and quantum field theory.
Some cosmologists think that string theory and brane cosmology will provide an alternative to inflation.
Another major problem in cosmology is what caused the universe to contain more particles than antiparticles. Cosmologists can observationally deduce that the universe is not split into regions of matter and antimatter. If it were, there would be X-rays and gamma rays produced as a result of annihilation, but this is not observed. This problem is called the baryon asymmetry, and the theory to describe the resolution is called baryogenesis. The theory of baryogenesis was worked out by Andrei Sakharov in 1967, and requires a violation of the particle physics symmetry, called CP-symmetry, between matter and antimatter. Particle accelerators, however, measure too small a violation of CP-symmetry to account for the baryon asymmetry. Cosmologists and particle physicists are trying to find additional violations of the CP-symmetry in the early universe that might account for the baryon asymmetry.
Both the problems of baryogenesis and cosmic inflation are very closely related to particle physics, and their resolution might come from high energy theory and experiment, rather than through observations of the universe.
Big bang nucleosynthesis
Main article: Big bang nucleosynthesis
Big Bang Nucleosynthesis is the theory of the formation of the elements in the early universe. It finished when the universe was about three minutes old and its temperature dropped below that at which nuclear fusion could occur. Big Bang nucleosynthesis had a brief period during which it could operate, so only the very lightest elements were produced. Starting from hydrogen ions (protons), it principally produced deuterium, helium-4 and lithium. Other elements were produced in only trace abundances.
The basic theory of nucleosynthesis was developed in 1948 by George Gamow, Ralph Asher Alpher and Robert Herman. It was used for many years as a probe of physics at the time of the Big Bang, as the theory of Big Bang nucleosynthesis connects the abundances of primordial light elements with the features of the early universe. Specifically, it can be used to test the equivalence principle, to probe dark matter, and test neutrino physics. Some cosmologists have proposed that Big Bang nucleosynthesis suggests there is a fourth “sterile” species of neutrino.
Cosmic microwave background

The cosmic microwave background is radiation left over from decoupling after the epoch of recombination when neutral atoms first formed. At this point, radiation produced in the Big Bang stopped Thomson scattering from charged ions. The radiation, first observed in 1965 by Arno Penzias and Robert Woodrow Wilson, has a perfect thermal black-body spectrum. It has a temperature of 2.7 kelvins today and is isotropic to one part in 105. Cosmological perturbation theory, which describes the evolution of slight in homogeneities in the early universe, has allowed cosmologists to precisely calculate the angular power spectrum of the radiation, and it has been measured by the recent satellite experiments (COBE and WMAP) and many ground and balloon-based experiments (such as Degree Angular Scale Interferometer, Cosmic Background Imager, and Boomerang). One of the goals of these efforts is to measure the basic parameters of the Lambda-CDM model with increasing accuracy, as well as to test the predictions of the Big Bang model and look for new physics. The recent measurements made by WMAP, for example, have placed limits on the neutrino masses.
Newer experiments, such as QUIET and the Atacama Cosmology Telescope, are trying to measure the polarization of the cosmic microwave background. These measurements are expected to provide further confirmation of the theory as well as information about cosmic inflation, and the so-called secondary anisotropies, such as the Sunyaev-Zel’dovich effect and Sachs-Wolfe effect, which are caused by interaction between galaxies and clusters with the cosmic microwave background.
Formation and evolution of large-scale structure
Main articles: Large-scale structure of the cosmos, Structure formation, and Galaxy formation and evolution
Understanding the formation and evolution of the largest and earliest structures (i.e., quasars, galaxies, clusters and superclusters) is one of the largest efforts in cosmology. Cosmologists study a model of hierarchical structure formation in which structures form from the bottom up, with smaller objects forming first, while the largest objects, such as superclusters, are still assembling. One way to study structure in the universe is to survey the visible galaxies, in order to construct a three-dimensional picture of the galaxies in the universe and measure the matter power spectrum. This is the approach of the Sloan Digital Sky Survey and the 2dF Galaxy Redshift Survey.
Another tool for understanding structure formation is simulations, which cosmologists use to study the gravitational aggregation of matter in the universe, as it clusters into filaments, superclusters and voids.
Most simulations contain only non-baryonic cold dark matter, which should suffice to understand the universe on the largest scales, as there is much more dark matter in the universe than visible, baryonic matter. More advanced simulations are starting to include baryons and study the formation of individual galaxies.
Cosmologists study these simulations to see if they agree with the galaxy surveys, and to understand any discrepancy.
Other, complementary observations to measure the distribution of matter in the distant universe and to probe reionization include:
The Lyman alpha forest, which allows cosmologists to measure the distribution of neutral atomic hydrogen gas in the early universe, by measuring the absorption of light from distant quasars by the gas.
The 21 centimeter absorption line of neutral atomic hydrogen also provides a sensitive test of cosmology
Weak lensing, the distortion of a distant image by gravitational lensing due to dark matter.
These will help cosmologists settle the question of when and how structure formed in the universe.
Dark matter
Evidence from Big Bang nucleosynthesis, the cosmic microwave background and structure formation suggests that about 23% of the mass of the universe consists of non-baryonic dark matter, whereas only 4% consists of visible, baryonic matter. The gravitational effects of dark matter are well understood, as it behaves like a cold, non-radiative fluid that forms haloes around galaxies. Dark matter has never been detected in the laboratory, and the particle physics nature of dark matter remains completely unknown. Without observational constraints, there are a number of candidates, such as a stable supersymmetric particle, a weakly interacting massive particle, an axion, and a massive compact halo object. Alternatives to the dark matter hypothesis include a modification of gravity at small accelerations (MOND) or an effect from brane cosmology.
Dark energy
If the universe is flat, there must be an additional component making up 73% (in addition to the 23% dark matter and 4% baryons) of the energy density of the universe. This is called dark energy. In order not to interfere with Big Bang nucleosynthesis and the cosmic microwave background, it must not cluster in haloes like baryons and dark matter. There is strong observational evidence for dark energy, as the total energy density of the universe is known through constraints on the flatness of the universe, but the amount of clustering matter is tightly measured, and is much less than this. The case for dark energy was strengthened in 1999, when measurements demonstrated that the expansion of the universe has begun to gradually accelerate.

Apart from its density and its clustering properties, nothing is known about dark energy. Quantum field theory predicts a cosmological constant much like dark energy, but 120 orders of magnitude larger than that observed. Steven Weinberg and a number of string theorists (research the string landscape) have used this as evidence for the anthropic principle, which suggests that the cosmological constant is so small because life (and thus physicists, to make observations) cannot exist in a universe with a large cosmological constant, but many people find this an unsatisfying explanation. Other possible explanations for dark energy include quintessence or a modification of gravity on the largest scales. The effect on cosmology of the dark energy that these models describe is given by the dark energy’s equation of state, which varies depending upon the theory. The nature of dark energy is one of the most challenging problems in cosmology.
A better understanding of dark energy is likely to solve the problem of the ultimate fate of the universe. In the current cosmological epoch, the accelerated expansion due to dark energy is preventing structures larger than superclusters from forming. It is not known whether the acceleration will continue indefinitely, perhaps even increasing until a big rip, or whether it will eventually reverse.
Other areas of inquiry that other Cosmologists also study:
Whether primordial black holes were formed in our universe, and what happened to them.
The GZK cutoff for high-energy cosmic rays, and whether it signals a failure of special relativity at high energies the equivalence principle, whether or not Einstein’s general theory of relativity is the correct theory of gravitation, and if the fundamental laws of physics are the same everywhere in the universe see Hawking, Stephen W. (2001). The Universe in a Nutshell. Bantam Books, Inc. ISBN 0-553-80202-X.
Simon Singh (2005). Big Bang: the origins of the universe. Fourth Estate. ISBN 0-00-716221-9.
Steven Weinberg (1993; 1978). The First Three Minutes. Basic Books. ISBN 0-465-02437-8. Cyclic model Paul Steinhardt; Neil Turok 2002 Expanding and contracting in cycles; M theory. Two parallel orbifold planes or M-branes collide periodically in a higher dimensional space. With quintessence or dark energy
Cyclic model Lauris Baum;Paul Frampton 2007 Solution of Tolman’s entropy problem Phantom dark energy fragments universe into large number of disconnected patches. Our patch contracts containing only dark energy with zero entropy.
Table notes: the term “static” simply means not expanding and not contracting. Symbol G represents Newton’s gravitational constant; (Lambda) is the cosmological constant.
Physical cosmology
Physical cosmology is the branch of physics and astrophysics that deals with the study of the physical origins and evolution of the Universe. It also includes the study of the nature of the Universe on its very largest scales. In its earliest form it was what is now known as celestial mechanics, the study of the heavens.
The Greek philosophers Aristarchus of Samos, Aristotle and Ptolemy proposed different cosmological theories. In particular, the geocentric Ptolemaic system was the accepted theory to explain the motion of the heavens until Nicolaus Copernicus, and subsequently Johannes Kepler and Galileo Galilei proposed a heliocentric system in the 16th century. This is known as one of the most famous examples of epistemological rupture in physical cosmology.
With Isaac Newton and the 1687 publication of Principia Mathematica, the problem of the motion of the heavens was finally solved. Newton provided a physical mechanism for Kepler’s laws and his law of universal gravitation allowed the anomalies in previous systems, caused by gravitational interaction between the planets, to be resolved. A fundamental difference between Newton’s cosmology and those preceding it was the Copernican principle that the bodies on earth obey the same physical laws as all the celestial bodies.
This was a crucial philosophical advance in physical cosmology.
Modern scientific cosmology is usually considered to have begun in 1917 with Albert Einstein’s publication of his final modification of general relativity in the paper “Cosmological Considerations of the General Theory of Relativity,” (although this paper was not widely available outside of Germany until the end of World War I). General relativity prompted cosmogonists such as Willem de Sitter, Karl Schwarzschild and Arthur Eddington to explore the astronomical consequences of the theory, which enhanced the growing ability of astronomers to study very distant objects. Prior to this (and for some time afterwards), physicists assumed that the Universe was static and unchanging.
In parallel to this dynamic approach to cosmology, one long-standing debate about the structure of the cosmos was coming to a climax. Mount Wilson astronomer Harlow Shapley championed the model of a cosmos made up of the Milky Way star system only; while Heber D. Curtis argued for the idea that spiral nebulae were star systems in their own right – island universes. This difference of ideas came to a climax with the organization of the Great Debate at the meeting of the (US) National Academy of Sciences in Washington on 26 April 1920. The resolution of this debate came with the detection of novae in the Andromeda galaxy by Edwin Hubble in 1923 and 1924. Their distance established spiral nebulae well beyond the edge of the Milky Way and has galaxies of their own.
Subsequent modeling of the universe explored the possibility that the cosmological constant introduced by Einstein in his 1917 paper may result in an expanding universe, depending on its value. Thus the big bang model was proposed by the Belgian priest Georges Lemaître in 1927 which was subsequently corroborated by Edwin Hubble’s discovery of the red shift in 1929 and later by the discovery of the cosmic microwave background radiation by Arno Penzias and Robert Woodrow Wilson in 1964.
These findings were a first step to rule out some of many alternative physical cosmologies.
Recent observations made by the COBE and WMAP satellites observing this background radiation have effectively, in many scientists’ eyes, transformed cosmology from a highly speculative science into a predictive science, as these observations matched predictions made by a theory called Cosmic inflation, which is a modification of the standard big bang model. This has led many to refer to modern times as the “Golden age of cosmology.”
This text gives an encyclopedic account of the Jain tradition.
—————-The text is widely quoted.
A widely used quote from Carl Sagan’s Cosmos, page 140 is:
“Some foolish men declare that Creator made the world. The doctrine that the world was created is ill-advised, and should be rejected. If god created the world, where was he before creation? If you say he was transcendent then, and needed no support, where is he now?”
—————-
A number of Jain and non-Jain texts have been influenced by the Mahapurana. Mahapurana was the model for Saiva SiddhantaPeriyapuranam which gives biographies of the 63 individuals. Some writings are shared in various forms of inspired writings.
Ascension Age

We share the various New Age variations on a theme now as the Ascension AGE a new movement which officially begins on the winter solstice as December 21, 2012 at 11:11 universal time and Greenwich Time. We share what we call the love and the light. Some believe that those who are with us are all about the ascension as Christ Consciousness. It is true many of us would rather relate to those called good and are Christians.
We are taught what is good and right as Christ the son of light and the one who sits on the right hand of God and what many do not share is that we also have a God mother but her name was so sacred that God for whatever reason chose for us to know of her existence but we were not allowed to know her sacred name.
We are told that we were not to blaspheme against the Holy Ghost. What we all know is taught by the one called Jesus. He taught us to know and be those of faith, hope, charity but the greatest is love. We are to practice ascension and to follow in his message and his example to us as a great teacher from those above who are our elders and Co-creators of us all.
Ascension Age (12-21-12) Semiology, Cosmology, Golden Age of communication and technology sharing in space travel
Theresa Janette Thurmond Morris aka TJ Morris ACIR ACO
Categories:
Aliens and UFOs
Author articles by TJ recorded on UFO Digest of Canada (1987-2012)
Alien UFO Religion Article Exploitations Exposed Good for the Economy!
Alien ET Hybrid TJ Shares Space Robotoids Finds! Level of Each of us=Upgrades 2012
Alien/ET Theorists- UFO Paranormal Communication Changes
ET Inspiration Declared To Be Divine Ascension Age 12-21-2012
Alien ET TJ Shares the Sweet Joy of the 2012 Ascension Age with a Connection
ET UFO Community Path – A Brief History – 777
Thinking About Age in the ET UFO Era
ET Spacetime Grids for Humanoids
Alien ET Abductee/Contactee Ask What is wrong with The World in 2012?
ET Global Community Future of 2012
A compilation of information from Wikipedia the open source online resource. Redirected from UFOlogists not to be confused with UFO religion.
Ufology
Ufology (/juːˈfɒlədʒiː/) is the array of subject matter and activities associated with an interest in unidentified flying objects (UFOs). UFOs have been subject to various investigations over the years by governments, independent groups, and scientists. The term derives from UFO, which is pronounced as an acronym, and the suffix -logy,
Etymology
According to the Oxford English Dictionary, one of the first documented uses of the word ufology can be found in the Times Literary Supplement from January 23, 1959, in which it writes, “The articles, reports, and bureaucratic studies which have been written about this perplexing visitant constitute ‘ufology’.” This article was printed eight years after Edward J. Ruppelt of the United States Air Force (USAF) coined the word UFO in 1951.
Historical background
FOO Fighters
A Swedish Air Force officer searches for a “ghost rocket” in Lake Kölmjärv, Norrland, Sweden, in July 1946.
The modern UFO mythology has three traceable roots: the late 19th century “mystery airships” reported in the newspapers of western United States, “foo fighters” reported by Allied airmen during World War II, and the Kenneth Arnold “flying saucer” sighting near Mt. Rainier, Washington on June 24, 1947.
UFO reports between “The Great Airship Wave” and the Arnold sighting were limited in number compared to the post-war period: notable cases include reports of “ghost fliers” in Europe and North America during the 1930s and the numerous reports of “ghost rockets” in Scandinavia (mostly Sweden) from May to December 1946.
Media hype in the late 1940s and early 1950s following the Arnold sighting brought the concept of flying saucers to the public audience.
As the public’s preoccupation in UFOs grew, along with the number of reported sightings, the United States military began to take notice of the phenomenon. The UFO explosion of the early post-war era coincides with the escalation of the Cold War and the Korean War.
The U.S. military feared that secret aircraft of the Soviet Union, possibly developed from captured German technology, were behind the sightings.
If correct, the craft causing the sightings were thus of importance to national security and of need of systematic investigation.
A UFO Commanders team is shared by two of the 20st century by sharing their combined knowledge in various books to leave behind on earth when they leave.
TJ Morris ET

Some people know me as TJ Morris or TJ Morris ET.
Theresa Janette Thurmond born December 26, 1951 in Monroe, Ouachita Parish, Louisiana, USA.
One of two of a UFO Team with Thomas Ray Morris born May 16, 1959 in Lafayette, Tippecanoe County, Indiana, USA. One Male and Female who were the Commander Navigators working later in the Alien ET UFO Contact Team of the EBEs. Extra-biological Entities. Roswell UFO Encounters by Theresa J Morris is a book with the story line underground written with pseudo names of Sarah Thomas and John Harris. Theresa Thomas has a code name of Thothe the first three letters of her last name of her mother who remarried Charles Thomas. Theresa’s grandchildren were to live in Lubbock and named Jacob Thomas and Jordan Thomas raised without any knowledge of their UFO inheritance of UFOlogy in their memory banks. Two children were said to be extraterrestrials from birth out of four as the other two are only of the Theresa Janette who was genetically enhanced from the 1943 program which had a timeline from the Philadelphia Experiment gone Wrong with the Montauk Point Portal Wormhole time line 1968 68-43 is a 35 year window which is said to be opened and crossing and yet physically impossible to understand is said to be challenged by others with the chair of one of the crashed UFOS found in pieces at the farm where Mac Brazel was said to be photographed with pieces of the wreckage.
By 1952, however, the official US government interest in UFOs began to fade as the USAF projects Sign and Grudge concluded, along with the CIA’s Robertson Panel that UFO reports indicated no direct threat to national security.
The government’s official research into UFOs ended with the publication of the Condon Committee report in 1969, which concluded that the study of UFOs in the past 21 years had achieved little, if anything, and that further extensive study of UFO sightings was unwarranted. It also recommended the termination of the USAF special unit Project Blue Book.
As the U.S. government ceased officially studying UFO sightings, the same became true for most governments of the world. A notable exception is France, which still maintains the GEIPAN, formerly known as GEPAN (1977–1988) and SEPRA (1988–2004), a unit under the French Space Agency CNES. During the Cold War, British, Canadian, Danish, Italian, and Swedish governments have each collected reports of UFO sightings. Britain’s Ministry of Defence ceased accepting any new reports as of 2010.
Status as a field
Further information can be shared by future ACIR as the Alien Contactees Investigations Research Group and their compiled lists of UFOlogists for the ACE Folklife. Ufology is now shared as part of their history in their similar interests groups of folklife and part of anthropology due to the vast acceptance by various anthropologists, archaeologists, and historians.
Ufology has generally not been embraced by academia as a scientific field of study, even though UFOs were during the late 1940s and early 1950s the subject of large-scale scientific studies. The lack of acceptance of ufology by academia as a field of study means that people can claim to be “UFO researchers”, without the sorts of scientific consensus building and, in many cases peer review, that otherwise shape and influence scientific paradigms. Even among scientifically inclined UFO research efforts, data collecting is often done by amateur investigators.
Famous mainstream scientists who have shown interest in the UFO phenomenon include Stanford physicist Peter A. Sturrock, astronomer J. Allen Hynek, computer scientist and astronomer Jacques F. Vallée, and University of Arizona meteorologist James E. McDonald.
As a pseudoscience Ufology has sometimes been characterized as a partial or total pseudoscience, which many Ufologists reject
Pseudoscience is a term that classifies studies that are claimed to exemplify the methods and principles of science, but that do not adhere to an appropriate scientific methodology, lack supporting evidence or plausibility, or otherwise lack scientific status.
Feist thinks that ufology can be categorized as a pseudoscience because, he says, its adherents claim it to be a science while being rejected as being one by the scientific community and because, he says, the field lacks a cumulative scientific progress; ufology has not, in his view, advanced since the 1950s.[26] Cooper states that the fundamental problem in ufology is not the lack of scientific methodology, as many ufologists have striven to meet standards of scientific acceptability, but rather the fact that the assumptions on which the research is often based are considered highly speculative.
Methodological issues
Scientific UFO research suffers from the fact that the phenomena under observation do not usually make predictable appearances at a time and place convenient for the researcher.
Ufologist Diana Palmer Hoyt argues,
The UFO problem seems to bear a closer resemblance to problems in meteorology than in physics. The phenomena are observed, occur episodically, are not reproducible, and in large part, are identified by statistical gathering of data for possible organization into patterns. They are not experiments that can be replicated at will at the laboratory bench under controlled conditions.
On the other hand, skeptics have argued that UFOs are not a scientific problem at all, as there is no tangible physical evidence to study.
Barry Markovsky argues that, under scrutiny by qualified investigators, the vast majority of UFO sightings turn out to have mundane explanations.
Astronomer Carl Sagan stated on UFO sightings, “The reliable cases are uninteresting and the interesting cases are unreliable. Unfortunately there are no cases that are both reliable and interesting.”
Peter A. Sturrock states that UFO studies should be compartmentalized into at least “the following distinct activities”:
Field investigations leading to case documentation and the measurement or retrieval of physical evidence;
Laboratory analysis of physical evidence;
The systematic compilation of data (descriptive and physical) to look for patterns and so extract significant facts;
The analysis of compilations of data (descriptive and physical) to look for patterns and so extract significant facts;
The development of theories and the evaluation of those theories on the basis of facts.
Denzler states that ufology as a field of study has branched into two different mindsets: the first group of investigators wants to convince the unbelievers and earn intellectual legitimacy through systematic study using the scientific method, and the second group sees the follow-up questions concerning the origin and “mission” of the UFOs as more important than a potential academic standing.
UFO categorization
J. Allen Hynek (left) and Jacques Vallée
The “UFO” is unidentified flying object. Because it is unidentified, the classification and categorization are impossible. However, ufologists have proposed different systems for the classification.
Hynek system
Developed in the 1970s, J. Allen Hynek’s original system of description divides sightings into six categories. It first separates sightings into distant- and close-encounter categories, arbitrarily setting five-hundred feet as the cutoff point. It then subdivides these close and distant categories based on appearance or special features:
Nocturnal Lights (NL): Anomalous lights seen in the night sky.
Daylight Discs (DD): Any anomalous object, generally but not necessarily “discoidal”, seen in the distant daytime sky.
Radar/Visual cases (RV): Objects seen simultaneously by eye and on radar.
Hynek also defined three close encounter (CE) subcategories:
CE1: Strange objects seen nearby but without physical interaction with the environment.
CE2: A CE1 case that leaves physical evidence, e.g. soil depressions, vegetation damage, or causes electromagnetic interference.
CE3: CE1 or CE2 cases where occupants or entities are seen.
Later, Hynek introduced a fourth category, CE4, which is used to describe cases where the witness feels he was abducted by a UFO.
Some Ufologists have adopted a fifth category, CE5, which involves conscious human-initiated contact with extraterrestrial intelligence
Vallée system
Jacques Vallée has devised a UFO classification system, where the UFO sightings of four different categories are divided into five subcategories:
Close Encounter (CE): As per Hynek.
Maneuver (MA): Trajectory discontinuity in flight.
Fly-by (FB): No observed discontinuity in flight.
Anomaly (AN): Unusual lights or unexplained entities.
The five subcategories can apply to all previous categories of sightings:
Sighting Physical effects: for example, radar sighting
Life form or living entity
Reality transformation: witnesses experienced a transformation of their sense of reality (often corresponding to the popular characterization of the incident as abduction)
Physiological impact: Such as death or serious injury
Thus, the Vallée categorization categorizes cases as MA-2, AN-1, CE-4, for example.
Alleged academic ridicule
Stanton T. Friedman, Physicist, Spokesperson, Grandfather of UFOlogy
Stanton Friedman considers the general attitude of mainstream academics as arrogant and dismissive, or bound to a rigid world view that disallows any evidence contrary to previously held notions.
Denzler states that the fear of ridicule and a loss of status have prevented scientists of pursuing a public interest in UFOs.
J. Allen Hynek’s also commented, “Ridicule is not part of the scientific method and people should not be taught that it is.” Hynek said of the frequent dismissal of UFO reports by astronomers that the critics knew little about the sightings, and should thus not be taken seriously.
Peter A. Sturrock suggests that a lack of funding is a major factor in the institutional disinterest in UFOs.
Ufology and UFO reports
In addition to UFO sightings, certain supposedly related phenomena are of interest to some in the field of ufology, including crop circles, cattle mutilations, and alien abductions and implants.
Some ufologists have also promoted UFO conspiracy theories, including the alleged Roswell UFO Incident of 1947, the Majestic 12 documents, and UFO disclosure advocation.
We share on the Internet an open source encyclopedia system we can all add too and create known as the Wikipedia. In this location file of information we can see the work of Skeptics in etymology of Ufology as a sub-culture that exists.
Skeptic Robert Sheaffer has accused ufology of having a “credulity explosion”.
He claims a trend of increasingly sensational ideas steadily gaining popularity within ufology. Sheaffer remarked, “The kind of stories generating excitement and attention in any given year would have been rejected by mainstream Ufologists a few years earlier for being too outlandish.”
Likewise, James McDonald has expressed the view that extreme groups undermined serious scientific investigation, stating that a “bizarre ‘literature’ of pseudo-scientific discussion” on “spaceships bringing messengers of terrestrial salvation and occult truth” had been “one of the prime factors in discouraging serious scientists from looking into the UFO matter to the extent that might have led them to recognize quickly enough that cultism and wishful thinking have nothing to do with the core of the UFO problem.” In the same statement, McDonald said that, “Again, one must here criticize a good deal of armchair-researching (done chiefly via the daily newspapers that enjoy feature-writing the antics of the more extreme of such subgroups). A disturbing number of prominent scientists have jumped all too easily to the conclusion that only the nuts see UFOs.
Surveys of scientists and amateur astronomers concerning UFOs
In 1973, Peter A. Sturrock conducted a survey among members of the San Francisco chapter of the American Institute of Aeronautics and Astronautics, where 1175 questionnaires were mailed and 423 were returned, and found no consensus concerning the nature and scientific importance of the UFO phenomenon, with views ranging equally from “impossible” to “certain” in reply to the question, “Do UFOs represent a scientifically significant phenomenon?” In a later larger survey conducted among the members of the American Astronomical Society, where 2611 were questionnaires mailed and 1356 were returned, Sturrock found out that opinions were equally diverse, with 23% replying “certainly”, 30% “probably”, 27% “possibly”, 17% “probably not”, and 3% “certainly not”, to the question of whether the UFO problem deserves scientific study. Sturrock also asked in the same survey if the surveyee had witnessed any event which they could not have identified and which could have been related to the UFO phenomenon, with around 5% replying affirmatively.
In 1980, a survey of 1800 members of various amateur astronomer associations by Gert Herb and J. Allen Hynek of the Center for UFO Studies also knoan as CUFOS found that 24% responded “yes” to the question, “Have you ever observed an object which resisted your most exhaustive efforts at identification?”
Notable studies, panels, and conferences in ufology
We share the various people and tribes over time that shares some oral and written information. Some are faith keepers and some are memory sharers. Some actually come and go throughout time and are known as the Time Lords on this planet. We share those who make the little nudges to keep us on a course throughout time which was the original Chairman and Co-Chairman’s desires in what we call the Divine Plan for their creations.
We all have had a beginning and this is where we begin what we call our soul. It is the original point of origin for our unique essence that can come and go from various destinations which are of the co-creators original creations in what we know as nature. The natural environments of various levels of heavens were first created in what we know as the infirmities in space. All of this everything in what we know as the expansion of space is where the planets, galaxies, super clusters, nebulas, branes, and various levels, realms, and dimensions were co-created for all of the various creations such as animals, plants, minerals, and various species of humanoid sentient intelligent beings throughout time and space.
Indian Heritage Connection

We all share generations as our ancestry and DNA is now easily tracked as genome, and some of us claim oral history versus family history as our own. I use all that I personally relate too as what we call vibrations. We know that sound and vibration is important to our health and wellbeing. Our ancestors knew that too. We now know through science and government scientific research that sound waves can hurt and kill us.
My personal Indian shares of past lives are where I get most of my knowledge about seeing how sound can kill and also it is shared that it was sound that brought down the walls of Jericho. The vibrations of walking together creating vibrations in a circle plus the vibrations of a horn or drums have been used not only by Indians of the North American continent but in other Druid locations around the earth where the meridians and ley lines are located. Information for those who also believe in the crop circles. We can see that there were waves written and if one cares to investigate the patterns of our Native American Heritage one can find that the patterns were used and passed down not only in petroglyphs on rocks but in our designs on our Native American Indian Blankets and clothes, etc. The Alien Contact Organization combines all information for archiving purposes as oral and written knowledge as our history of the ancient ones.

Theresa as Tatonka as the White Buffalo Woman as many and only one messenger has shared and written with the Ascension Center Organization as the chosen messenger of those who are considered older and wiser as the angels and alien messengers. Some have seen those chosen as in the movie The Adjustment Bureau stories and Men in Black movies. Yet many are called and few are chosen.
Keeper of the Flame as the White Buffalo Spirit Returns to Bring Peace from all the Star Nations. We have many channels as those who know things as receivers and as we share we are called Medicine Women and Warriors who are like Shaman of the past. Some of us are still here today to assist as healers with sound and movement. This was why the Ghost Dance was so important and what the U.S. Government feared.
This was actually based not only on certain superstitions of group power such as in modern day Pow Wows but that of using sound and movement together to help heal and protect.
We can all learn to use our abilities to heal this planet and our own selves and communities. We are all one and connected in a way that we can still honor our own Native American Culture and Traditions. We should as one world connect with our native and natural tectonic plates. The ancient ones new of how we could work with mother nature as the world entity as a living organism.
ALL PEOPLE ARE INCLUDED and THERE IS NO MORE SEPARATION is the MESSAGE OF SPIRIT.
FORMER NATIVE AMERICAN TRIBES ARE STILL INVOLVED WITH NATIVE AMERICAN INDIAN FAMILIES AND THEIR CULTURE AND TRADITIONS.
MY GREAT – GRANDMOTHER TAUGHT THE INDIAN CHILDREN IN MISSOURI. HER name was Canzada Parsons.
She left us Messages of the CHEROKEE Indians in our Family Treasures to keep. Some of the notes I shall share. She spoke of teaching the Little Native American Indian Children in their Schools in Southern Missouri.
My other Grand Mother on my Father’s Side Lived on the Ouachita River with the Indians who she knew as the Leatherwoods. There are tales of the sheshoni-Blackfoot not getting along up North but they once told of Wilhelmina which is my Indian Name of a Young Boy who was the Chief’s Son who fell in Love with a Sheshoni Princess and One of My Grandmothers of the Cherokee Tribe was the Medicine Woman and she Saved the Story and had it written down and this is where we say that we are all ONE NATION. Note Shesoni is the Northern part of the SHESHONE TRIBE of CHIEF POCATELLO of IDAHO and UTAH MORMON STATE.
We also were always visited by the STAR NATIONS of those above and we share the STAR PEOPLE and the STAR BABIES as PART of our ACE FOLKLIFE to this day.
ASCENSION CENTER ORGANIZATION ACE FOLKLIFE CLUB is about PRESERVING all our INTERMIXED and CROSS CULTURE POLINIZATION likes BEES that go FLOWER TO FLOWER. This is our NORTHERN AMERICA HERITAGE and our CULTURE among the ones in my family who married the Mennonites, Amish, and Mormons.
THE NAME OF MANY NAMES WE HONOR AND KNOW OF LISTED TODAY ARE AS FOLLOWS:
Anasazi Indians
Apache Indians
Aztec Indians
Blackfoot Indians
Cherokee Indians
Cheyenne Indians
Chinook Indians
Chippewa Indians
Choctaw Indians
Comanche Indians
Cree Indians
Creek Indians
Crow Indians
Eastern Woodland Indians
Hopi Indians
Iroquois Indians
Lakota Indians
Mayan Indians
Mohawk Indians
Navajo Indians
Nez Perce Indians
Pawnee Indians
Plains Indians
Pueblo Indians
Seminole Indians
Seneca Indians
Sioux Indians
Shawnee Indians
Shoshone Indians
Southwest Indians
Taino Indians
Zuni Indians
Some of the Native American tribes that most of us know of are Indian tribes such as the Iroquois Indians. The Iroquois Indians lived in the northeast of what is now the United States, primarily throughout New York State and along the St. Lawrence River. The Iroquois Indians consisted of five tribes which were the Seneca, the Cayuga, the Mohawk, the Onondaga, and the Oneida. They were considered to be civilized Native American tribes. Another well-known tribe are the Cherokee Indians, who are believed to be a tribe that broke off from the Iroquois and migrated south into what is now the southeast United States. This is where they originally lived and when the Americans began to settle into the southeast they forced the Cherokees out and many moved to the Oklahoma area. This is recorded in history and known as the Trail of Tears. The Cherokee were very powerful and were also good allies of the Americans; and since they did not want to leave they went to the Supreme Court. The courts agreed and said the Cherokees could stay in their land, and then the American armies led by Andrew Jackson forced them out anyways. They were forced out during the harsh winter and many Native Americans died from this trip, thus giving it the name the Trail of Tears. Many of the Cherokee tribes did not want to leave their lands but many were forced into the territory of Oklahoma but some were able to hide from the Europeans along the Appalachian Trails. Many Cherokee still occupy Oklahoma today.
There were many more Native American tribes and cultures and some of the more well known outside of the east are the Apache who lived in the southwest of America. The southwest was also home to the Navajo Indians, who were one of the largest tribes in the United States. There were also many tribes in the plains states such as the Comanche Indians, the Kiowa, and the Pawnee. The great lakes region was home to the tribes such as the Chippewa and Wyandot Indians. The last area of the US was the northwest and the tribes that occupied that territory were the Shoshone, the Flathead and the Blackfoot. There are many Native American cultures still strong today and many reservations spread throughout the United States.

Project Sign, Project Grudge (USA, 1947–1949)
Nathan F. Twining
FATE Magazine was created in 1948 as the first Paranormal Magazine. FATE – 2012 & Beyond
An example of future articles will share science, and various topics and metadata as channeling, akashic insights, mystical energy, and artistry
And the art, culture, education, science, technology, history, and folklife of the people of the world.
ACO~Ascension Center organization’s ACE FOLKLIFE CLUB
Honestly, none of us have a clue what the future will hold for us however, we can make plans and hope for the best. I am a psychic medium who has died in this lifetime not just once but three times. I have written a book called Ascension Age 2012 & Beyond.
Also, I have been contacted and my life story can be seen in the “TAKEN” made for television. I am presently working on my own story called “ASCENSION AGE” and “TAKEN UP”. I have several books written but the one that most people are interested in is called “Roswell UFO Encounters” by Theresa J Morris. I wanted to become an author like my mother who gave me the gift of life and writing. We lived across from a library on two occasions in my childhood life growing up with her as my mother. I miss her as she passed over May 4, 2011 and my father passed Dec 9, 2011 leaving me at the age of 59 years. I am married and I live with my husband who is an author as Thomas R. Morris. He has written about his life as a Spy for our country in his book series once called “Spy Games” and one called “The Package”. He and I worked some cases together out of country while he was U.S. Army and I was U.S. Navy and we were part of the intelligence community and the Alien Contact Team. This is how we know that alien civilizations exist. My life is anything but normal and there are many threads and story lines.
I am a woman who has experimented with life in various worlds of existence whether I wanted too or not didn’t matter. Life made some decisions for me and due to these life experiences I decided to learn from what was given me in this lifetime.
My name is TJ Morris. My legal name is now Theresa J Morris according to Uncle Sam in the USA. I was born a Christian in Monroe, Louisiana and the name my mother wanted to name me was Wilhelmina however since I was born the day after Christmas I was almost named Holly instead of Holy.
For some unknown reason that I do not understand I was given the name on my birth certificate as Theresa Janette Thurmond. Names supposedly mean something in this world as symbols and sounds.
I haven’t written an article in a while now although I am a prolific writer and syndicated columnist. My history of how I came to be who I am in this lifetime is of interest to many people in my country and in others due to the social, spiritual, and paranormal way I feel I am involved in my social networks.
Personally, I feel rather exposed and public now and this is teaching me how we really do not deep down like to expose ourselves to others outside of ourselves meaning that we are all inner beings. The theosophy, psychology, history, and philosophy I plan on sharing of myself are growing daily. Every day I change and this is common now for most people like me. Because of my curiosity of life and people who exist like me in our humanoid sentient intelligent being species, I feel that it is my duty to share as a messenger of truth as a Lightworker and Truthseeker. I am both.
I have written for UFO Digest online for five (5) years now while sharing my stories on my own websites, blogs, and in my magazines. Now, I felt compelled to share my story with Phyllis Gelde of FATE Magazine. Phyllis is a woman in business and she may understand me being that I am a public known psychic. I am also a publisher and we together may be able to benefit our readership with ways to expand our own lives and may even in the future proclaim a joint venture. For now, we shall learn how to create more stories to share that which is unknown to some.
Join two women writers, entrepreneurs and see what the future holds for us in what we have become a part of known as FATE.
Project Sign
The first official USAF investigations of UFOs were Project Sign (1947–1949) and its successor Project Grudge (1949). Several hundred sightings were examined, a majority of them having a mundane explanation. Some sightings were classified as credible but inexplicable, and in these cases the possibility of an advanced unknown aircraft could not be ruled out.
The initial memos of the project took the UFO question seriously. After surveying 16 early reports, Lt. Col. George D. Garrett estimated that the sightings were not imaginary or exaggerations of natural phenomena.
Lt. General Nathan F. Twining expressed the same estimate in a letter to Brig. General Schulgen. Flying Saucer Working Party (UK, 1950–1951)
Flying Saucer Working Party
The United Kingdom’s Ministry of Defence, alarmed by reports of seemingly advanced unidentified aircraft, followed the US military’s example by conducting its own study on UFOs in 1950. A research group was formed based on the recommendation of the chemist Henry Tizard, and was involved in similar work, such as “Project Sign”. After less than a year, the directorate, named the “Flying Saucer Working Party” (FSWP), concluded that most observations were either cases of mistaken identity, optical illusions, psychological delusions, or hoaxes, and recommended that no further investigation on the phenomena should be undertaken. In 1952, the directorate informed Prime Minister Winston Churchill, after his inquiry about UFOs, that they had found no evidence of extraterrestrial spacecraft. The FSWP files were classified for fifty years and were released to the British public in 2001.
Project Magnet, Project Second Story (Canada, 1950–1954)
Project Magnet
Project Magnet, led by senior radio engineer Wilbert B. Smith from the Department of Transport, had the goal of studying magnetic phenomena, specifically geomagnetism, as a potential propulsion method for vehicles. Smith believed UFOs were using this method to achieve flight. The final report of the project, however, contained no mention of geomagnetism. It discussed twenty-five UFO sightings reported during 1952, and concluded with the notion that “extraterrestrial space vehicles” are probable. Along with the Smith group, a parallel committee dedicated solely to dealing with “flying saucer” reports was formed. This committee, called Project Second Story, was sponsored by the Defence Research Board, with its main purpose being to collect, catalog, and correlate data from UFO sighting reports.
The committee appeared to have dissolved after five meetings, as the group deemed the collected material unsuitable for scientific analysis.
Project Blue Book (USA, 1951–1969)
As a continuation of Project Sign and Project Grudge in 1951, the USAF launched Project Blue Book, led by Captain Edward J. Ruppelt. Under Ruppelt, the collection and investigation of UFO sightings became more systematic. The project issued a series of status reports, which were declassified in September 1960 and made available in 1968. Project Blue Book was terminated in December 1969, following the report of the Condon Committee. Until then, 12,618 incidents had been investigated, the grand majority of which explained by conventional means. 701 cases, around 6%, remained “unidentified”. Officially, the USAF concluded from the project that the phenomena investigated were of no concern to national security, and that there was no evidence the sightings categorized as “unidentified” were caused by extraterrestrial aircraft.
Project Blue Book Special Report No. 14 (USA, 1952–1954)
The main entrance to Battelle Memorial Institute in Columbus, Ohio
Ruppelt contracted a team of scientists from the Battelle Memorial Institute to evaluate the early sightings gathered by Project Blue Book. They conducted analysis, primarily statistical, on the subject for almost two years. The study concluded that the more complete the data was and the better the report, the more likely it was that the report was classified as “unidentified”. The report emphasized the subjectivity of the data, and stated that the conclusions drawn from the study were not based on facts, but on the subjective observations and estimations of the individual. The report summary and conclusion stated that “unknowns” were not likely something beyond the era’s technology, and almost certainly not “flying saucers”.
Robertson Panel (USA, 1953)
Before the final Battelle report was published, the Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) had developed an interest in UFOs as a national security issue, and set up a committee to examine existing UFO data. The panel, headed by mathematician and physicist Howard Percy Robertson, met from January 14 to 17, 1953. It concluded unanimously that the UFO sightings posed no direct threat to national security.
Did find that a continued emphasis on UFO reporting might threaten government functions by causing the channels of communication to clog with irrelevant reports and by inducing mass hysteria.
Also, the panel worried that nations hostile to the US might use the UFO phenomena to disrupt air defenses. To meet these problems, the panel stated that a policy of public education on the lack of evidence behind UFOs was needed, to be done through the mass media and schools, among others. It also recommended monitoring private UFO groups for subversive activities. The recommendations of the Roberson Panel were partly implemented through a series of special military regulations. The December 1953 Joint-Army-Navy-Air Force Publication 146 (JANAP 146) made publication of UFO sightings a crime under the Espionage Act. The Air Force Regulation 200-2 (AFR 200-2) revision of 1954 made all UFO sightings reported to the USAF classified. AFR 200-2 revision of February 1958 allowed the military to deliver to the FBI names of those who were “illegally or deceptively” bringing UFOs to public attention.
Condon Committee (USA, 1966–1968)
Edward U. Condon
After the recommendations of the Robertson Panel, the USAF wanted to end its involvement in UFOs, and pass Project Blue Book to another agency. In October 1966, the USAF contracted the University of Colorado, under the leadership of physicist Edward U. Condon, for $325,000 to conduct more scientific investigations of selected UFO sightings and to make recommendations about the project’s future. The committee looked at ninety-one UFO sightings, of which 30% was unidentifiable.
The report concluded that there was no “direct evidence” that UFOs were extraterrestrial spacecraft, that UFO research from the past twenty-one years had not contributed anything to scientific knowledge, and that further study was not justified. As a direct result of the Condon report, Project Blue Book was closed in December 1969. Many Ufologists were not satisfied with the Condon report, and considered it a cover-up
RAND Corporation paper (USA, 1968)
The RAND Corporation produced a short internal document titled “UFOs: What to Do?” published in November 1968. The paper gave a historical summary of the UFO phenomenon, talked briefly about issues concerning extraterrestrial life and interstellar travel, presented a few case studies and discussed the phenomenological content of a UFO sighting, reviewed hypotheses, and concluded with a recommendation to organize a central UFO report-receiving agency and conducting more research on the phenomenon.
Project Identification (USA, 1973–1980)
In 1973, a wave of UFO sightings in southeast Missouri prompted Harley D. Rutledge, physics professor at the University of Missouri, to conduct an extensive field investigation of the phenomenon.
The findings were published in the book Project Identification: the first scientific field study of UFO phenomena. Although taking a specific interest in describing unidentified aerial phenomena, as opposed to identifying them, the book references the presumed intelligence of the sighted objects. Rutledge’s study results were not published in any peer-reviewed journal or other scientific venue or format.
Studies by GEPAN, SERPA & GEIPAN (France, 1977–present)
Drawing from the GEPAN report on the Cussac case
Main article: Groupe d’études ET d’informations sur les phénomènes aérospatiaux non identifiés
In 1977, the French Space Agency CNES Director General set up a unit to record UFO sighting reports.[79] The unit was initially known as Groupe d’Etudes des Phénomènes Aérospatiaux Non identifiés (GEPAN), changed in 1988 to Service d’expertise de rentrée atmosphérique Phenom (SERPA) and in 2005 to Groupe d’études et d’informations sur les phénomènes aérospatiaux non identifiés (GEIPAN). GEIPAN found a mundane explanation for the vast majority of recorded cases, but in 2007, after 30 years of investigation, 1,600 cases, approximately 28% of total cases, remained unexplained “despite precise witness accounts and good-quality evidence recovered from the scene” and are categorized as “Type D”.
In April 2010, GEIPAN statistics stated that 23% of all cases were of Type D. Jean-Jacques Velasco, the head of SEPRA from 1983 to 2004, wrote a book in 2004 noting that 13.5% of the 5,800 cases studied by SEPRA were dismissed without any rational explanation, and stated that UFOs are extraterrestrial in origin.
United Nations (1977–1979)
Thanks to the lobbying of Eric Gairy, the Prime Minister of Grenada, the United Nations General Assembly addressed the UFO issue in the late 1970s. On July 14, 1978, a panel, with Gordon Cooper, J. Allen Hynek, and Jacques Vallée among its members, held a hearing to inform the UN Secretary General Kurt Waldheim about the matter. As a consequence of this meeting, the UN adopted decisions A/DEC/32/424 and A/DEC/33/426, which called for the “establishment of an agency or a department of the United Nations for undertaking, co-ordinating and disseminating the results of research into unidentified flying objects and related phenomena”.
Project Hessdalen / Project EMBLA (Norway, 1983–present / Italy 1999–2004)
Hessdalen light
Since 1981, in an area near Hessdalen in Norway, unidentified flying objects have been commonly observed. This so-called Hessdalen phenomenon has twice been the subject of scientific field studies: Project Hessdalen (1983–1985, 1995–) secured technical assistance from the Norwegian Defense Research Establishment, the University of Oslo, and the University of Bergen, while Project EMBLA (1999–2004) was a team of Italian scientists led by Ph.D. Massimo Teodorani from the Istituto di Radioastronomia di Bologna.
Both studies confirmed the presence of the phenomenon and were able to record it with cameras and various technical equipment such as radar, laser, and infrared. The origin and nature of the lights remains unclear. Researchers from Project EMBLA speculated the possibility that atmospheric plasma had been the origin of the phenomenon.
Project Condign (UK, 1996–2000)
The British Ministry of Defence (MoD) published in 2006 the “Scientific & Technical Memorandum 55/2/00a” of a four-volume, 460-page report entitled Unidentified Aerial Phenomena in the UK Air Defence Region, based on a study by DI55 (a section of the Directorate of Scientific and Technical Intelligence of the Defence Intelligence Staff) codenamed Project Condign. It discusses the British UFO reports received between 1959 and 1997. The report affirms that UFOs are an existing phenomenon and points out that they present no threat to national defense. The report further states that there is no evidence that UFO sighting are caused by incursions of intelligent origin, or that any UFO consists of solid objects which might create a collision hazard. Although the study admits of being unable to explain all analyzed UFO sightings with certainty, it recommends that section DI55 ceases monitoring UFO reports, as they do not provide information useful for Defence Intelligence. The report concludes that a small percentage of sightings that cannot be easily explained are caused by atmospheric plasma phenomenon similar to ball lightning; Magnetic and other energy fields produced by these “buoyant plasma formations” are responsible for the appearance of so-called “Black Triangles” as well as having hallucinogenic effects on the human mind, inducing experiences of Close Encounters.
Sturrock Panel Report (USA, 1997)
From Sept. 29 to Oct. 4, 1997 a workshop examining selected UFO incidents took place in Tarrytown, New York. The meeting was initiated by Peter A. Sturrock, who had reviewed the Condon report and found it dissatisfying. The international review panel consisted of nine physical scientists, who responded to eight investigators of UFO reports, who were asked to present their strongest data. The final report of the workshop was published under the title “Physical Evidence Related to UFO Reports” in the Journal of Scientific Exploration in 1998. The study concluded that the studied cases presented no unequivocal evidence for the presence of unknown physical phenomena or for extraterrestrial intelligence, but argued that a continued study of UFO cases might be scientifically valuable.
COMETA Report (France, 1999)
COMETA (Comité d’Études Approfondies, “Committee for in-depth studies”) is a private French group, which is mainly composed of high-ranking individuals from the French Ministry of Defence. In 1999 the group published a ninety-page report entitled “Les OVNI ET la défense: à quoi doit-on se preparer? “Which is translated in English as (“UFOs and Defense: What Should We Prepare For?” The report analyzed various UFO cases and concluded that UFOs are real, complex flying objects, and that the extraterrestrial hypothesis has a high probability of being the correct explanation for the UFO phenomenon. The study recommended that the French government should adjust to the reality of the phenomenon and conduct further research. Skeptic Claude Maugé criticized COMETA for research incompetency, and claimed that the report tried to present itself as an official French document, when in fact it was published by a private group.
“Disclosure Project” Press Conference (USA, 2001)
Steven M. Greer and the Disclosure Project were held on May 9, 2001. Twenty government workers from military and civilian organizations spoke about their experiences regarding UFOs and UFO confidentiality at the National Press Club in Washington D.C…
The press conference was initiated by Steven M. Greer, founder of the Disclosure Project, which has the goal of disclosing alleged government UFO secrecy. The purpose of the press conference was to build public pressure through the media to obtain a hearing before the United States Congress on the issue. Although major American media outlets reported on the conference, the interest quickly died down, and no hearing came forth.
Fife Symington Press Conference (USA, 2007)
On November 12, 2007, a press conference, moderated by former Governor of Arizona Fife Symington, was held at the National Press Club in Washington D.C… Nineteen former pilots and military and civilian officials spoke about their experiences with UFOs, demanding that the U.S. government engage in a new investigation of the phenomenon. We now have various You Tube videos and many experts as well as novices as civilians who are sharing many photos and videos online on the internet regarding notable cases in ufology.
Further information and list of UFO sightings are listed below as short summaries of select famous cases in UFO research. All of the incidents remain subject to controversy.
Kenneth Arnold UFO sighting (USA, 1947)
On June 24, 1947 pilot Kenneth Arnold reported seeing nine metallic objects flying near Mt. Rainier, Washington.
The term “flying saucer” was coined by an Associated Press reporter, Bill Bequette, who based it on Arnold’s description of the objects.
Roswell UFO Incident (USA, 1947)
The Roswell Incident of 1947 ranks as one of the most publicized and controversial UFO incidents. The US Army recovered an object which crashed near Roswell, New Mexico in July 1947, allegedly an extraterrestrial spacecraft, and alien pilots. Many books on the incident have been written since the 1970s, and numerous alleged witnesses have spoken on the event. The USAF maintains that the crashed object was a top-secret military spy balloon, a part of Project Mogul, many UFO proponents maintain that an alien craft was found and its occupants were captured, and that the military covered it up.
July 1952 Washington D.C. UFO incident (USA, 1952)
1952 Washington D.C. UFO incident
From July 13 to 29, 1952, there was a major wave of UFO sightings over Washington D.C. Simultaneous radar and visual sightings were reported, of what appeared to be a group of UFOs flying over the city, and the Capitol Building. Fighter jets were scrambled to intercept the objects, which allegedly disappeared when the planes got close enough to engage, and reappeared when the jets disengaged. The USAF held a major press conference to respond to the media and public inquiry, and brought in Harvard astronomer Donald Menzel to explain away the sightings as being caused by temperature inversion.
Tehran UFO Incident (Iran, 1976)
Page 2 of a USAF report on the Tehran incident by Captain Henry S. Shields shares the 1976 Tehran UFO incident.
On the morning of September 19, 1976, a bright object was sighted and recorded by radar over Tehran, Imperial State of Iran. Two Imperial Iranian Air Force F-4 Phantom jet fighters tried to intercept the object, but turned back, reportedly after an instrumentation and communications failure on both planes. The second plane’s weapons system reportedly also died when it tried to fire a missile at a smaller object, which had emerged from the object pursued. The case is confirmed both by the statements of a senior Iranian military official and by a report from the U.S. Defense Department on the case. Skeptic Philip J. Klass, after having examined the case, claims the witnesses initially saw an astronomical body, possibly Jupiter, while equipment malfunction and pilot incompetence accounted for the technical malfunctions. Klass also pointed out that although being supposedly such a spectacular UFO case, it remained unclassified, and that there was no evidence of a follow-up investigation.
Rendlesham Forest Incident (UK, 1980)
From December 26 to 28, 1980, several bright UFOs were reportedly observed by military personnel in Rendlesham Forest, Suffolk, England. In one case, a witness reported seeing a landed object, which he then touched and felt characters etched on its surface, before the object flew off. Later, military personnel found impressions and increased radioactivity measurements on the supposed landing site. The witnesses were all military personnel, including the deputy commander of the nearby Bentwaters Royal Air Force base, Lt. Col. Charles I. Halt. An official USAF memo dated January 13, 1981 documents the incident. An audio recording of the military investigation that took place on December 27 is also available to the public. Skeptic Brian Dunning of the Skeptoid podcast suggests the UFO and strange light sightings were misidentifications of the nearby Orfordness lighthouse, the re-entry of the Russian Cosmos 749 rocket, and meteors.
Belgian UFO wave (Belgium, 1989–1991)
From 1989 to mid-1991, around 3,500 UFO sightings were recorded in Belgium.
On the night of March 30, 1990, hundreds of people reported seeing UFOs in the airspace over Belgium, and unknown targets were confirmed by radar. Two Belgian Air Force (BAF) F-16 fighters attempted to intercept the objects, with no success. The radar tapes were later analyzed by the BAF, who concluded that the anomalies could have been caused by processing errors on the on-board computers. Ufologist Renaud Leclet states that some of the sightings could be explained by helicopters with unusual designs, with which the public was unfamiliar.
Phoenix Lights (USA, 1997)
On March 13, 1997, from around 8:15 to 10 p.m. local time, hundreds of citizens in the city of Phoenix, Arizona reported seeing a formation of lights move over city and surrounding mountains, giving the impression of a large “V”-shaped object. Along with eyewitness testimony, video material and pictures of the lights exist. It was revealed that the visiting 104th Fighter Squadron of the Maryland Air National Guard dropped illumination flares as a part of an exercise near Phoenix around 8:15 to 8:30 p.m.
Notable UFO organizations and lists of UFO organizations
United States
In the US, groups and affiliates interested in UFO investigation number in the hundreds, of which a few have achieved prominence based on their longevity, size, and researcher involvement with scientific credentials. The first significant UFO interest group in the US was the Aerial Phenomena Research Organization (APRO), formed in 1952 by Coral and James Lorenzen. The organization closed down in 1988.
The National Investigations Committee on Aerial Phenomena (NICAP), which formed in 1957 and shut down in the 1970ṣ, whose Board of Directors included former Director of Central Intelligence and first head of the Central Intelligence Agency, VADM Roscoe H. Hillenkoetter, was, at one time, the largest UFO organization in the country, with numerous chapters.
In 1957, Brothers W. H. and J. A. Spaulding founded the Ground Saucer Watch, which later became famous when, in 1977, the group filed a suit under the Freedom of Information Act against the CIA.
ARPO out of Arizona was prior to MUFON and CUFOS
The two major UFO groups active today are the Mutual UFO Network (MUFON), founded in 1969, and the Center for UFO Studies (CUFOS), founded in 1973 by J. Allen Hynek.
MUFON grew as the key members of NICAP joined the organization in the 1970s.
CUFOS has tried to limit its membership to established researchers, but has found little academic acceptance.
United Kingdom
The British UFO Research Association (BUFORA) is the largest and oldest of the active British UFO organizations.
It traces its roots to the London UFO Research Association, founded in 1959, which merged with the British UFO Association (BUFOA) to form BUFORA in 1964.
Ukraine
The Ukrainian Ufologic Club (UFODOS) has released and placed on the Internet (ufobua.org.ua) a national archive of UFO evidences [138]. It was compiled based on people’s evidences about strange flying objects over Ukraine. The “secret files” comprise about 500 eyewitnesses testimonies who saw UFO in Ukraine starting from the 17th century. According to UFODOS chief Yaroslav Sochka, the materials were collected from various sources, basically, Hydrometeorological Center of Ukraine Air Force and public ufological organizations.
Australia
Australian ufology
The Australian Flying Saucer Bureau (AFSB) and the Australian Flying Saucer Research Society (AFSRS) were the earliest UFO groups established in Australia, with both being founded in the early 1950s.
The Australian Centre for UFO Studies (ACUFOS) was established in 1974 with links to the American CUFOS. Other currently active Australian UFO groups include the Victorian UFO Research Society (VUFORS), the Australian UFO Research Network (AUFORN), and UFO Research Queensland (UFORQ).
Part of a Sub-Culture of critics as skeptics organizations
The Committee for Skeptical Inquiry (CSI), although not a UFO organization, has investigated various UFO cases and has given a skeptical review of the phenomena in its publications, often in the Skeptical Inquirer magazine. Founded as the Committee for the Scientific Investigation of Claims of the Paranormal (CSICOP) in 1976 by professor of philosophy Paul Kurtz, the committee is notable for its member scientists and skeptics, such as Carl Sagan, Isaac Asimov, Philip J. Klass, Ray Hyman, James Randi, and Martin Gardner.
The Skeptics Society, founded by science historian Michael Shermer in 1992, has also addressed the UFO issue in its magazine Skeptic.
We now have other magazines online including Intrepid Magazine and the one I began called Social Paranormal Magazine dealing with the super natural and various topics some which are listed below.

Other keywords now used in research projects:
Ancient astronauts
Extraterrestrial life
Fringe science
List of Ufologists
Pseudoscience (list of topics)
SETI
UFOs in fiction
Projects
MK Ultra – Montauk-Pegasus-Redhawk-Aviary
The Roswell Incident (1980)
Philadelphia Experiment
Roswell UFO incident
UFO conspiracy theory
Paul Bennewitz
Majestic 12

Roswell, New Mexico UFO Alien Spacecraft History of Research

William Leonard Moore (born October 31, 1943?) is an author and former UFO researcher. Prominent from the late 1970s to the late 1980s, he co-authored two books with Charles Berlitz, including The Roswell Incident – the first book written about the alleged Roswell UFO crash/retrieval.
Moore later became a controversial figure within UFOlogy due to his involvement with a group of intelligence contacts known as ‘The Aviary’. He played a role in The Bennewitz Affair, and was a central figure in the release of the controversial Majestic 12 documents.
Early career
Bill Moore has a background in the liberal arts, history, teaching and English. He speaks fluent French and holds a degree in Russian.
Moore attended Thiel College, located in Greenville, Pennsylvania graduating in 1965.
Before deciding to concentrate on his writing career he taught language and humanities at various high schools. Bill Moore was a subscriber to NICAP and during the mid to late 1960s he was asked to investigate a couple of UFO cases for the group.
He was later on the board of directors of APRO, based in Arizona.
Moore wrote The Philadelphia Experiment with Charles Berlitz. Published in 1979, it details the alleged 1943 US Navy cloaking experiment of the destroyer escort USS Eldridge at the Philadelphia Naval Yard.
The Roswell Incident
Whilst Bill Moore was based in Minnesota and still publicizing
The Philadelphia Experiment he met with fellow UFO researcher Stanton T. Friedman who he knew, to compare notes.
Friedman stated to Moore that he had recently travelled to Louisiana and spoken to a retired Major Jesse Marcel, after following up on an earlier lead he received from a radio station manager whilst he was waiting for an interview.
Jesse Marcel detailed to Friedman his involvement in an incident that had occurred almost 30 years previously – the handling of wreckage from an alleged crash of a craft during July 1947 in Roswell, New Mexico.
Moore also had some information pertaining to a UFO crash and when they thought it could be connected to the same story, they began to research the case further. Moore later raised the idea of a book with his writing partner Charles Berlitz who liked the idea. Within a relatively short period of time Moore conducted the field work, interviewed eyewitnesses, prepared reports and sent them to Berlitz in New York who wrote up the chapters of the book.
The Roswell Incident was published in 1980 and was the first book written about the alleged Roswell UFO crash/retrieval.
Interactions with ‘The Aviary’
In late 1980 after the release of The Roswell Incident, Moore received a phone call after appearing on a radio show where he was promoting the new book. In October 1988 on the nationally televised UFO Cover-Up: Live! Broadcast Bill Moore described:
“I got a phone call after appearing on a radio show from a man who said ‘you’re the only person we’ve heard talk about this subject, who seems to know what he’s talking about’. He convinced me that he was a government intelligence agent and wanted to begin disseminating some information about UFOs to the public”.
The original contact Moore later met was to be known as ‘Falcon’. In exchange for information received Moore would keep tabs on sections of the UFO research community. This also included taking part in disinformation activities against Paul Bennewitz with AFOSI agent Richard C. Doty, as Moore would later admit at the 1989 Las Vegas MUFON conference. Throughout the 80s the group of intelligence contacts grew in number, each given a bird name – hence they became known as ‘The Aviary’.
In June 1982 television producer Jaime Shandera joined forces with Moore to attend the meetings and collaborate on the research, including the discovery of the existence of MJ-12 – the purported high-level policy making group overseeing the UFO and extraterrestrial issue. In 1984 Moore and Shandera received the now infamous MJ-12 documents as a 35mm black and white film that was mailed to Jaime Shandera in a plain brown envelope. Their contacts with The Aviary continued until the 1990s when Moore and Shandera eventually left the UFO research field.
Recent Activities
In the last few years William Moore has been interviewed several times by researcher Greg Bishop on his radio show Radio Mysterioso regarding his past involvement in UFOlogy. In one of the interviews Bill Moore reveals he still writes, though not about UFOs – he carries out editorial work for a newspaper, and has been acting as an historian researching and writing about The Book of Mormon.
William Moore was also a central figure in Greg Bishop’s 2005 book detailing the Bennewitz Affair Project Beta: The Story of Paul Bennewitz, National Security, and the Creation of a Modern UFO Myth. Some of Moore’s activities and interactions with The Aviary have also been detailed in the 2006 book Exempt from Disclosure: The Black World of UFOs by Aviary members Robert M. Collins aka ‘Condor’ and Richard C. Doty – the surrogate ‘Falcon’ Here are some references below.
The Philadelphia Experiment – Project Invisibility (1979)
Research Groups Findings of Negative Cults
Notable UFO religions which may or may not affect others thoughts negatively about the future of UFO religions.
Whether they are positive or negative is left up to each individual for we are allowed to believe and think what we want as freedom of will power inside our own spiritual soul’s connection as essence that records throughout time and space. We decided to include the various groups that become clusters of individuals as either believers or followers in what term is called religion in some academic circles. Whether they are listed here does not mean that we researched their legal paperwork and recordings on earth to see if there is a legal bond with the individual states, countries, or areas of the world. We simply used the Internet Open Source information as a convenience to our reader of this book in this time on earth. We believe in offering that which we find common and shared together in the Internet at present time in 2012.
There have been some negative results from some research groups which were later referred to as religions and cults.
The logo used by the Heaven’s Gate group whose members committed a group suicide in the belief they were performing a rendezvous with a UFO or what exactly we will never know for sure. However, UFO religion is an informal term used to describe a religion in which extraterrestrials (ET) figure.
Typically, ETs are held to be interested in the benefit of humanity which either already is, or eventually will become, part of a preexisting ET civilization. Others may incorporate ETs into a more supernatural worldview in which the UFO occupants are more akin to angels than physical aliens, though, ultimately this distinction may become blurred within the overall subculture and a variety of tropes from standard space operas to the classic UFO sighting/abductee subculture are observed.
Some are cargo cults, in that the adherents believe that the arrival or rediscovery of alien civilizations, technologies and spirituality will enable humans to overcome their current ecological, spiritual and social problems.
Issues such as hatred, war, bigotry, poverty and so on are said to be resolvable through the use of superior alien technology and spiritual abilities. Such belief systems are also described as millenarian in their outlook. UFO religions naturally have developed first in such countries as the United States, Canada, France, the United Kingdom and Japan as the concept presumes the cultural context of a society technologically advanced enough to conceive of ET as such and one in which religion of any kind is not discouraged or suppressed. The term “flying saucers” and the popular notion of the UFO originated in 1947. The 1950s saw the creation of UFO religions, with the advent of the purported contactees. Scientology, which does not publicly stress this basis is probably the largest and originates from this early period.
Aetherius Society
The Aetherius Society was founded in the United Kingdom in the 1950s. Its founder, George King, claimed to have been contacted telepathically by an alien intelligence called Aetherius, who represented an “Interplanetary Parliament.” According to Aetherians, their society acts as a vehicle through which “Cosmic Transmissions of advanced metaphysical significance” can be disseminated to the rest of humanity. These “transmissions” were recorded on magnetic reel-to-reel tape by persons present during each “telepathic transmission” as George King sat in a state of “Samadhi” and the “transmission” was “delivered” via his voice box. In 1956 and 1957, and on occasion before a public audience, several of these “transmissions” forecast flying saucer activity in specific parts of the world on certain dates (You Are Responsible! Aetherius Society 1961). Shortly after these dates, newspapers, such as the Sunday Times and The Daily Telegraph, reported sightings which coincided with the dates and locations forecast in these “transmissions”. As a spiritual teacher, George King taught certain yoga practices, spiritual healing, Eastern mantra and “dynamic prayer”—tools for spiritual self-advancement and service to the world—which the Aetherius Society is principally based upon.
Church of the SubGenius
Founded in 1979 with the publication of SubGenius Pamphlet #1 by Ivan Stang and Philo Drummond, the Church of the SubGenius has been known as a “parody religion” due to its extensive use of comedy and parody. In spite of this, the organization claims over 10,000 followers worldwide that have paid $30 to become “ordained SubGenius ministers”, and it has been embraced by many skeptic and atheist groups. With the publication of The Book of the SubGenius in 1983, the Church of the SubGenius prophesied that its founder, J.R. “Bob” Dobbs, was in contact with an exterrestrial race called the Xists (“X-ists”), and these Xists were scheduled to launch a worldwide invasion of Earth on July 5, 1998. (See also: X-Day (Church of the SubGenius)) The day of the scheduled invasion came and went without an appearance by the Xists, but church members remain unconvinced. The church now holds annual “X-Day” celebrations on July 5 of every year. The church also claims that its members are not entirely human, having descended from the Yeti.
Heaven’s Gate was considered a religious group or cult.
The Heaven’s Gate group achieved notoriety in 1997 when one of its founders convinced 38 followers to commit mass suicide. Members reportedly believed themselves to be aliens, awaiting a spaceship that would arrive with Comet Hale-Bopp. The suicide was undertaken in the apparent belief that their souls would be transported onto the spaceship, which they thought was hiding behind the comet. They underwent elaborate preparations for their trip, including purchasing and wearing matching shoes. For a time, group members lived in a darkened house where they would simulate the experience they expected to have during their long journey in outer space.
Industrial Church of the New World Comforter
The Industrial Church of the New World Comforter is a UFO religion founded in 1973 by Allen Michael.
In 1947, Allen Noonan was a pictorial sign painter in Long Beach, California, who that year claimed to have a telepathic encounter with a UFO. He then changed his name from Allen Noonan to Allen Michael. He claimed to have physically encountered a flying saucer in 1954 at Giant Rock in the Mojave Desert of California. During the Summer of Love, he had a vegan restaurant on the northeast corner of Haight and Scott streets in San Francisco, California, called the Here and Now (also called the Mustard Seed). His group lived in two communes in two large houses during the late 1960s and early 1970s in Berkeley, California, called The One World Family. They taught classes in tantric sex. In 1969, the vegan restaurant moved to a much larger space on Telegraph Avenue and Haste Street in Berkeley and the name of the restaurant was changed to the One World Family Natural Food Center. They published a vegan cookbook called Cosmic Cookery. There was a large mural on the side of the restaurant painted by Allen Michael that had written above it the phrase Farmers, Workers, Soldiers—Revolution by 1976! The farmer was holding a pitchfork, the worker was holding a hammer, and the soldier was holding a gun, and they had their arms around each other’s shoulders. Above the three were three flying saucers coming in for a landing. In 1973, Allen Michael founded “The Industrial Church of the New World Comforter” and published the first volume of his revelations, The Everlasting Gospel. In 1975, the church headquarters and the vegetarian restaurant relocated to Stockton, California. Allen Noonan ran for president of the United States in the 1980 and 1984 elections on the Utopian Synthesis Party ticket.
Nation of Islam
The Nation of Islam subscribes to the belief that UFOs are responsible for “raising mountains” and will destroy the world on the Day of Judgment. Its former leader, Elijah Muhammed, claimed that the Biblical Book of Ezekiel describes a “Motherplane” or “wheel”. The movement’s current leader, Louis Farrakhan, describes the “Motherplane” thus:
The Honorable Elijah Muhammad told us of a giant Motherplane that is made like the universe, spheres within spheres. White people call them unidentified flying objects (UFOs). Ezekiel, in the Old Testament, saw a wheel that looked like a cloud by day but a pillar of fire by night. The Hon. Elijah Muhammad said that that wheel was built on the island of Nippon, which is now called Japan, by some of the original scientists. It took 15 billion dollars in gold at that time to build it. It is made of the toughest steel. America does not yet know the composition of the steel used to make an instrument like it. It is a circular plane, and the Bible says that it never makes turns. Because of its circular nature it can stop and travel in all directions at speeds of thousands of miles per hour. He said there are 1,500 small wheels in this mother wheel which is a half mile by a half mile (800 by 800 m). This Mother Wheel is like a small human built planet. Each one of these small planes carries three bombs.
Raëlism
The International Raëlian Movement has been described as “the largest UFO religion in the world.” Raëlians believe that scientifically advanced extraterrestrials, known as the Elohim, created life on Earth through genetic engineering, and that a combination of human cloning and “mind transfer” can ultimately provide eternal life. Past religious teachers, like Jesus, Buddha and Muhammad, are said to have been sent by these scientifically advanced extraterrestrials to teach humanity. The Elohim are said to be planning a future visit to complete their revelation and education of humanity.
Raëlian Priest Thomas said on this topic, “The difference between Raëlians and Heaven’s Gate and Jim Jones etc., is that the others destructively believed in a God who would give them a better life after death, just like most believers in a monotheistic religion do today, and hence the risk for suicide chasing afterlife rewards … as Raëlians we want the best right now in our life, who would want to die now in that scenario with all those pleasures to enjoy? Raëlians believe in enjoying life now, with happiness and laughter.”
Scientology
L. Ron Hubbard, founder of Scientology, in 1950
UFO religions run the gamut from serious enough for adherents to commit mass suicide to a few that are intentionally satirical or farcical.
Scientology has been discussed in the context of UFO religions in UFO Religions by Christopher Partridge, The Encyclopedic Sourcebook of UFO Religions by James R. Lewis, and UFO Religion: Inside Flying Saucer Cults and Culture by Gregory Reece.
Stories of extraterrestrial civilizations and interventions in past lives form a part of the belief system of Scientology. The most well-known story publicized and held up to ridicule by critics is that of Xenu, the ruler of the Galactic Confederacy who is said to have brought billions of frozen people to Earth 75 million years ago and placed them near a number of volcanoes, and dropped hydrogen bombs into them, thus killing the entire population in an effort to solve overpopulation. The spirits of these people were then captured by Xenu and mass implanted with numerous suggestions and then “packaged” into clusters of spirits. From the early 1950s onwards, Scientology’s founder, L. Ron Hubbard, published a number of books, lectures and other works describing what he termed “space opera”.
Scientology teaches that all humans have experienced innumerable past lives, including lives in ancient advanced extraterrestrial societies, such as Helatrobus and the Marcabians. Traumatic memories from these past lives are said to be the cause of many present-day physical and mental ailments. Scientologists also believe that human beings possess superhuman powers which cannot be restored until they have been fully rehabilitated as spiritual beings through the practice of “auditing”, using methods set out by Hubbard in his various works. According to Hubbard, when thetans (the Scientology term for a human being) die they go to a “landing station” on the planet Venus, where they are re-implanted and are programmed to “forget” their previous lifetimes, thus causing amnesia. The Venusians then “capsule” each thetan and send them back to Earth to be dumped into the ocean off the coast of California; whereupon, each thetan searches for a new body to inhabit. To avoid these inconveniences, Hubbard advised Scientologists to simply refuse to go to Venus after their death.
Unarius Academy of Science
Founded by Ernest L. Norman and his wife, Ruth, in 1954, the Unarians are a group headquartered in El Cajon, California, who believe that, through the use of fourth dimensional physics, they are able to communicate with supposed advanced intelligent beings that allegedly exist on higher frequency planes. Unarians believe in past lives and hold that the Solar System was once inhabited by ancient interplanetary civilizations.
Universe people
The Universe people or Cosmic people of light powers (Czech: Vesmírní lidé sil světla) is a Czech movement centered around Ivo A. Benda. Its belief system is based upon the existence of extraterrestrial civilizations communicating with Benda and other “contacters” since October 1997 telepathically and later by direct personal contact. According to Benda, those civilizations operate a fleet of spaceships led by Ashtar (sometimes written Ashtar Sheran) orbiting and closely watching the Earth, helping the good and waiting to transport the followers into another dimension. The Universe People teaching incorporates various elements from ufology (some foreign “contacters” are credited, though often also renounced after a time as misguided or deceptive), Christianity (Jesus was a “fine-vibrations” being) and conspiracy theories (forces of evil are supposed to plan compulsory chipping of the populace).
UFOs in other religions
• Though rarely mentioned after having been introduced in 1991, Harry Palmer asserts a Galactic Confederacy story similar to Scientology in his “Avatar” courses and literature
• The Theosophical guru Benjamin Creme claims that the Messiah figure he refers to as Maitreya, who, he teaches, will soon declare himself publicly, is in telepathic contact with the space brothers in their flying saucers. Creme subscribes to the view that Nordic aliens from Venus pilot flying saucers from a civilization on Venus hundreds of millions of years in advance of ours that exists on the etheric plane of Venus. These flying saucers are capable of stepping down the level of vibration of themselves and their craft to the slower level of vibration of the atoms of the physical plane (Creme accepts George Adamski’s UFO sightings as valid).
According to Creme, the Venusians have mother ships up to four miles long. It is also believed by the Theosophists in general as well as Creme in particular that the governing deity of Earth, Sanat Kumara (who is believed to live in a city called Shamballa located above the Gobi desert on the etheric plane of Earth), is a Nordic alien who originally came from Venus 18,500,000 years ago.
• The followers of Benjamin Creme believe there is regular flying saucer traffic between Venus and Shamballah and that crop circles are mostly caused by flying saucers.
• The Ascended Master Teachings are a group of religions based on Theosophy. In the traditional Ascended Master Teachings of Guy Ballard and Elizabeth Clare Prophet, no mention is made of UFOs or flying saucers. However, the Ascended Master Teachings teacher Joshua David Stone in his teachings began, beginning in 1993, to refer to Ashtar, believed by some UFO enthusiasts to be the commander of a flying saucer fleet called the “Ashtar Galactic Command” that operates near Earth (manned mostly by Venusians), as a Master along with the more traditional ascended masters. He continued to include “Ashtar” on his list of ascended masters that he mentioned he received dictations from when speaking at his yearly Wesak Festival Mount Shasta gatherings that began to be held in 1996. Stone also taught that the Master Jesus, under his “galactic” name Sananda, sometimes rides with “Commander Ashtar” in his flying saucer fleet.
• A neo-Nazi esoteric Nazi Gnostic sect headquartered in Vienna, Austria, called the Tempelhofgesellschaft, founded in the early 1990s, teaches what it calls a form of Marcionism. They distribute pamphlets claiming that the Aryan race originally came to Atlantis from the star Aldebaran (this information is supposedly based on “ancient Sumerian manuscripts”). They maintain that the Aryans from Aldebaran derive their power from the vril energy of the Black Sun. They teach that since the Aryan race is of extraterrestrial origin it has a divine mission to dominate all the other races. It is believed by adherents of this religion that an enormous space fleet is on its way to Earth from Aldebaran which, when it arrives, will join forces with the Nazi Flying Saucers from Antarctica” to establish the Western Imperium.
Akashic Field History Oral and Written Variations
History of Ennead 9 of Egypt

The Ennead of Heliopolis was the group of gods who created the world, according to Egyptian mythology centered in Heliopolis (near Memphis, in the Nile Delta of Lower Egypt).
The Ogdoad of Hermopolis is a contrasting grouping of 8 creating Heliopolitan gods
A third cosmogony is the Memphis Theology, which is centered on the god Ptah.
In the theology of the Ennead of Heliopolis, there is recognition of a time before there was anything.
It was thought there was a creative potential in the primeval water, which was personified as the self-generated Nun. From the waters emerged Atum, the source of all creation, often depicted as the sun god Re-Atum who produced Shu and Tefnut when he masturbated or spat. Ennead means a group of 9, but often the list is larger, including wives, offspring, and a splitting up of Atum-Re into two separate deities.
Here are the basic 9Also Known As: Heliopolitan Ennead:
1. Atum (the spirit that lived inside Nun before creation)
2. Shu (male created by Atum-Re)
3. Tefnut (sister of Shu)
4. Geb (Earth god – Shu and Tefnut’s male offspring)
5. Nut (Sky goddess – Shu and Tefnut’s female offspring)
6. Osiris (god of the dead – son of Geb and Nut)
7. Seth (evil brother of Osiris – son of Geb and Nut)
8. Isis (wife/sister of Osiris and mother of Horus)
9. Nephthys (goddess of the dead – wife/sister of Seth)
Before the Atum Spirit there was the Nun (NONE) and this was the Mother or Omegaverse.
The NINE became the VOICE of the DIVINE inspiration in all things present, past, and future. How could there be a before NUN when there was NONE?
Humanoid Multi Senses in 21st Century Recognized

This has become the almighty ever present question among all scientists!
The WHAT existed before the BIG BANG THEORY is where we are presently in our critical mass mind way of thinking in SCIENCE.
Humans of the past taught in their school books to children only five (5) senses of sight, sound, taste, hearing, touch.
We now know that this is true but limited which now disturbs the human psyche of mind over matter which allows us to know we have many more senses that we have not channeled as knowledge of our past history or our intake and input into the overall critical mass mind or global brain of our terms in space in order to maintain efficiency and to remain current on our own wisdom.
While we call SCIENCE the empirical way of repetition of our experiments that can be proved by our peers and then recognized in our community as our grand understanding we also now recognize our own glorified way.
We now share our learning and co-creating memories as our spiritual path. We share our spiritual path as our divine journey experiences while away from our natural divine soul creation.

We now recognize that we have an essence inside us all we share as the spirit that will live inside us while we are body-mind-spirit on earth. When we die, we no longer need our bodies as containers as vehicles to explore this divine realm, dimension, and level of existence. We now know we can be in more than one place at one time due to our original divine creation as a spark of the divine which is the essence of the energy of the God Particle which is unique in us all.
We all come across and meet our unique divine spark of our Co-creators which not only lives inside us all but when gathered with another becomes more powerful and gives us a unique ability to co-create. This is exercised in many ways on earth in the spectrum of light as energy of light in the dark.
We are all on an individual path and follow or lead while co-creating our own individual life plan. Some of us choose to stay on the path given inside us all and we choose not to deter off course. While others will change their divine path which is given as freedom and we use our divine free will.
This long term health plan of the psyche of our essence while here in life form is what we call our journey. To some it is not the destination but the experiences we call life while in not only spirit form but in the body physical which gives us more insight and accumulated wisdom. We call the return to various realms, dimensions, and levels as our memories developed for our own increase in personality traits.
We are all co-created as the children of the original soul and sparks of the eternal divine essence. We share our connection on our soul’s source as well as our own new expansion into the divine creation we know as space as a journey into the light.

We are taught in the beginning and there was the living word and the word was without form.
Words with repetition and analysis of all is our birth right as a family tradition of all our existence as the soul’s essence of co-creation of our original parents of Mother and Father.
We came from the 3 as the divine which is in space.
We can see, touch, hear, smell, taste, we also now add the sixth sense of FEEL.
We now know that the FIVE senses did not accurately define that which we can feel without TOUCH!
Justified words of what we believe we are as descriptions we allow are to record insights in words and in worlds.
1. Sight
2. Sound
3. Smell
4. Taste
5. Touch
6. Feel
7. Perception
8. Intuition
9. Knowing
We now have accepted the SIXTH SENSE!
We shall now add the divine sense as that of the spirit self as that of the new age ascension as the combination of that which we have forgotten to share in the past with all humanoids on earth as sentient intelligent beings due to our past masculine reign of supremacy based on our testosterone and male dominating warring ways of the male supremacy or insecurity issues in our governments and religions which have ruled the empirical cultures on this planet.

SEVENTH SENSE
PERCEPTION – Perception (from the Latin perceptio, percipio) is the organization, identification and interpretation of sensory information in order to represent and understand the environment.
KAELIDESCOPE – A Kaleidoscope operates on the principle of multiple reflection.
We are now entering the KNOWING which is the SEVENTH SENSE of the ASCENSION AGE of the GOLDEN AGE of COSMOLOGY!
We will now understand that in order to be whole we must continue to explore and research our origins in the cosmos that we now call SPACE!
The “All Knowing” to some is still considered divine due to our past and ancient cultures of our ancestors.
We will now accept the higher levels and dimensions above that which we call the SEVENTH level which is the OMNIVERSE.
EIGHTH SENSE
INTUITION – Intuition is the ability to acquire knowledge without inference and/or the use of reason.
The eighth sense is that which is called the ALPHA or the Alphaverse and is the alpha male partition of the He/She. The entire creation that existed as the ANCIENT ANCESTORS is not foreign to this world as we have kept up the male dominant force as that in monotheism we call the one male GOD.
This male portion could not exist without the counterpart of the He/She known as that which from what the male eighth Alpha Male comes out of as that which is the ninth or omega the perfect complement and counterpart.

I shall share more information when it is downloaded for a future book.
NINTH SENSE
KNOWING – Knowing may refer to:
Knowledge – Knowledge is a familiarity with someone or something, which can include facts, information, descriptions, or skills acquired through experience or education. It can refer to the theoretical or practical understanding of a subject. It can be implicit (as with practical skill or expertise) or explicit (as with the theoretical understanding of a subject); it can be more or less formal or systematic.
In philosophy, the study of knowledge is called epistemology; the philosopher Plato famously defined knowledge as “justified true belief.” However, no single agreed upon definition of knowledge exists, though there are numerous theories to explain it.
The following quote from Bertrand Russell’s “Theory of Knowledge” illustrates the difficulty in defining knowledge: “The question how knowledge should be defined is perhaps the most important and difficult of the three with which we shall deal. This may seem surprising: at first sight it might be thought that knowledge might be defined as belief which is in agreement with the facts.
The trouble is that no one knows what a belief is, no one knows what a fact is, and no one knows what sort of agreement between them would make a belief true. Let us begin with belief.”
Knowledge acquisition involves complex cognitive processes:
1. perception,
2. communication,
3. association
4. reasoning;
5. knowledge is also said to be related to the capacity of acknowledgment in human beings.
The ninth sense is that which is called the OMEGA or the Omegaverse and the omega female portion or partition of the He/She.
The “ALL KNOWING” as the Omniverse of the ALL TIME in the SPACE-TIME which we have created as the place in space of which we exist has had to have both a male and a female in order to recognize it’s parents or the dominant forces which came together to create that which we call the NUN or the liquid of the vast space fluids which cause the cadence and rhythm of all that is inside the known Omniverse.
CENSUS
In order for us all to learn to work together in the future we must learn to embrace our community of online practicing skills with our computers. There is much to share about the future and we will use what information we can create together based on our history and statistics including our census.
What is a Census?
A modern Population Census may be defined as the total process of collecting, compiling and publishing demographic, economic and social data pertaining to all persons in a country at a specified time. A Census can also be described as a form of national stock-taking. The Census is a complete count of the population and provides detailed bench-mark data on the size of the population, age structure, educational attainment, labor force and socio-economic characteristics.
Since Census is a form of national undertaking, it involves everyone in the country and, through its statistical results, serves everyone in the country. In most countries it engenders good will and a sense of individual responsibility for seeing it through. For those who work on it, the Census is an exciting enterprise and a unique experience.
Why take a Census?
The increasing complexity of modern life means a greater need to plan housing, schools, roads, transportation and a vast range of social and economic requirements for the nation. This cannot be done without a regular detailed count of the population.
How often is regular?
In most countries, the census exercise is a decennial one, that is, every ten (10) years.
The last population census in Anguilla was taken in 1992, that is nine years ago. Since then, many changes have taken place. Such as fluctuating rates of population growth, changes in employment, changes in the average annual number of births, etc., all of which will have implications on the demand in social services, e.g. health, education and infrastructure including water, electricity and roads.
Does the Census just count people?
Although the main focus of the population Census is a count of the population, much more information about the characteristics of the population is obtained. The Census questions will seek to solicit information on the age, sex, marital status, religion and educational characteristics of each person. Questions on the economic activity of persons will provide information on the work force and its occupational and industrial breakdown.
Does the Census deal with any other area?
Our Census is a Census of population and housing, so in addition to the questions on persons, there are also questions on the houses that they live in. The questions on housing will tell us about conditions, facilities like water and electricity, overcrowding and so on.
How is a Population Census taken?
While the term Census is generally taken to mean counting the country’s population and the recording of certain characteristics at a particular point in time, several distinct operations have to be completed before a picture of the population can be presented.
In the first place, plans must be drawn up outlining what information is to be collected, how it is to be recorded and how the findings are to be presented. After these have been settled, the next step is to organize the collection of the data in the field under careful supervision.
The country is divided into small areas called Enumeration Districts (EDs) and an interviewer is assigned to each. The interviewer is thoroughly trained to ensure that he/she fully understands what questions are to be asked and how to record the answers quickly and correctly on the questionnaires provided. About three weeks before Census Day, preliminary enumeration begins. During that period, the interviewer will visit all buildings in his /her ED and record information on the Visitation Record. The actual enumeration begins on Census Day when all enumerators will visit every dwelling unit in all buildings and record the information given on the questionnaires. Therefore, if the quality of enumeration is good, the final tables which will be published will also be of good quality and usable for policy formation.
A field supervisor is placed in charge of a number of interviewers to monitor their work and to attend to any problems which may arise while the field work is being done. He/she also acts as a link between interviewers and the Census Office.
At the Census Office, the completed questionnaires are checked, coded where necessary, and made ready for processing by computers which are programmed to provide statistical tables for publication.
Who provides the Census information?
Ideally, every individual in the household should be interviewed, but this is not always possible. It is therefore permitted for any responsible adult to give the information about all the persons in that household, provided that he/she knows all the required answers.
Aren’t these questions kind of personal?
Most of the Census questions are really fairly innocuous (that is not harmful or injurious) but if you are worried about confidentiality, then be assured that the Statistics Act guarantees the confidentiality of your answers to the Census questions. Neither the enumerator nor any employee of the Census Office can reveal information about you or your household without incurring severe penalties including fines and or imprisonment.
Census Information is confidential
The law requires that all information collected from the Census must be kept confidential. All enumerators, supervisors, other field staff, as well as employees of the Census Office, will be required to take an oath of secrecy to not reveal any Census information to anyone who is not a sworn employee of the Census organization. This means that they will not divulge any Census information, under any circumstances, even to members of their families. Enumerators, supervisors and other persons working with the collected information are instructed and cautioned not to leave completed questionnaires lying around unprotected.
Census Information is used only for
preparing tabulations about the population as a whole
Some households may hesitate to answer some of the questions asked. This is understandable since they will be asked to provide information which they do not usually make available to strangers. However, persons who are reluctant to answer questions will be put at ease by informing them of the conditions under which information will be collected. These are:
• All persons engaged on the Census have taken an oath of secrecy, whether they are working in the field or in the Census Office.
• Information collected is kept strictly confidential. It is against the law for any Census worker to divulge information to any unauthorized individual or organization whatever. No information about any individual can be made available to any agency, not even to another government department.
The information collected will be used solely in the preparation of tables showing the size and structure of the population as a whole by means of TOTALS.
What is the role of the public?
The data are important to everyone and it is in our best interest to make the exercise a success. Everyone can help by:
• Being informed about the Census;
• Being available to the enumerators who will visit every household in Anguilla;
• Being accessible to the enumerators by opening our gates and answering the door;
• Being neighborly – ensure the safety of the enumerators while they are in your neighborhood. Make sure that they reach the next house safely and put away any vicious dogs while they are in the vicinity.
• Being involved. If you suspect your household has been missed, take steps to ensure that you are counted. Call the Census Office.
• Being cooperative. It is vital for the success of the Census that each and everyone of us give the enumerator our full cooperation. We will serve our country and ourselves if we answer the Census questions accurately and completely.
UFO religion
The logo used by the Heaven’s Gate group whose members committed a group suicide in the belief they were performing a rendezvous with ET.
UFO religion is an informal term used to describe a religion in which extraterrestrials (ET) figure. Typically, ETs are held to be interested in the benefit of humanity which either already is, or eventually will become, part of a preexisting ET civilization. Others may incorporate ETs into a more supernatural worldview in which the UFO occupants are more akin to angels than physical aliens, though, ultimately this distinction may become blurred within the overall subculture and a variety of tropes from standard space operas to the classic UFO sighting/abductee subculture are observed.
Some are cargo cults, in that the adherents believe that the arrival or rediscovery of alien civilizations, technologies and spirituality will enable humans to overcome their current ecological, spiritual and social problems. Issues such as hatred, war, bigotry, poverty and so on are said to be resolvable through the use of superior alien technology and spiritual abilities. Such belief systems are also described as millenarian in their outlook
UFO religions naturally have developed first in such countries as the United States, Canada, France, the United Kingdom and Japan as the concept presumes the cultural context of a society technologically advanced enough to conceive of ET as such and one in which religion of any kind is not discouraged or suppressed. The term “flying saucers” and the popular notion of the UFO originated in 1947. The 1950s saw the creation of UFO religions, with the advent of the purported contactees. Scientology, which does not publicly stress this basis is probably the largest and originates from this early period.
L. Ron Hubbard, founder of Scientology, in 1950
UFO religions run the gamut from serious enough for adherents to commit mass suicide to a few that are intentionally satirical or farcical.
Notable UFO religions
Aetherius Society
The Aetherius Society was founded in the United Kingdom in the 1950s. Its founder, George King, claimed to have been contacted telepathically by an alien intelligence called Aetherius, who represented an “Interplanetary Parliament.” According to Aetherians, their society acts as a vehicle through which “Cosmic Transmissions of advanced metaphysical significance” can be disseminated to the rest of humanity. These “transmissions” were recorded on magnetic reel-to-reel tape by persons present during each “telepathic transmission” as George King sat in a state of “Samadhi” and the “transmission” was “delivered” via his voicebox. In 1956 and 1957, and on occasion before a public audience, several of these “transmissions” forecast flying saucer activity in specific parts of the world on certain dates (You Are Responsible! Aetherius Society 1961). Shortly after these dates, newspapers, such as the Sunday Times and The Daily Telegraph, reported sightings which coincided with the dates and locations forecast in these “transmissions”. As a spiritual teacher, George King taught certain yoga practices, spiritual healing, Eastern mantra and “dynamic prayer”—tools for spiritual self-advancement and service to the world—which the Aetherius Society is principally based upon.
Church of the SubGenius
Founded in 1979 with the publication of SubGenius Pamphlet #1 by Ivan Stang and Philo Drummond, the Church of the SubGenius has been known as a “parody religion” due to its extensive use of comedy and parody. In spite of this, the organization claims over 10,000 followers worldwide who have paid $30 to become “ordained SubGenius ministers”, and it has been embraced by many skeptic and atheist groups. With the publication of The Book of the SubGenius in 1983, the Church of the SubGenius prophesied that its founder, J.R. “Bob” Dobbs, was in contact with an exterrestrial race called the Xists (“X-ists”), and these Xists were scheduled to launch a worldwide invasion of Earth on July 5, 1998. (See also: X-Day (Church of the SubGenius)) The day of the scheduled invasion came and went without an appearance by the Xists, but church members remain unconvinced. The church now holds annual “X-Day” celebrations on July 5 of every year. The church also claims that its members are not entirely human, having descended from the Yeti.
Heaven’s Gate
The Heaven’s Gate group achieved notoriety in 1997 when one of its founders convinced 38 followers to commit mass suicide. Members reportedly believed themselves to be aliens, awaiting a spaceship that would arrive with Comet Hale-Bopp. The suicide was undertaken in the apparent belief that their souls would be transported onto the spaceship, which they thought was hiding behind the comet. They underwent elaborate preparations for their trip, including purchasing and wearing matching shoes. For a time, group members lived in a darkened house where they would simulate the experience they expected to have during their long journey in outer space.
Industrial Church of the New World Comforter
The Industrial Church of the New World Comforter is a UFO religion founded in 1973 by Allen Michael.
In 1947, Allen Noonan was a pictorial sign painter in Long Beach, California, who that year claimed to have a telepathic encounter with a UFO. He then changed his name from Allen Noonan to Allen Michael. He claimed to have physically encountered a flying saucer in 1954 at Giant Rock in the Mojave Desert of California. During the Summer of Love, he had a vegan restaurant on the northeast corner of Haight and Scott streets in San Francisco, California, called the Here and Now (also called the Mustard Seed). His group lived in two communes in two large houses during the late 1960s and early 1970s in Berkeley, California, called The One World Family. They taught classes in tantric sex.
In 1969, the vegan restaurant moved to a much larger space on Telegraph Avenue and Haste Street in Berkeley and the name of the restaurant was changed to the One World Family Natural Food Center. They published a vegan cookbook called Cosmic Cookery. There was a large mural on the side of the restaurant painted by Allen Michael that had written above it the phrase Farmers, Workers, Soldiers—Revolution by 1976! The farmer was holding a pitchfork, the worker was holding a hammer, and the soldier was holding a gun, and they had their arms around each other’s shoulders. Above the three were three flying saucers coming in for a landing. In 1973, Allen Michael founded “The Industrial Church of the New World Comforter” and published the first volume of his revelations, The Everlasting Gospel. In 1975, the church headquarters and the vegetarian restaurant relocated to Stockton, California. Allen Noonan ran for president of the United States in the 1980 and 1984 elections on the Utopian Synthesis Party ticket.
Nation of Islam
The Nation of Islam subscribes to the belief that UFOs are responsible for “raising mountains” and will destroy the world on the Day of Judgment. Its former leader, Elijah Muhammed, claimed that the Biblical Book of Ezekiel describes a “Motherplane” or “wheel”. The movement’s current leader, Louis Farrakhan, describes the “Motherplane” thus:
The Honorable Elijah Muhammad told us of a giant Motherplane that is made like the universe, spheres within spheres. White people call them unidentified flying objects (UFOs). Ezekiel, in the Old Testament, saw a wheel that looked like a cloud by day but a pillar of fire by night. The Hon. Elijah Muhammad said that that wheel was built on the island of Nippon, which is now called Japan, by some of the original scientists. It took 15 billion dollars in gold at that time to build it. It is made of the toughest steel. America does not yet know the composition of the steel used to make an instrument like it. It is a circular plane, and the Bible says that it never makes turns. Because of its circular nature it can stop and travel in all directions at speeds of thousands of miles per hour. He said there are 1,500 small wheels in this mother wheel which is a half mile by a half mile (800 by 800 m). This Mother Wheel is like a small human built planet. Each one of these small planes carry three bombs.
Raëlism
The International Raëlian Movement has been described as “the largest UFO religion in the world.”
Raëlians believe that scientifically advanced extraterrestrials, known as the Elohim, created life on Earth through genetic engineering, and that a combination of human cloning and “mind transfer” can ultimately provide eternal life. Past religious teachers, like Jesus, Buddha and Muhammad, are said to have been sent by these scientifically advanced extraterrestrials to teach humanity. The Elohim are said to be planning a future visit to complete their revelation and education of humanity.
Raëlian Priest Thomas said on this topic, “The difference between Raëlians and Heaven’s Gate and Jim Jones etc., is that the others destructively believed in a God who would give them a better life after death, just like most believers in a monotheistic religion do today, and hence the risk for suicide chasing afterlife rewards … as Raëlians we want the best right now in our life, who would want to die now in that scenario with all those pleasures to enjoy? Raëlians believe in enjoying life now, with happiness and laughter.”
SCIENTOLOGY
Scientology has been discussed in the context of UFO religions in UFO Religions by Christopher Partridge,
The Encyclopedic Sourcebook of UFO Religions by James R. Lewis, and UFO Religion: Inside Flying Saucer Cults and Culture by Gregory Reece.
Stories of extraterrestrial civilizations and interventions in past lives form a part of the belief system of Scientology. The most well-known story publicized and held up to ridicule by critics is that of Xenu, the ruler of the Galactic Confederacy who is said to have brought billions of frozen people to Earth 75 million years ago and placed them near a number of volcanoes, and dropped hydrogen bombs into them, thus killing the entire population in an effort to solve overpopulation. The spirits of these people were then captured by Xenu and mass implanted with numerous suggestions and then “packaged” into clusters of spirits.
From the early 1950s onwards, Scientology’s founder, L. Ron Hubbard, published a number of books, lectures and other works describing what he termed “space opera”.
Scientology teaches that all humans have experienced innumerable past lives, including lives in ancient advanced extraterrestrial societies, such as Helatrobus and the Marcabians. Traumatic memories from these past lives are said to be the cause of many present-day physical and mental ailments. Scientologists also believe that human beings possess superhuman powers which cannot be restored until they have been fully rehabilitated as spiritual beings through the practice of “auditing”, using methods set out by Hubbard in his various works.
According to Hubbard, when thetans (the Scientology term for a human being) die they go to a “landing station” on the planet Venus, where they are re-implanted and are programmed to “forget” their previous lifetimes, thus causing amnesia. The Venusians then “capsule” each thetan and send them back to Earth to be dumped into the ocean off the coast of California; whereupon, each thetan searches for a new body to inhabit. To avoid these inconveniences, Hubbard advised Scientologists to simply refuse to go to Venus after their death.
Unarius Academy of Science
Founded by Ernest L. Norman and his wife, Ruth, in 1954, the Unarians are a group headquartered in El Cajon, California, who believe that, through the use of fourth dimensional physics, they are able to communicate with supposed advanced intelligent beings that allegedly exist on higher frequency planes. Unarians believe in past lives and hold that the Solar System was once inhabited by ancient interplanetary civilizations –
Universe people
The Universe people or Cosmic people of light powers (Czech: Vesmírní lidé sil světla) is a Czech movement centered around Ivo A. Benda. Its belief system is based upon the existence of extraterrestrial civilizations communicating with Benda and other “contacters” since October 1997 telepathically and later by direct personal contact. According to Benda, those civilizations operate a fleet of spaceships led by Ashtar (sometimes written Ashtar Sheran) orbiting and closely watching the Earth, helping the good and waiting to transport the followers into another dimension. The Universe People teaching incorporates various elements from ufology (some foreign “contacters” are credited, though often also renounced after a time as misguided or deceptive), Christianity (Jesus was a “fine-vibrations” being) and conspiracy theories (forces of evil are supposed to plan compulsory chipping of the populace
UFOs in other religions

Though rarely mentioned after having been introduced in 1991, Harry Palmer asserts a Galactic Confederacy story similar to Scientology in his “Avatar” courses and literature.
The Theosophical guru Benjamin Creme claims that the Messiah figure he refers to as Maitreya, who, he teaches, will soon declare himself publicly, is in telepathic contact with the space brothers in their flying saucers Creme subscribes to the view that Nordic aliens from Venus pilot flying saucers from a civilization on Venus hundreds of millions of years in advance of ours that exists on the etheric plane of Venus. These flying saucers are capable of stepping down the level of vibration of themselves and their craft to the slower level of vibration of the atoms of the physical plane (Creme accepts George Adamski’s UFO sightings as valid).
According to Creme, the Venusians have mother ships up to four miles long. It is also believed by the Theosophists in general as well as Creme in particular that the governing deity of Earth, Sanat Kumara (who is believed to live in a city called Shamballa located above the Gobi desert on the etheric plane of Earth), is a Nordic alien who originally came from Venus 18,500,000 years ago.
The followers of Benjamin Creme believe there is regular flying saucer traffic between Venus and Shamballah and that crop circles are mostly caused by flying saucers.
The Ascended Master Teachings are a group of religions based on Theosophy. In the traditional Ascended Master Teachings of Guy Ballard and Elizabeth Clare Prophet, no mention is made of UFOs or flying saucers. However, the Ascended Master Teachings teacher Joshua David Stone in his teachings began, beginning in 1993, to refer to Ashtar, believed by some UFO enthusiasts to be the commander of a flying saucer fleet called the “Ashtar Galactic Command” that operates near Earth (manned mostly by Venusians), as a Master along with the more traditional ascended masters. He continued to include “Ashtar” on his list of ascended masters that he mentioned he received dictations from when speaking at his yearly Wesak Festival Mount Shasta gatherings that began to be held in 1996. Stone also taught that the Master Jesus, under his “galactic” name Sananda, sometimes rides with “Commander Ashtar” in his flying saucer fleet
A neo-Nazi esoteric Nazi Gnostic sect headquartered in Vienna, Austria, called the Tempelhofgesellschaft, founded in the early 1990s, teaches what it calls a form of Marcionism. They distribute pamphlets claiming that the Aryan race originally came to Atlantis from the star Aldebaran (this information is supposedly based on “ancient Sumerian manuscripts”). They maintain that the Aryans from Aldebaran derive their power from the vril energy of the Black Sun. They teach that since the Aryan race is of extraterrestrial origin it has a divine mission to dominate all the other races. It is believed by adherents of this religion that an enormous space fleet is on its way to Earth from Aldebaran which, when it arrives, will join forces with the “Nazi Flying Saucers from Antarctica” to establish the Western Imperium.
The Aim of the Financiers: A One-World Government with a One-World Currency By Alain Pilote.
The following article is one of the appendices of Louis Even’s new book, “In This Age of Plenty”:
The basic flaw of the present financial system is that the banks create money as a debt, charging interest on the money that they create. The obligation for the debtor countries to repay the banks money that the banks did not create, money that does not exist, brings about unpayable debts. The Financiers know quite well that it is impossible for these countries to repay their debts, that the present financial system is defective at its base, and that it can only bring about crises and revolutions. But this is exactly what they want!
As Clifford Hugh Douglas, the founder of the Social Credit school, said: “The Money Power does not, and never did, want to improve the money system – its consequences in war, sabotage and social friction are exactly what is desired.”.Why?
It is because the Financiers believe that they are the only ones capable of governing mankind properly, and in order to be able to impose their will upon every individual and control the whole world, they invented the present debt-money system. They want to bring every nation in the world to such a state of crisis that these countries will think they have no alternative but to accept the miracle solution of the Financiers to save them from disaster: complete centralization, a single world currency, and a one-world government, in which all nations will be abolished, or forced to give up their sovereignty.
The Trilateral Commission
There are three major economic areas in the world: Europe, North America, and the Far East (Japan, South Korea, Taiwan, etc.). If, under the pretext of having to join forces to be able to face economic competition with the two other economic regions, the member countries of each of these three regions decide to merge into one single country, forming three Super-States, then the one-world government will be almost achieved.
This is exactly what is taking place now, and being promoted by the Trilateral Commission, founded in July, 1973, by David Rockefeller, the chairman of the Chase Manhattan Bank of New York. The official aim of the Trilateral Commission is “to harmonize the political, economic, social, and cultural relations between the three major economic regions in the world (hence the name “Trilateral”). This aim is almost achieved in Europe with the Single European Act that was implemented in 1993, requiring all the member countries of the European Community to abolish their trade barriers, and to hand over their monetary and fiscal policies to the European Commission in Brussels, Belgium. By 1999, all these countries are supposed to share only one currency, the “Euro”.
As regards the North American area, the merger of its member countries is well under way with the passage of NAFTA (North American Free Trade Agreement), first between Canada and the U.S.A., ant which later also included Mexico. (By the next ten years, it is supposed to include all of the Americas) There is a strong pressure to force these countries to harmonize their fiscal policies, and as it happened in Europe, economic union will inevitably lead to political union.
In front of these two gigantic economic powers, the countries of the Far East will have no choice but to join forces together and merge, to be able to compete with North America and Europe in the field of international trade.
One-world currency — the “Mark of the Beast”??
To consolidate their power, the Financiers also want to eliminate every existing national currency, and to install a one-world currency. In the 1970s, Dr. Hanrick Eldeman, Chief Analyst of the Common Market Confederacy in Brussels, unveiled a plan to “straighten out world chaos”: a three-story computer located in the administrative building of the headquarters of the Common Market, in Brussels, Belgium. People who work there call it “the Beast”. The plan implies a system of digital enumeration of each human being on earth. Thus the computer would give each inhabitant of the world a number to be used for each purchase or sale. This number would be invisibly tattooed by laser (or implanted with a microchip) either on the forehead or on the back of the hand. This would establish a walking credit card system.
And the number could be seen only through infrared scanners, installed in special verification countries or in business places. Dr. Eldeman pointed out that by using three entries of six digits each, every inhabitant of the world would be given a distinct credit card number.
This reminds us strangely of what Saint John the Apostle wrote in the Book of Revelation (13:16-18): “And he (the Beast) shall make all, both little and great, rich and poor, freemen and slaves, to receive a mark on their right hands, or on their foreheads, and that none might buy or sell, unless he carried this mark, which was the beast’s name, or the number that stands for his name. Here is wisdom; he that has understanding, let him count the number of the beast. For it is the number of a man: and the number of him is six hundred and sixty-six”.
That man will be the Pope of Rome who will be incarnate by Satan as he incarnate the Serpent, a man-like creature, in the garden of Eden, and Judas Iscariot in the days of Christ’s flesh. The main title and claim of the Pope is “Vicarivs Filii Dei” which means “In place of the Son of God”, or “Substitute for the Holy Ghost”. The letters of this title with numeric values in the old Roman system add up to 666. For Eample:

V = 005
I = 001
C = 100
A = 000
R = 000
I = 001
V = 005
S = 000

F = 000
I = 001
L = 500
I = 001
I = 001

D = 050
E = 000
I = 001
Total = 666
Debit cards
A few decades ago, before the invention of computers and microchips, such a system would have seemed far-fetched, a product of science fiction. But now everyone knows about the existence of debit cards with which you can buy anything in stores, without the need to carry any cash on you, the amount of your purchase being debited automatically from your bank account. The avowed goal of the banks is to eliminate all cash, and to force people to use debit cards as the only means of payment.

There is always the risk of losing one’s debit card, or of having somebody else illegally use it. So here comes the ultimate solution: to link people personally to their card, so there is no way they can lose it or have it stolen! And there you have it: a micro-computer chip can be implanted under your skin, or a three six-digital unit can be tattooed on your skin…just as described in Saint John’s Book of Revelation.
Actually, the mark in the right hand signifies obeying the will, and the mark in the forehead implies receiving the doctrine of the “Beast”. The Beast will be the Pope of Rome who will be incarnate by Satan when he is cast down to earth at the close of the Gentile dispensation.
Everything will be in place for a government that wants to control everybody’s move, since they will know everything about you: all that you buy, where and when you buy it, who you phone, how much money you have, will all be inscribed on this card. And if, for whatever reason, you are classified as an “undesirable person” or as an “enemy of the State” by the government, they will only have to erase your number from the central computer, and you will no longer be able to buy or sell and thus be condemned to disappear before long.
The Illuminati
This quest for a world government has been going on for a long time. For example, on Feb. 17, 1953, Financier Paul Warburg said before the U.S. Senate: “We shall have world government whether or not you like it, by conquest or consent.” This quest for world domination can be traced back to the creation of the “Illuminati”, a secret society, in 1776. Their leader, Adam Weishaupt, wrote out the master plan to bring about the subjection of the whole human race to an oligarchy of Financiers. The word “Illuminati” is derived from Lucifer and means “holders of the light”.
As surprising as it may seems, the insignia of the Order of the Illuminati appears on the reverse side of U.S. one-dollar bills. The first time it appeared was in 1933, by order of U.S. President Franklin D. Roosevelt, at the beginning of the New Deal (the name given to Roosevelt’s political reforms of that time).
One can read at the base of the 13-story pyramid, the year 1776 (MDCCLXVI in Roman numerals). Most of the people think that it represents the date of the signing of the American Declaration of Independence, but it actually memorializes the foundation of the Order of the Illuminati, which was on May 1, 1776. (Note the Zionist-Communist May Day connection).
The pyramid represents the conspiracy for the destruction of the Catholic Church (and all existing religions”), and the establishment of a one-world government, or a United Nations dictatorship. The eye radiating in all directions, is the “all-spying” eye that symbolizes the terroristic, Gestapo-like, espionage agency that Weishaupt set up to guard the “secret of the Order and to terrorize the populace into the acceptance of its rule”. The Latin words “ANNUIT COEPTIS” translate to “Announcing the creation or beginning”. Below them, “NOVUS ORDO SECLORUM” translates to a “New secular order” and the year is written in Roman numerals at the base of the Pyramid.
Manly Palmer Hall explained the symbolism otherwise. He said, Annuit Coeptis means “He (NOT the Christian God) has smiled upon our endeavours”. The capstone or triangle signifies science, NOT spirituality, and that the scroll underneath, bearing the inscription “Novus Ordo Seclorum” indicates the nature of the enterprise: a “New order of the ages”, an order of science and knowledge as opposed to Christian (morality) superstition and fear.
This insignia was adopted by the U.S. Congress as the reverse of the seal of the United States on September 15, 1789. (The obverse side of the seal bears the eagle, which is used as the official seal and coat of arms of the U.S.A., and which is also shown on the reverse side of the U.S. $1.00 bills).
The appearance of this insignia of the Illuminati on U.S., one-dollar bills in 1933 meant that the followers of Weishaupt regarded their efforts as beginning to “be crowned with success,” and that they totally controlled the U.S. Government.
The pyramid is a symbol of the Knights Templar of Freemasonry and a Zionist symbol and the Hexgram is used by Royal Arch Masons which is part of York Rite Masonry also a Zionist symbol. The two seals of the “Great Seal” combines symbolism of all Masonic Orders. The Eagle is a symbol of the Scottish Rite of Freemasonry.

Proof the Great Seal is Masonic

First outline the pyramid with a triangle. Now take the pyramid and draw a line under the base of the capstone and extend it left to right extended to the A in ANNUIT and the S in COEPTIS. Now draw lines from the end of this line down to the last O in ORDO so you will finish the Hexagram also called the Jewish Star of David.
Draw circles around all five letters to which the Hexagram points. These letters make the word MASON. The 32 feathers on the left wing of the eagle signify the 32 degrees of the Scottish Rite of Freemasonry. The right wing has 33 feathers for the extra 33rd honorary degree and inner head of the Scottish Rite. George Washington himself on the front of the One Dollar Bill was a 33rd degree Scottish Rite Mason. The 9 tail feathers indicate the 9 additional degrees of the York Rite of Freemasonry. There are13 olives and 13 leaves on the olive branches, 13 arrows in the other eagle’s claw, 13 stripes on the shield, 13 stars above the eagle in the form of a Hexagram, 13 letters in “E PLURIBUS UNUM”, 13 letters in “ANNUIT COEPTIS”, 13 rows of bricks in the pyramid. The 33rd degree Grand Lodge of the Scottish Rite of Freemasonry is located exactly 13 blocks north of the White House above an upside down pentagram outlined by the road layout which rests on the White House. The use of the Hexagram and the Pentagram and even the 7 pointed star stems from Jewish Cabalism or mysticism which was adopted from paganism. The placement of the symbols on the American money is no different to displaying a cross on the back of a one dollar bill. But you will never see these religious symbols removed because the ACLU only attacks what it sees as Christian. Separation of Church and State is a farce. The law requiring the “Separation of CHURCH and State” might as well say “Separation of Christian Kingdom and State” because only religions calling themselves “Christian” use buildings called “Church”.
Albert Pike was the founder of the KKK and one time leader of the Scottish Rite of Freemasonry Southern Jurisdiction. He himself protested the suggestion that Masonry was Christian and said that “if Masonry was Christian why were most of the people who had possession of it during the early days of the USA Hebrew”?
A Luciferian conspiracy
To say that the Illuminati is a “Luciferian” conspiracy” is not only a stylistic device, but it is literally true, since the leaders of the Illuminati are actually worshipers of Satan, and their final objective is to have the whole world bow down to him. Through his hellhounds, it is Satan himself who continues his revolt against God by endeavoring to foil God’s plan on earth, and to snatch from God as many souls as possible.
Just like Satan, the Financiers think that they are smarter than God, and that they are the only ones who can lead mankind properly. The members of the Illuminati are people of every race and creed, but who all lust for money and power.
Recognizing the powers involved
In the conclusion of his book “Pawns in the Game”, which denounces the plot of the Illuminati for world domination, William Guy Carr explains what must be done to stop this plot.
First, we must as individuals recognize the spiritual powers involved, and realize that we are not only facing terrestrial powers, but also spiritual ones; that it is basically a fight between God and Satan. We must choose who we will serve, who we will fight for: God or Satan.
Second, we must take practical steps to counteract the plan of the Financiers which, in Mr. Carr’s own words, can be done only through a monetary reform: “The electors must insist that the issue of money, and the control thereof, be placed back in the hands of the Government where it rightfully belongs.”
The necessity for Social Credit
The prayers and sacrifices to obtain the assistance of Heaven are certainly necessary to thwart the plan of the Financiers. But a technique, a temporal means, is also necessary to thwart the plan of the Financiers. This means is the Social Credit reform, conceived by the Scottish engineer, Clifford Hugh Douglas, the only reform that the Financiers really fear, and that would put an end to their power to control all the nations. “Social Credit” means social money – money created without debt by society, issued with new production, and withdrawn from circulation as production is consumed – instead of having a banking credit, as it is the case today – money created as a debt by private banks. Douglas first thought that once his discovery and its implications would be brought to the attention of the governments and of those in charge of the economy, they would hasten to implement it. But Douglas soon made another discovery: the Financiers, who ruled the economy, were absolutely not interested in changing the financial system, and its flaws and consequences (wars, waste, poverty, social friction etc.,) were absolutely what they desired, and even fostered deliberately, in order to impose their solution of a one-world government. So the Financiers did everything they could to stop and silence the Social Credit idea: a conspiracy of silence in the news media, or deliberate falsification of Douglas’s doctrine, in order to render it vulnerable; calumnies and ridicule against the apostles of “Michael”. Douglas wrote in his book “Warning Democracy”:
“So rapid was the progress made by the Social Credit ideas between 1919 and 1923 both in this country (Great Britain) and abroad, and so constantly did ideas derived from them appear in the pages of the press, that the interests threatened by them became considerably alarmed, and took what were, on the whole, effective steps to curtail their publicity. In this country the Institute of Bankers allocated five million pounds (then the equivalent of 24 million dollars) to combat the ‘subversive’ ideas of ourselves and other misguided people who wished to thinker with the financial system. The large Press Associations were expressly instructed that my own name should not be mentioned in the public press, and no metropolitan newspaper in this country or the United States was allowed to give publicity, either to correspondence or to contributions bearing upon the subject. In spite of this Canadian Parliamentary Inquiry at which I was a witness (in 1923) managed to expose on the one hand the ignorance of even leading bankers of the fundamental problems with which they had to deal, and on the other hand the lengths to which the financial power was prepared to go to retain control of the situation.”
One must not forget to mention here that the best way that the Financiers found to stop the advancement of the Social Credit idea was the creation of political parties falsely bearing the name “Social Credit”, to make people think that voting for a new party is sufficient to change the system, whereas what is needed is the education of the people (by having them subscribe to the “Michael Journal”), to force the elected representatives to serve the population, instead of serving the Financiers. Fortunately, all the so-called “Social Credit parties” are dead and buried now, but they did a lot of damage and spread confusion in the minds of the people while they existed.
“The psychological moment”
Douglas predicted that the present debt-money system of the Bankers would become unworkable and fall by itself, because of all of the unpayable debts that it creates. All the countries in the world are struggling with skyrocketing debts and heading for disaster, even though everybody knows these debts can never be paid off. Other factors announce the inevitable fall of the present system: automation, for example, which makes full employment impossible.
Douglas said that “a psychological moment” will come, a critical moment when the population, given the gravity of the situation, and despite all the power of the Financiers, will have suffered their debt-money system long enough, and will be disposed to study and accept Social Credit. Douglas wrote the following in 1924, in his book “Social Credit”:
“The position will be tremendous in its importance. A comparatively short period will probably serve to decide whether we are to master the mighty economic and social machine that we have created, or whether it is to master us; and during that period a small impetus from a body of men who know what to do and how to do it, may make the difference between yet one more retreat into the Dark Ages, or the emergence into the full light of a day of such splendor as we can at present only envisage dimly. It is this necessity for the recognition of the psychological moment, and the fitting to that moment of appropriate action, which should be present in the minds of that small minority which is seized of the gravity of the present times.”
Louis Even, at the end of an article written in 1970 and entitled “Social Credit, yes – Party, No”, repeated this idea of Douglas:
“The Social Creditors of the Michael Journal maintain, along with Douglas, that as regards Social Credit, the most effective work to do is to enlighten the population on the monopoly of financial credit, attributing to it the bad fruits of which it is the cause in the lives of people, of families, of institutions; and, in front of these bad fruits, to expose the doctrine of genuine Social Credit, which is so brilliant and in keeping with common sense. They also endeavor to develop within themselves, and to also radiate, a Social Credit spirit, which is clearly in keeping with the spirit of the Gospel: a spirit of service and not of domination, not of an insatiable pursuit of money or material goods, which is of the same nature – with a less powerful means – as the spirit of the barons of High Finance.
“Whether the collapse of the present financial system, under the weight of its own enormities, or events that have been foretold many times by privileged souls – events one certainly cannot doubt of when one sees the present decadence of moral standards, apostasy, the paganization of affluent nations that used to be Christian – occur soon, in either case, the living or the survivors of those events won’t be without a light to establish a social economic system worthy of its name.”
The point to remember in all of this is that the present financial system, which creates money as a debt, is the main means of the Financiers to establish a one-world government. Debt finance is the bridge that leads us from a free society to complete dictatorship. And the only thing the Financiers fear, the only thing that can stop them in their plan of world conquest, is the reform of the present financial system, the establishment of an honest debt-free money system, along the lines of the Social Credit philosophy. Then one realizes all the importance of the Social Credit solution, and the importance of spreading it an making it known. This is why Soviet foreign Minister Molotow had said to Dr. Hawlett Johnson, Archbishop of Canterbury, in the 30s: “We know all about Social Credit. It is the one theory in the world we fear.”
Alain Pilote.
John Paul II denounces usury
At the conclusion of his Wednesday audience on Sept. 10, 1997, Pope John Paul II denounced the practice of usury, which is a real plague in Italy, and spoke out against the “unscrupulous usurers” who engage in “pitiless exploitation” of families.
Comments in red were added by Bible Believers’ Church to align this article with God’s Word.
Bill Moore belongs with our timeline in history of UFOlogy.
William Leonard Moore (born October 31, 1943?) is an author and former UFO researcher. Prominent from the late 1970s to the late 1980s, he co-authored two books with Charles Berlitz, including The Roswell Incident – the first book written about the alleged Roswell UFO crash/retrieval.
Moore later became a controversial figure within UFOlogy due to his involvement with a group of intelligence contacts known as ‘The Aviary’. He played a role in The Bennewitz Affair, and was a central figure in the release of the controversial Majestic 12 documents.
Early career
Bill Moore has a background in the liberal arts, history, teaching and English. He speaks fluent French and holds a degree in Russian.
Moore attended Thiel College, located in Greenville, Pennsylvania graduating in 1965.
Before deciding to concentrate on his writing career he taught language and humanities at various high schools. Bill Moore was a subscriber to NICAP and during the mid to late 1960s he was asked to investigate a couple of UFO cases for the group.
He was later on the board of directors of APRO, based in Arizona.
Moore wrote The Philadelphia Experiment with Charles Berlitz. Published in 1979, it details the alleged 1943 US Navy cloaking experiment of the destroyer escort USS Eldridge at the Philadelphia Naval Yard.
The Roswell Incident
Whilst Bill Moore was based in Minnesota and still publicizing
The Philadelphia Experiment he met with fellow UFO researcher Stanton T. Friedman who he knew, to compare notes.
Friedman stated to Moore that he had recently travelled to Louisiana and spoken to a retired Major Jesse Marcel, after following up on an earlier lead he received from a radio station manager whilst he was waiting for an interview.
Jesse Marcel detailed to Friedman his involvement in an incident that had occurred almost 30 years previously – the handling of wreckage from an alleged crash of a craft during July 1947 in Roswell, New Mexico.
Moore also had some information pertaining to a UFO crash and when they thought it could be connected to the same story, they began to research the case further. Moore later raised the idea of a book with his writing partner Charles Berlitz who liked the idea. Within a relatively short period of time Moore conducted the field work, interviewed eyewitnesses, prepared reports and sent them to Berlitz in New York who wrote up the chapters of the book.
The Roswell Incident was published in 1980 and was the first book written about the alleged Roswell UFO crash/retrieval.
Interactions with ‘The Aviary’
In late 1980 after the release of The Roswell Incident, Moore received a phone call after appearing on a radio show where he was promoting the new book. In October 1988 on the nationally televised UFO Cover-Up?: Live! broadcast Bill Moore described:
“I got a phone call after appearing on a radio show from a man who said ‘you’re the only person we’ve heard talk about this subject, who seems to know what he’s talking about’. He convinced me that he was a government intelligence agent and wanted to begin disseminating some information about UFOs to the public”.
The original contact Moore later met was to be known as ‘Falcon’. In exchange for information received Moore would keep tabs on sections of the UFO research community. This also included taking part in disinformation activities against Paul Bennewitz with AFOSI agent Richard C. Doty, as Moore would later admit at the 1989 Las Vegas MUFON conference. Throughout the 80s the group of intelligence contacts grew in number, each given a bird name – hence they became known as ‘The Aviary’.
In June 1982 television producer Jaime Shandera joined forces with Moore to attend the meetings and collaborate on the research, including the discovery of the existence of MJ-12 – the purported high-level policy making group overseeing the UFO and extraterrestrial issue. In 1984 Moore and Shandera received the now infamous MJ-12 documents as a 35mm black and white film that was mailed to Jaime Shandera in a plain brown envelope. Their contacts with The Aviary continued until the 1990s when Moore and Shandera eventually left the UFO research field.
Recent Activities
In the last few years William Moore has been interviewed several times by researcher Greg Bishop on his radio show Radio Mysterioso regarding his past involvement in UFOlogy. In one of the interviews Bill Moore reveals he still writes, though not about UFOs – he carries out editorial work for a newspaper, and has been acting as an historian researching and writing about The Book of Mormon.
William Moore was also a central figure in Greg Bishop’s 2005 book detailing the Bennewitz Affair Project Beta: The Story of Paul Bennewitz, National Security, and the Creation of a Modern UFO Myth. Some of Moore’s activities and interactions with The Aviary have also been detailed in the 2006 book Exempt from Disclosure: The Black World of UFOs by Aviary members Robert M. Collins aka ‘Condor’ and Richard C. Doty – the surrogate
References really should be included because this part relies on references to primary sources or sources affiliated with the subject. Please add citations from reliable and independent sources See the end of the book for list.
UFOLOGY HISTORY
Ufology
Not to be confused with UFO religion.
Ufology ( /juːˈfɒlədʒiː/) is the array of subject matter and activities associated with an interest in unidentified flying objects (UFOs). UFOs have been subject to various investigations over the years by governments, independent groups, and scientists. The term derives from UFO, which is pronounced as an acronym, and the suffix -logy, which comes from the Ancient Greek λογία (logiā).
According to the Oxford English Dictionary, one of the first documented uses of the word ufology can be found in the Times Literary Supplement from January 23, 1959, in which it writes, “The articles, reports, and bureaucratic studies which have been written about this perplexing visitant constitute ‘ufology’.” This article was printed eight years after Edward J. Ruppelt of the United States Air Force (USAF) coined the word UFO in 1951.
Historical background
FOO FIGHTERS
A Swedish Air Force officer searches for a “ghost rocket” in Lake Kölmjärv, Norrland, Sweden, in July 1946.
The modern UFO mythology has three traceable roots: the late 19th century “mystery airships” reported in the newspapers of western United States, “foo fighters” reported by Allied airmen during World War II, and the Kenneth Arnold “flying saucer” sighting near Mt. Rainier, Washington on June 24, 1947.
UFO reports between “The Great Airship Wave” and the Arnold sighting were limited in number compared to the post-war period: notable cases include reports of “ghost fliers” in Europe and North America during the 1930s and the numerous reports of “ghost rockets” in Scandinavia (mostly Sweden) from May to December 1946.
Media hype in the late 1940s and early 1950s following the Arnold sighting brought the concept of flying saucers to the public audience.
As the public’s preoccupation in UFOs grew, along with the number of reported sightings, the United States military began to take notice of the phenomenon. The UFO explosion of the early post-war era coincides with the escalation of the Cold War and the Korean War.
The U.S. military feared that secret aircraft of the Soviet Union, possibly developed from captured German technology, were behind the sightings.
If correct, the craft causing the sightings were thus of importance to national security and of need of systematic investigation.
Theresa Janette Thurmond born December 26, 1951 in Monroe, Ouachita Parish, Louisiana, USA. One of two of a UFO Team with Thomas Ray Morris born May 16, 1959 in Lafayette, Tippecanoe County, Indiana, USA. One Male and Female who were the Commander Navigators working later in the Alien ET UFO Contact Team of the EBEs. Extra-biological Entities. Roswell UFO Encounters by Theresa J Morris is a book with the story line underground written with pseudo names of Sarah Thomas and John Harris. Theresa Thomas has a code name of Thothe the first three letters of her last name of her mother who remarried Charles Thomas. Theresa’s grandchildren were to live in Lubbock and named Jacob Thomas and Jordan Thomas raised without any knowledge of their UFO inheritance of UFOlogy in their memory banks. Two children were said to be extraterrestrials from birth out of four as the other two are only of the mother Theresa Janette who was genetically enhanced from the 1943 program which had a timeline from the Philadelphia Experiment gone Wrong with the Montauk Point Portal Wormhole time line 1968 68-43 is a 35 year window which is said to be opened and crossing and yet physically impossible to understand is said to be challenged by others with the chair of one of the crashed UFOS found in pieces at the farm where Mac Brazel was said to be photographed with pieces of the wreckage.
By 1952, however, the official US government interest in UFOs began to fade as the USAF projects Sign and Grudge concluded, along with the CIA’s Robertson Panel that UFO reports indicated no direct threat to national security.
The government’s official research into UFOs ended with the publication of the Condon Committee report in 1969, which concluded that the study of UFOs in the past 21 years had achieved little, if anything, and that further extensive study of UFO sightings was unwarranted. It also recommended the termination of the USAF special unit Project Blue Book.
As the U.S. government ceased officially studying UFO sightings, the same became true for most governments of the world. A notable exception is France, which still maintains the GEIPAN, formerly known as GEPAN (1977–1988) and SEPRA (1988–2004), a unit under the French Space Agency CNES. During the Cold War, British,[8] Canadian, Danish, Italian, and Swedish governments have each collected reports of UFO sightings. Britain’s Ministry of Defence ceased accepting any new reports as of 2010.
Status as a field
Further information: List of ufologists
Ufology has generally not been embraced by academia as a scientific field of study, even though UFOs were during the late 1940s and early 1950s the subject of large-scale scientific studies. The lack of acceptance of ufology by academia as a field of study means that people can claim to be “UFO researchers”, without the sorts of scientific consensus building and, in many cases peer review, that otherwise shape and influence scientific paradigms. Even among scientifically inclined UFO research efforts, data collecting is often done by amateur investigators.
Famous mainstream scientists who have shown interest in the UFO phenomenon include Stanford physicist Peter A. Sturrock, astronomer J. Allen Hynek, computer scientist and astronomer Jacques F. Vallée, and University of Arizona meteorologist James E. McDonald.
As a pseudoscience
Ufology has sometimes been characterized as a partial or total pseudoscience, which many ufologists reject
Pseudoscience is a term that classifies studies that are claimed to exemplify the methods and principles of science, but that do not adhere to an appropriate scientific methodology, lack supporting evidence or plausibility, or otherwise lack scientific status.
Feist thinks that ufology can be categorized as a pseudoscience because, he says, its adherents claim it to be a science while being rejected as being one by the scientific community and because, he says, the field lacks a cumulative scientific progress; ufology has not, in his view, advanced since the 1950s. Cooper states that the fundamental problem in ufology is not the lack of scientific methodology, as many ufologists have striven to meet standards of scientific acceptability, but rather the fact that the assumptions on which the research is often based are considered highly speculative.
Methodological issues
Scientific UFO research suffers from the fact that the phenomena under observation do not usually make predictable appearances at a time and place convenient for the researcher.
Ufologist Diana Palmer Hoyt argues,
The UFO problem seems to bear a closer resemblance to problems in meteorology than in physics. The phenomena are observed, occur episodically, are not reproducible, and in large part, are identified by statistical gathering of data for possible organization into patterns. They are not experiments that can be replicated at will at the laboratory bench under controlled conditions.
On the other hand, skeptics have argued that UFOs are not a scientific problem at all, as there is no tangible physical evidence to study.
Barry Markovsky argues that, under scrutiny by qualified investigators, the vast majority of UFO sightings turn out to have mundane explanations.
Astronomer Carl Sagan stated on UFO sightings, “The reliable cases are uninteresting and the interesting cases are unreliable. Unfortunately there are no cases that are both reliable and interesting.”
Peter A. Sturrock states that UFO studies should be compartmentalized into at least “the following distinct activities”:
Field investigations leading to case documentation and the measurement or retrieval of physical evidence;
Laboratory analysis of physical evidence;
The systematic compilation of data (descriptive and physical) to look for patterns and so extract significant facts;
The analysis of compilations of data (descriptive and physical) to look for patterns and so extract significant facts;
The development of theories and the evaluation of those theories on the basis of facts.
Denzler states that ufology as a field of study has branched into two different mindsets: the first group of investigators wants to convince the unbelievers and earn intellectual legitimacy through systematic study using the scientific method, and the second group sees the follow-up questions concerning the origin and “mission” of the UFOs as more important than a potential academic standing.
UFO categorization
J. Allen Hynek) and Jacques Vallée
The “UFO” is unidentified flying object. Because it is unidentified, the classification and categorization are impossible. However, ufologists have proposed different systems for the classification.
Hynek system
Developed in the 1970s, J. Allen Hynek’s original system of description divides sightings into six categories. It first separates sightings into distant- and close-encounter categories, arbitrarily setting five-hundred feet as the cutoff point. It then subdivides these close and distant categories based on appearance or special features:
Nocturnal Lights (NL): Anomalous lights seen in the night sky.
Daylight Discs (DD): Any anomalous object, generally but not necessarily “discoidal”, seen in the distant daytime sky.
Radar/Visual cases (RV): Objects seen simultaneously by eye and on radar.
Hynek also defined three close encounter (CE) subcategories:
CE1: Strange objects seen nearby but without physical interaction with the environment.
CE2: A CE1 case that leaves physical evidence, e.g. soil depressions, vegetation damage, or causes electromagnetic interference.
CE3: CE1 or CE2 cases where occupants or entities are seen.
Later, Hynek introduced a fourth category, CE4, which is used to describe cases where the witness feels he was abducted by a UFO.
Some Ufologists have adopted a fifth category, CE5, which involves conscious human-initiated contact with extraterrestrial intelligence
Vallée system
Jacques Vallée has devised a UFO classification system, where the UFO sightings of four different categories are divided into five subcategories:
Close Encounter (CE): As per Hynek.
Maneuver (MA): Trajectory discontinuity in flight.
Fly-by (FB): No observed discontinuity in flight.
Anomaly (AN): Unusual lights or unexplained entities.
The five subcategories can apply to all previous categories of sightings:
Sighting
Physical effects: for example, radar sighting
Life form or living entity
Reality transformation: witnesses experienced a transformation of their sense of reality (often corresponding to the popular characterization of the incident as an abduction)
Physiological impact: Such as death or serious injury
Thus, the Vallée categorization categorizes cases as MA-2, AN-1, CE-4, for example.
Alleged academic ridicule
Stanton T. Friedman, Physicist, Spokesperson, Grandfather of UFOLogy
Stanton Friedman considers the general attitude of mainstream academics as arrogant and dismissive, or bound to a rigid world view that disallows any evidence contrary to previously held notions.
Denzler states that the fear of ridicule and a loss of status has prevented scientists of pursuing a public interest in UFOs.
J. Allen Hynek’s also commented, “Ridicule is not part of the scientific method and people should not be taught that it is.” Hynek said of the frequent dismissal of UFO reports by astronomers that the critics knew little about the sightings, and should thus not be taken seriously.
Peter A. Sturrock suggests that a lack of funding is a major factor in the institutional disinterest in UFOs.
Ufology and UFO reports
In addition to UFO sightings, certain supposedly related phenomena are of interest to some in the field of ufology, including crop circles, cattle mutilations, and alien abductions and implants.
Some ufologists have also promoted UFO conspiracy theories, including the alleged Roswell UFO Incident of 1947, the Majestic 12 documents, and UFO disclosure advocation. According to Wikipedia on Skeptics in etymology of Ufology as a sub-culture that exists. Such as skeptic Robert Sheaffer has accused ufology of having a “credulity explosion”. He claims a trend of increasingly sensational ideas steadily gaining popularity within ufology. Sheaffer remarked, “the kind of stories generating excitement and attention in any given year would have been rejected by mainstream Ufologists a few years earlier for being too outlandish. “Likewise, James McDonald has expressed the view that extreme groups undermined serious scientific investigation, stating that a “bizarre ‘literature’ of pseudo-scientific discussion” on “spaceships bringing messengers of terrestrial salvation and occult truth” had been “one of the prime factors in discouraging serious scientists from looking into the UFO matter to the extent that might have led them to recognize quickly enough that cultism and wishful thinking have nothing to do with the core of the UFO problem.” In the same statement, McDonald said that, “Again, one must here criticize a good deal of armchair-researching (done chiefly via the daily newspapers that enjoy feature-writing the antics of the more extreme of such subgroups). A disturbing number of prominent scientists have jumped all too easily to the conclusion that only the nuts see UFOs”.
Surveys of scientists and amateur astronomers concerning UFOs
In 1973, Peter A. Sturrock conducted a survey among members of the San Francisco chapter of the American Institute of Aeronautics and Astronautics, where 1175 questionnaires were mailed and 423 were returned, and found no consensus concerning the nature and scientific importance of the UFO phenomenon, with views ranging equally from “impossible” to “certain” in reply to the question, “Do UFOs represent a scientifically significant phenomenon?” [52] In a later larger survey conducted among the members of the American Astronomical Society, where 2611 were questionnaires mailed and 1356 were returned, Sturrock found out that opinions were equally diverse, with 23% replying “certainly”, 30% “probably”, 27% “possibly”, 17% “probably not”, and 3% “certainly not”, to the question of whether the UFO problem deserves scientific study.[53] Sturrock also asked in the same survey if the surveyee had witnessed any event which they could not have identified and which could have been related to the UFO phenomenon, with around 5% replying affirmatively.[53]
In 1980, a survey of 1800 members of various amateur astronomer associations by Gert Herb and J. Allen Hynek of the Center for UFO Studies (CUFOS) found that 24% responded “yes” to the question, “Have you ever observed an object which resisted your most exhaustive efforts at identification?”[54]
Notable studies, panels, and conferences in ufology
Further information: Identification studies of UFOs
Further information: List of government responses to UFOs
Project Sign, Project Grudge (USA, 1947–1949)
Nathan F. Twining
FATE Magazine was created in 1948 as the first Paranormal Magazine. FATE – 2012 & Beyond
Greatness
Added Reference of Affirmations likes by TJ
AFFIRMATIONS ON PERSONAL DAYS IN LIFE – MIND YOUR BODY & HEAL YOUR SPIRIT in the BIRTH-LIFE-DEATH Beginning & END of INFINITY in TIME
1- Monday – I Break New Ground and Begin New Ventures
2- Tuesday – I Trust the Process of Life to Unfold in Divine Right Order
3- Wednesday – I Love Life and the Joy of Living
4- Thursday – I Turn Everything into an Opportunity
5- Friday – I Welcome Change and Expand My Boundaries
6- Saturday – I Accept My Responsibilities with Love and Joy
7- Sunday – I Enjoy the Inner Quest and Find Many Answers
8- Monday – I am the Prosperous, Successful Executive of My World
9- Tuesday – I am Satisfied, Fulfilled, and Complete
11 Wednesday- Master – 11- I listen to the Inner Voice of Wisdom
12 Thursday – Master – 22- I work for the Good of the Planet and I Am Blessed
TJ MORRIS ET & FRIENDS LECTURES -LIVE

This is shared for our Conferences, Seminar Attendees & Fans
This is simply a model we used in 2012 for Janet Kira Lessin, Dr. Alexander Sasha Lessin, Tommy Hawksblood Sinici, David Saeed Farman for Alchemy Conferences. See AssociateGuides.com which I renewed for a year and will combine all my prior websites except for the Social Paranormal Magazine as socialparanormal.com which I intend on keeping. ACO is now a part of the AssociateGuides.com which will be shared with all my friends who desire to have an annual gathering of Project Managers as Advisers, Consultants, and Organizers also known as my service mark as ACO. I presently use as a business name TJ Morris ACO as my Operating Account as a Social Service Club which I list with Gene Watts, CPA in Beaver Dam, KY USA.
Type Price Quantity
Ticket Line to Purchase LIVE 12-2 PM
TOTAL PACKAGE FOR DAY WITH TJ MORRIS ET is $165.00 per person. UP TO 500 and 50% of DAY TICKET GOES TO HUNGER AND POVERTY IN AMERICA.
ASSOCIATE GUIDES FOR 2013 7 BEYOND LIFE INTRO TO OUR PSYCHIC READINGS: 15 MIN $25
BOOK TRADE TABLE ROOM~12-4PM
MEET & GREET 4-5 PM
MEAL: 5-6 PM (Price not included)
Seating for Meal begins at 5 pm-6 pm
WORKSHOP SPEECHCRAFT 6-7 PM
LECTURE 7 PM-8PM
LIVE TJ MORRIS ET RADIO SHOW
8-10 PM
10-11 PM Photo SESSION/Signed
$165.00
(Entire Package –READING, MEET & GREET, MEAL, lecture-radio show live-photo session – autographed books)
Student
Valid with Student I.D. $35.00
8-10 pm 2 hour session $45.00
Late night 10 pm STAY FOR PHOTO SESSION $20.00

Breakdown:
$65.oo Lecture
$35.00 Meet & Greet Meal
$20.00 Photo Session
$25.00 Psychic Reading
$20.00 Workshop-Speechcraft
Meet & Greet (does not include evening lecture)
Spend an hour with ASSOCIATE GUIDES OF TJ MORRIS & FRIENDS OF THE TJ MORRIS ET RADIO SHOW in an informal setting, receive a special gift you’ll be able to keep autographed book while supply lasts – pay at time of purchase for entire ticket $100.00
Meet & Greet (does not include evening lecture)
Valid with Student I.D. Spend an hour TJ MORRIS 7 FRIENDS OF ASSOCIATE GUIDES in an informal setting, get a drink at the cash bar and receive a special gift you’ll be able to wear that same night! $35.00
We invite you to come and join some of the most inspiring figures in the fields of extra-terrestrial awareness and cosmic consciousness. We have member’s worldwide exploring consciousness, ET disclosure, & unconditional love in life with believing in our liberty.
We have a passion and a desire to serve humanity as facilitators of awareness sharing information as our attention shifts.

We are also involved in creating conscious music in unison with frequencies to raise vibrations through sound healing. We have a network of Practioners, Lightworkers and Truthseekers.
Awakening Section Disclaimer: We don’t necessarily endorse the posts found here, we have grouped together frequent contributors. This section may hold a vast array of channeled material. These can be anything from inspirational writing, channeling your spirit guide, higher or lower vibrational beings from the spirit world or E.Ts. You should use discernment when reading this kind of material and take what resonates with you. Loving beings would never seek to remove your free will or guide you into a place of ‘no action’ or apathy. As physical beings it’s important that we speak up against injustices and use our voices to stop the proliferation of evil and help heal planet Earth as we believe we are here to restore her back to full health and pave the way for a brighter future for ourselves and our children.
It is our belief that Ascension/Awakening is an inward personal journey stripping away fears and emotional baggage that no longer serve you, so YOU can become more of who you truly are. In this state of clarity we are able view the illusion of consensus reality that has been projected onto us by those seeking to crush man’s spirit and then take personal responsibility and action through peaceful spiritual activism. We shouldn’t wait to be saved or upgraded as Action should be in the NOW not tomorrow.
‘All that is necessary for the triumph of evil is that good men do nothing’
Internet Investigations – ACIR

We are listing for your information some articles listed in archives on the American Chronicle. See http://americanchronicle.com and look or search or the following listed articles. This information got us to this book to be complied as information that is helpful to our members and readers of our ACO Association of our Social Service Club. We can share this to assist others who may need some information.
Theresa J Morris, American Culture International Relations as ACIR for the Record of Researchers into the 2012 Phenomenon of the Super Natural Spiritism.
American Chronicle Articles Still on File on 12/14/2012 by Theresa J Thurmond Morris aka as TJ of Ascension in this century of Avatar Communication Messengers or Angels of Spirit. Spiritual Science of Alien Contact Orbiting Earth. 
EPILOGUE

An epilogue or epilog is a piece of writing at the end of a work of literature or drama, usually used to bring closure to the work. It is presented from the perspective of within the story; when the author steps in and speaks directly to the reader that is more properly considered an afterword. The opposite is a Prologue – a piece of writing at the beginning of a work of literature or drama, usually used to open the story and capture interest.

There is much information that we need to exist while on planet earth and I simply provide some information that I find interesting to me in words which we can learn to understand to use to bond us together in this time of the Ascension Age.
My job was to make sure that while here as a messenger of the Co-creators our parents in space and time that I shared in this time and dispensation the knowledge that we are divine essences and that we are a part of the divine plan to continue to grow and learn and to think. We are here to be explorers of our own soul’s essence and we share as spirit as we can either share or withhold our own information. I repeat what we share as knowing which we presently call knowledge. I feel that the knowing as knowledge bears repeating for us all in this epilogue of which I have created as TJ.
Knowledge is a familiarity with someone or something, which can include facts, information, descriptions, or skills acquired through experience or education. It can refer to the theoretical or practical understanding of a subject. It can be implicit (as with practical skill or expertise) or explicit (as with the theoretical understanding of a subject); it can be more or less formal or systematic.
In philosophy, the study of knowledge is called epistemology; the philosopher Plato famously defined knowledge as “justified true belief.” However, no single agreed upon definition of knowledge exists, though there are numerous theories to explain it. The following quote from Bertrand Russell’s “Theory of Knowledge” illustrates the difficulty in defining knowledge: “The question how knowledge should be defined is perhaps the most important and difficult of the three with which we shall deal. This may seem surprising: at first sight it might be thought that knowledge might be defined as belief which is in agreement with the facts. The trouble is that no one knows what a belief is, no one knows what a fact is, and no one knows what sort of agreement between them would make a belief true. Let us begin with belief.”
Knowledge acquisition involves complex cognitive processes: perception, communication, association and reasoning; while knowledge is also said to be related to the capacity of acknowledgment in human beings. An acknowledgement of self is the first step on the road to recovery. Recovery from what is up to the individual.
Ascension Age is the age of knowing and taking action, health, prosperity for all and to live in love and light. References we list as important in this time of history on earth.
ACE GUIDE – ACO CATEGORIES & DEFINITIONS

ASCENSION CENTER ~Stargate to the Cosmos
Body~Mind~Spirit Conferences
Ancient & Present
DIVINATION
Ghost Hunters
Premonitions
Psychic Mediums
Seers
Nostradamus
Spirit Guides
Telepathy
ET Disclosure Project
Exopolitics
Disclosure
Government Cover Ups
Conspiracy Theories
EXTRA SENSORY PERCEPTION (ESP)
Dowsing
Levitation of Spirit
Mental Telepathy
Migrations of Birds
PSI FUNCTIONS
Psi miracles
Spirits of electricity
God Particle
Poltergeist
Holotropic Breathwork
CRYPTOZOOLOGY
BIG FOOT, YETI, ABOBMINABLE SNOWMAN
LOC NESS MONSTER
VAMPIRES
Time Displacement
Sages
Organized divination
EXTRATERRESTRIALS
Extraterrestrial Education
Extraterrestrial Intelligent Beings
Extra biological Beings (EBENS)
FUTURE DISCOVERIES
Science
Technology
Futurists Theories
GUIDES
Body-Mind-Spirit
Lomi-Lomi
New Age Culture
Meditations
Hypnotism
Yoga
Joytish
Reiki
Hollow Earth Society
Mayan Calendar
Ufology
UFOS & USOs
METAPHYSICS
GLOBAL COMMUNITY CULTURES
New World Order
Walk-Ins
Ghosts Energy Apparitions
Ascension Channels
Shroud of Turin
SCIENCE OF RELIGIONS
1. ASPECTS & PROBLEMS
Origin of Religions
2. EXTINCT RELIGIONS
INSIDE EUROPE & OUTSIDE OF EUROPE
Thinking of primitive people
3. EGYPTIAN RELIGION
History, Gods, Pharaohs, Priests, Monuments
Ideas of Death & Last Judgment
4. RELIGIONS OF BIBLICAL REVELATION
CHRISTIANITY
Creed, Jesus, Dogma, Catholicism, Reformation, Present
JUDAISM
Jewish Creed, Ethics, Talmud, Mysticism
ISLAM
History, Origin, Mohammedan Mysticism,
DEITY WORSHIP
Basic Modes between humankind & Deities
Offering-Prayers-Rituals
Animistic
Preanimistic Theory
Theory of Original Monotheism
Magic & Religion
Celts & Slavs
Greeks
Romans
Tibet
China
Japan
Japanese Buddhism
Shintoism
Shamanism
Totemism
Extinct Religions
Teutonic Gods
Ideas of Death
Magic of Runes
Biblical Revelations
Zen
Buddhism
All isms
Hindi
Christian
Various
Jew
Messianic
Muslim
THEOLOGY
SPIRITUALITY & PHILOSOPHY
Seers
Nostradamus
Star Gates
Time Travel
UFOs
Alien History
Ancient Alien Theories
Erick von Daniken
Zechariah Sitchin
UFO ORGANIZATIONS
MUFON
CETI
CUFOS
UFORNA
Others
EVENT LINKS
MAGAZINE LINKS
TELEVISION LINKS
WEBSITE & BLOG LINKS
Futurist Politics in World
Entrepreneurs
Social
Spiritual
Super Natural
Paranormal
Building a Website
Video Magic
Graphic Design
Starting a Business
Social Networks
Lightworkers
Truthseekers
Researchers
Social Networks
Social Media Online
Definition: behaviour US, behavior [bɪˈheɪvjə] n
1. manner of behaving or conducting oneself
on one’s best behaviour behaving with careful good manners
3. (Psychology) Psychol
a. the aggregate of all the responses made by an organism in any situation
b. a specific response of a certain organism to a specific stimulus or group of stimuli
4. the action, reaction, or functioning of a system, under normal or specified circumstances
(from behave; influenced in form by Middle English havior, from Old French havoir, from Latin habēre to have behavioural US, behavioral adj)
5. the behaviour – the action or reaction of something (as a machine or substance) under specified circumstances; “the behavior of small particles can be studied in experiments”. Behavior activeness, activity, action – the state of being active; “his sphere of activity”; “he is out of action”
2. behaviour – (behavioral attributes) the way a person behaves toward other people
demeanor, demeanour, deportment, conduct, behavior
Trait – a distinguishing feature of your personal nature
Manners – social deportment; “he has the manners of a pig”
Citizenship – conduct as a citizen; “award for good citizenship”
Swashbuckling – flamboyantly reckless and boastful behavior
Correctitude, properness, propriety – correct or appropriate behavior
Improperness, impropriety – an improper demeanor
Personal manner, manner – a way of acting or behaving
3. Behavior – (psychology) the aggregate of the responses or reactions or movements made by an organism in any situation
Behavior Activity – any specific behavior; “they avoided all recreational activity”
Territoriality – the behavior of a male animal that defines and defends its territory
Psychological science, psychology – the science of mental life
4. behaviour – manner of acting or controlling yourself
Behavior, conduct, doings
Activity – any specific behavior; “they avoided all recreational activity”
Aggression – deliberately unfriendly behavior
Bohemianism – conduct characteristic of a bohemian
Dirty pool – conduct that is unfair or unethical or unsportsmanlike
Dirty tricks – underhand commercial or political behavior designed to discredit an opponent
Offense, offensive activity, discourtesy, offence – a lack of politeness; a failure to show regard for others; wounding the feelings or others
Easiness – the quality of being easy in behavior or style; “there was easiness between them”; “a natural easiness of manner”
the way of the world, the ways of the world – the manner in which people typically behave or things typically happen; “the ordinary reader is endowed with considerable wisdom and knowledge of the way of the world”; “she was well-versed in the ways of the world before she had taken the veil”; “he was amazingly innocent of the ways of the world”

For other uses, see Perception (disambiguation).
“Percept” redirects here. For other uses, see Percept (disambiguation).
“Perceptual” redirects here. For the Brian Blade album, see Perceptual (album).
“Perceptible” and “imperceptible” redirect here. For perceptibility of digital watermarks, see Digital watermarking # Perceptibility.
The Necker cube and Rubin vase can be perceived in more than one way.
Psychology
History Subfields
Basic science
Abnormal Biological Cognitive Comparative Cultural Differential Developmental Evolutionary Experimental Mathematical Personality Positive Social
Applied science
Applied behavior analysis Clinical Community Consumer Educational Health Industrial and organizational Legal Military Occupational health Political Religion School Sport
Lists
Disciplines Organizations Outline Psychologists Psychotherapies Publications Research methods Theories Timeline Topics
Portal
v t e
Philosophy
Plato Confucius Avicenna
Philosophers
Aestheticians Epistemologists Ethicists Logicians Metaphysicians Social and political philosophers
Traditions
Analytic Continental Eastern Islamic Platonic Scholastic
Periods
Ancient Medieval Modern Contemporary
Literature
Aesthetics Epistemology Ethics Logic Metaphysics Political philosophy
Branches
Aesthetics Epistemology Ethics Logic Metaphysics Social philosophy Political philosophy
Lists
Index Outline Theories Glossary Philosophers
Philosophy portal
v t e
Neuropsychology
Topics
Brain functions
People
Tests -Mind and brain portal
v t e

PERCEPTION DEFINITION FOR READERS

Perception (from the Latin perceptio, percipio) is the organization, identification and interpretation of sensory information in order to represent and understand the environment.
All perception involves signals in the nervous system, which in turn result from physical stimulation of the sense organs.
For example, vision involves light striking the retinas of the eyes, smell is mediated by odor molecules and hearing involves pressure waves. Perception is not the passive receipt of these signals, but can be shaped by learning, memory and expectation. Perception involves these “top-down” effects as well as the “bottom-up” process of processing sensory input.
The “bottom-up” processing is basically low-level information that’s used to build up higher-level information (i.e. – shapes for object recognition). The “top-down” processing refers to a person’s concept and expectations (knowledge) that influence perception. Perception depends on complex functions of the nervous system, but subjectively seems mostly effortless because this processing happens outside conscious awareness.
Since the rise of experimental psychology in the late 19th Century, psychology’s understanding of perception has progressed by combining a variety of techniques.
Psychophysics measures the effect on perception of varying the physical qualities of the input. Sensory neuroscience studies the brain mechanisms underlying perception. Perceptual systems can also be studied computationally, in terms of the information they process. Perceptual issues in philosophy include the extent to which sensory qualities such as sounds, smells or colors exist in objective reality rather than the mind of the perceiver.
Although the senses were traditionally viewed as passive receptors, the study of illusions and ambiguous images has demonstrated that the brain’s perceptual systems actively and pre-consciously attempt to make sense of their input.
There is still active debate about the extent to which perception is an active process of hypothesis testing, analogous to science, or whether realistic sensory information is rich enough to make this process unnecessary.
The perceptual systems of the brain enable individuals to see the world around them as stable, even though the sensory information may be incomplete and rapidly varying. Human and animal brains are structured in a modular way, with different areas processing different kinds of sensory information. Some of these modules take the form of sensory maps, mapping some aspect of the world across part of the brain’s surface. These different modules are interconnected and influence each other. For instance, the taste is strongly influenced by its odor
Reference Articles by TJ Morris, Syndicated Journalist

The articles I have written over the last six years on the internet were mainly shared as submitted to two main locations as American Chronicle.com if the USA and UFODigest.com. of CA –Canada. Both locations are where I am listed as a contributor and/or Syndicated Columnist. I am listing those which are on American Chronicle.com however, those which are listed by me under my various name combinations on UFO Digest at ufodigest.com are too numerous. Dirk Vander Ploeg the creator of that website has articles and old archived articles. Please email him for how to access my files if you are interested. As far as I know at the time I compiled this information for this book they are still there either under Theresa J Thurmond Morris, TJTM, Theresa J Morris, or TJ Morris. My first one with Dirk on UFO Digest was in August, 2007 and you can read forward from there. Thank you for you interest in my work of ET, UFO, Aliens, Angels, Supernatural, Spirit and the Paranormal. TJ
ACIR TITLE RESEARCH – TJ Morris ACO Social Service Club ~ Project Management Source of Information for Future Alignment of Conferences and Sustainability Events.
Title Date Status Views Mailed Options
Alien Contact Orbit 2012 12/14/2012 11:30 PM
Pending Approval
42
Ascension Age Global Tectonic Economics of Change on Nov 6, 2012 11/06/2012 01:47 AM
Approved
178
Undercover 2012 Disclosure by a psychic to Michael Jackson 10/13/2012 03:22 AM
Approved
222
2012 New Space Cosmology replaces the old time religion and science. 10/08/2012 02:14 AM
Approved
104
Alien ET UFO Community Cosmic Consciousness 08/11/2012 5:37 PM
Approved
57
Ascension Age TJ Morris ET 07/21/2012 2:48 PM
Approved
140
2012 Humanoid Consciousness Training ACE Folklife 07/02/2012 2:56 PM
Approved
222
Ascension Age Body-Mind-Spirits Future Health & Prosperity For All 06/10/2012 02:10 AM
Approved
123
Ascension Age The Journey 2012 05/09/2012 2:46 PM
Approved
168
GLOBAL LOVE DAY SUSTAINABILITY MAY 1, 2012 Ascension Age is Now! 05/01/2012 1:03 PM
Approved
85
TJ of Ascension Center Org The Known Psychic Network founder 04/30/2012 2:02 PM
Approved
137
Ascension Age Enlightenment 04/25/2012 10:15 AM
Approved
110
2012 Ascension Age Welcomes Paranormal Metaphysical Science 04/08/2012 2:22 PM
Approved
122
2012 Easter Welcomes Ascension Age 04/08/2012 1:47 PM
Approved
143
2012 Global Change of Science and Spirit An Apacalypse or Ascension Age? ET a Movie 03/08/2012 1:17 PM
Approved
98
Ancient Astronauts – Ancient Aliens – UFO Generation 02/29/2012 4:19 PM
Approved
99
Science and TV Alien Personalities Support! 02/28/2012 6:47 PM
Approved
85
Humanoid Body Types Alien Hybridization of The Fay 02/27/2012 1:39 PM
Approved
112
Global Community Apocalypse 2012 is All About Beginning Anew! 12/22/2011 7:02 PM
Approved
154
Alien ET Contactee TJ Shares the Death of her Parents prior to 2012 = Real Life vs. movies 12/09/2011 6:49 PM
Approved
576
2012 Common Goal – Health & Prosperity for All! – Point Weapons into Space away from US! 12/04/2011 2:58 PM
Approved
162
Alien ET UFO Social Paranormal Community 11.11.11 11/10/2011 7:24 PM
Approved
118
History of Ascension Age Cosmology Immortals 11-11-11 10/23/2011 9:20 PM
Approved
535
Future Sustainability 2012 Ascension Age -Tectonic Economics of 7 Billion People 10/17/2011 02:15 AM
Approved
151
World Sustainability Summit Conference 2012 – Tectonic Economics 09/25/2011 4:35 PM
Approved
471
Awakening the Space in Our Minds – Universe, Mulitiverse, Metaverse, Xenoverse, Omniverse -911 TIME 09/09/2011 02:55 AM
Approved
161
Transgender Chaz Bono on Dancing With The Stars – What is the World Coming Too? 09/08/2011 8:02 PM
Approved
250
TAKEN UP by TJ – A ET UFO Future 2012 & Beyond Begins 07/08/2011 7:05 PM
Approved
190
A Psychic Spiritual Soulful Outlook of the Future for Modern Humanoids as a Species 07/03/2011 10:32 PM
Approved
241
TIME 06/21/2011 09:35 AM
Approved
143
Avatar Ascension Masters of Ascension Age 12-21-12 06/20/2011 01:25 AM
Approved
239
Awareness and Sustainability for 12-21-12 Golden Age of Ascension 05/25/2011 12:33 AM
Approved
227
Cyberspace Magick in our Future Dec. 21, 2012 04/07/2011 5:07 PM
Approved
155
Awaking Shift – Ascension Age 02/27/2011 7:15 PM
Approved
224
Sky People, Ancient Astronauts Global Brain Matrix – The Internet Exopolitics 02/26/2011 7:43 PM
Approved
311
Global Community Sustainability 02/17/2011 10:20 PM
Approved
222
Future World Infrastructure 2013 – Super Power in Space 02/02/2011 7:18 PM
Approved
499
Sharing the Omniverse & Susskind’s Cosmic Landscape Review Comparisons Survey 01/19/2011 9:23 PM
Approved
347
Omniverse Theory and the ET Psychic Awakening of 2012 01/19/2011 5:00 PM
Approved
588
Alien ET Sky People of the UFOS from Space 01/17/2011 8:25 PM
Approved
364

Truth About 2012 Exposing The Future of Humanoids on Earth to Space 01/17/2011 6:06 PM
Approved
523

Advocate of Truth TJ – Alien Civilizations Exist! 01/16/2011 05:15 AM
Approved
292
ALIEN ET CONTACT MOTIVE? The Truth Conversation 01/15/2011 5:27 PM
Approved
376
Living Inside the Matrix called Earth, Universe, Metaverse, Xenoverse, Omniverse 01/13/2011 8:18 PM
Approved
346

Brain Mapping the Future for Success – Characters Future! Inspiration 01/13/2011 12:35 AM
Approved
310
Memories Of You – Thoughts Are Energy Creations By You! Future in Computers 01/12/2011 7:58 PM
Approved
285
Theresa of Ascension on God Beyond 2012 & Science of the Omniverse 12/29/2010 7:53 PM
Approved
326

Ancient Aliens God of Ascension Age Begins Dec. 21, 2012 12/28/2010 10:15 PM
Approved
352
ET Story of Spirit for Christmas – Future, Past, and Present 12/23/2010 5:14 PM
Approved
317
ET Contactee Dream -Time Travel in other Dimensions – Virtual or Real? You Decide 12/18/2010 12:31 AM
Approved
377
EVOLUTION – ANCIENT HISTORY OR ET MODERN TIMES? 12/05/2010 04:58 AM
Approved
418
GLOBAL EVOLUTIONARY CHANGE IN THE SOCIAL PARANORMAL WORLD 12/04/2010 3:53 PM
Approved
326
MEMORIES IN ESSENCE BASIC INFORMATION OF ASCENSION AGE 11/30/2010 3:58 PM
Approved
333
CRYSTAL PROPHECIES OF THE NEW ASCENSION AGE 11/16/2010 06:48 AM
Approved
443
ASCENSION AGE 11/15/2010 9:02 PM
Approved
354
ASCENSION AGE MOVEMENT DEC, 21, 2012 11/15/2010 4:29 PM
Approved
312

THINKING ABOUT THE ET UFO FUTURE AGE 10/17/2010 5:11 PM
Approved
340
ALIENS, ETs, ANCIENTS, and October 13, 2010 – Countdown to Dec. 21, 2012 10/12/2010 10:36 PM
Approved
322
ET ARTIFACT OR NOT? PYRAMID OF THE SUN 10/11/2010 6:12 PM
Approved
510
WORLD POLITICS AND RELIGIONS FOR 2012 CONSTRUCTION OR DESTRUCTION 10/08/2010 1:58 PM
Approved
326
ET/GOD MOVEMENT EXTRATERRESTRIALS EXIST TO BEGIN AS ASCENSION AGE 12-21-2012 09/25/2010 7:39 PM
Approved
409

FUTURE OF ASCENSION AGE 2012 & BEYOND THE GLOBAL BRAIN 09/23/2010 5:46 PM
Approved
336

GOD & ET WHERE DO WE GO FROM HERE? BRAIN TRAIN WITH TJ 09/23/2010 5:35 PM
Approved
289
ASCENSION AGE OF THE PARANORMAL QUEST FOR GOD – SPIRITUAL TOURISM 09/22/2010 3:28 PM
Approved
343
GLOBALIZATION – EVOLVING CONSCIOUS ASCENSION SPIRIT OF 7 HEAVENS 09/08/2010 2:34 PM
Approved
320
ET UFO COMMUNITY – ASCENSION CENTER ENLIGHTENMENT 09/06/2010 3:59 PM
Approved
341
ACE FOLKCULTURE – HISTORY OF ANCIENT AND MODERN CULTURE OF THE WORLD 08/30/2010 1:33 PM
Approved
573
UNIVERSAL EXPLORATION FOR ANTI-MATTER & GOD by AMS ON ISS BY NASA 08/27/2010 05:24 AM
Approved
373
DECEMBER 26, 2012 – ASCENSION AGE BEGINS -New Age of Aquarius 08/26/2010 7:41 PM
Approved
743
LIVING IN LOVE AND LIGHT OR A FALLEN WORLD 08/21/2010 10:19 PM
Approved
397
RELEASE AND DISCLOSURE OF TRUTH ABOUT HUMANOIDS ON EARTH & IN SPACE 08/20/2010 11:56 PM
Approved
549
ANCIENT -ET-UFO & MODERN ANCIENT ASTRONAUTS OF ERAS IN TIME – GLOBAL BRAIN TRAIN 08/20/2010 10:54 PM
Approved
667
LIFE IN THE FUTURE – THE 70’s ARE MIDDLE AGE FOR BABY BOOMERS & X Generation 08/20/2010 02:33 AM
Approved
450
Universal Knowledge of Extraterrestrials 08/18/2010 6:20 PM
Approved
523
A LEAP OF FAITH INTO THE METAVERSE INSIDE THE OMNIVERSE 08/11/2010 11:57 PM
Approved
585
EARTH’S ENERGY ENDURANCE CHANGE 08/02/2010 7:20 PM
Approved
841
A LIFE – ONE PERSPECTIVE 07/26/2010 03:33 AM
Approved
863
GLOBAL CHANGE FOR THE FUTURE OF HUMANKIND ON EARTH 07/23/2010 3:43 PM
Approved
488
TEA PARTY WITNESSES ARE INDEPENDENTS UNDERCLASS, POVERTY CLASS, WORKING CLASS IF TRUTH BE KNOWN! 07/19/2010 11:31 PM
Approved
562
WRAP YOUR MIND AROUND THIS LARRY KING 07/16/2010 6:52 PM
Approved
613
GLOBALIZATION CHANGING UNDERCLASS CULTURE & JOBS 07/15/2010 5:33 PM
Approved
758
WORLDS OF KNOWLEDGE 07/14/2010 6:01 PM
Approved
526
ALLEGORY OF TIME TRAVEL 07/13/2010 4:47 PM
Approved
499
EARTH ET ECOSYSTEMS ECONOMIC POLITICS 07/01/2010 6:17 PM
Approved
500
Extra-terrestrials in Various Levels of Being can Change our Lives – Out of Body 06/26/2010 6:44 PM
Approved
530
WHY TJ BELIEVES IN ASCENSION AFTER DEATH 06/22/2010 05:14 AM
Approved
617
Lighworkers of Ascension Center Earth Assisting during Shift in the Zone 06/19/2010 06:57 AM
Approved
507
SHIFT OF CONSCIOUSNESS aka ASCENSION CENTER EARTH ADVANCEMENTS 06/15/2010 05:55 AM
Approved
442
Eugenics of the Ancient Astronauts 06/13/2010 5:41 PM
Approved
520
THE TRUTH IS OUT THERE ABOUT FLYING SAUCERS 06/13/2010 5:35 PM
Approved
510
LIES WE BELIEVE TO COVER UP THE TRUTH – ALIEN UFO RECOVERY – ROSWELL 06/13/2010 04:36 AM
Approved
600
BRAIN TRAINING – TJ’S CHANNELING INFORMATION 06/10/2010 11:59 PM
Approved
481

ASCENSION CENTER ENLIGHTENMENT WORLD COMING DEC. 21, 2012 T. 11:11- Nephilim Angels Return 06/10/2010 03:40 AM
Approved
506
ALIEN ET MYSTICAL SPIRITUAL SOUL STONE MONUMENT CLUES ON EARTH 06/08/2010 5:02 PM
Approved
1042
TRUTH OF GOD – THREE FOLD FLAME BORN AGAIN 2012 & BEYOND 06/07/2010 10:00 PM
Approved
630
BELIEF IN ET, SHROUD OF TURIN, ASCENSION, JESUS, UFOS 06/07/2010 7:23 PM
Approved
546
ET CLOUDS OF HEAVEN AND JESUS THE KEY TO A PORTAL OF ANOTHER WORLD 06/02/2010 10:34 PM
Approved
539
KNOW THE ENEMY OF OUR RACE IN SPACE 05/31/2010 8:15 PM
Approved
490
GLOBAL BRAIN THE CRITICAL MASS CONSCIOUS CHANGE 2012 & BEYOND 05/29/2010 10:33 PM
Approved
438
GLOBAL EXPANSION 05/28/2010 10:30 PM
Approved
443
SECRET ESSENCE -ANCIENT MYSTERY-2012 NEW EARTH BEGINNINGS 05/28/2010 02:44 AM
Approved
448
GOD ALMIGHTY ASCENSION ASTRONAUT MYSTERY OF 2012 05/27/2010 7:39 PM
Approved
531
LIGHT WORKER TRAINING BY AVATAR TJ 05/26/2010 6:36 PM
Approved
547
Accidents Happen but Can We forgives? 05/25/2010 8:41 PM
Approved
509
GLOBAL EXPANSION – ALIEN XENOVERSE 05/25/2010 7:58 PM
Approved
556
ALIEN TELEPATHY HEALTH SCIENCES EDUCATION AND TRAINING 05/25/2010 5:38 PM
Approved
542
One Body One planet at a Time -Knowing the Truth – Change the Lies 05/22/2010 05:39 AM
Approved
521
ALIEN SECRETS OF ET ANCIENT MYSTERY SCHOOLS ESOTERIC ESSENCE ESSENE CODE 05/19/2010 4:06 PM
Approved
441 ANCIENT CULTURES ANCIENT ASTRONAUTS AGE OF REVELATIONS 2012 05/19/2010 2:48 PM
Approved
717
GLOBAL CHANGE REQUIRED FOR FUTURE ON EARTH 05/19/2010 06:30 AM
Approved
483
PREPARE BY CONTINENT FOR MEGA DISASTERS – VOLCANOES, Etc. 05/19/2010 06:21 ARE
Approved
350
GLOBAL PREPARATION FOR MEGA DISASTERS ON FIVE CONTINENTS 05/19/2010 05:41 AM
Approved
439
FIVE MAIN CONTINENTS FUTURE ON PLANET EARTH TO SURVIVE BY LAND MASS IN TRADE 05/19/2010 04:50 AM
Approved
648
IGNITE, SHIFT, & UPLIFT THE WORLD BEYOND 2012 U2 CAN MAKE A DIFFERENCE 05/17/2010 3:48 PM
Approved
384
12-21-2012 11:11 TRUTH OF DOERS AND DOUBTERS OF ANCIENT ASTRONAUTS 05/16/2010 3:31 PM
Approved
486
CHOOSING THE FUTURE FOR US ALL! 2012 FUTURE ENDOWMENTS INEVITABLE 05/15/2010 4:47 PM
Approved
471
WHO WILL SAVE EARTH AND HUMANKIND FROM DESTRUCTION? 05/12/2010 9:39 PM
Approved
499
GLOBAL TRADE REQUIRES UNIVERSAL SPIRIT FOR ALL BEINGS 05/12/2010 9:32 PM
Approved
492
Blow the Whistle on World Hunger – Intelligence Analysis on World Leaders 05/11/2010 8:30 PM
Approved
508
GLOBAL INTELLIGENCE SUSTAINABILITY 05/11/2010 7:57 PM
Approved
332
ALIEN INTEGRATION 2012 & BEYOND ON EARTH AND IN SPACE 05/11/2010 12:23 AM
Approved
559
Taxonomy, TJ, Q&A Answers for Readers and Writers Beyond 2012 05/10/2010 8:47 PM
Approved
477
ALIEN TALK FOR INTELLIGENT BEING SPECIES 05/10/2010 08:46 AM
Approved
489
XENO-BEYOND 2012 ANCIENT ANCESTORS HOME IN SPACE 05/05/2010 4:33 PM
Approved
503
BEYOND 2012 – Humanoid History and Culture 05/02/2010 06:55 AM
Approved
559
Bigfoot/Gigantopithecus/Sasquatch/Yeti 05/01/2010 06:39 AM
Approved
891
UNIBODY FASHION 2012 BY TJ 04/29/2010 11:04 PM
Approved
843
QUANTUM ENTANGLEMENT, ANCIENT ALIEN ASTRONAUTS, TIME TRAVEL 04/28/2010 9:11 PM
Approved
852
QUANTUM ENTANGLEMENT AND ANCIENT ALIEN ASTRONAUTS 04/27/2010 10:03 PM
Approved
705
BEYOND 2012 ANDROMEDA GALAXY HUMANOIDS ON EARTH AND SPACE 04/27/2010 01:23 AM
Approved
1168
MOTHER’s WISDOM OF 20TH CENTURY BABY BOOMERS HAS THIS IN COMMON 04/20/2010 10:10 PM
Approved
544
BEYOND 2012 BEGINS ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE, WORMHOLE & TIME TRAVEL 04/19/2010 9:32 PM
Approved
762
SURVIVAL OF OUR SPECIES – PSYCHE BASICS – 12-21-2012 PROPHETIC AWARENESS 04/18/2010 12:55 PM
Approved
618

ACCEPTING AND APPROACHING 2012 & BEYOND – WHAT DO WE EXPECT? 04/17/2010 05:49 AM
Approved
631
ALIEN CIVILIZATIONS EXIST ON EARTH AND IN SPACE TJ 04/16/2010 9:13 PM
Approved
740
OBAMA WORLD IN SPACE OR LEFT BEHIND? GLOBAL UNIVERSAL THINKERS ARE WE 04/15/2010 10:15 PM
Approved
694
BRAIN TRAINING AND MASTERING THE UNIVERSE FOR 2012 ASCENSION 04/05/2010 10:31 PM
Approved
462
GLOBAL SECURITY CLAUSE FOR ALL HUMANKIND ON EARTH 04/04/2010 09:22 AM
Approved
559
HAPPY EASTER 2010 WE ARE A GLOBAL COMMUNITY 04/04/2010 06:58 AM
Approved
581
PROGRAMMED AND MADE TO FORGET ABOUT REMOTE VIEWING & PSYCHIC WORK 03/31/2010 08:48 AM
Approved
604
XENOVERSES THINK LARGER THAN OUTSIDE THE BOX OR UNIVERSE 03/31/2010 03:18 AM
Approved
602
INFIDELITY IN MARRIAGE 03/28/2010 9:17 PM
Approved
508
INFIDELITY IN MARRIAGE 03/28/2010 9:17 PM
Approved
575
WHAT I KNOW ABOUT A FRIENDLY UFO 03/23/2010 10:40 PM
Approved
705
ANGELS & ETS ARE CHANGING OUR MINDS ABOUT OUR WORLD 03/21/2010 11:04 PM
Approved
625
SOME EBES AS ANGELS COME IN PEACE! TJ 03/20/2010 12:20 AM
Approved
556
MYSTERY OF 2012 ENLIGHTENMENT REVEALED BY TJ – AVATAR ORACLE 03/17/2010 08:33 AM
Approved
566
CONSCIOUS CHANGE OF HUMANS March 11 2010 through Dec. 21, 2012 03/11/2010 10:46 PM
Approved
562
BEING AWAKENED TO ANGELS, MESSENGERS, ORACLES, PROPHETS, SEERS, THE FUTURE 03/11/2010 9:49 PM
Approved
642
KNOWING IN ADVANCE BY AN ORACLE PSYCHIC DOES IT HELP OUR WORLD LEADERS? 03/11/2010 9:29 PM
Approved
520
HOME AND HOPE FOR HUMANITY IS IN SPACE – WELCOME TO ASCENSION 03/11/2010 6:24 PM
Approved
524
HOPE FOR HUMANITY IN SPACE 03/11/2010 4:41 PM
Approved
532
AMERICAN DREAM BOOMER POLITICS SAVE THE FUTURE! 03/10/2010 8:23 PM
Approved
513
ALIEN INTERGALACTIC SPACE VS. ALLIED INTERNATIONAL SPACE POLICIES 03/09/2010 9:41 PM
Approved
630
EBENS ARE THE KEPT SECRETS OF MEN IN BLACK 03/06/2010 07:49 AM
Approved
571
ALIENS, EBENS, MEN IN BLACK & UFOS 03/06/2010 07:49 AM
Approved
718
“A” IS FOR ALTRUISM AND the “A-FIELD” 03/02/2010 7:02 PM
Approved
567
REDEFINING SPIRITUAL EVOLUTION IN THE WORLD IS DUE – UFOS ARE REAL 03/01/2010 11:11 PM
Approved
687
SCIENTIFIC AND SPIRITUAL EXPLORATION OF THE 21st CENTURY – ASCENSION AGE 03/01/2010 10:14 PM
Approved
495
ESOTERIC BOOK OF THERESA ABOUT ASCENSION AGE IN 21st CENTURY 02/27/2010 10:01 PM
Approved
583
EARTHQUAKE 8.8 Concepcion, Chile – Pacific Rim-Hawaii on Tsunami Alert 02/27/2010 11:30 AM
Approved
1336
ASCENSION AGE SPIRITUAL PATH OF 2012 02/25/2010 7:13 PM
Approved
706
EARTH’s IMMORTALITY OF THE FUTURE SOUL 02/25/2010 4:49 PM
Approved
658
FAST OF ESTHER FEB. 25, 2010 02/25/2010 07:37 AM
Approved
628
ASCENSION AGE ANCIENT MYSTERY SCHOOLS AND BEYOND 02/24/2010 04:03 AM
Approved
607
EARTH GLOBAL COMMUNITY BATTLEFIELD FOR THE GAME OF LIFE 02/23/2010 7:01 PM
Approved
642
RAINBOW NONPARTISAN THIRD PARTY MAJOR VOTES ORGANIZING AITP 02/22/2010 8:54 PM
Approved
663
TWO MAJOR PARTIES MAKE IT HARD ON ALTERNATIVE THIRD PARTY NONPARTISAN VOTERS 02/22/2010 8:32 PM
Approved
638
NONPARTISAN VOTES WILL COUNT FOR 2012 THIRD PARTY 02/22/2010 8:10 PM
Approved
560
Nonpartisan Elections 02/22/2010 7:43 PM
Approved
451
AMERICAN GOLD – INDEPENDENTS TEA PARTY – THIRD PARTY ORGANIZED 02/21/2010 11:33 PM
Approved
593
AMERICAN INDEPENDENTS TEA PARTY ORGANIZATION GUIDE 02/21/2010 7:56 PM
Approved
760
TEA PARTY “It’s Not Political, It’s Personal! Business as Usual, The Show Must Go On! 02/20/2010 9:23 PM
Approved
677
2012 “THE GAME IS A FOOT” ASCENSION AGE BEGINS! Paranormal Writers Get Ready 02/20/2010 4:54 PM
Approved
700
ASCENSION GUIDE FOR LIGHT WORKERS 2012-2019 SHIFT 02/20/2010 05:15 AM
Approved
1431
TRUTH BECOMES MYTHS & LEGENDS WHEN IT IS TOO DANGEROUS TO TELL 02/18/2010 8:16 PM
Approved
643
SPACE AND THE GOD PARTICLE – THE TRUE FINAL FRONTIER 02/18/2010 4:48 PM
Approved
519
CHANGE IN GLOBAL MAGIC REALITY FOR 2012 02/18/2010 4:22 PM
Approved
550
QUANTUM ENTANGLEMENT – CRITICAL MASS CONSCIOUSNESS 02/18/2010 4:12 PM
Approved
581
SOCIAL PARANORMAL NETWORK 02/18/2010 3:54 PM
Approved
456
WORLD MANTRA FOR GLOBAL CONSCIOUSNESS 2012 02/18/2010 3:45 PM
Approved
547
GLOBAL SHIFT IN REALITY 02/15/2010 7:40 PM
Approved
699
2010-2019 YEARs OF ENRICHMENT AND HOPE 01/21/2010 04:20 AM
Approved
641
NUCLEAR SPACE DUST FUEL FOR ALIEN SHIPS Believe it or not 01/17/2010 7:55 PM
Approved
1046
GLOBAL AWARENESS OF NATURAL CATACLYSMS AND GOD 01/13/2010 03:21 AM
Approved
643

AVATAR ANALOGY – HAPPY NEW 2010- LIVING IN THE MOMENT 01/12/2010 04:07 AM
Approved
902
ALIEN BIG FOOT A KENTUCKY LEGEND OF THE COAL MINERS 12/23/2009 10:53 PM
Approved
1967

Aliens, UFOs, and Extraterrestrials Changing Reality about Angels vs. Demons 12/23/2009 05:38 AM
Approved
1044
AWARENESS OF THE FORCE 2010-2012 Visionaries perceptions of the future 12/22/2009 09:23 AM
Approved
640
NATURE VERSUS HUMAN NATURE 12/14/2009 02:17 AM
Approved
678
GLOBAL COMMUNITY POLITICS & PREDICTIONS 12/13/2009 7:16 PM
Approved
609
ET SCIENCE PROJECT 12/12/2009 8:17 PM
Approved
503
SCIENCE OF INTELLIGENCE – Intelligence analysis is art and tradecraft. 12/10/2009 6:16 PM
Approved
884
2010 YEAR OF ENLIGHTENMENT -PHILOSOPHY OF INDIVUDUALISM ON INTERNET 12/06/2009 04:32 AM
Approved
919
SECRET ACE CRYPTOGRAMS AND THE REASON PROJECT – Organizations, beliefs, Associations 12/06/2009 03:53 AM
Approved
449
BRAIN TRAIN – A RELIGIOS SCIENCE 12/05/2009 10:06 PM
Approved
588
BELIEF IN ETs -21st Century Social Paranormal Network Ethics, Morals, Mind, Religion 12/05/2009 8:20 PM
Approved
736
UFO´s and MEN IN BLACK 12/05/2009 04:04 AM
Approved
687
Global Phenomena Interests in 2010-2012 a Cultural Trend 11/30/2009 07:40 AM
Approved
698
GLOBAL COMMUNITY AWARENESS OF THE SPACE RACE 09/22/2009 06:48 AM
Approved
1110
RAISING CONSCIOUS AWARENESS of the ET UFO COMMUNITY 09/14/2009 10:46 PM
Approved
991
ALIENS VERSUS EXTRATERRESTRIALS IN THE ET UFO COMMUNITY 09/13/2009 10:34 AM
Approved
1011
Body-Mind-Spirit-Soul-ET Selves Conscious Change 9-9-09 prior to 2012 09/08/2009 7:46 PM
Approved
983
CHANGE IN US IN THE 21ST CENTURY COMING OUT OF RECESSION – NOW WHAT? 08/30/2009 6:20 PM
Approved
616
CHANGE BY EXTRATERRESTRIALS ON EARTH 08/24/2009 2:29 PM
Approved
675
HEALTH & PROSPERITY CAN OVER RIDE THE GLOBAL CATACLYSMS COMING 08/10/2009 12:51 PM
Approved
715
NOT SINCE ATLANTIS 07/19/2009 12:53 PM
Approved
593
MICHAEL JACKSON TRIBUTE “WE ARE THE WORLD’ HAS JUST BEGUN 06/29/2009 5:48 PM
Approved
7119
DON’T ASK-DON’T TELL /AMERICAN TRUE COLORS DON’T RUN 06/09/2009 04:03 AM
Approved
720
TRANSPARENCY, SECRECY, INTERNET, USA & GLOBAL DECISIONS 06/07/2009 8:25 PM
Approved
1366
TIME TRAVEL PREPARATION 06/07/2009 4:08 PM
Approved
606
FORGING WORLD PEACE-E PLURIBUS UNUM 2012 06/06/2009 5:02 PM
Approved
753
ANTHROPONOMY, PROCREATION, GENDER, CREATION OF THE HUMAN SPECIES 06/02/2009 5:10 PM
Approved
938
GLOBAL COMMUNITY PROCLAMATION PROPOSAL 05/31/2009 7:00 PM
Approved
863
X-pansion December 21, 2012 11:11 Obama World 05/29/2009 11:01 PM
Approved
785
THE NEXT 100 DAYS -THE NEXT 100 YEARS 05/26/2009 03:29 AM
Approved
1578
SCIENCE GRID METAPHYSICS WEB OF ET UFO GOD MATRIX 05/21/2009 5:13 PM
Approved
842
ANCIENT ANCESTORS EXTRATERRESTRIAL DNA 2012 METAMORPHOSIS 05/18/2009 4:57 PM
Approved
1837
GOOD AND BAD ALIENS – ANGELS AND DEMONS 05/15/2009 4:53 PM
Approved
1769
FOLK LIFE- GLOBAL COMMUNITY-NEW MEDIA 05/13/2009 5:39 PM
Approved
891
BEING HUMAN KNOWING ALIEN ETS 05/13/2009 1:37 PM
Approved
991
UNIVERSE ORACLE AGASHAN SHAMANS-ETs 05/12/2009 3:12 PM
Approved
791
2012 MAGNETISM LAWS, UNIVERSAL BONDS, CIVIL UNIONS 05/08/2009 12:53 PM
Approved
1223
GLOBAL FAITH FASCICLE AGE OF REVEALING 05/06/2009 5:08 PM
Approved
1356
2012 REALITY CHECK 05/06/2009 3:28 PM
Approved
3126
LAWS, MONEY, SCIENCE & GLOBAL COMMUNITY ORACLES, ET EXPANSION 2012 05/04/2009 2:03 PM
Approved
1416
SCIENCE, SECRETS, GLOBAL COMMUNITY DISCLOSURE INFORMATION 05/03/2009 2:06 PM
Approved
804
GLOBAL NEW AGE CHANGING OUR THOUGHTS, ENTERTAINMENT, LIVES 04/30/2009 3:55 PM
Approved
841
GLOBAL COMMUNITY ISSUES 04/25/2009 3:04 PM
Approved
864
SOCIAL MEDIA COMMUNICATION 04/24/2009 4:26 PM
Approved
647
ECONOMIC & GLOBAL WARMING NOT JUST BUSINESS BUT PERSONAL! 04/23/2009 3:07 PM
Approved
989
GLOBAL EARTH DAY FUTURE CONVENTIONAL THINKING & CROP CIRCLES 04/22/2009 2:35 PM
Approved
1232
SPACE, MAGNETIC POLES, SUN SPOTS, EARTH, 2012 CHANGES 04/20/2009 6:54 PM
Approved
7005
GLOBAL HEMISPHERE SYNERGY BY Dec. 21, 2012 11:11 FACTS 04/20/2009 3:08 PM
Approved
1222
TAKEN UP FOR ET UFO KNOWLEDGE 04/19/2009 4:26 PM
Approved
851
YES WE CAN CREATE USA JOBS FOR GLOBAL COMMUNITY STUFF 04/17/2009 5:31 PM
Approved
1553

SHROUD OF TURIN, JESUS, ASCENSION BELLIEFS, TRUTH OR FOLKLORE? 04/10/2009 3:16 PM
Approved
9047

AGE OF REVEALING SIGNS OF THE TIMES 2012 GLOBAL APOCALYPSE 04/08/2009 4:48 PM
Approved
1271
NEW WORLD ORDER, SPACE DEC. 21, 2012 11:11 NOWHERE TO GO BUT UP! TRIANGLE UFO 04/07/2009 5:22 PM
Approved
1706
NEW WORLD ORDER CHANGES GLOBAL COMMUNITY ET INFO PRIOR TO 2012 04/04/2009 2:10 PM
Approved
3295
EARTH EARNED EQUALITY AS THE REPLACEMENT FOR MONETARY FUNDS! A G20 AGENDA? 03/29/2009 5:41 PM
Approved
1202
HAVE YOU MET AN EXTRA TERRESTRIAL OR ALIEN HYBRID? New Human Ways to Think! 03/28/2009 12:22 PM
Approved
1612
RAISING CONSCIOUS AWARENESS OF Dec. 21, 2012 and US! 03/23/2009 11:24 AM
Approved
1726
TIME CAPSULES, BEING DIFFERENT CHANGES THE FUTURE 03/16/2009 2:42 PM
Approved
1402
Global Future Changes and G20 Summit General Layman’s Notes 03/13/2009 7:24 PM
Approved
1680
GLOBAL FUTURE GALAXY MITIGATION December 21, 2012 03/13/2009 1:16 PM
Approved
4688
UFO CONTACTEE SECRET JOURNALS OF LIFE, GOD, CREATIONS & PRAYER – Verse 1A 03/09/2009 2:07 PM
Approved
1146
GLOBAL FUTURE PREDICTIONS AND A MOVIE CALLED 2012 03/05/2009 4:01 PM
Approved
2871
ET PREDICTIONS ASCENSION and BIBLE CODE 03/04/2009 2:30 PM
Approved
1306
ET UFO PSYCHIC PERSUASION OF ABDUCTEES VS. CONTACTEES 03/02/2009 7:39 PM
Approved
1460
EXTRA-TERRESTRIAL EDUCATION BEYOND 2012 AND THE FUTURE 03/02/2009 08:58 AM
Approved
1174
ET BEINGS KEEPER OF THE ASCENSION FLAME OF TRUTH 03/01/2009 1:29 PM
Approved
1046
UNRAVELING THE UNKNOWN ABOUT ET UFOS & INTELLIGENT BEINGS 02/28/2009 7:48 PM
Approved
1127
21ST CENTURY WHITE HOUSE AGENDA, A DREAM OF DISCLOSURE PROJECT 02/27/2009 11:20 AM
Approved
972
CHANGE IS COMING 2012 02/15/2009 1:54 PM
Approved
1780
LIFE AND DEATH – ASCENSION CENTER EDUCATION LESSON 01/22/2009 3:35 PM
Approved
1654
ASCENSION ET AUTHORITY ASSISTANCE FOR 2012 NIBURU EXPLORERS 01/13/2009 01:07 AM
Approved
1834
ASCENSION BEINGS 2012 REVIEW 01/11/2009 8:23 PM
Approved
1948
2012 CRITICAL MASS MOVEMENT OF ASCENSION EXPLAINED VALUES 01/10/2009 5:37 PM
Approved
2712
GALAXY ENLIGHTENMENT IN TIME OF REVELATIONS 12/23/2008 03:17 AM
Approved
1349
THURMOND SUPPORTERS OF SUCCESS SOBER STAR GETAWAYS 2009 12/22/2008 5:30 PM
Approved
1973
ANEW NEWS ABOUT PSYCHIC AWAKENING INTUITION GETAWAYS 2009 12/22/2008 4:54 PM
Approved
1796
THOUGHTS, DREAMS, VISIONS 12/21/2008 7:41 PM
Approved
1351
PARANORMAL ET VISIONS OR NORMAL GNOSTIC WISDOM 12/21/2008 7:28 PM
Approved
1226
ANDROMEDA ET ORACLES 12/21/2008 7:28 PM
Approved
864
AN AMERICAN GAY NEW YEAR STORY 12/17/2008 6:42 PM
Approved
1950
BLESSINGS OR CURSES 12/14/2008 4:38 PM
Approved
1008
GOOD & EVIL VAMPIRES & ETS 12/14/2008 2:24 PM
Approved
1367
FRIENDLY EARTH ADVICE 12/14/2008 11:15 AM
Approved
903
ESP & ETS/ ADVANCED ANCIENT ASCENDED MASTERS REINCARNATED 11/16/2008 1:37 PM
Approved
2607
TREASURE ZONE OF MIND, BODY & SPIRIT OF SOULS 11/13/2008 10:17 PM
Approved
851
ACCESS INFORMATION /AKASHIC FIELD OF ASCENSION MASTERS 11/13/2008 4:23 PM
Approved
1259
DEBATE THE FUTURE OF MARRIAGE AND GLOBAL CHANGE 11/13/2008 11:54 AM
Approved
1386
THE ZONE – THE TREASURE – THE MARRIAGE – THE CHANGES! 11/12/2008 10:54 AM
Approved
1391
BEING A MIDDLE CLASS COMMON FOLK AMERICAN – Cinderella in Camelot 11/10/2008 2:21 PM
Approved
2342

TRUTH SEEKERS – A KEY TO THE PAST AND FUTURE 11/10/2008 12:22 AM
Approved
1251
INTELLECTUAL EXERCISE – THOUGHTS ARE THINGS 11/09/2008 4:56 PM
Approved
1069
EXTRA TERRESTRIAL LEMURIAN LIGHTWORKER TEST 11/09/2008 4:56 PM
Approved
2499
ADVANCED ANCIENT ASCENSION CIVILIZATIONS/11:11 CELEBRATION 2008 11/09/2008 3:52 PM
Approved
3355
THOSE WHO FROM HEAVEN TO EARTH CAME 11/08/2008 11:25 AM
Approved
3703
MORRIS, John C., 108 YRS., 11 Mos. Kentucky Colonel, Author, Pastor, Painter Dies 11/01/2008 05:53 AM
Approved
3693
ET UFO CONTACT BASICS 10/28/2008 9:36 PM
Approved
2041
ET UFO CONTACT BEGINS 10/26/2008 2:16 PM
Approved
3105
PARANORMAL ET UFO CONTACT MAY INVOLVE OUT OF BODY EXPERIENCES 10/22/2008 7:48 PM
Approved
2481

References

This information relies on references to primary sources or sources affiliated with the subjects in this book.
(March 2007) ^ Biography – Moore, William L(eonard), (Jr.) (1943-): An article from: Contemporary Authors [HTML] (Digital). [n.d.] Retrieved June, 2009, from Amazon: http://www.amazon.com/dp/B0007SDZMK
^ Birnes, William J. (January 6, 2004). The UFO Magazine UFO Encyclopedia. Pocket. p. 39. ISBN 0-7434-6674-8.
^ Knight, Peter (2003). Conspiracy Theories in American History. ABC-CLIO. p. 629. ISBN 1-57607-812-4.
^ a b Downing, Jeremiah J. (Producer), Meacham, Warren (Director) & Deyo, Stan (Research). (1983). The Cosmic Conspiracy [Video]. Australia: RWB Productions Film & Television Pty. Ltd. / Zenac Corp.
^ a b Bishop, Greg (2005). Project Beta: The Story of Paul Bennewitz, National Security, and the Creation of a Modern UFO Myth. Paraview Pocket Books. p. 50. ISBN 0-7434-7092-3.
^ a b c Bishop, Greg (2004). Bill Moore Interview [Radio broadcast]. Radio Mysterioso. http://www.radiomisterioso.com/2008/12/15/the-lost-bill-moore-interviews-epsiode-1/
^ Bishop, Greg (2005). Project Beta: The Story of Paul Bennewitz, National Security, and the Creation of a Modern UFO Myth. Paraview Pocket Books. p. 52. ISBN 0-7434-7092-3.
^ Seligman, Michael B. (Producer) & Pasetta, J. R. (Director) (1988). UFO Cover-Up?: Live! [Video]. USA: Seligman Productions / LBS Communications Inc.
^ Bishop, Greg (2005). Bill Moore Interview [Radio broadcast]. Radio Mysterioso. http://www.radio4all.net/index.php/program/11770
Collins, Robert M. & Doty, Richard C. (2006), Exempt from Disclosure: The Black World of UFOs, Peregrine Communications, ISBN 0-9766426-3-8
. ^ Biography – Moore, William L (Leonard), (Jr.) (1943- ): An article from: Contemporary Authors [HTML] (Digital). [n.d.] Retrieved June, 2009, from Amazon: http://www.amazon.com/dp/B0007SDZMK
^ Birnes, William J. (January 6, 2004). The UFO Magazine UFO Encyclopedia. Pocket. p. 39. ISBN 0-7434-6674-8.
^ Knight, Peter (2003). Conspiracy Theories in American History. ABC-CLIO. p. 629. ISBN 1-57607-812-4.
^ A b Downing, Jeremiah J. (Producer), Meacham, Warren (Director) & Deyo, Stan (Research). (1983). The Cosmic Conspiracy [Video]. Australia: RWB Productions Film & Television Pty. Ltd. / Zenac Corp.
^ A b Bishop, Greg (2005). Project Beta: The Story of Paul Bennewitz, National Security, and the Creation of a Modern UFO Myth. Paraview Pocket Books. p. 50. ISBN 0-7434-7092-3.
^ A b c Bishop, Greg (2004). Bill Moore Interview [Radio broadcast]. Radio Mysterioso. http://www.radiomisterioso.com/2008/12/15/the-lost-bill-moore-interviews-epsiode-1/
^ Bishop, Greg (2005). Project Beta: The Story of Paul Bennewitz, National Security, and the Creation of a Modern UFO Myth. Paraview Pocket Books. p. 52. ISBN 0-7434-7092-3.
^ Seligman, Michael B. (Producer) & Pasetta, J. R. (Director) (1988). UFO Cover-Up? Live! [Video]. USA: Seligman Productions / LBS Communications Inc.
^ Bishop, Greg (2005). Bill Moore Interview [Radio broadcast]. Radio Mysterioso. http://www.radio4all.net/index.php/program/11770
Collins, Robert M. & Doty, Richard C. (2006), Exempt from Disclosure: The Black World of UFOs, Peregrine Communications, and ISBN 0-9766426-3-8
^ A b Brake, Mark (June 2006). “On the plurality of inhabited worlds; a brief history of extraterrestrialism”. International Journal of Astrobiology 5 (2): 104. Doi: 10.1017/S1473550406002989.
^ Denzler, Brenda (2003). The lure of the edge: scientific passions, religious beliefs, and the pursuit of UFOs. University of California Press. pp. 6–7. ISBN 0-520-23905-9.
^ Denzler (2003), pp. 9
^ Schulgen, George (October 28, 1947). “Schulgen Memo”. Retrieved May 3, 2010. “The object sighted is being assumed to be a manned aircraft, of Russian origin, and based on the perspective thinking and actual accomplishments of the Germans.”
^ “The Air Force Intelligence Report”. Retrieved May 3, 2010. “To implement this policy it was directed that Hq, Air Material Command set up a project with the purpose of collecting, collating, evaluating, and distributing to interested government agencies and contractors, all information concerning sightings and phenomena in the atmosphere which could be construed to be of concern to the national security.”
^ A b c d e f g h i j k Haines, Gerald K. (April 14, 2007). “CIA’s Role in the Study of UFOs, 1947-90”. Retrieved May 3, 2010.
^ GEIPAN stands for Groupe d’Études ET d’informations sur les Phénomènes Aérospatiaux Non-identifiés (“unidentified aerospace phenomenon research and information group”)
^ UFO files from the UK National Archives
^ UFO files from the Library and Archives Canada
^ “Secret UFO archives opened”. The Copenhagen Post. January 29, 2009. Retrieved May 3, 2010.
^ Italian Air Force UFO site (in Italian)
^ “För insyn: 18 000 svenska UFO-rapporter” (in Swedish). Expressen . May 6, 2009. Retrieved May 3, 2010.
^ “UFO reports to be destroyed in future by MoD”. Telegraph (London). February 28, 2010. Retrieved May 3, 2010.
^ A b Denzler (2003), pp. 69
^ A b Why SETI Is Science and UFOlogy Is Not – A Space Science Perspective on Boundaries, Mark Moldwin, 2004
^ Sturrock, Peter A. (2000). The UFO Enigma: A New Review of the Physical Evidence. Aspect Books. ISBN 0-446-67709-4.
^ The J. Allen Hynek Center for UFO Studies
^ Vallee, Jacques (1965). Anatomy of a phenomenon: unidentified objects in space–a scientific appraisal. NTC/Contemporary Publishing. ISBN 0-8092-9888-0…
^ McDonald, James. E. (1968). Statement on Unidentified Flying Objects submitted to the House Committee on Science and Astronautics at July 29, 1968, Symposium on Unidentified Flying Objects, Rayburn Bldg., Washington, D.D.
^ Tuomela, Raimo (1985). Science, action, and reality. Springer. pp. 234. ISBN 90-277-2098-3.
^ Feist, Gregory J. (2006). The psychology of science and the origins of the scientific mind. Yale University Press. pp. 219. ISBN 0-300-11074-X.
^ Restivo, Sal P. (2005). Science, technology, and society: an encyclopedia. Oxford University Press USA. pp. 176. ISBN 0-19-514193-8.
^ Friedman, Stanton T. (2009-05-30). Pseudo-Science of Anti-Ufology. The UFO Chronicles. Retrieved 2010-05-03.
^ Hansson, Sven Ove (September 3, 2008). “Science and Pseudo-Science”. Retrieved May 8, 2010.
^ Denzler (2003), pp. 91
^ Feist (2006), pp. 219-220
^ Cooper, Rachel (2009). “Chapter 1: Is psychiatric research scientific?”. In Broome, Matthew; Bortolotti, Lisa. Psychiatry as Cognitive Neuroscience: Philosophical Perspectives. Oxford University Press. pp. 19. ISBN 0-19-923803-0.
^ a b Denzler (2003), pp. 35
^ Hoyt, Diana Palmer (2000-04-20). UFOCRITIQUE: UFO’s, Social Intelligence and the Condon Committees. Master’s Thesis. Virginia Polytechnic Institute. Retrieved 2007-05-25. (Page 13)
^ Markovsky B., “UFOs”, in The Skeptic’s Encyclopedia of Pseudoscience, edited by Michael Shermer, 2002 Skeptics Society, p260
^ Sagan, Carl (1975). Other Worlds. Bantam. p. 113. ISBN 0-552-66439-1.
^ Sturrock (2000) pp. 163
^ Denzler (2003), pp. 35-36
^ Hynek, J. Allen (1974). The UFO experience: a scientific enquiry. Corgi. ISBN 0-552-09430-7.
^ A b Tumminia, Diana G. (2007). Alien worlds: social and religious dimensions of extraterrestrial contact. Syracuse University Press. ISBN 0-8156-0858-6.
^ Vallée, Jacques F. (1998). “Physical Analyses in Ten Cases of Unexplained Aerial Objects with Material Samples”. Journal of Scientific Exploration 12 (3): 360–361.
^ Friedman, Stanton T. (2008). Flying Saucers and Science: A Scientist Investigates the Mysteries of UFOs. Franklin Lakes, NJ: New Page Books. ISBN 978-1-60163-011-7.
^ Denzler (2003), pp. 72-73
^ Hynek, Josef Allen (April 1953). “Unusual Aerial Phenomena”. Journal of the Optical Society of America 43 (4): 311–314. doi:10.1364/JOSA.43.000311.
^ Josef Allen Hynek (1952-08-06). Special report on conferences with astronomers on unidentified aerial objects. NARA. Retrieved 2007-05-25. “Close questioning revealed they knew nothing of the actual sightings, of their frequency or anything much about them, and therefore cannot be taken seriously. This is characteristic of scientists in general when speaking about subjects which are not in their own immediate field of concern.”
^ Sturrock (2000) pp. 155: “If the Air Force were to make available, say, $50 million per year for ten years for UFO research, it is quite likely that the subject would look somewhat less disreputable … however, an agency is unlikely to initiate such a program at any level until scientists are supportive of such an initiative. We see that there is a chicken-and-egg program. It would be more sensible, and more acceptable to the scientific community, if research began at a low level.”
^ Andrews, Colin; Spignesi, Stephen J. (2003). Crop circles: signs of contact. Career Press. ISBN 1-56414-674-X.
^ Howe, Linda Moulton (1989). Alien Harvest: Further Evidence Linking Animal Mutilations and Human Abductions to Alien Life Forms. Linda Moulton Howe Productions. ISBN 0-9620570-1-0.
^ Denzler (2003), pp. 239
^ Friedman, Stanton T.;Berliner, Don (1992). Crash at Corona: The U.S. Military Retrieval and Cover-up of a UFO. Paragon House. ISBN 1-55778-449-3.
^ Randle, Kevin D.; Schmitt, Donald R. (1991). UFO Crash at Roswell. Avon Books. ISBN 0-380-76196-3.
^ Friedman, Stanton T. (1997). TOP SECRET/MAJIC. Marlowe & Co. ISBN 1-56924-741-2.
^ Salla, Michael (2004). Exopolitics: Political Implications of Extraterrestrial Presence. Dandelion Books. ISBN 1-893302-56-3.
^ Greer, Steven M. (2001). Disclosure: Military and Government Witnesses Reveal the Greatest Secrets in Modern History. Crossing Point. ISBN 0-9673238-1-9.
^ A b c Sheaffer, Robert. “A Skeptical Perspective on UFO Abductions”. In: Pritchard, Andrea & Pritchard, David E. & Mack, John E. & Kasey, Pam & Yapp, Claudia. Alien Discussions: Proceedings of the Abduction Study Conference. Cambridge: North Cambridge Press. Pp. 382-388.
^ A b McDonald (1968)
^ Sturrock, Peter A. (May 1974). UFO Reports from AIAA (American Institute of Aeronautics and Astronautics) Members. UFO Evidence. Retrieved 2010-05-04.
^ A b Sturrock, Peter A. (1976). Report on a Survey of the Membership of the American Astronomical Society Concerning the UFO Phenomenon – Summary. Stanford university report No. 681R. Retrieved 2010-05-04.
^ Herb, Gert & J. Allen Hynek (May 2006). The Amateur Astronomer and the UFO Phenomena. Reprint. 30. International UFO Reporter. pp. 14–16.
^ United States Air Force (April 27, 1949). “USAF Briefing Report”. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “The majority of reported incidents have been caused by misidentification of weather balloons, high altitude balloons with lights or electronic equipment, meteors, Boliden, and celestial bodies.”
^ United States Air Force (April 27, 1949). “USAF Briefing Report”. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “There are numerous reports from reliable and competent observers for which a conclusive explanation has not been possible. Some of these involve descriptions which would place them in the category of new manifestations of probable natural phenomena, but others involve configurations and described performance which might conceivably represent an advanced aerodynamical development.”
^ Lt. Col. George D. Garrett, USAF. (July 30, 1947). “Flying discs. Summary of 16 UFO cases.”. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “This “flying saucer” situation is not all imaginary or seeing too much in some natural phenomenon. Something is really flying around.”
^ Lt. General Nathan F. Twining, USAF. (September 23, 1947). “AMC Opinion Concerning “Flying Discs””. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “The phenomenon is something real and not visionary or fictitious”
^ A b c d Hodapp, Christopher & Alice Von Kannon (2008). Conspiracy Theories & Secret Societies for Dummies. For Dummies. pp. 133. ISBN 0-470-18408-6.
^ Flying Saucer Working Party, Ministry of Defence (June 1951). “Unidentified Flying Objects: Report by the ‘Flying Saucer’ Working Party”. Retrieved May 4, 2010.
^ Denzler (2003), pp. 98
^ A b Library and Archives Canada (August 11, 2007). “Canada’s UFOs: The Search for the Unknown – Project Magnet”. Retrieved May 8, 2010.
^ a b Cameron, Vicki (1995). Don’t tell anyone, but–: UFO experiences in Canada. General Store Publishing House. pp. 10. ISBN 1-896182-20-8.
^ A b Library and Archives Canada (December 14, 2007). “Canada’s UFOs: The Search for the Unknown – Project Second Story”. Retrieved May 8, 2010.
^ Cameron (1995), pp. 10-11
^ A b c Denzler (2003), pp. 13
^ Lamb, David (2001). The search for extraterrestrial intelligence: a philosophical inquiry. Routledge. pp. 146. ISBN 0-203-99174-5.
^ a b USAF (June 1995). “USAF Fact Sheet 95-03: Unidentified Flying Objects and Air Force Project Blue Book”. Retrieved May 4, 2010.
^ a b c d Denzler (2003), pp. 16
^ Sturrock, Peter A. (1987). “An Analysis of the Condon Report on the Colorado UFO Project”. Journal of Scientific Exploration 1 (1): 77.
^ United States Air Technical Intelligence Center (May 5, 1955). “Project Blue Book Special Report NO. 14: Analysis of Reports of Unidentified Aerial Objects. Project No. 10073.” Retrieved May 4, 2010. “The danger lies in the possibility of forgetting the subjectivity of the data at the time that conclusions are drawn from the analysis. It must be emphasized, again and again, that the conclusions contained in this report are based NOT on facts, but on what many observers thought and estimated the true facts to be.”
^ A b c d Denzler (2003), pp. 14
^ A b Denzler (2003), pp. 15
^ Edward U.Condon (1968). “Scientific Study of Unidentified Flying Objects”. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “Our general conclusion is that nothing has come from the study of UFOs in the past 21 years that has added to scientific knowledge. Careful consideration of the record as it is available to us leads us to conclude that further extensive study of UFOs probably cannot be justified in the expectation that science will be advanced thereby.”
^ A b Kocher, George (November 1968). “UFOs: What to Do?”. RAND Corporation. Retrieved May 8, 2010.
^ A b Denzler (2003), pp. 72
^ Rutledge, Harley D. (1981). Project Identification: the first scientific field study of UFO phenomena. Prentice-Hall. ISBN 0-13-730705-5.
^ Dickinson, Alexander K. (February 1982). “Interesting, But UFO’s Still Unidentified”. The Physics Teacher 20 (2): 128–130. doi:10.1119/1.2340971.
^ A b c CNES (March 26, 2007). “GEIPAN UAP investigation unit opens its files”. Retrieved May 4, 2010.
^ GEIPAN, CNES (April 8, 2010). “GEIPAN statistics” (in French). Retrieved May 4, 2010.
^ (French) Jean-Jacques Vélasco and Nicolas Montigiani (2004). OVNIS l’Evidence. Chatou – New York, Carnot, « Orbis enigma ». ISBN 2-84855-054-6.
^ La Dépêche du Midi (April 18, 2004). “‘Yes, UFOs exist’: Position statement by SEPRA head, Jean-Jacques Velasco”. Retrieved May 4, 2010.
^ Dolan, Richard M. (2008). UFOs and the National Security state – the cover-up exposed 1973-1991. Keyhole Publishing. pp. 143–144. ISBN 978-0-9677995-1-3.
^ Photograph of United Nations meeting on UFOs, July 14, 1978 ufoevidence.org (Retrieved May 4, 2010)
^ A/DEC/32/424 UNBISnet- United Nations Bibliographic Information System, Dag Hammarskjöld Library (Retrieved May 4, 2010)
^ A/DEC/33/426, UNBISnet (Retrieved May 4, 2010)
^ UN (December 18, 1978). “Recommendation to Establish UN Agency for UFO Research – UN General Assembly decision 33/426”. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “the General Assembly invites interested Member States to take appropriate steps to coordinate on a national level scientific research and investigation into extraterrestrial life, including unidentified flying objects, and to inform the Secretary-General of the observations, research and evaluation of such activities.”
^ Teodorani, Massimo (2004). “A Long-Term Scientific Survey of the Hessdalen Phenomenon”. Journal of Scientific Exploration 18 (12): 222–224.
^ Erling Strand. “Project Hessdalen 1984 – Final Technical Report”. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “Beside the light measurements, it can be “measured” by radar and laser. Perhaps the measurements we did on the magnetograph and spectrum analyzer are due to this phenomenon as well. We have to do more measurements with these instruments, before we can be sure of that.”
^ Erling Strand. “Project Hessdalen 1984 – Final Technical Report”. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “We have not found out what this phenomenon is. That could hardly be expected either. But we know that the phenomenon, whatever it is, can be measured.”
^ Teodorani, Massimo (2004). “A Long-Term Scientific Survey of the Hessdalen Phenomenon”. Journal of Scientific Exploration 18 (12): 217–251. “A self-consistent definitive theory of the phenomenon’s nature and origin in all its aspects cannot be constructed yet quantitatively”
^ Massimo Teodorani, Gloria Nobili (2002). “EMBLA 2002 – An Optical and Ground Survey in Hessdalen” (PDF). pp. 16. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “Whatever these things are, if some “alien intelligence” is behind the Hessdalen phenomenon, that hypothetical intelligence has shown no interest in searching a direct, continuative and structurally evolved communication with mankind and went on behaving in such a way that the light-phenomenon itself appears to be totally elusive.”
^ Wired (2006-05-10). “It’s Official: UFOs Are Just UAPs”. Retrieved May 4, 2010.
^ Ministry of Defense (December 2000). “Unidentified Aerial Phenomena in the UK Air Defence Region: Executive Summary” (PDF). pp. 4. Retrieved May 5, 2010. “„That UAP exist is indisputable … [they] clearly can exhibit aerodynamic characteristics well beyond those of any known aircraft or missile – either manned or unmanned. “”
^ Telegraph (September 20, 2009). “Britain’s X Files: RAF suspected aliens of “tourist” visits to Earth”. The Daily Telegraph (London). Retrieved May 4, 2010.
^ Ministry of Defense (December 2000). “Unidentified Aerial Phenomena in the UK Air Defence Region: Executive Summary” (PDF). pp. 10. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ Ministry of Defense (December 2000). “Unidentified Aerial Phenomena in the UK Air Defence Region: Executive Summary” (PDF). pp. 11. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ David F. Salisbury (July 1, 1998). “No evidence of ET: Panel calls for more scientific UFO research”. Stanford Online Report. Retrieved May 5, 2010. “”The upshot of this was that, far from supporting Condon’s conclusions, I thought the evidence presented in the report suggested that something was going on that needed study.””
^ Salisbury (1998)
^ Sturrock, Peter A. (1998). “Physical Evidence Related to UFO Reports: The Proceedings of a Workshop Held at the Pocantico Conference Center, Tarrytown, New York, and September 29 – October 4, 1997”. Journal of Scientific Exploration 12 (2): 179–229.
^ Sturrock et al (1998) pp. 180: “…but there was no convincing evidence pointing to unknown physical processes or to the involvement of extraterrestrial intelligence.”, “…it would be valuable to carefully evaluate UFO reports since, whenever there are unexplained observations…”
^ Sturrock et al (1998) pp. 180: “…it would be valuable to carefully evaluate UFO reports since, whenever there are unexplained observations, there is the possibility that scientists will learn something new by studying these observations.”
^ COMETA Report, part 1 (July 1999). “UFOs and Defense: What Should We Prepare For?” (PDF). ufoevidence.org. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ COMETA Report, part 2 (July 1999). “UFOs and Defense: What Should We Prepare For?” (PDF). ufoevidence.org. pp. 38. Retrieved May 5, 2010. “[…] almost certain physical reality of completely unknown flying objects […], apparently operated by intelligent [beings].”, “A single hypothesis sufficiently takes into account the facts […] It is the hypothesis of extraterrestrial visitors.””
^ COMETA Report, part 2 (199) pp. 72
^ Maugé, Claude. Commentary on COMETA. Inforespace (No.100, June 2000, pp.78).
^ Katelynn Raymer (May 10, 2001). “Group Calls for Disclosure of UFO Info”. ABC News. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ Rob Watson (May 10, 2001). “UFO spotters slam ‘US cover-up'”. BBC News. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ Watson (2001)
^ Sharon Kehnemui (May 10, 2001). “Men in Suits See Aliens as Part of Solution, Not Problem”. Fox News. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ Bonnie Malkin (November 14, 2007). “Pilots call for new UFO investigation”. London: Telegraph. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ “I touched a UFO: ex-air force pilot”. The Sydney Morning Herald. November 13, 2007. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ a b Denzler (2003): pp. 4
^ B.D. Gildenberg. “A Roswell Requiem”. Skeptic 10-1 (2003).
^ Hodapp & Von Kannon (2008): pp. 119-120
^ Hodapp & Von Kannon (2008): pp.121-122
^ James McAndrews (1997). “The Roswell Report: Case Closed”. Headquarters United States Air Force. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ A b c Denzler (2003): pp. 11
^ Rutledge, Jack (July 22, 1952). “Air Force Spots ‘Flying Saucers’ In Its Own Back Yard”. Tri City Herald.
^ A b Boyd, Ronald (May 8, 1982). “A close encounter with a UFO believer”. St. Petersburg Times.
^ Rowland, Michael (November 13, 2007). “Ex-pilots, military officers call for new UFO probe”. ABC News (Australia). “Retired Iranian Air Force general, Parviz Jafari, says he attempted to shoot down a strange object hovering over Tehran in 1976.”
^ “F-4 Jet Chase over Iran 1976”. ufoevidence.org. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ Klass, Philip J. (1983). UFOs: the public deceived. Prometheus Books. ISBN 0-87975-322-6.
^ Rutkowski, Chris A. (2008). A World of UFO. Dundurn Press. pp. 35. ISBN 1-55002-833-2.
^ Rutkowski (2008): pp. 27-31
^ Rutkowski (2008): pp. 28
^ Rutkowski (2008): pp. 30
^ A b Rutkowski (2008): pp. 31
^ Brian Dunning (January 6, 2009). “The Rendlesham Forest UFO”. Skeptoid. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ Rutkowski (2008): pp. 68
^ a b c d e Rutkowski (2008): pp. 70
^ Renaud Leclet et al.. “The Belgian UFO Wave of 1989-1992 – A Neglected Hypothesis” (pdf). Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ Richard Price (June 18, 1997). “Arizona says the truth about UFO is out there” (PDF). USA Today. Retrieved May 6, 2010.
^ Rutkowski (2008): pp. 40
^ Brian Dunning (April 26, 2007). “The Alien Invasion of Phoenix, Arizona”. Skeptoid. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ A b c d e f g h i Markovsky (2002) pp. 270
^ A b “About BUFORA”. BUFORA. Retrieved May 6, 2010.
^ “About UFOBUA”. Aliens the Truth. Retrieved December 12, 2009.
^ a b “The History of VUFORS”. VUFORS. Retrieved May 6, 2010.
^ “Australian Centre for UFO Studies”. ACUFOS. Retrieved May 6, 2010.
^ “Australian UFO Research Network”. AUFORN. Retrieved May 6, 2010.
^ “UFO Research Queenslandk”. FORQ. Retrieved May 6, 2010.
^ Sheaffer, Robert (February 2009). “UFOlogy 2009: A Six-Decade Perspective”. Skeptical Inquirer. Retrieved May 6, 2010.
^ “About CSI”. CSI. Retrieved May 6, 2010.
^ “Skeptics Society & Skeptic Magazine”. Skeptics Society. Retrieved May 6, 2010.
Ufology Books Collection
Academic books about ufology as a sociological and historical phenomenon
Denzler, Brenda (2003). The lure of the edge: scientific passions, religious beliefs, and the pursuit of UFOs. University of California Press. ISBN 0-520-23905-9.
Pro-ufology
Hynek, J. Allen (1998). The UFO experience: a scientific enquiry. Da Capo Press. ISBN 1-56924-782-X.
Vallée, Jacques F. (1991). Confrontations: A Scientist’s Search for Alien Contact. Random House Value Publishing. ISBN 0-517-07204-1.
Skeptical opinions
Klass, Philip J. (1983). UFOs: the public deceived. Prometheus Books. ISBN 0-87975-322-6.
Sheaffer, Robert (1986). The UFO verdict: examining the evidence. Prometheus Books. ISBN 0-87975-338-2.
Ufology studies
Gillmor, Daniel S., Condon, Edward U. (1970). Scientific Study of Unidentified Flying Objects. Vision. ISBN 0-85478-142-0.
Rutledge, Harley D. (1981). Project Identification: the first scientific field study of UFO phenomena. Prentice-Hall. ISBN 0-13-730705-5.
Groupe d’Études et d’Informations sur les Phénomènes Aérospatiaux Non-identifiés
British UFO Research Association
Committee for Skeptical Inquiry UFO resources
Largest searchable UFO picture database on the net
^ Biography – Moore, William L(eonard), (Jr.) (1943-): An article from: Contemporary Authors [HTML] (Digital). [n.d.] Retrieved June, 2009, from Amazon: http://www.amazon.com/dp/B0007SDZMK
^ Birnes, William J. (January 6, 2004). The UFO Magazine UFO Encyclopedia. Pocket. p. 39. ISBN 0-7434-6674-8.
^ Knight, Peter (2003). Conspiracy Theories in American History. ABC-CLIO. p. 629. ISBN 1-57607-812-4.
^ a b Downing, Jeremiah J. (Producer), Meacham, Warren (Director) & Deyo, Stan (Research). (1983). The Cosmic Conspiracy [Video]. Australia: RWB Productions Film & Television Pty. Ltd. / Zenac Corp.
^ a b Bishop, Greg (2005). Project Beta: The Story of Paul Bennewitz, National Security, and the Creation of a Modern UFO Myth. Paraview Pocket Books. p. 50. ISBN 0-7434-7092-3.
^ a b c Bishop, Greg (2004). Bill Moore Interview [Radio broadcast]. Radio Mysterioso. http://www.radiomisterioso.com/2008/12/15/the-lost-bill-moore-interviews-epsiode-1/
^ Bishop, Greg (2005). Project Beta: The Story of Paul Bennewitz, National Security, and the Creation of a Modern UFO Myth. Paraview Pocket Books. p. 52. ISBN 0-7434-7092-3.
^ Seligman, Michael B. (Producer) & Pasetta, J. R. (Director) (1988). UFO Cover-Up?: Live! [Video]. USA: Seligman Productions / LBS Communications Inc.
^ Bishop, Greg (2005). Bill Moore Interview [Radio broadcast]. Radio Mysterioso. http://www.radio4all.net/index.php/program/11770
Collins, Robert M. & Doty, Richard C. (2006), Exempt from Disclosure: The Black World of UFOs, Peregrine Communications, ISBN 0-9766426-3-8

^ a b Brake, Mark (June 2006). “On the plurality of inhabited worlds; a brief history of extraterrestrialism”. International Journal of Astrobiology 5 (2): 104. doi:10.1017/S1473550406002989.
^ Denzler, Brenda (2003). The lure of the edge: scientific passions, religious beliefs, and the pursuit of UFOs. University of California Press. pp. 6–7. ISBN 0-520-23905-9.
^ Denzler (2003), pp. 9
^ Schulgen, George (October 28, 1947). “Schulgen Memo”. Retrieved May 3, 2010. “the object sighted is being assumed to be a manned aircraft, of Russian origin, and based on the perspective thinking and actual accomplishments of the Germans.”
^ “The Air Force Intelligence Report”. Retrieved May 3, 2010. “To implement this policy it was directed that Hq, Air Material Command set up a project with the purpose of collecting, collating, evaluating, and distributing to interested government agencies and contractors, all information concerning sightings and phenomena in the atmosphere which could be construed to be of concern to the national security.”
^ a b c d e f g h i j k Haines, Gerald K. (April 14, 2007). “CIA’s Role in the Study of UFOs, 1947-90”. Retrieved May 3, 2010.
^ GEIPAN stands for Groupe d’Études et d’Informations sur les Phénomènes Aérospatiaux Non-identifiés (“unidentified aerospace phenomenon research and information group”)
^ UFO files from the UK National Archives
^ UFO files from the Library and Archives Canada
^ “Secret UFO archives opened”. The Copenhagen Post. January 29, 2009. Retrieved May 3, 2010.
^ Italian Air Force UFO site (in Italian)
^ “För insyn: 18 000 svenska UFO-rapporter” (in Swedish). Expressen . May 6, 2009. Retrieved May 3, 2010.
^ “UFO reports to be destroyed in future by MoD”. Telegraph (London). February 28, 2010. Retrieved May 3, 2010.
^ a b Denzler (2003), pp. 69
^ a b Why SETI Is Science and UFOlogy Is Not – A Space Science Perspective on Boundaries, Mark Moldwin, 2004
^ Sturrock, Peter A. (2000). The UFO Enigma: A New Review of the Physical Evidence. Aspect Books. ISBN 0-446-67709-4.
^ The J. Allen Hynek Center for UFO Studies
^ Vallee, Jacques (1965). Anatomy of a phenomenon: unidentified objects in space–a scientific appraisal. NTC/Contemporary Publishing. ISBN 0-8092-9888-0..
^ McDonald, James. E. (1968). Statement on Unidentified Flying Objects submitted to the House Committee on Science and Astronautics at July 29, 1968, Symposium on Unidentified Flying Objects, Rayburn Bldg., Washington, D.D.
^ Tuomela, Raimo (1985). Science, action, and reality. Springer. pp. 234. ISBN 90-277-2098-3.
^ Feist, Gregory J. (2006). The psychology of science and the origins of the scientific mind. Yale University Press. pp. 219. ISBN 0-300-11074-X.
^ Restivo, Sal P. (2005). Science, technology, and society: an encyclopedia. Oxford University Press USA. pp. 176. ISBN 0-19-514193-8.
^ Friedman, Stanton T. (2009-05-30). Pseudo-Science of Anti-Ufology. The UFO Chronicles. Retrieved 2010-05-03.
^ Hansson, Sven Ove (September 3, 2008). “Science and Pseudo-Science”. Retrieved May 8, 2010.
^ Denzler (2003), pp. 91
^ Feist (2006), pp. 219-220
^ Cooper, Rachel (2009). “Chapter 1: Is psychiatric research scientific?”. In Broome, Matthew; Bortolotti, Lisa. Psychiatry as Cognitive Neuroscience: Philosophical Perspectives. Oxford University Press. pp. 19. ISBN 0-19-923803-0.
^ a b Denzler (2003), pp. 35
^ Hoyt, Diana Palmer (2000-04-20). UFOCRITIQUE: UFO’s, Social Intelligence and the Condon Committees. Master’s Thesis. Virginia Polytechnic Institute. Retrieved 2007-05-25. (page 13)
^ Markovsky B., “UFOs”, in The Skeptic’s Encyclopedia of Pseudoscience, edited by Michael Shermer, 2002 Skeptics Society, p260
^ Sagan, Carl (1975). Other Worlds. Bantam. p. 113. ISBN 0-552-66439-1.
^ Sturrock (2000) pp. 163
^ Denzler (2003), pp. 35-36
^ Hynek, J. Allen (1974). The UFO experience: a scientific enquiry. Corgi. ISBN 0-552-09430-7.
^ a b Tumminia, Diana G. (2007). Alien worlds: social and religious dimensions of extraterrestrial contact. Syracuse University Press. ISBN 0-8156-0858-6.
^ Vallée, Jacques F. (1998). “Physical Analyses in Ten Cases of Unexplained Aerial Objects with Material Samples”. Journal of Scientific Exploration 12 (3): 360–361.
^ Friedman, Stanton T. (2008). Flying Saucers and Science: A Scientist Investigates the Mysteries of UFOs. Franklin Lakes, NJ: New Page Books. ISBN 978-1-60163-011-7.
^ Denzler (2003), pp. 72-73
^ Hynek, Josef Allen (April 1953). “Unusual Aerial Phenomena”. Journal of the Optical Society of America 43 (4): 311–314. doi:10.1364/JOSA.43.000311.
^ Josef Allen Hynek (1952-08-06). Special report on conferences with astronomers on unidentified aerial objects. NARA. Retrieved 2007-05-25. “Close questioning revealed they knew nothing of the actual sightings, of their frequency or anything much about them, and therefore cannot be taken seriously. This is characteristic of scientists in general when speaking about subjects which are not in their own immediate field of concern.”
^ Sturrock (2000) pp. 155: “If the Air Force were to make available, say, $50 million per year for ten years for UFO research, it is quite likely that the subject would look somewhat less disreputable … however, an agency is unlikely to initiate such a program at any level until scientists are supportive of such an initiative. We see that there is a chicken-and-egg program. It would be more sensible, and more acceptable to the scientific community, if research began at a low level.”
^ Andrews, Colin; Spignesi, Stephen J. (2003). Crop circles: signs of contact. Career Press. ISBN 1-56414-674-X.
^ Howe, Linda Moulton (1989). Alien Harvest: Further Evidence Linking Animal Mutilations and Human Abductions to Alien Life Forms. Linda Moulton Howe Productions. ISBN 0-9620570-1-0.
^ Denzler (2003), pp. 239
^ Friedman, Stanton T.;Berliner, Don (1992). Crash at Corona: The U.S. Military Retrieval and Cover-up of a UFO. Paragon House. ISBN 1-55778-449-3.
^ Randle, Kevin D.;Schmitt, Donald R. (1991). UFO Crash at Roswel. Avon Books. ISBN 0-380-76196-3.
^ Friedman, Stanton T. (1997). TOP SECRET/MAJIC. Marlowe & Co. ISBN 1-56924-741-2.
^ Salla, Michael (2004). Exopolitics: Political Implications of Extraterrestrial Presence. Dandelion Books. ISBN 1-893302-56-3.
^ Greer, Steven M. (2001). Disclosure : Military and Government Witnesses Reveal the Greatest Secrets in Modern History. Crossing Point. ISBN 0-9673238-1-9.
^ a b c Sheaffer, Robert. “A Skeptical Perspective on UFO Abductions”. In: Pritchard, Andrea & Pritchard, David E. & Mack, John E. & Kasey, Pam & Yapp, Claudia. Alien Discussions: Proceedings of the Abduction Study Conference. Cambridge: North Cambridge Press. Pp. 382-388.
^ a b McDonald (1968)
^ Sturrock, Peter A. (May 1974). UFO Reports from AIAA (American Institute of Aeronautics and Astronautics) Members. UFO Evidence. Retrieved 2010-05-04.
^ a b Sturrock, Peter A. (1976). Report on a Survey of the Membership of the American Astronomical Society Concerning the UFO Phenomenon – Summary. Stanford university report No. 681R. Retrieved 2010-05-04.
^ Herb, Gert & J. Allen Hynek (May 2006). The Amateur Astronomer and the UFO Phenomena. reprint. 30. International UFO Reporter. pp. 14–16.
^ United States Air Force (April 27, 1949). “USAF Briefing Report”. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “The majority of reported incidents have been caused by misidentification of weather balloons, high altitude balloons with lights or electronic equipment, meteors, Boliden, and celestial bodies.”
^ United States Air Force (April 27, 1949). “USAF Briefing Report”. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “There are numerous reports from reliable and competent observers for which a conclusive explanation has not been possible. Some of these involve descriptions which would place them in the category of new manifestations of probable natural phenomena, but others involve configurations and described performance which might conceivably represent an advanced aerodynamical development.”
^ Lt. Col. George D. Garrett, USAF. (July 30, 1947). “Flying discs. Summary of 16 UFO cases.”. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “This “flying saucer” situation is not all imaginary or seeing too much in some natural phenomenon. Something is really flying around.”
^ Lt. General Nathan F. Twining, USAF. (September 23, 1947). “AMC Opinion Concerning “Flying Discs””. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “The phenomenon is something real and not visionary or fictitious”
^ a b c d Hodapp, Christopher & Alice Von Kannon (2008). Conspiracy Theories & Secret Societies For Dummies. For Dummies. pp. 133. ISBN 0-470-18408-6.
^ Flying Saucer Working Party, Ministry of Defence (June 1951). “Unidentified Flying Objects: Report by the ‘Flying Saucer’ Working Party”. Retrieved May 4, 2010.
^ Denzler (2003), pp. 98
^ a b Library and Archives Canada (August 11, 2007). “Canada’s UFOs: The Search for the Unknown – Project Magnet”. Retrieved May 8, 2010.
^ a b Cameron, Vicki (1995). Don’t tell anyone, but–: UFO experiences in Canada. General Store Publishing House. pp. 10. ISBN 1-896182-20-8.
^ a b Library and Archives Canada (December 14, 2007). “Canada’s UFOs: The Search for the Unknown – Project Second Story”. Retrieved May 8, 2010.
^ Cameron (1995), pp. 10-11
^ a b c Denzler (2003), pp. 13
^ Lamb, David (2001). The search for extraterrestrial intelligence: a philosophical inquiry. Routledge. pp. 146. ISBN 0-203-99174-5.
^ a b USAF (June 1995). “USAF Fact Sheet 95-03: Unidentified Flying Objects and Air Force Project Blue Book”. Retrieved May 4, 2010.
^ a b c d Denzler (2003), pp. 16
^ Sturrock, Peter A. (1987). “An Analysis of the Condon Report on the Colorado UFO Project”. Journal of Scientific Exploration 1 (1): 77.
^ United States Air Technical Intelligence Center (May 5, 1955). “Project Blue Book Special Report NO. 14: Analysis of Reports of Unidentified Aerial Objects. Project No. 10073.”. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “The danger lies in the possibility of forgetting the subjectivity of the data at the time that conclusions are drawn from the analysis. It must be emphasized, again and again, that the conclusions contained in this report are based NOT on facts, but on what many observers thought and estimated the true facts to be.”
^ a b c d Denzler (2003), pp. 14
^ a b Denzler (2003), pp. 15
^ Edward U.Condon (1968). “Scientific Study of Unidentified Flying Objects”. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “Our general conclusion is that nothing has come from the study of UFOs in the past 21 years that has added to scientific knowledge. Careful consideration of the record as it is available to us leads us to conclude that further extensive study of UFOs probably cannot be justified in the expectation that science will be advanced thereby.”
^ a b Kocher, George (November 1968). “UFOs: What to Do?”. RAND Corporation. Retrieved May 8, 2010.
^ a b Denzler (2003), pp. 72
^ Rutledge, Harley D. (1981). Project Identification: the first scientific field study of UFO phenomena. Prentice-Hall. ISBN 0-13-730705-5.
^ Dickinson, Alexander K. (February 1982). “Interesting, But UFO’s Still Unidentified”. The Physics Teacher 20 (2): 128–130. doi:10.1119/1.2340971.
^ a b c CNES (March 26, 2007). “GEIPAN UAP investigation unit opens its files”. Retrieved May 4, 2010.
^ GEIPAN, CNES (April 8, 2010). “GEIPAN statistics” (in French). Retrieved May 4, 2010.
^ (French) Jean-Jacques Vélasco and Nicolas Montigiani (2004). OVNIS l’Evidence. Chatou – New York, Carnot, « Orbis enigma ». ISBN 2-84855-054-6.
^ La Dépêche du Midi (April 18, 2004). “‘Yes, UFOs exist’: Position statement by SEPRA head, Jean-Jacques Velasco”. Retrieved May 4, 2010.
^ Dolan, Richard M. (2008). UFOs and the National Security state – the cover-up exposed 1973-1991. Keyhole Publishing. pp. 143–144. ISBN 978-0-9677995-1-3.
^ Photograph of United Nations meeting on UFOs, July 14, 1978 ufoevidence.org (Retrieved May 4, 2010)
^ A/DEC/32/424 UNBISnet- United Nations Bibliographic Information System, Dag Hammarskjöld Library (Retrieved May 4, 2010)
^ A/DEC/33/426, UNBISnet (Retrieved May 4, 2010)
^ UN (December 18, 1978). “Recommendation to Establish UN Agency for UFO Research – UN General Assembly decision 33/426”. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “the General Assembly invites interested Member States to take appropriate steps to coordinate on a national level scientific research and investigation into extraterrestrial life, including unidentified flying objects, and to inform the Secretary-General of the observations, research and evaluation of such activities.”
^ Teodorani, Massimo (2004). “A Long-Term Scientific Survey of the Hessdalen Phenomenon”. Journal of Scientific Exploration 18 (12): 222–224.
^ Erling Strand. “Project Hessdalen 1984 – Final Technical Report”. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “Beside the light measurements, it can be “measured” by radar and laser. Perhaps the measurements we did on the magnetograph and spectrum analyser are due to this phenomenon as well. We have to do more measurements with these instruments, before we can be sure of that.”
^ Erling Strand. “Project Hessdalen 1984 – Final Technical Report”. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “We have not found out what this phenomenon is. That could hardly be expected either. But we know that the phenomenon, whatever it is, can be measured.”
^ Teodorani, Massimo (2004). “A Long-Term Scientific Survey of the Hessdalen Phenomenon”. Journal of Scientific Exploration 18 (12): 217–251. “A self-consistent definitive theory of the phenomenon’s nature and origin in all its aspects cannot be constructed yet quantitatively”
^ Massimo Teodorani, Gloria Nobili (2002). “EMBLA 2002 – An Optical and Ground Survey in Hessdalen” (PDF). pp. 16. Retrieved May 4, 2010. “Whatever these things are, if some “alien intelligence” is behind the Hessdalen phenomenon, that hypothetical intelligence has shown no interest in searching a direct, continuative and structurally evolved communication with mankind and went on behaving in such a way that the light-phenomenon itself appears to be totally elusive.”
^ Wired (2006-05-10). “It’s Official: UFOs Are Just UAPs”. Retrieved May 4, 2010.
^ Ministry of Defense (December 2000). “Unidentified Aerial Phenomena in the UK Air Defence Region: Executive Summary” (PDF). pp. 4. Retrieved May 5, 2010. “„That UAP exist is indisputable …[they] clearly can exhibit aerodynamic characteristics well beyond those of any known aircraft or missile – either manned or unmanned.“”
^ Telegraph (September 20, 2009). “Britain’s X Files: RAF suspected aliens of “tourist” visits to Earth”. The Daily Telegraph (London). Retrieved May 4, 2010.
^ Ministry of Defense (December 2000). “Unidentified Aerial Phenomena in the UK Air Defence Region: Executive Summary” (PDF). pp. 10. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ Ministry of Defense (December 2000). “Unidentified Aerial Phenomena in the UK Air Defence Region: Executive Summary” (PDF). pp. 11. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ David F. Salisbury (July 1, 1998). “No evidence of ET: Panel calls for more scientific UFO research”. Stanford Online Report. Retrieved May 5, 2010. “”The upshot of this was that, far from supporting Condon’s conclusions, I thought the evidence presented in the report suggested that something was going on that needed study.””
^ Salisbury (1998)
^ Sturrock, Peter A. (1998). “Physical Evidence Related to UFO Reports: The Proceedings of a Workshop Held at the Pocantico Conference Center, Tarrytown, New York, September 29 – October 4, 1997”. Journal of Scientific Exploration 12 (2): 179–229.
^ Sturrock et al (1998) pp. 180: “…but there was no convincing evidence pointing to unknown physical processes or to the involvement of extraterrestrial intelligence.”, “…it would be valuable to carefully evaluate UFO reports since, whenever there are unexplained observations…”
^ Sturrock et al (1998) pp. 180: “…it would be valuable to carefully evaluate UFO reports since, whenever there are unexplained observations, there is the possibility that scientists will learn something new by studying these observations.”
^ COMETA Report, part 1 (July 1999). “UFOs and Defense: What Should We Prepare For?” (PDF). ufoevidence.org. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ COMETA Report, part 2 (July 1999). “UFOs and Defense: What Should We Prepare For?” (PDF). ufoevidence.org. pp. 38. Retrieved May 5, 2010. “[…] almost certain physical reality of completely unknown flying objects […], apparently operated by intelligent [beings].”, “A single hypothesis sufficiently takes into account the facts […] It is the hypothesis of extraterrestrial visitors.””
^ COMETA Report, part 2 (199) pp. 72
^ Maugé, Claude. Commentary on COMETA. Inforespace (No.100, June 2000, pp.78).
^ Katelynn Raymer (May 10, 2001). “Group Calls for Disclosure of UFO Info”. ABC News. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ Rob Watson (May 10, 2001). “UFO spotters slam ‘US cover-up'”. BBC News. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ Watson (2001)
^ Sharon Kehnemui (May 10, 2001). “Men in Suits See Aliens as Part of Solution, Not Problem”. Fox News. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ Bonnie Malkin (November 14, 2007). “Pilots call for new UFO investigation”. London: Telegraph. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ “I touched a UFO: ex-air force pilot”. The Sydney Morning Herald. November 13, 2007. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ a b Denzler (2003): pp. 4
^ B.D. Gildenberg. “A Roswell Requiem”. Skeptic 10-1 (2003).
^ Hodapp & Von Kannon (2008): pp. 119-120
^ Hodapp & Von Kannon (2008): pp.121-122
^ James McAndrews (1997). “The Roswell Report: Case Closed”. Headquarters United States Air Force. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ a b c Denzler (2003): pp. 11
^ Rutledge, Jack (July 22, 1952). “Air Force Spots ‘Flying Saucers’ In Its Own Back Yard”. Tri City Herald.
^ a b Boyd, Ronald (May 8, 1982). “A close encounter with a UFO believer”. St. Petersburg Times.
^ Rowland, Michael (November 13, 2007). “Ex-pilots, military officers call for new UFO probe”. ABC News (Australia). “Retired Iranian Air Force general, Parviz Jafari, says he attempted to shoot down a strange object hovering over Tehran in 1976.”
^ “F-4 Jet Chase over Iran 1976”. ufoevidence.org. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ Klass, Philip J. (1983). UFOs: the public deceived. Prometheus Books. ISBN 0-87975-322-6.
^ Rutkowski, Chris A. (2008). A World of UFO. Dundurn Press. pp. 35. ISBN 1-55002-833-2.
^ Rutkowski (2008): pp. 27-31
^ Rutkowski (2008): pp. 28
^ Rutkowski (2008): pp. 30
^ a b Rutkowski (2008): pp. 31
^ Brian Dunning (January 6, 2009). “The Rendlesham Forest UFO”. Skeptoid. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ Rutkowski (2008): pp. 68
^ a b c d e Rutkowski (2008): pp. 70
^ Renaud Leclet et al.. “The Belgian UFO Wave of 1989-1992 – A Neglected Hypothesis” (pdf). Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ Richard Price (June 18, 1997). “Arizona say the truth about UFO is out there” (PDF). USA Today. Retrieved May 6, 2010.
^ Rutkowski (2008): pp. 40
^ Brian Dunning (April 26, 2007). “The Alien Invasion of Phoenix, Arizona”. Skeptoid. Retrieved May 5, 2010.
^ a b c d e f g h i Markovsky (2002) pp. 270
^ a b “About BUFORA”. BUFORA. Retrieved May 6, 2010.
^ “About UFOBUA”. Aliens the Truth. Retrieved December 12, 2009.
^ a b “The History of VUFORS”. VUFORS. Retrieved May 6, 2010.
^ “Australian Centre for UFO Studies”. ACUFOS. Retrieved May 6, 2010.
^ “Australian UFO Research Network”. AUFORN. Retrieved May 6, 2010.
^ “UFO Research Queenslandk”. FORQ. Retrieved May 6, 2010.
^ Sheaffer, Robert (February 2009). “UFOlogy 2009: A Six-Decade Perspective”. Skeptical Inquirer. Retrieved May 6, 2010.
^ “About CSI”. CSI. Retrieved May 6, 2010.
^ “Skeptics Society & Skeptic Magazine”. Skeptics Society. Retrieved May 6, 2010.
Further reading
Ufology Books Collection
Academic books about ufology as a sociological and historical phenomenon
Denzler, Brenda (2003). The lure of the edge: scientific passions, religious beliefs, and the pursuit of UFOs. University of California Press. ISBN 0-520-23905-9.
Pro-ufology
Hynek, J. Allen (1998). The UFO experience: a scientific enquiry. Da Capo Press. ISBN 1-56924-782-X.
Vallée, Jacques F. (1991). Confrontations: A Scientist’s Search for Alien Contact. Random House Value Publishing. ISBN 0-517-07204-1.
Skeptical opinions
Klass, Philip J. (1983). UFOs: the public deceived. Prometheus Books. ISBN 0-87975-322-6.
Sheaffer, Robert (1986). The UFO verdict: examining the evidence. Prometheus Books. ISBN 0-87975-338-2.
Ufology studies
Gillmor, Daniel S., Condon, Edward U. (1970). Scientific Study of Unidentified Flying Objects. Vision. ISBN 0-85478-142-0.
Rutledge, Harley D. (1981). Project Identification: the first scientific field study of UFO phenomena. Prentice-Hall. ISBN 0-13-730705-5.
Brian Greene (2005). The Fabric of the Cosmos. Penguin Books Ltd. ISBN 0-14-101111-4.
Alan Guth (1997). The Inflationary Universe: The Quest for a New Theory of Cosmic Origins. Random House. ISBN 0-224-04448-6.
Hawking, Stephen W. (1988). A Brief History of Time: From the Big Bang to Black Holes. Bantam Books, Inc. ISBN 0-553-38016-8.
Hawking, Stephen W. (2001). The Universe in a Nutshell. Bantam Books, Inc. ISBN 0-553-80202-X.
Simon Singh (2005). Big Bang: the origins of the universe. Fourth Estate. ISBN 0-00-716221-9.
Steven Weinberg (1993; 1978). The First Three Minutes. Basic Books. ISBN 0-465-02437-8
Mahapurana (Jainism)
Mahapurana is a major Jain text composed largely by Acharya Jinasena during the rule of Rashtrakuta ruler Amoghavarshaand completed by his pupil Gunabhadra in the 9th century CE. The section composed by Gunabhadra is called “Uttarapurana”. The completed and edited text was released by Lokasena, pupil of Gunabhadra in a celebration at Bankapura in the court of Vira-Bankeyarasa in 898 CE. The first 42 Parvans of this text were written by Jinasena, while remaining 34 Parvans were composed by Gunabhara.

External link Key Words TJ Morris ACO shares

Ufology News
Center for UFO Studies
Mutual UFO Network
Groupe d’Études et d’Informations sur les Phénomènes Aérospatiaux Non-identifiés
British UFO Research Association
Committee for Skeptical Inquiry UFO resources
Biography
TJ THURMOND MORRIS
AUTHOR/SPEAKER
ACIR
ASSURED CONFIDENTIAL INVESTIGATIVE REPORTS
AMERICAN CULTURE INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS
ACO ~ ASCENSION CENTER ORGANIZATION
TJ MORRIS MKTG MEDIA MGMT
TJ MORRIS ET RADIO
AMERICANNEWSMAGAZINE.COM
TJMORRISENTERTAINMENT.ORG
ANEWNEWS.COM
SOCIALPARANORMAL.COM
TJ MORRIS ACO
ASCENSION CENTER ORGANIZATION
TJMORRIS TM ACIR SM
TJMORRISPUBLISHING.COM
TIMELY MANOR BOOKS.COM
ETSPIRIT.WEBS.COM
SOCIALPARANORMAL.COM
TJ – PSYCHIC – MEDIUM-ORACLE -INVESTIGATOR-PARAPSYCHOLOGIST
FOUNDER PSYCHIC NETWORK HI-CA -1990- FOUNDER ASCENSION CENTER-SOCIALPARANORMAL.COM MAGAZINE, AMERICANNEWSMAGAZINE.COM, ANEWNEWS.COM, NOW WORKS WITH FATEMAG.COM AND OTHER SOCIAL PARANORMAL PUBLICATIONS TO SHARE IN THE ACE FOLKLIFE CLUB AND ACO FOR THE FUTURE OF 2012 & BEYOND.
TJ MORRIS ET IS THE RADIO SHOW AS HTTP://BLOGTALKRADIO.COM/TJMORRISETRADIO
TJ IS THE INITIALS FOR THERESA JANETTE THURMOND MORRIS WHO SHARES MANY SOCIAL ENTREPRENEURIAL SKILLS WITH OTHERS IN HER CREATED SOCIAL NETWORKS AS AN AMBASSADOR OF GOODWILL IN THE USA.
TJ IS AN AMBASSADOR OF GOODWILL AMONG THOSE IN THE ASCENSION AGE MOVEMENT IN THE WORLD. Share ACO membership.
ACO is an acronym for Ascension Center Organization. We plan on becoming in the future a not for profit 501 C # association of churches in relation to the alien civilizations exist belief system and faith in that of Christ Consciousness and we practice the golden rule. Do unto others as you would have others do unto you. We do not discriminate against anyone based on the rule that we understand we are all one species having the same body-mind-spirit experiences in the birth-life-death process of life which we understand to be the normal in this universe, in every human being. We encourage others to share in science and religion of the Ascension Center Organization.
We reason by analogy and phenomenon and empirical evidence in our agreement to have both science and spirit involved in our evolvement and involvement as one entire humanoid species on this planet.
We share that we are all one humanoid sentient intelligent being species which practices more education in spiritual, artistic awakened awareness.
FRIENDS WORK IN EPISTIMOLOGY CREATING THE FUTURE SOLUTIONS FOR THE SUSTAINABILITY OF BODY-MIND-SPIRIT HUMANOIDS SHARING THE BIRTH-LIFE-DEATH EXPERIENCES
TOGETHER IN WHAT IS TERMED THE GOLDEN AGE OF COSMOLOGY IN THE ASCENSION AGE TO OFFICIALLY BEGIN AS 12-21-12 11:11 UNIVERSAL TIME. TJ IS A BORN LEADER BORN 12-26-51 AT 12:00 NOON OR 3 MIN PAST AS A CAPRICORN, AQUARIUS RISING WITH AN OUTGOING PERSONALITY WITH LOVE FOR ALL. PRIOR LIFE MEMORIES AND HAVING OUT OF BODY AND NEAR DEATH EXPERIENCES HAS OPENED TJ UP TO THE WAY OF THINKING THAT LIFE IS ETERNAL. TJ BELIEVES LIFE IS ETERNAL AND SPIRIT RETURNS BACK TO THE ORIGINAL CREATION AS A SOUL TO THAT WHICH SHE SHARES AS THE CREATORS WHO HAVE ALWAYS BEEN. TJ SHARES SEVEN LEVELS OF EXISTENCE AS HER EXPERIENCE IN THE UNIVERSE, MULTIVERSE, METAVERSE, XENOVERSE, OMNIVERSE, ALPHAVERSE, AND OMEGAVERSE WITH 12 DIMENSIONS PLUS HER OWN POINT OF ORIGIN AS 13.
ONTOLOGIST, GRADUATE OF SECONDARY PROFESSIONAL COURSES IN THE PARA-PSYCHOLOGY CLASSES, GROUPS, SEMINARS, WAS A CO-PRODUCER AND PSYCHIC LECTURER AT THE ECO-EXPO IN 1993 IN LA, CA AND AGAIN IN WHOLE LIFE EXPOS IN LA, AND SAN FRANCISCO. WHOLE LIFE EXPO, NEW YORK NY 1993. THERESA HAS A BACKGROUND IN INVESTIGATIONS, PRIVATE, LEGAL, AND PROFESSIONAL BUSINESS AND PUBLIC SECURITY 1980-1994 IN INVESTIGATIONS AND WORKED IN GOVERNMENT SERVICE OBTAINING AN HONORABLE DISCHARGE 1993.
OWN BUSINESS IN BIRMINGHAM, AL (AL 1980) ASSURED CONFIDENTIAL INVESTIGATIVE REPORTS (ACIR). THERESA HAS PUBLISHED MANY WEBSITES AND ARTICLES THAT HAVE BEEN PUBLISHED WORLDWIDE ON OTHER WEBSITES FOR SYNDICATION. THERESA HAS BEEN ON TELEVISION AND RADIO SHOWS THROUGHOUT HER LIFETIME. THERESA SEES HERSELF AS A JOURNALIST, HISTORIAN, RESEARCHER AND REGISTERS AS A WRITER WITH THE GOVERNMENT. ANTHROPOLOGY AND FOLKLIFE ARE THE PRESENT FIELDS OF STUDY ACADEMICALLY ALTHOUGH THERESA’S MAJOR IS CRIMINAL JUSTICE AND PSYCHOLOGY. DEALING IN THE PARAPSCHOLOGY FIELD OF ADVANCEMENT
OF SCIENCE AS (AAAS) SINCE 1969.THE PARAPSYCHOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION IS AN INTERNATIONAL PROFESSIONAL ORGANIZATION OF SCIENTISTS AND SCHOLARS ENGAGED IN THE STUDY OF PSI (OR ‘PSYCHIC’) EXPERIENCES, SUCH AS TELEPATHY, CLAIRVOYANCE, PSYCHOKINESIS, PSYCHIC HEALING, AND PRECOGNITION. THE PRIMARY OBJECTIVE OF THE PA IS TO ACHIEVE A SCIENTIFIC UNDERSTANDING OF THESE EXPERIENCES.
FIRST ESTABLISHED IN 1957, THE PA HAS BEEN AN AFFILIATED ORGANIZATION OF THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE (AAAS) SINCE 1969. THE PA IS A NON-PROFIT, NON-ADJUDICATING ORGANIZATION THAT ENDORSES NO IDEOLOGIES OR BELIEFS OTHER THAN THE VALUE OF RIGOROUS SCIENTIFIC AND SCHOLARLY INQUIRY.

Thank you for sharing your valued time on earth with me TJ Morris and my association as ACO. I shall value your membership in our ACO Social Service Club if you choose to join and support our efforts and cause as Ascension Center Organization with emphasis on Alien Contactee Organizers of our ACO Social Service Club available globally to the entire world population. We expect to invite others with similar interests in our group as an association and peer group journal of the Social Paranormal Magazine.
Ascension Center and ACE Folklife Logos and photo of founder of both as TJ also known as Theresa Janette.

THE TRI-STATE AREA –ACO
ALIEN CONTACT INVESTIGATIVE REPORTS
CONTENTS ACIR ~ ACE FOLKLIFE
TJ MORRIS ACO
ACE FOLKLIFE
Author & Books
Ghosts & Hauntings
Myths & Legends
Religion&Spirituality
Supernatural&Mystical
UFOLOGY & Ancient Alien Research
– Book Reviews – ‘The Day After Roswell’
Ascension Center Organization on Alien Contact Investigations Research (ACIR)
Assured Confidential Investigative Reports ~ White Papers ~ Declassified
– Colonel Philip Corso and his Critics – Parts 1 and 2
– Colonel Philip J. Corso
– La Nueva Medicina Puede Ser Retro-Ingeniada
– Roswell – Colonel Philip Corso Interview – CNI News
– Testimony of Colonel Phillip J. Corso, Sr. – US Army (ret.) – from “Disclosure Project – Briefing Document”
– The New Medicine Can Be Back-Engineered!
– 60th Anniversary of the Roswell Crash – Exopolitical Significance of the Walter Haut Affidavit
– ACC (American Computer Company) and the Roswell 1947 Story – Reverse Engineering
– A Different View of “Roswell – Anatomy of a Myth” – by Michael D. Swords
– ‘Aliens Exist’ – Say Real-Life X-Files
– An Occult Translation of the Roswell Event – Count Down to 2012
– China Central Television Covers Disclosure of UFO Official Documents
– Did Howard Hughes View a Captured UFO and its Occupants?
– Earl Fulford Speaks Out! – The Roswell Incident
– El Panorama Más Grande – Una Hipótesis
– Engaging Higher Intelligence Agencies in a Post-Roswell Civilization – Expression, Repression and Mediation
– Geo-political Considerations on The Roswell Cover-Up and The Emerging Field of Exopolitics
– Glimpses of Disclosure
– Philip Corso and Paul Hellyer – Initiating Public Debate Over the Weaponization of Space &…
– Results of a Search for Records Concerning the 1947 Crash Near Roswell, NM – Government Records
– Roswell Revisited or Shades of The X-Files!
– The Big Picture – A Hypothesis
– The Covert World of UFO Crash Retrievals – An Overview of Personnel Management in Majestic-12 Group Projects
– The Official Unofficial Phil Corso Homepage – from The Blue Brethren
– The Railroads And Aliens
– The Roswell Case – from “The Rockefeller UFO Report”
– The Roswell Incident – Report Air Force Research Regarding The “Roswell Incident”
– The Roswell Report – Case Closed – July 1994
– Using Space Weapons Against Extraterrestrial Civilizations
– Von Braun Was At Roswell
– World Peace and Dawn of a New Age: Part 1, Part 2, Part 3
Books-Treaties
– Alien Interview – Personal Notes and Interview Transcriptions Provided by Matilda O’Donnell MacElroy – by Lawrence R. Spencer
– The Day After Roswell – by Philip Corso
Multimedia & Related Reports
– Alien Autopsy – Roswell UFO Crash – Original Footage
– Alien Reproduction Vehicles
– UFO Area 51 – The Alien Interview
– Clifford Stone – And Alien Races – Main File
– Project SERPO – Main File
– UFOs Are Real – Extraterrestrial Encounters Documented by the U.S. Government
– Vida en Nuestra Galaxia – Main File
Memo to George Marshall from FDR, 27 February 1942 (49k)
George C. Marshall to Franklin D. Roosevelt, 5 March 1942 (89k)
Franklin D. Roosevelt Memo on Non-Terrestrial Science and Technology, 22 February 1944 (117k)
On February 22, 1944 Franklin D. Roosevelt writes a DOUBLE TOP SECRET memo on White House stationary for “The special committee on non-terrestrial science and technology.” Both the title and the content clearly allude to extraterrestrial life, the former using the word “non-terrestrial” and the latter talks about “coming to grips with the reality that our planet is not the only one harboring intelligent life the universe.” Remarkably, the last four words are exactly the title of Sagan’s book co-authored with the Soviet scientist Shklovsky. Clearly the situation was that we had recovered at least one craft by then, probably the Cape Girardeau crash of 1941, and came to realize the wealth of technology that lay there for the pickings. Apparently the “Special Committee on Non-terrestrial Science and Technology” had been working some time in order to define a clear action. Dr. Bush had presumably presented a proposal from the Committee for an aggressive separate program to apply “non-terrestrial know how” to the war effort, but FDR thought that it would threaten the atomic bomb program. Thus, he carefully avoids saying “no,” but says that we will “take every advantage of such wonders that have come to us” after we have won the war. Very gracious letter. The classification “double top secret” was a legitimate one. We are currently (May 2000) requesting copies of similar correspondence from the Roosevelt Library for format and typography comparison. The signature, although not a strong discriminant, is consistent with other authentic signatures.
Oppenheimer-Einstein Draft, June 1947 (494k)
This six-page document titled, “Relationships with Inhabitants of Celestial Bodies”, is the first document to use the phrase Extraterrestrial Biological Entities, or EBEs. It says the presence of unidentified spacecraft is accepted as de facto by the military – and this is dated June 1947. It deals with the subjects that you would expect competent scientists to deal with – i.e., where do they come from, what does the law say about it, what should we do in the event of colonization and/or integration of peoples, and why are they here? The document suggests that in the event that EBE’s desire to settle here on earth there will be “profound change in traditional concepts” of law and the possible need for a new “Law Among Planetary Peoples.” There is also propositions concerning the necessary creation of a “Cosmic International law” that would protect the rights of all celestial states to lay claim on otherwise unclaimed solar territories. Finally, the document addresses the presence of celestial astroplanes in our atmosphere as a result of actions of military experiments with fission and fusion devices of warfare. The authors of this document encourage consideration of our potential future situation and safety due to our present and past actions in space. How can we avoid a perilous fate?
General Eisenhower Memo to Col. K. W. Ireland, 30 June 1947 (34k)
In this one-page unclassified memo dated 30 June 1947, Eisenhower orders Col. K. W. Ireland to take good care of Archbishop Francis J. Spellman on his tour through New Mexico. What seems unusual is President Truman’s personal involvement in this matter. The memo states: “By personal direction of the President of the United States, Archbishop Francis J. Spellman in his capacity as Military Vicar of the Armed Forces of the Army, Army Air Forces and the Navy, is making a tour of military bases in New Mexico, afterwards is making a trip over the routes of the Air Transport Command.” It is strange that this is a classified trip, as evidenced by the following statement: “General Webster has assured me that the Archbishop will have complete security at all times and that his presence at any air field will not be disclosed as his flight schedule is considered classified by order of AC/AS General Vandenberg.”
Interplanetary Phenomenon Unit Field Order, 4 July 1947 (43k)
This one page order directs the officer in charge (OIC) to take a counter intelligence team to the UFO crash site and report to the G2 (intelligence) at Condron Field, New Mexico, which, of course, is Roswell. OIC is to take along a non-commissioned OIC, an aeronautical engineer, a scientist, a security officer and a medical doctor, and to provide a report by the 28th of July.
Vannevar Bush Letter to President Truman, 5 July 1947 (206k)
On July 5, 1947, possibly as a result of the New Mexico events, Vannevar Bush writes a memo to Truman recapping the status of the earlier investigations. As an apparent follow up by FDR to Bush, FDR wrote another letter (which we don’t have) in April 1944 requesting recommendations on four specific points. This letter is Bush’s answer. It is presumed that the Top Secret/Eyes Only Operation Majestic-12 classification was added at a later date. The letter also shows an “OK” and a Harry Truman signature. This letter is stamped with the known authentic “original” stamp, and was probably produced by a typewriter because of the uniformity of letter spacing. We expect to show, of course, that this format was commonly used by OSRD typewriters of the era. Bush restates the FDR questions for Truman’s benefit, mentions the assistance of distinguished committees, alludes to the “many meetings since the events of this summer,” transmits the full reports as appendices, and proposes a “single mechanism for implementing the recommendations of the several committees.” Could this be one hugely classified program called “Majestic Twelve” at the end of the summer?
The date of the letter, 5 July, was, of course, coincident with the recoveries going on in New Mexico at that very time. Harry Truman’s “OK” may have been prophetic.
Directive to General Twining by Eisenhower, 8 July 1947 (86k)
On the 8th of July, Eisenhower got around to signing the authorization for General Nathan Twining, the head of the Air Materiel Command, to go to White Sands to “…make an appraisal of the reported unidentified objects being kept there.” With a team of experts, technicians, scientists and assistants, Twining was directed to not only appraise the unidentified object, but also to deal with the military, political, and psychological situation surrounding its existence in New Mexico.
Directive to General Twining by President Truman, 9 July 1947 (324k)
On the 9th of July, Harry Truman signed a virtually identical letter authorizing Twining to re-visit White Sands to make another appraisal of the object being kept. It was desired that he “proceed with detachment from any opinions or feelings expressed by personnel involved which do not conform to sound reasoning with regard to possible outcome”. Someone apparently thought it was so important that the Commander-in-Chief put his name on the spot without “passing the buck.” Alternatively, Ike himself may have requested a “back-up” memo.
Air Accident Report by Twining to Headquarters, 16 July 1947 (570k)
This three page bureaucratic report provides the first glimpses of Lt. General Nathan F. Twinning’s Air Accident Report originally published in Leonard Stringfield’s (now deceased) Status Report VII, in 1994.
Twining apparently describes in first order detail the inside of a “flying disc”, everything from the typewriter-like keys that control the propulsion system to a thirty-five foot doughnut shaped one-inch tube inside the craft filled with a clear substance and a coil of copper-like material. Twining, engineers from Engineering Division T-3, scientific personnel from the Jet Propulsion Laboratory, and other educated experts report that the object was not manufactured by the US, Germany, or Russia for a variety of reasons including; lack of any known design resemblance, lack of external propulsion system and power plant, and the lack of Identifying markings and/or numbers. The experts theorized about how the craft is powered, how it moves, and how and where it is controlled from, but there is no real knowledge beyond the theories.
The inability for the experts to prove the object to be made in any of the advanced technological societies on earth is intriguing and thought provoking.
The significance and consistency of the technical content has not been evaluated, although it is clear that the writing is consistent with 1947 state of the art, not modern.
Metallurgical Lab Personnel (49k)
Interesting list of metallurgical lab personnel as of July 17, 1947, that may have been unwittingly involved in analyzing and reverse engineering crashed wreckage.
Lt. Gen. Nathan Twining to Curtis LeMay: Meteorological R & D Memo, 18 July 1947 (403k)
This two page memo from Lt General Nathan Twining to Curtis LeMay activates a new laboratory to conduct meteorological research and development and upper air research with the Electronics Subdivision of the Engineering Division of the AMC. It states in part, “In view of the close relationship and interdependence of research in meteorology and research in electromagnetic compressional wave propagation, action is being taken to reorganize the present Applied Propagation Laboratory of Watson laboratories in the Atmospheric Laboratory, and expand its functions to include research and development in meteorology and related geophysical fields.” Later the memo goes on to state that “funds requested for F.Y. 1949 Project 680-11, Atmospheric Research and applied scientific research of the upper atmosphere, a total sum of $6,000,000 has been specified…” What a huge sum of money in 1949 to study the “upper atmosphere;” a more logical interpretation is that we are analyzing flying saucers, their technology, why they are here, and what are we going to do about it.
Counter Intelligence Corps/Interplanetary Phenomenon Unit Report, 22 July 1947 (415k)
This seven page document by the Interplanetary Phenomenon Unit begins by saying “…the extraordinary recovery of fallen airborne objects in the State of New Mexico between 4 July and 6 July 1947.” That’s the subject, and it goes on to state what the coordinates are, and other fascinating details of the recovery operations and discoveries. The most interesting being the discovery and basic detailed appearance of several bodies that were taken to the hospital at Roswell AAF and other nearby hospitals (listed, but not disclosed for security reasons). The conclusion arrived at by the team of experts was unclear because of the limitations of contemporary science and appropriate budgets for future investigation, but leans to the possibility of a very well-orchestrated Hoax by US societal outsiders or that “our country has played host to beings from another planet.”
CWO Marcrau Memo to Commanding General Army Air Forces, 12 August 1947 (80k)
This one page memo discusses the control of Restricted Data, which was used for both atomic activities and alien activities stemming from the New Mexico events. Cantwheel, the alleged source of much of these new documents, typed on the bottom of the document, “SAC wanted to keep certain AAF personnel from accessing the out-going messages from Roswell AAF to SAC headquarters that would identify AAF personnel responsible for the transport of classified material to Wright Field, and the personnel who were responsible for disposition of the wreckage and bodies found near Socorro and Corona, New Mexico.”
Flying Saucer Analytical Report, 2 September 1947 (90k)
This two-page Top Secret MAJIC Eyes Only report to General C. P. Cabell and commanding General of the Air Materiel Command from the Research and Development Laboratory is dated 2 September 1947. It provides a credible glimpse into the problems that faced the first analytical team to examine real crashed extraterrestrial hardware. Here are some quotes: “some nation has reached a stage of flight development in which the present ideas are entirely obsolete” and “the absence of riveting and surface over-lapping indicates a “‘simplistic’ concept that confronts our technology to match the “‘careful and well-considered compromises in respect to weight, aerodynamic refinement and design.'” A general description of the flying saucer craft is presented including a host of historically accurate AISI metallurgical tests. The research team did have success in identifying some control surfaces and exhaust ports and concluded the spherical reactor (hydrogen isotope type) was connected to propulsion motors.
Hillenkoetter Memo to Joint Intelligence Committee, 19 September 1947 (324k)
The title of this document is “Memorandum for the Military Assessment of the Joint Intelligence Committee.” And for those of you paying special attention, you’ll notice that the acronym is MAJIC, which in fact turned out to be the code word selected. The four paragraphs say we need a classified intelligence project; we recovered one craft, captured one. It says no coordinated scientific examination is possible until we get a clear directive from the president. It also says Wright Field has a new biological laboratory, the Joint Research and Development Board and the FBI, MI5, MI6 are helping.
Twining’s “White Hot” Report: Mission Assessment of Recovered Lenticular Aerodyne Objects, 19 September 1947 (1.3 MB*)
*please note this file may take up to 20 min. to download on a slow connection
“No one, without express permission from the President, may disseminate the information contained in this report or communicate it to any unauthorized person not possessing MAJIC SECURITY CLEARANCE.” The White Hot report is a 19-page document, dated 19 September 1947 and signed by an appropriate cadre of military leaders on 24 September 1947.
Several accounts of individual pilots were reported in 1947 with varying details that make each encounter a unique piece in a puzzle of phenomenon. In this particular year, sightings were reported “not only in the United States, but also in Sweden, Germany, Holland, Paraguay, Scandinavia, Greece, and by ships at sea.” Studied by classified teams of experts, many interesting and provocative details were recorded in this report of unidentifiable crash remains.
The document is broken down into various sections that address concerns specifically: Preliminary Intelligence Estimate, Technical Evaluation, Scientific Probabilities, Political Considerations, and National Security Structure. In the preliminary estimate, experts of the AMC and ONR speculate that “the unidentified lenticular-shaped aerodyne…lacking conventional wing, fuselage, nacelle, control, and fuel systems” is not only foreign to United States technology, but is also unlikely to be of Russian origin, or for that matter, unlikely to have been designed to operate within the earth’s atmosphere. Several bodies were discovered along with the material of the crash, their existence and death just as mysterious as the cause of the crash itself. More interesting than these basic facts is the evidence that suggests “a symbionic relationship between operator and the functions of the aerodyne’s operation.”
This particular leaked governmental document has a plethora of factual information linked to the retrieval and appraisal of the evidence collected from the recovered exhibits that “AMC, ASP, NEAP, ACE, ONR, NACKA, JED, RAND, USAF, SAG, and MIT, are deemed extraterrestrial in nature.” The White Hot report not only covers the factual evidence of the retrieval, but also sheds light on a number of conceptual concerns surrounding politics, National Security, nuclear weaponry, and the reasons behind keeping knowledge of this nature out of the public’s grasp indefinitely. It concludes, for the wellbeing of the public, of course, and the protection of national security, that “the US must be perceived as being the top of the heap, and every effort must be made to insure that there is, and never has been, a threat to the country.”
Malcolm Grow to Lt. Gen. Twining – Aero Medical Laboratory, 20 September 1947 (86k)
Brig. Gen. Malcolm C. Grow writes a two page memo for General Twining describing the preliminary results of the post-mortem examination of the Air Accident Report filed 17 July 1947 (see above). Note the wide-ranging distribution list from people like Dr. Detlev Bronk and Dr. Randolph Lovelace to the AAF Scientific Advisory Group and Intelligence Departments. This perfunctory preliminary report is clear in its references to a UFO: “Collision in full flight with object other than conventional aircraft,” “Artifacts collected and assembled indicate that the unidentified aircraft€¦,” “The functions of the instruments found in the cockpit area are unknown at present; so there is no way to determine if the craft was manned or remotely controlled.”
Lt. Col. Tucker Memo to Office of Air Surgeon, 22 September 1947 (120k)
A bureaucratic memo with excellent checkable references discusses an Analysis of Factors Contributing to “Pilot-Error” Experiences in Operating Experimental Aircraft Controls written by Lt. Col. Tucker. Tucker and his correct period phone extension, memo format, and writing style have been verified in the National Archives. Tucker was part of the Aero Medical Laboratory, Psychological Branch. It discusses two incidents on 25 March and 4 July 1947 about S-Aircraft (PF) and interactions with symbolic instrumentation with tactile manipulation of flight controls.
Secretary of State Marshall, Memo to the President, 24 September 1947 (55k)
Marshall writes a memo to the President concerning the “Presentation of Report to the President Re; ULAT” dated September 24, 1947 that expresses concern about the timing of the internal release of this report. “It would be better to discuss the report during the meeting (National Security Council). This would give the members a better picture of the situation rather than having it released piecemeal.” Marshall goes on to say, “I further suggest that Twining present the findings of the Majestic-12 briefing to be given be the Director of Central Intelligence with a detailed showing of visual as well as written materials.” File references, format, and signatures suggest authenticity.
President Truman to Secretary of Defense James Forrestal, 24 September 1947 (35k)
So, five days later, President Truman, in that busy week of the 24th of September, 1947, decided that he would sign this document, which says, “Hereafter this matter shall be referred to only as Operation Majestic Twelve.” Unfortunately, researcher Stanton Friedman found another memo, with a nearly identical signature in this same week signed by Truman to Dr. Bush. How can that be? See the Authentication section for a possible answer.
Memo to General Spaatz, 25 September 1947 (with Cantwheel comments; retyped copy) (39k)
This one page unclassified memo dated 25 September 1947 is directed to General Spaatz. It voices concern about the quality of the briefing given that day and wants the presentation package improved for the National Security Council (NSC) meeting the following day. Cartwheel’s comments typed in capital letters at the bottom sum up the sentiment, “The Secretary of Defense was unhappy with briefing of the AMC and R&D briefing officers and Symington wanted Bush and Twining to meet with Truman before NSC meeting on the 26th so that a more concise and explainable report of the discovery would be made.”
Secretary of State Marshall to President Truman, 25 September 1947 (116k)
This memo was signed top secret, MAJIC eyes only. It says “cryptographic (misspelled in original) security does not apply,” thereby revealing that this subject would normally be encrypted, but to expedite it they did not. The memo says that no indication of its contents is to be divulged to the public, referring to Twinning’s White Hot report discussed earlier. So this is Marshall telling Humelsine, the secretary to President Truman, to make sure that Truman realizes that he’s not going to let anything out to the public, and even suggests a “cover story.” The similarity of the handwriting to that in other documents poses an authentication challenge.
Twining’s Report to the President, Parts I-V, 26 September 1947 (70k)
General Nathan Twining writes to the President on 26 September 1947 and respectfully submits his report on Flying Saucers. This is “In accordance with your instructions, advisors from State, Treasury, War, and Navy departments assisted me in a two month exploratory mission concerning the reality of other-world visitation.” The memo is impressive for its authentic looking pentagon Joint Chiefs of Staff and Combined Chiefs of Staff filing references along with clear older sized paper markings.
Secretary of State George C. Marshall to Carl Humelsine, 27 September 1947 (154k)
On 27 September 1947 George C. Marshall writes to his Executive secretary Carl Humelsine about the tragic consequences if the present rumors about New Mexico events are disclosed to the public. Humelsine is resistant to sign an agreement to remain quiet concerning these events because he has already heard about them through other sources. The memo states in part, “… (a) you are unwilling to commit yourself to any agreement regarding not communicating its contents to any other person in view of the fact that you felt you already knew certain of the things probably referred to in the memo, as suggested to you by seeing the security reference ‘MAJIC’ and b) you could not feel that such a letter as this could have been addressed to you without the knowledge of the President€¦.” This ozalid (early carbon duplication) printing process memo is authentic for the era and would be difficult to fake.
“Unidentified Aircraft Sightings Over the United States,” Top Secret Eyes Only Intelligence Estimate, 30 September 1947 (844k)
This presidential briefing document is an intelligence estimate dated September 30, 1947 titled “Unidentified Aircraft Sighting over the United States.” Prepared by the Special Studies and Evaluation State-War-Navy Coordinating Committee and the Office of National Estimates Central Intelligence Agency. It references both a TS Control No. 7300405, NSA authority and a NSCID (National Security Council Intelligence Directive) 6 Authority, NIA Directive.
The six page Top Secret Eyes Only covers essential elements of information, however, no discussion of wreckage, alien bodies etc., after all the briefing is about unidentified aircraft sightings. Main headings are: estimates of Soviet capabilities, domestic capabilities, estimate of the situation, estimates of interplanetary capabilities, and conclusions. The estimate of the situation and interplanetary capabilities make for very interesting reading.
The document is retyped and Source S-2 has handwritten at the bottom this is the best version available. It is allegedly annotated by Harry Truman “I want the Director of NSA to have this for future reference. October 24, 1952”
General Vandenberg to Chief of Staff, 17 December 1947 (14k)
This memo from Vandenberg to the Army Chief of Staff does not clearly relate to UFOs. However, it is clear that the decision process at White Sands and Alamogordo was in turmoil and that clarification was needed. Possibly as a result of the UFO wreckage being stored there and different access requests and priorities. The addition of a senior Army Ordnance Officer being permanently assigned to work with the joint committee for range coordination was the resolution to improve local decision making. What could be so important that would involve top generals to clarify decision making? The leaked version (page 1), is nearly identical to a document we found at the National Archives, RG 341, Entry 174, Box 141 (page 2), showing the same language in Paragraph 1 but an additional clarifying paragraph has been added which states: “This agreement concerns only decisions on joint range problems and does not extend into command and administration matters at Alamogordo Air Base.” It is possible that either Vandenberg or the Army Chief of Staff upon seeing or reviewing the first memo might say “we need to clarify this so that no one misconstrues our intent and screws up the basic functions of Alamogordo Air Base.
The team’s mission is to clarify the UFO phenomenon, its agenda and history, and to implement the most effective way to educate the public and world governments to its reality and implications.
Our overall goals are to: Promote all those who are involved in the UFOlogy and Discovery of the Truth.
• Aggressively collect data and draw conclusions.
• Create an environment conducive to public disclosure of information withheld by all inside sources.
• Educate and present findings and conclusions to the public.
• Establish a dialogue with the broader community including religions, governments, and political parties.
• Improve the information exchange and effectiveness of Ufology and increase participation in the subject.
This website is dedicated to the Majestic documents and their related codewords such as MAJIC or MJ-12. The plan is to build a strong information base that focuses on the authenticity of these and new documents. Specifically, we plan to:
Share detailed supporting rationale for authenticity and strong linkage with known historical facts.
Expand the database of credible witnesses and hard proof to the UFO/ET phenomenon.
Potentially restate the history of the United States and the World, not ignoring the role of psychological warfare deceptions
Pay special attention to the technological implications of the documents and their potential �reverse engineering� clues to our modern science and benefiting corporations.
Offer intellectual products for sale to pay for the ongoing research team expenses.
Our hope is that over the next five years, the UFO community or other visionaries will succeed in bringing forth overwhelming proof of the UFO/ET reality with particular attention paid to recovered alien technology which will help solve planet Earth’s problems of pollution, energy, population, and intolerance, and point towards unlimited energy and economical interstellar travel.
Dr. Robert M. and Ryan S. Wood
Robert M. Wood, Ph.D.
With a Bachelor of Science in Aeronautical Engineering from Colorado and a Ph.D. in physics from Cornell, a 43-year career at McDonnell Douglas managing research and development projects and over thirty years of investigation into UFOs, Dr. Wood is uniquely qualified to provide credible analysis about the nature of the UFO reality. He began reconstructing the (MAJIC) Special Operations Manual in 1995.
Ryan S. Wood E-mail: rswood@majesticdocuments.com
With Bachelors of Science in Mathematics and Computer Science from Cal Poly, a 20-year interest in UFOs — especially documents — and excellent high tech business skills, Mr. Wood has an excellent record of entrepreneurship, marketing, and public relations. Met Stan Friedman in 1969. Archival research expertise today.
Nick Redfern
Nick Redfern was born in 1964 and is the author of three best-selling books on the UFO subject: (a) A Covert Agenda: The British Government’s UFO Top Secrets Exposed (Simon & Schuster, 1997); (b) The FBI Files: The FBI’s UFO Top Secrets Exposed (Simon & Schuster, 1998) and (c) Cosmic Crashes: The Incredible Story Of The UFOs That Fell To Earth (Simon & Schuster, 1999). His books were serialized in the British Sunday newspaper, The People.
Stanton T. Friedman
Stanton Friedman received his Masters degree in Physics from the University of Chicago, and has the distinction of being the longest full-time lecturer and researcher in ufology. He is an expert on the 1952 Eisenhower Briefing Document, the first civilian investigator of the Roswell Incident, has given over 700 lectures about UFOs in 15 countries, and been to 19 archives.
Timothy S. Cooper
As the unwitting focus of much of the investigation into the Majestic documents, Mr. Cooper quietly began his investigation into CIA and NSA UFO activities in 1988 through FOIA requests, he has received private investigator training and served his country during Vietnam in both the Navy and the Marine Corps. He currently works in security.
Jim Marrs
As a distinguished journalist and author of best selling books like Rule by Secrecy, Crossfire, and Alien Agenda, Mr. Marrs is gifted writer and sleuth for the truth. His forty year experience in investigative journalism is a powerful discriminate for fact vs. fiction. His website is www.jimmarrs.com.
Mr. Jim Clarkson
UFO researcher and State Section Director for the Seattle-area Mutual UFO Network, with a 20-year career as a detective in Washington State.
Mr. Clarkson and his wife have specialized in investigating the story of June Crain, a former Air Force secretary who, before she died, revealed UFO-related secrets she had typed or overheard during the course of her work at Wright-Patterson AFB. See the Witnesses section to read her story.
Contact Us
Majestic Documents
14004 Quail Ridge Dr.
Broomfield, CO 80020
Or call Ryan Wood at 720-887-8171 (8am–8pm Mountain Time Zone)
E-mail: rswood@majesticdocuments.com
Help expand the scope and quality of evidence that shows that UFOs are real, extraterrestrial, and the government has been hiding the truth from the world.
Submit Evidence — At the core of our ongoing success is building a bigger portfolio of witnesses and unique documentary evidence. If you have relevant documents or testimony and you believe that sharing this information is not in violation of the law, please forward the information to:
Majestic Documents
14004 Quail Ridge Dr.
Broomfield, CO 80020

Volunteer To Help With Research — Our goal at Majestic Documents.com is to provide an outstanding resource and dissemination vehicle for the investigation of UFO-related documents. If you are interested in military history, archival research, witness interviewing, and private investigation send an e-mail (rswood@majesticdocuments.com) explaining your background, areas of interest, and how you would like to help the effort.
Ongoing Research Projects and Desired Areas of Expertise:
Forensic linguistics and stylistics
Language and linguistic research
People with easy access to the presidential libraries, especially the Kennedy Library in Boston Massachusetts, Roosevelt Library, Truman Library in Independence Missouri, and Eisenhower Library.
Retired military personnel that knew any of the actual or alleged Majestic Personnel
Genealogy researchers, people willing to track down obituaries and their children
Current or former private investigators, detectives, FBI or Secret Service agents
Also, the following article is highly recommended:
A Guide to UFO Research by Michael D. Swords (Copyright 1993 Journal of Scientific Exploration)
Abstract – The very natural query of the interested intellectual: what should I read to understand the status of the UFO Phenomenon?, has no simple answer. This review article briefly examines the characteristics of the “UFO Problem” and relates those characteristics to the problem of ignorance in the academic community. An “inside look” at the appropriate library for the “working UFOlogist” is then explored. The list of personnel tabulated in this document is the result of significant research by our investigation team, which encompassed analyzing all the leaked Majestic documents and related documents from archives with a keen eye toward aggressively identifying the people involved with this immense cover-up. The techniques used to find the information were government document libraries, online searches, FBI file requests, National Personnel Military Records, and UFO literature reviews.

by Ron Patton
from ThinkAboutIt Website
Amidst the subtle cerebral circumvention of the gullible populace, through a multitude of manipulated mediums, lies one of the most diabolical atrocities perpetrated upon a segment of the human race; a form of systematic mind control which has permeated every aspect of society for almost fifty years.
To objectively ascertain the following, one may need to re-examine preconceived ideologies relating to the dualistic nature of mankind.
Resolving the philosophical question of whether we are inherently good or inherently evil is tantamount in shaping our perception of reality; specifically, the spiritual variable within the equation of life.
This exposition is substantiated by declassified U.S. government documents, individuals formerly connected to the U.S. intelligence communities, historical writings, researchers knowledgeable in mind control, publications from mental health practitioners, and interviews taken from survivors unwittingly subjected to a highly complex form of trauma-based mind control known as MONARCH programming.
A word of caution for survivors of intensively systematic mind control and/or some form of ritualized abuse: There are numerous “triggers” in this article.
It is therefore recommended not to read it unless appropriate support systems are in place or if you have a thoroughly reintegrated personality.

A Brief History of Control
The Mystery Religions of ancient Egypt, Greece, India and Babylon helped lay the foundation for occultism, meaning “hidden knowledge.”
One of the earliest writings giving reference to occultism is the Egyptian Book of the Dead, a compilation of rituals explicitly describing methods of torture and intimidation (to create trauma), the use of potions (drugs) and the casting of spells (hypnotism), ultimately resulting in the total enslavement of the initiate.
These have been the main ingredients for a part of occultism known as Satanism, throughout the ages.
During the 13th Century, the Roman Catholic church increased and solidified its dominion throughout Europe with the infamous Inquisition. Satanism survived this period of persecution, deeply entrenching itself under the veil of various esoteric groups.
In 1776, a Bavarian Jesuit by the name of Adam Weishaupt was commissioned by the House of Rothschild to centralize the power base of the Mystery Religions into what is commonly known as the Illuminati, meaning “Enlightened Ones.” This was an amalgamation of powerful occultic bloodlines, elite secret societies and influential Masonic fraternities, with the desire to construct the framework for a “New World Order.”
The outward goal of this Utopia was to bring forth universal happiness to the human race. However, their underlying intention was to gradually increase control over the masses, thus becoming masters of the planet.

The Anglo Alliance
By the 19th century, Great Britain and Germany were recognized as the primary geographic areas of Illuminati control.
It then should be of little surprise to know the first work in Behavioral Science research was established in England in 1882, while much of the early medical and psychiatric techniques involved in mind control were pioneered at the Kaiser Wilhelm Institute in Germany.
The Tavistock Institute of Human Relations was set up in London in 1921 to study the “breaking point” of humans. Kurt Lewin, a German psychologist, became the director of the Tavistock Institute in 1932, about the same time Nazi Germany was increasing its research into neuropsychology, parapsychology and multi-generational occultism.
Interestingly, a progressive exchange of scientific ideas was taking place between England and Germany, most notably in the field of eugenics: the movement devoted to “improving” the human species through the control of hereditary factors in mating. The nefariously enigmatic union between the two countries was bonded, partly through the Order of the Golden Dawn, a secret society which consisted of many high ranking officials in the Nazi party and British aristocracy.
Top SS Nazi officer Heinrich Himmler, was in charge of a scientific project called Lebersborn, which included selective breeding and adoption of children, a peculiarly large number of twins among them.
The purpose of the program was to create a super-race (Aryans) who would have total allegiance to the cause of the Third Reich (New World Order).
Much of the preliminary experimentation concerning genetic engineering and behavior modification was conducted by Dr. Josef Mengele at Auschwitz, where he coldly analyzed the effects of trauma-bonding, eye-coloring and “twinning” upon his victims. Besides the insidious surgical experimentation performed at the concentration camp, some of the children were subjected to massive amounts of electroshock.
Sadly, many of them did not survive the brutality.
Concurrently, “brain-washing” was carried out on inmates at Dachau, who were placed under hypnosis and given the hallucinogenic drug mescaline. During the war, parallel behavioral research was led by Dr. George Estabrooks of Colgate University. His involvement with the Army, CID, FBI and other agencies remains shrouded in secrecy. However, Estabrooks would occasionally “slip” and discuss his work involving the creation of hypno-programmed couriers and hypnotically-induced split personalities.
After WWII, the U.S. Department of Defense secretly imported many of the top German Nazi and Italian Fascist scientists and spies into the United States via South America and the Vatican. The code name for this operation was Project PAPERCLIP.[4] One of the more prominent finds for the U.S. was German General Reinhard Gehlen.
Hitler’s Chief of Intelligence against Russia. Upon arriving in Washington D.C. in 1945, Gehlen met extensively with President Truman, General William “Wild Bill” Donovan, Director of the Office of Strategic Services (OSS) and Allen Dulles, who would later become the stalwart head of the CIA. The objective of their brain-storming sessions was to reorganize the nominal American intelligence operation, transforming it into a highly-efficient covert organization. The culmination of their efforts produced the Central Intelligence Group in 1946, renamed the Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) in 1947.
Reinhard Gehlen also had profound influence in helping to create the National Security Council, from which the National Security Act of 1947 was derived.
This particular piece of legislation was implemented to protect an unconscionable number of illegal government activities, including clandestine mind control programs.

The Evolution of Project MKULTRA
With the CIA and National Security Council firmly established, the first in a series of covert brain-washing programs was initiated by the Navy in the fall of 1947.

Project CHATTER was developed in response to the Soviet’s “successes” through the use of “truth drugs.” This rationale, however was simply a cover story if the program were to be exposed. The research focused on the identification and testing of such drugs for use in interrogations and the recruitment of agents.
The project was officially terminated in 1953.

The CIA decided to expand their efforts in the area of behavior modification, with the advent of Project BLUEBIRD, approved by director Allen Dulles in 1950.
Its objectives were to:
(1) discover a means of conditioning personnel to prevent unauthorized extraction of information from them by known means
(2) investigate the possibility of control of an individual by application of special interrogation techniques
(3) investigate memory enhancement
(4) establish defensive means for preventing hostile control of agency personnel
In August 1951, Project BLUE BIRD was renamed Project ARTICHOKE, which evaluated offensive uses of interrogation techniques, including hypnosis and drugs.
The program ceased in 1956. Three years prior to the halt of Project ARTICHOKE, Project MK-ULTRA came into existence on April 13, 1953 along the lines proposed by Richard Helms, Deputy Director of Central Intelligence (DDCI) with the rationale of establishing a “special funding mechanism of extreme sensitivity.”
The hypothetical etymology of “MK” may possibly stand for “Mind Kontrolle.” The obvious translation of the German word “Kontrolle” into English is “control’.
A host of German doctors, procured from the post war Nazi talent pool, were an invaluable asset toward the development of MKULTRA. The correlation between the concentration camp experiments and the numerous sub-projects of MKULTRA are clearly evident.
The various avenues used to control human behavior under MKULTRA included:
radiation
electroshock
psychology
psychiatry
sociology
anthropology
graphology
harassment substances
paramilitary devices
materials “LSD” being the most widely dispensed “material”
A special procedure, designated MKDELTA, was established to govern the use of MKULTRA abroad. MKULTRA/DELTA materials were used for harassment, discrediting or disabling purposes.
There were 149 subprojects listed under the umbrella of MKULTRA.
Project MONARCH has not been officially identified by any government documentation as one of the corresponding subprojects, but is used rather, as a descriptive “catch phrase” by survivors, therapists, and possible “insiders”.

MONARCH may in fact, have culminated from MKSEARCH subprojects such as operation SPELLBINDER, which was set up to create “sleeper” assassins (ie. “Manchurian candidates”) who could be activated upon receiving a key word or phrase while in a post-hypnotic trance.
Operation OFTEN, a study which attempted to harness the power of occultic forces was possibly one of several cover programs to hide the insidious reality of Project MONARCH.

Definition and Description
The name MONARCH is not necessarily defined within the context of royal nobility, but rather refers to the monarch butterfly.
When a person is undergoing trauma induced by electroshock, a feeling of light-headedness is evidenced; as if one is floating or fluttering like a butterfly. There is also a symbolic representation pertaining to the transformation or metamorphosis of this beautiful insect: from a caterpillar to a cocoon (dormancy, inactivity), to a butterfly (new creation) which will return to its point of origin. Such is the migratory pattern that makes this species unique.
Occultic symbolism may give additional insight into the true meaning Psyche is the word for both “soul” and “butterfly” coming from the belief that human souls become butterflies while searching for a new reincarnation.
Some ancient mystical groups, such as the Gnostics, saw the butterfly as a symbol of corrupt flesh. The “Angel of Death” (remember Mengele?) in Gnostic art was portrayed crushing the butterfly.

A marionette is a puppet that is attached to strings and is controlled by the puppet master, hence MONARCH programming is also referred to as the “Marionette Syndrome.” “Imperial Conditioning” is another term used, while some mental health therapists know it as “Conditioned Stimulus Response Sequences.”
Project MONARCH could be best described as a form of structured dissociation and occultic integration, in order to compartmentalize the mind into multiple personalities within a systematic framework. During this process, a Satanic ritual, usually including Cabalistic mysticism, is performed with the purpose of attaching a particular demon or group of demons to the corresponding alter(s).
Of course, most skeptics would view this as simply a means to enhance trauma within the victim negating any irrational belief that demonic possession actually occurs.

Alters and Triggers
Another way of examining this convoluted victimization of body and soul is by looking at it as a complex computer program: A file (alter) is created through trauma, repetition and reinforcement. In order to activate (trigger) the file, a specific access code or password (cue or command) is required.

The victim/survivor is called a “slave” by the programmer/handler, who in turn is perceived as “master” or “god.” About 75% are female, since they possess a higher tolerance for pain and tend to dissociate easier than males. Subjects are used mainly for cover operations, prostitution and pornography; involvement in the entertainment industry is notable.
A former military officer connected to the DIA, told this writer,
“In the ’big picture’ these people [MONARCH victims] are in all walks of life, from the bum on the street to the white-collar guy”.
In corroboration, a retired CIA agent vaguely discussed the use of such personnel to be used as “plants” or “chameleons” for the purpose of infiltrating a designated group, gathering information and/or injecting an ulterior agenda.
There are an inordinate amount of alters in the victim/survivor with numerous back-up programs, mirrors and shadows. A division of light-side (good) and dark-side (bad) alters are interwoven in the mind and rotate on an axis. One of the main internal structures, (of which there are many) within the system is shaped like a double-helix, consisting of seven levels. Each system has an internal programmer which oversees the “gatekeeper” (demons?) who grant or deny entry into the different rooms.
A few of the internal images predominately seen by victims/survivors are:
trees
the Cabalistic “Tree of Life,” with adjoining root systems
infinity loops
ancient symbols and letters
spider webs
mirrors or glass shattering
masks
castles
mazes
demons/monsters/aliens
sea shells
butterflies
snakes
ribbons
bows
flowers
hour glasses
clocks
robots
chain-of-command diagrams
schematics of computer circuitry boards
Bloodlines and Twinning
A majority of the victims/survivors come from multi-generational Satanic families (bloodlines) and are ostensibly programmed “to fill their destiny as the chosen ones or chosen generations” (a term coined by Mengele at Auschwitz).
Some are adopted out to families of similar origin. Others used in this neurological nightmare are deemed as he “expendable ones” (non-bloodliners), usually coming from orphanages, foster care homes, or incestuous families with a long history of pedophilia.
There also appears to be a pattern of family members affiliated with government or military intelligence agencies.
Many of the abused come from families who use Catholicism, Mormonism, or charismatic Christianity as a “front” for their abominable activities (though members of other religious groups are also involved.) Victims/survivors generally respond more readily to a rigid religious (dogmatic, legalistic) hierarchical structure because it parallels their base programming. Authority usually goes unchallenged, as their will has been usurped through subjective and command-oriented conditioning.
Physical identification characteristics on victims/survivors often include multiple electrical prod scars and/or resultant moles on their skin. A few may have had various parts of their bodies mutilated by knives, branding irons, or needles, Butterfly or occult tattoos are also common. Generally, bloodliners are less likely to have the subsequent markings, as their skin is to “remain pure and unblemished.”
The ultimate purpose of the sophisticated manipulation of these individuals may sound unrealistic, depending upon our interpretive understanding of the physical and spiritual realms. The deepest and darkest alters within bloodliners are purported to be dormant until the “Anti-Christ” is revealed.
These “New World Order” alters supposedly contain call-back orders and instructions to train and/or initiate a large influx of people (possibly clones or “soulless ones”), thereby stimulating social control programs into the new millennium.
Non-biological “twinning” is yet another bizarre feature observed within MONARCH programming. For instance, two young non related children would be ceremoniously initiated in a magical “soul-bonding” ritual so they might be “inseparably paired for eternity” (possibly another Mengele connection?). They essentially share two halves of the programmed information, making them interdependent upon one another.
Paranormal phenomenon such as astral projection, telepathy, ESP, etc. appear to be more pronounced between those who have undergone this process.

Levels of MONARCH Programming
ALPHA. Regarded as “general” or regular programming within the base control personality; characterized by extremely pronounced memory retention, along with substantially increased physical strength and visual acuity. Alpha programming is accomplished through deliberately subdividing the victims personality which, in essence, causes a left brain-right brain division, allowing for a programmed union of L and R through neuron pathway stimulation.
BETA. Referred to as “sexual” programming. This programming eliminates all learned moral convictions and stimulates the primitive sexual instinct, devoid of inhibitions. “Cat” alters may come out at this level.
DELTA. This is known as “killer” programming, originally developed for training special agents or elite soldiers (i.e. Delta Force, First Earth Battalion, Mossad, etc.) in covert operations. Optimal adrenal output and controlled aggression is evident. Subjects are devoid of fear; very systematic in carrying out their assignment. Self-destruct or suicide instructions are layered in at this level.
THETA considered to the “psychic” programming. Bloodliners (those coming from multi-generational Satanic families) were determined to exhibit a greater propensity for having telepathic abilities than did non-bloodliners. Due to its evident limitations, however, various forms of electronic mind control systems were developed and introduced, namely, bio-medical human telemetry devices (brain implants), directed-energy lasers using microwaves and/or electromagnetics. It is reported these are used in conjunction with highly-advanced computers and sophisticated satellite tracking systems.
OMEGA. A “self-destruct” form of programming, also known as “Code Green.” The corresponding behaviors include suicidal tendencies and/or self-mutilation. This program is generally activated when the victim/survivor begins therapy or interrogation and too much memory is being recovered.
GAMMA. Another form of system protection is through “deception” programming, which elicits misinformation and misdirection. This level is intertwined with demonology and tends to regenerate itself at a later time if inappropriately deactivated.
Method and Components

The initial process begins with creating dissociation within the subject, usually occurring from the time of birth to about six years.
This is primarily achieved through the use of electroshock (ECT) and is at times performed even when the child is in the mother’s womb.
Due to the severe trauma induced through ECT, sexual abuse and other methods, the mind splits off into alternate personalities from the core. Formerly referred to as Multiple Personality Disorder, it is presently recognized as Dissociative Identity Disorder and is the basis for MONARCH programming. Further conditioning of the victim’s mind is enhanced through hypnotism, double-bind coercion, pleasure-pain reversals, food, water, sleep and sensory deprivation, along with various drugs which alter certain cerebral functions.
The next stage is to embed and compress detailed commands or messages within the specified alter. This is achieved through the use of hi-tech headsets, in conjunction with computer-driven generators which emit inaudible sound waves or harmonics that affect the RNA covering of neuron pathways to the subconscious and unconscious mind.
“Virtual Reality” optical devices are sometimes used simultaneously with the harmonic generators projecting pulsating colored lights, subliminals and split-screen visuals. High voltage electroshock is then used for memory dissolution.

Programming is updated periodically and reinforced through visual, auditory and written mediums. Some of the first programming themes included the Wizard of Oz and Alice and Wonderland, both heavily saturated with occultic symbolism.
Many of the recent Disney movies and cartoons are used in a two-fold manner:
desensitizing the majority of the population, using subliminals and neuro-linguistic programming
deliberately constructing specific triggers and keys for base programming of highly-impressionable MONARCH children.
A prime example of how subliminal programming works is by looking at the recent Disney cinematic sensation Pochahontas, curiously billed as their “33rd” (highest degree in Scottish Rite Freemasonry) animated movie.
In the movie, Grandmother Willow is a mystical 400 year old tree who counsels the motherless Pochahontas to listen to her heart and help her realize all the answers lie within. Grandmother Willow is constantly talking in “double-speak” and using “reversals” (i.e. “Sometimes the right path is not the easiest one”; the esoteric derivative being: the left path [the path that leads to destruction] is the easiest one.
In Illuminati Structured MPD Systems, the willow tree represents the occultic powers of Druidism.
The intrinsic imagery of the tree’s branches, leaves and root systems are very significant, as some of the dark spiritual proper ties associated with the Willow Tree Programming are:
(1) The branches are used to whip victims in rituals for “cleansing” purposes
(2) A willow tree can endure severe weather disturbances (i.e. storms) and is known for it’s pliability or flexibility. Victims/Survivors of the programming describe the willow’s branches wrapping around them, with no hope of escape
(3) The deep root system of the willow tree makes the victim/survivor feel as if they are falling deeper and deeper into an abyss while in a hypnotic trance.
Music plays an instrumental role in programming, through combinations of variable tones, rhythms and words.

Frightmeister Stephen King’s numerous novels and subsequent movies, are purported by credible sources to be used for such villainous purposes. One of his latest books, Insomnia, features a picture of King with the trigger phrase “WE NEVER SLEEP,” (indicative of someone with MPD/ DID) below an all-seeing eye.
A partial list of other mediums used to reinforce base programming are:
Pinnochio
Sleeping Beauty
Snow White
Beauty and the Beast
Aladdin
The Little Mermaid
The Lion King
E. T.
Star Wars
Ghost Busters
Trancers II
Batman
Bewitched
Fantasy Island
Reboot
Tiny Toons
Duck Tails
The Dead Sea Scrolls
The Tall Book of Make Believe
A few movies which depict or portray some aspect of MONARCH programming are Hell raiser 3, Raising Cain, Labyrinth, Telefon, Johnny Mneumonic, Point of No Return, The Lawnmower Man and Closet Land.

Programmers and Places
It’s difficult to figure out who the original programmer of this satanic project was, due to the substantial amount of disinformation and cross-contamination propagated by the “powers that be.”
The two that went by the color-coded name of Dr. Green are a Jewish doctor named Dr. Gruenbaum, who supposedly collaborated with the Nazis during WWII, and Dr. Josef Mengele, whose trademark of cold blooded and calculating brutality has not only scarred the souls of survivors from Auschwitz, but also a countless number of victims throughout the world.
Mengele’s direct involvement at the infamous Auschwitz concentration camp was suspiciously downplayed during the Nuremberg Trials, and consequently no intensified effort by the U.S. and it’s allies was directed toward his capture.
As a means to confuse serious investigators as to his whereabouts, U.S. officials would report Mengele being a non-threatening recluse in Paraguay or Brazil, or that he was simply dead (the “Angel of Death” miraculously must have come back to life at least five different times).

His unprecedented research, at the expense of thousands of lives, undoubtedly was a significant bonus to U.S. interests. Besides using the pseudonym of Dr. Green, survivors knew him as Vaterchen (daddy), Schoner Josef (beautiful Joseph), David and Fairchild. A gracefully handsome man of slight stature, Mengele would disarm people with his gentle demeanor, while at other times, he would explode into violent rages.
Other characteristics remembered by survivors were the cadence of his shiny black boots as he paced back and forth and his “I-love-you/l-love-you-not” daisy game.
When he pulled off the last daisy petal, he would maliciously torture and kill a small child in front of the other child he was programming. Distraught survivors also recalled being thrown naked into cages with monkeys, who were trained to viciously abuse them. Evidently, Mengele enjoyed reducing people to the level of animals. He also would purposely restrain his victims from crying, screaming, or showing any excessive emotion.
Dr. D. Ewen Cameron, also known as Dr. White, was the former head of the Canadian, American and World Psychiatric Associations.
Because of Cameron’s extensive experience and credentials, the ClA’s Allen Dulles funneled millions of dollars throughout organizations like the society for the Investigation of Human Ecology, which Cameron ruthlessly presided over. Experimentations were conducted at several locations in Montreal, mostly at McGill University, St Mary’s Hospital and Allan Memorial Institute.
Besides the conventional methods of psychiatric tyranny, such as electroshock drug injections and lobotomies, Cameron conceived the technique of “psychic driving,” wherein unsuspecting patients were kept in a drug induced coma for several weeks and administered a regimen of electroshocks, while electronic helmets were strapped to their heads and repetitive auditory messages were transmitted at variable speeds.
Many of those exploited were abused children which had been run through the Roman Catholic orphanage system.
Not surprisingly, Dr Cameron has been conveniently left out of most psychiatric journals.
This may have been, in fact, largely due to Project MKULTRA being publicly exposed in 1970, through lawsuits filed by Canadian survivors and their families.
The CIA and Canadian government settled out of court so as not to be required to officially admit to any wrongdoing.
A former U.S. Army Lt. Col. in the DIA’s psychological Warfare Division, Michael Aquino, is the latest in a line of alleged government-sponsored sadists. Aquino, an eccentric genius obsessed with Nazi pagan rituals, founded the Temple of Set, an offshoot of Anton LaVey’s Church of Satan. Aquino was connected with the Presidio Army Base day care scandal, in which he was accused child molestation.
Much to the dismay of the young victims’ parents, all charges were dismissed. Code-named “Malcolm”, Aquino was reported to have developed training tapes on how to create a MONARCH slave and worked as a liaison between Government/Military Intelligence and various criminal organizations and occult groups in the distribution of MONARCH slaves.
Heinrich Mueller was another important programmer who went under the code names “Dr. Blue” or “Gog.” He apparently has two sons who have carried on the trade. The original “Dr. Black” was apparently Leo Wheeler, the nephew of deceased General Earle G. Wheeler, who was the commander of the Joint Chiefs of Staffs during the Vietnam War. Wheeler’s protégé, E. Hummel is active in the Northwest, along with W. Bowers (from the Rothschild bloodline).
Other alleged master mind manipulators, past and present, are:
Dr. Sydney Gottleib
Lt. Col John Alexander
Richard Dabney Anderson (USN)
Dr. James Monroe
Dr. John Lilly
Lt. Comdr. Thomas Narut
Dr William Jennings Bryan
Dr. Bernard L. Diamond
Dr. Martin T. Orne
Dr. Louis J. West
Dr Robert J. Lifton
Dr. Harris Isbel
Col. Wilson Green
In order to keep MKULTRA from being easily detected, the CIA segmented its subprojects into specialized fields of research and development at universities, prisons, private laboratories and hospitals. Of course, they were rewarded generously with government grants and miscellaneous funding.
The names and locations of some of the major institutions involved in MONARCH programming experimentation were/are:
Cornell
Duke
Princeton
UCLA
University of Rochester
MIT
Georgetown University Hospital
Maimonides Medical Center
St. Elizabeth’s Hospital (Washington D.C.)
Bell Laboratories
Stanford Research Institute
Westinghouse Friendship Laboratories
General Electric
ARCO
Mankind Research Unlimited
The “final product” was/is usually created on military installations and bases, where maximum security is required. Referred to as (re) programming centers or near-death trauma centers, the most heavily identified are:
China Lake Naval Weapons Center
The Presidio
Ft. Dietrick
Ft. Campbell
Ft. Lewis
Ft. Hood
Redstone Arsenal
Offutt AFB
Patrick AFB
McClellan AFB
MacGill AFB
Kirkland AFB
Nellis AFB
Homestead
Grissom AFB
Maxwell AFB
Tinker AFB
Other places recognized as major programming sites are:
Langley Research Center
Los Alamos National Laboratories
Tavistock Institute
Areas in or by Mt. Shasta, CA, Lampe, MO and Las Vegas, NV.
Notable Names
One of the first documented cases of a MONARCH secret agent was that of the voluptuous 1940’s model, Candy Jones. The book, The Control of Candy Jones, (Playboy Press) portrays her 12 years of intrigue and suspense as a spy for the CIA.
Jones, whose birth name is Jessica Wilcox, apparently fit the physiological profile as to be one of the initial experiments or human guinea pigs under the government’s “scientific” project, MKULTRA.
The most publicized case of MONARCH monomania has surfaced through the book TRANCE Formation of America: The True Life Story of a ClA Slave by Cathy O’Brien. On the back cover it emphatically states,
“Cathy O’Brien is the only vocal and recovered survivor of the Central Intelligence Agency’s MKULTRA Project Monarch mind control operation”
(Read Related Report)
This documented autobiography contains compelling accounts of O’Brien’s years of unrelenting incest and eventual introduction into Project MONARCH by her perverted father.
Along with co-author Mark PhiIlips, her rescuer and deprogrammer, Cathy covers an almost unbelievable array of conspiratorial crime: forced prostitution (white slavery) with those in the upper echelons of world politics, covert assignments as a “drug mule” and courier, and the country-western music industry’s relationship with illegal CIA activities.
Paul Bonacci a courageous survivor who endured almost two decades of degradation under Project MONARCH, has disclosed strong corroborating evidence of widescale crimes and corruption from the municipal/state level all the way up to the White House.
He has testified about sexually-abused males selected from Boy’s Town in Nebraska and taken to nearby Offut AFB, where he says they were subjected to intense MONARCH programming, directed mainly by Commander Bill Plemmons and former Lt. Col. Michael Aquino.
After thoroughly tormenting the young boys into mindless oblivion, they were used (along with girls) for pornography and prostitution with several of the nation’s political and economic power brokers. Bonacci recalled being transported from the Air Force base via cargo planes to McClelland AFB in California. Along with other unfortunate adolescents and teenagers, he was driven to the elite retreat, Bohemian Grove. The perpetrators took full advantage of these innocent victims, committing unthinkable perversions in order to satisfy their deviant lusts. Some victims were apparently murdered, further traumatizing already terrified and broken children.

An insatiable actress of marginal talent (now deceased), a morally-corrupt T.V. evangelist, a heralded former Green Beret officer and a popular country-western singer are a few others likely having succumbed to MONARCH madness.
Lee Harvey Oswald, Sirhan-Sirhan, Charlie Manson, John Hinckley Jr., Mark Chapman, David Koresh, Tim McVeigh and John Salvi are some notable names of infamy, strongly suspected of being pawns who were spawned by MKULTRA.
Additional information about Cathy O’brien
Deprogrammers and Exposers
Dr. Corydon Hammond, a Psychologist from the University of Utah, delivered a stunning lecture entitled “Hypnosis in MPD: Ritual Abuse” at the Fourth Annual Eastern Regional Conference on Abuse and Multiple Personality, June 25, 1992 in Alexandria, Virginia.
He essentially confirmed the suspicions of the attentive crowd of mental health professionals, wherein a certain percentage of their clients had undergone mind control programming in an intensively systematic manner.
Hammond alluded to the Nazi connection, military and CIA mind control research, Greek letter and color programming and specifically mentioned the Monarch Project in relation to a form of operative conditioning. Shortly after his ground breaking speech, he received death threats. Not wanting to jeopardize the safety of his family, Dr. Hammond stopped disseminating any follow-up information.
Mark Phillips, a former electronics subcontractor for the Department of Defense, was privy to some of the top secret mind control activities perpetrated by the U.S. government.
His inquisitive demeanor, strong conscience and heart-felt concern for Cathy O’Brien, a “Presidential Model’ under Project MONARCH, prompted him to reveal the inner-workings of this grand deception beginning about 1991. As the story goes, he helped Ms. O’Brien escape from her captors and was able to deprogram her in about a years time in Alaska.
The controversial Phillips has his share of critics who are skeptical of the veracity of his claims.
New Orleans therapist Valerie Wolf introduced two of her patients before the President’s Committee on Human Radiation Experiments on March 15, 1995 in Washington D.C. The astonishing testimony made by these two brave women included accounts of German doctors, torture, drugs, electroshock, hypnosis and rape, besides being exposed to an undetermined amount of radiation. Both Wolf and her patients stated they recovered the memories of this CIA program without regression or hypnosis techniques. Wolf presently devotes much of her time to counseling such survivors.
A former labor attorney for Atlantic Richfield Co., David E. Rosenbaum, conducted a nine. year investigation (1983-1992) concerning allegations of physical torture and coercive conditioning of numerous employees at an ARCO plant in Monaca, PA.[20] His clients, Jerry L. Dotey and Ann White, were victims of apparent radiation exposure; but as Mr. Rosenbaum probed deeper in the subsequent interview sessions, a “Pandora’s Box” was unveiled.
His most astonishing conclusion was that Jerry Dotey and Ann White were likely the off-spring of Adolf Hitler, based in part on the uncanny resemblance from photos (facial features; bone structure and size were taken into consideration).
Rosenbaum also states,
“They both exhibit feelings and experiences that indicate they are twins.”
Dotey and White were allegedly subjected to torture of many kinds while under drug induced hypnosis, with each one undergoing at least three training techniques by plant physicians.
Each victim was trained to enter into a hypnotic state upon the occurrence of specific stimuli, usually involving a “cue” word or phrase and trained to “remember to forget” what transpired in the hypnotic state. They were repeatedly subjected to identical stimulus-response sequence, to produce nearly automatic reactions to the particular status.
MKULTRA veteran, Dr. Bernard Diamond, Dr. Martin Orne and Dr. Josef Mengele regularly visited the ARCO plant, according to Rosenbaum. The special conditioning of Dotey and White was intended for the artificial creation of dual German personalities. Rosenbaum, who is Jewish, has maintained a deep friendship with the two, despite the seemingly precarious circumstances.
Other renowned therapists involved in deprogramming are Cynthia Byrtus, Pamela Monday, Steve Ogilvie, Bennett Braun, Jerry Mungadze and Colin Ross. Some Christian counselors have been able to eliminate parts of the programming with limited success.
Journalists who have recently expounded on the subject matter in exemplary fashion are Walter Bowart, Operation Mind Control, Jon Rappoport, U.S. Government Mind-Control Experiments on Children and Alex Constantine, Psychic Dictatorship In The USA.
Conclusion
The most incriminating statement to date made by a government official as to the possible existence of Project MONARCH was extracted by Anton Chaitkin, a writer for the publication, The New Federalist.
When former CIA Director William Colby was asked directly,
“What about monarch?” he replied angrily and ambiguously, “We stopped that between the late 1960’s and the early 1970’s.”
Suffice to say that society, in its apparent state of cognitive dissonance, is generally in denial of the over whelming evidence of this multifarious conspiracy.
Numerous victims/ survivors of Project MONARCH are in desperate need of help. However, the great majority of people are too preoccupied with themselves to show any genuine compassion toward these severely wounded individuals. Apathy has taken over the minds of the masses, who choose to exist within the comforts of this world.
Reality has thus become obscured by relativism and selfishness.
Related Reports:
The Montauk Project and Camp Hero Today
Interview with Ex Illuminati Programmer
Endnotes
1. David L. Carrico, The Egyptian Masonic Satanic Connection, 1992
2. Walter H. Bowart, Operation Mind Control, Flatland Editions, 1994, p. 216
3. Martin Cannon, Mind Control and the American Government, Prevailing Winds Research, 1994, p. 19
4. Linda Hunt, Secret Agenda, St. Martin’s Press, 1991
5. Final Report of the Select Committee to Study Governmental Operations, U.S. Senate, April 1976, p. 337
6. Ibid, p. 390
7. John Marks, The Search For The Manchurian Candidate, Times Books, 1979, pp 60-61
8. Final Report of the Select Committee to Study Governmental Operations, U.S. Senate, April 1976, p. 391
9. Barbara G. Walker, The Woman’s Dictionary of Symbols and Sacred Objects, Harper Collins, 1988
10. Marshall Cavendish, Man, Myth and Magic, 1995
11. Dr. Corydon Hammond, The Greenbaum Speech, 1992; Mark Phillips and Cathy O’Brien, Project Monarch Programming Definitions, 1993
12. Fritz Springmeier, The Illuminati Formula Used To Create An Undetectable Total Mind Controlled Slave, 1996
13. Gerald L. Posner, Mengele: The Complete Story, McGraw-Hill, 1986
14. Lucette Matalon Lagnado, Dr. Josef Mengele and the Untold Story of the Twins of Auschwitz, Morrow, 1991
15. Gordon Thomas, Journey into Madness: The True Story of Secret CIA Mind Control and Medical Abuse, Bantam Books, 1989
16. Cathy O’Brien and Mark Phillips, Trance Formation of America, 1995
17. John DeCamp, The Franklin Cover-Up, Child Abuse, Satanism and Murder in Nebraska, AWT Inc, 1992
18. Anton Chaitkin, “Franklin Witnesses Implicate FBI and U.S. Elites in Torture and Murder of Children”, The New Federalist, 1993
19. Jon Rappoport, “CIA Experiments with Mind Control on Children”, Perceptions Magazine, September/October 1995, p. 56
20. David E. Rosenbaum, Esq., First Draft Overview of Investigation of the Group, 1983-1993
TOPICS for SPEAKERS of ACO to Consider:
Majestic Documents
Temas / Sociopolitica
MK-Ultra – The Monarch Program
CIA – The Central Intelligence Agency
Ascension Center Organization
ACO
Seminars and Workshops for Lightworkers and Truth Seekers.
Some like to go to Indiana to the Light Centre or Pegasus Spiritual Seminars.
Some prefer to call Spiritual Mediumship the world of the The Light Centre as a non-denominational “church.” Our church services are at 1:30pm unless Pegasus is having a Fair or Retreat, then the Light Centre will be closed. “Church,” is a discussion, a round table discussion and some prefer to sit outdoors while others enjoy sitting around a table.
ACE FOLKLIFE Historical Society and ASSOCIATE GUIDES Speakers Club
We share various times to have speakers give Free Lectures while we have a room for our readers and our Authors, and a Room we make Videos.
We share ACE FOLKLIFE with students mostly of University of Alabama or Owensboro Technical College.
Some of us prefer to meet in a room in the Cunty Libraries with others who study UFOS or have had ET Experiences. We share our lives with each other in our peer groups of similar interests.
We decided who will be the main speaker for our
Train the Trainers in Speaking Skills. We are the Local Toastmasters Club in this Tri-State Area.
We also share with various Veteran Organizations with different folks leading the conversation for the day on their chosen topic. Smoking is usually allowed at the Light Centre, except on rare occasions, and “No Smoking” will be posted previous to these rare occasions.
ACIR Since 1978 and American News Center in Kentucky officially since 2002.
We shared ACE FOLKIFE as a not for profit in 2007 and we still hold our charter but not our bank account. We have turned the management over to TJ Morris ACO for the Operating Account.
Theresa J Morris is the Agent for our Ascension Center Lightworkers, Truth Seekers, and Toastmasters Teachers and Speakers Monthly Meetings.
The Ascension Center Light Workers were founded in 1989-1993 in Honolulu, Hawaii. The Retreat Center had a 10 rooms for a safe house for men in Honolulu,, Hawaii with Gerald W. Orr.
Theresa (Tara) Thurmond attended PSI Seminars at University of Hawaii and at the Hiltaon Hawaiian Village along with Spiritual World Network and TJ began World Information Network as WIN and Psychic Network Inc.,
In 1979 a Tantra Temple Spiritual Retreat Center in Maui, Hawaii with Dr. Alexander Sasha Lessin and Charles Muir and later with Janet Kira Lessin in 1993. Janet Kira Thompson then and Theresa J Thurmond were both attending Richard Higashida’s Spiritual Church. It wasn’t until 2012 when Janet Lessin and Janette (TJ) Morris found each other again and began the Stargate to the Cosmos Cyberspace Conferences and hope to meet at the future Annual Gatherings of the ACO Ascension Center Organization.
TJ Morris Productions worked with Louise of Pegasus Inc Productions in 2003-2005 but have had a lasting spiritual higher level relationship. There has been an existence for all ladies concerned with providing the place for both women and men to come together for over 20 years now, and continues to offer metaphysical classes, group discussions, and the certification classes for metaphysical ministers.
We believe much like spiritualists, but much differently at the same time. Most importantly, we agree to disagree about different thoughts and beliefs. Join us, and see how versatile and broad our thoughts are! Contrary to some belief, we DO believe in God/a creator who is wise, all knowing, and touches each and every one of us, every day.
Classes at both the Ascension Center in Hawaii and the Light Centre in Indiana are both uplifting and educational, all at a reasonable cost! Most classes run $10. They are held on most Saturdays and some of them on Sundays following our Group Discussion (Church) which is held each Sunday, unless Pegasus Productions is at a Psychic Fair. All of our teachers are very educated on their topics and have YEARS of experience under their belts in the Metaphysical studies.
Our classes may include: Reiki, Tantra, ET Experiences, Mediumship, Handwriting Analysis, Meeting Your Guides, How To Communicate With Your Guides, Healing With Color, Auras, Where Do We Come From REALLY?, Herbs, Tarot, Candles, Medicine Wheel, Dream Catchers, UFO’s, Symbols, Palmistry, and much more!
Again, we would like to welcome you to join our discussions on Sundays, OR attend any one of our many classes offered at the Light Centre!
Blessings and Love and Light
TJ Morris & Friends

Leave a Reply